1MRK504116-UEN B en Application Manual RET670 1.2

Relion 670 series
Transformer protection RET670 Application manual
Document ID: 1MRK 504 116-UEN Issued: September 2011 Revision: B Product version: 1.2
Copyright 2011 ABB. All rights reserved
Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
ABB AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/ or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks. This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The IED is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................13
Introduction to the application manual..............................................13 About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................13 About the application manual......................................................14 Intended audience.......................................................................14 Related documents......................................................................15 Revision notes.............................................................................15
Section 2
Requirements.................................................................17
Current transformer requirements....................................................17 Current transformer classification................................................17 Conditions....................................................................................18 Fault current................................................................................19 Secondary wire resistance and additional load...........................19 General current transformer requirements..................................20 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements........................20 Transformer differential protection.........................................20 Distance protection.................................................................21 Restricted earth fault protection (low impedance differential)..............................................................................22 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards............................................................................25 Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class P, PR.............................................................................25 Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class PX, IEC 60044-6, class TPS (and old British Standard, class X).........................................25 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE.......................26 Voltage transformer requirements....................................................26 SNTP server requirements...............................................................27 IEC 61850-9-2LE Merging unit requirements ..................................27
Section 3
IED application...............................................................29
General IED application....................................................................29 Analog inputs....................................................................................30 Introduction..................................................................................30 Setting guidelines........................................................................31 Setting of the phase reference channel..................................31 Setting parameters......................................................................56 Local human-machine interface.......................................................62
1
Application manual
Table of contents
Human machine interface ...........................................................62 Local HMI related functions.........................................................64 Introduction.............................................................................64 General setting parameters....................................................64 Indication LEDs...........................................................................65 Introduction.............................................................................65 Setting parameters.................................................................65 Basic IED functions..........................................................................67 Self supervision with internal event list........................................67 Application..............................................................................67 Setting parameters.................................................................68 Time synchronization...................................................................68 Application..............................................................................68 Setting guidelines...................................................................69 Setting parameters.................................................................70 Parameter setting groups............................................................73 Application..............................................................................73 Setting guidelines...................................................................74 Setting parameters.................................................................74 Test mode functionality TEST.....................................................74 Application..............................................................................74 Setting guidelines...................................................................74 Setting parameters.................................................................75 Change lock CHNGLCK..............................................................75 Application..............................................................................75 Setting parameters.................................................................76 IED identifiers..............................................................................76 Application..............................................................................76 Setting parameters.................................................................76 Product information.....................................................................77 Application..............................................................................77 Setting parameters.................................................................77 Rated system frequency PRIMVAL.............................................78 Application..............................................................................78 Setting guidelines...................................................................78 Setting parameters.................................................................78 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI...........................................78 Application..............................................................................78 Setting guidelines...................................................................78 Setting parameters.................................................................78 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ......................................79 Application..............................................................................79 Setting guidelines...................................................................79
2 Application manual
Table of contents
Setting parameters.................................................................79 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI...............................................79 Application..............................................................................79 Setting guidelines...................................................................79 Setting parameters.................................................................79 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI..........................................80 Application..............................................................................80 Frequency values...................................................................80 Setting guidelines...................................................................81 Setting parameters.................................................................85 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM...........................................86 Application..............................................................................86 Setting guidelines...................................................................86 Setting parameters.................................................................87 Authority status ATHSTAT..........................................................87 Application..............................................................................87 Setting parameters.................................................................87 Denial of service DOS.................................................................87 Application..............................................................................88 Setting guidelines...................................................................88 Differential protection........................................................................88 Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF ....................................................................................88 Application..............................................................................88 Setting guidelines...................................................................89 Setting example......................................................................97 Setting parameters...............................................................109 Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF .....114 Application............................................................................114 Setting guidelines.................................................................119 Setting parameters...............................................................121 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF ................121 Identification.........................................................................121 Application............................................................................122 Connection examples for high impedance differential protection..............................................................................128 Setting guidelines.................................................................131 Setting parameters...............................................................144 Impedance protection ....................................................................144 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR..............................................144 Identification.........................................................................144 Application............................................................................144 Setting guidelines.................................................................160
Table of contents
Setting parameters...............................................................169 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR...................................................................................171 Application............................................................................171 Setting guidelines.................................................................213 Setting parameters...............................................................225 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS.......................................................................229 Identification.........................................................................229 Application............................................................................229 Setting guidelines.................................................................229 Setting parameters...............................................................236 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS .................................................................................237 Application............................................................................237 Setting guidelines.................................................................250 Setting parameters...............................................................257 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS...................................................258 Application............................................................................258 Setting guidelines.................................................................273 Setting parameters...............................................................279 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDARDIR.........................................................................280 Application............................................................................280 Setting guidelines.................................................................280 Setting parameters...............................................................282 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC...........................283 Application............................................................................283 Setting guidelines.................................................................283 Setting parameters...............................................................284 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS................................................................................285 Application............................................................................285 Setting guidelines.................................................................286 Setting parameters...............................................................288 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR............289 Application............................................................................289 Setting guidelines.................................................................304 Setting parameters...............................................................311 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS.......................................................................313
Table of contents
Application............................................................................313 Load encroachment characteristics......................................318 Setting parameters...............................................................323 Power swing detection ZMRPSB ..............................................324 Application............................................................................325 Setting guidelines.................................................................326 Setting parameters...............................................................333 Power swing logic ZMRPSL .....................................................334 Application............................................................................334 Setting guidelines.................................................................335 Setting parameters...............................................................341 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM .................................................341 Application............................................................................341 Setting guidelines.................................................................344 Setting parameters...............................................................354 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ..............................................355 Application............................................................................355 Setting guidelines.................................................................358 Setting parameters...............................................................359 Current protection...........................................................................360 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC .............360 Application............................................................................360 Setting guidelines.................................................................361 Setting parameters...............................................................365 Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC .................365 Application............................................................................365 Setting guidelines.................................................................366 Setting parameters...............................................................377 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ...........381 Application............................................................................382 Setting guidelines.................................................................382 Setting parameters...............................................................384 Four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC ...............384 Application............................................................................385 Setting guidelines.................................................................387 Setting parameters...............................................................397 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC ................................................................402 Application............................................................................402 Setting guidelines.................................................................404 Setting parameters...............................................................408 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE ................................................................413 Application............................................................................413
Table of contents
Setting guidelines.................................................................414 Setting parameters...............................................................422 Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ......424 Application............................................................................424 Setting guideline...................................................................425 Setting parameters...............................................................428 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF .........................................429 Application............................................................................429 Setting guidelines.................................................................429 Setting parameters...............................................................433 Pole discordance protection CCRPLD .....................................433 Application............................................................................434 Setting guidelines.................................................................434 Setting parameters...............................................................435 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP..........................435 Application............................................................................436 Setting guidelines.................................................................438 Setting parameters...............................................................441 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ...........................442 Application............................................................................442 Setting guidelines.................................................................444 Setting parameters...............................................................448 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ........................................449 Application............................................................................449 Setting guidelines.................................................................449 Setting parameters...............................................................450 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC.......................................450 Application............................................................................451 Setting guidelines.................................................................455 Setting parameters...............................................................457 Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC .................................................................................458 Application............................................................................458 Setting guidelines.................................................................462 Setting parameters...............................................................464 Voltage protection...........................................................................465 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ...........................465 Application............................................................................465 Setting guidelines.................................................................466 Setting parameters...............................................................469 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV .............................471 Application............................................................................471 Setting guidelines.................................................................472
Table of contents
Setting parameters...............................................................475 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV ............477 Application............................................................................477 Setting guidelines.................................................................477 Setting parameters...............................................................482 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH .......................................483 Application............................................................................484 Setting guidelines.................................................................486 Setting parameters...............................................................489 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV .................................490 Application............................................................................490 Setting guidelines.................................................................492 Setting parameters...............................................................494 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV .............................................494 Application............................................................................494 Setting guidelines.................................................................495 Setting parameters...............................................................495 Frequency protection......................................................................495 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF ........................................495 Application............................................................................496 Setting guidelines.................................................................496 Setting parameters...............................................................498 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ..........................................498 Application............................................................................498 Setting guidelines.................................................................499 Setting parameters...............................................................500 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC ........................500 Application............................................................................500 Setting guidelines.................................................................501 Setting parameters...............................................................502 Multipurpose protection..................................................................502 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC.....................502 Application............................................................................502 Setting guidelines.................................................................508 Setting parameters...............................................................517 Secondary system supervision.......................................................524 Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF .......................................524 Application............................................................................524 Setting guidelines.................................................................525 Setting parameters...............................................................525 Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF..........................................525 Application............................................................................525 Setting guidelines.................................................................526
Table of contents
Setting parameters...............................................................529 Control............................................................................................530 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN.................................................................................530 Application............................................................................531 Application examples...........................................................535 Setting guidelines.................................................................542 Setting parameters...............................................................547 Apparatus control APC..............................................................549 Application............................................................................550 Interaction between modules...............................................556 Setting guidelines.................................................................558 Setting parameters...............................................................559 Interlocking ...............................................................................561 Configuration guidelines.......................................................563 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE .....................................563 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ...........................568 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO .......................574 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS.....................575 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ...........578 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES ...................586 Interlocking for double CB bay DB ......................................592 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH ................................................594 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV..............................................................595 Voltage control...........................................................................595 Application............................................................................596 Setting guidelines.................................................................628 Setting parameters...............................................................639 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO................................................................646 Application............................................................................646 Setting guidelines.................................................................647 Setting parameters...............................................................648 Selector mini switch VSGGIO....................................................648 Application............................................................................648 Setting guidelines.................................................................649 Setting parameters...............................................................649 Generic double point function block DPGGIO...........................649 Application............................................................................650 Setting guidelines.................................................................650 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO....................650 Application............................................................................650 Setting guidelines.................................................................650
Table of contents
Setting parameters...............................................................651 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS.....651 Application............................................................................651 Setting guidelines.................................................................652 Setting parameters...............................................................652 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD...............................666 Application............................................................................666 Setting guidelines.................................................................668 Setting parameters...............................................................668 Scheme communication.................................................................669 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH ..................................................................669 Application............................................................................669 Setting guidelines.................................................................670 Setting parameters...............................................................670 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH..........................................671 Application............................................................................671 Setting guidelines.................................................................672 Setting parameters...............................................................674 Logic...............................................................................................674 Tripping logic SMPPTRC ..........................................................674 Application............................................................................674 Setting guidelines.................................................................678 Setting parameters...............................................................679 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO.......................................................679 Application............................................................................679 Setting guidelines.................................................................679 Setting parameters...............................................................680 Configurable logic blocks...........................................................680 Application............................................................................680 Setting parameters...............................................................681 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN.......................................682 Application............................................................................682 Setting parameters...............................................................683 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.....................................683 Application............................................................................683 Setting guidelines.................................................................684 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI...........................................................684 Application............................................................................684 Setting guidelines.................................................................684 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16.....................................684 Application............................................................................684
Table of contents
Setting parameters...............................................................685 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB..........................................................685 Application............................................................................685 Setting parameters...............................................................685 Monitoring.......................................................................................685 Measurement.............................................................................685 Application............................................................................686 Zero clamping.......................................................................688 Setting guidelines.................................................................688 Setting parameters...............................................................698 Event counter CNTGGIO...........................................................711 Identification.........................................................................711 Application............................................................................711 Setting parameters...............................................................711 Event function EVENT...............................................................711 Introduction...........................................................................711 Setting guidelines.................................................................711 Setting parameters...............................................................712 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP................................714 Application............................................................................714 Setting guidelines.................................................................715 Setting parameters...............................................................715 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP...........................715 Application............................................................................715 Setting guidelines.................................................................716 Disturbance report DRPRDRE..................................................716 Application............................................................................716 Setting guidelines.................................................................717 Setting parameters...............................................................722 Event list....................................................................................732 Application............................................................................732 Setting guidelines.................................................................732 Indications.................................................................................732 Application............................................................................732 Setting guidelines.................................................................733 Event recorder ..........................................................................733 Application............................................................................733 Setting guidelines.................................................................734 Trip value recorder....................................................................734 Application............................................................................734 Setting guidelines.................................................................734 Disturbance recorder.................................................................735
Table of contents
Application............................................................................735 Setting guidelines.................................................................735 Metering..........................................................................................736 Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO.....................................................736 Application............................................................................736 Setting guidelines.................................................................736 Setting parameters...............................................................737 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR.................................................................................737 Application............................................................................738 Setting guidelines.................................................................738 Setting parameters...............................................................739
Section 4
Station communication.................................................741
Overview.........................................................................................741 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................741 Application IEC 61850-8-1.........................................................741 Setting guidelines......................................................................743 Setting parameters....................................................................743 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO, SP16GGIO................................................................................744 Application............................................................................744 Setting guidelines.................................................................744 Setting parameters...............................................................744 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO.......744 Application............................................................................744 Setting guidelines.................................................................744 Setting parameters...............................................................745 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication..............745 Application............................................................................745 Setting guidelines.................................................................746 Setting parameters...............................................................748 IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol.....................................748 Introduction................................................................................748 Setting guidelines......................................................................750 Specific settings related to the IEC 61850-9-2LE communication.....................................................................751 Consequence on accuracy for power measurement functions when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE communication.....................................................................751 Loss of communication.........................................................752 Setting examples for IEC 61850-9-2LE and time synchronization....................................................................754 Setting parameters....................................................................759
11
Application manual
Table of contents
LON communication protocol.........................................................760 Application.................................................................................760 Setting parameters....................................................................761 SPA communication protocol.........................................................762 Application.................................................................................762 Setting guidelines......................................................................764 Setting parameters....................................................................765 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................765 Application.................................................................................765 Setting parameters....................................................................771 Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV, MULTICMDSND.............................................................................774 Application.................................................................................774 Setting guidelines......................................................................774 Settings................................................................................774 Setting parameters....................................................................774
Section 5
Remote communication................................................775
Binary signal transfer......................................................................775 Application.................................................................................775 Communication hardware solutions.....................................775 Setting guidelines......................................................................776 Setting parameters....................................................................779
Section 6
Configuration................................................................783
Introduction.....................................................................................783 Description of configuration RET670..............................................784 Introduction................................................................................784 Description of configuration A30..........................................784 Description of configuration B30..........................................787 Description of configuration A40..........................................789 Description of configuration B40..........................................791 Description of configuration A10..........................................793 Description of configuration A25..........................................795
Section 7
Glossary.......................................................................799
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 1 Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
About this chapter

This chapter introduces the user to the manual as such.
1.1
1.1.1
Introduction to the application manual

About the complete set of manuals for an IED
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Decommissioning deinstalling & disposal
IEC09000744-1-en.vsd
IEC09000744 V1 EN
Planning & purchase
Commissioning
Engineering
Engineeringmanual Installation and Commissioning manual Operators manual Application manual Technical reference manual
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference
Operation
Installing
Maintenance
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned. The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. The Engineering Manual (EM) contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the different tools in PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 61850 and DNP3.
1.1.2
About the application manual

The application manual contains the following chapters: The chapter Requirements describes current and voltage transformer requirements. The chapter IED application describes the use of the included software functions in the IED. The chapter discusses application possibilities and gives guidelines for calculating settings for a particular application. The chapter Station communication describes the communication possibilities in a SA-system. The chapter Remote communication describes the remote end data communication possibilities through binary signal transferring. The chapter Configuration describes the preconfiguration of the IED and its complements. The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.
1.1.3
Intended audience
General
The application manual is addressing the system engineer/technical responsible that is responsible for specifying the application of the IED.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Requirements
The system engineer/technical responsible must have a good knowledge about protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protection.
1.1.4
Documents related to RET670 Operators manual
Related documents
Identity number 1MRK 504 114-UEN 1MRK 504 115-UEN 1MRK 504 113-UEN 1MRK 504 116-UEN 1MRK 504 117-BEN 1MRK 504 118-BEN 1MRK 504 104-BEN SA2005-001283
Installation and commissioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Product guide customized Product guide pre-configured Product guide IEC 61850-9-2 Sample specification
Connection and Installation components Test system, COMBITEST Accessories for 670 series IEDs 670 series SPA and signal list IEC 61850 Data objects list for 670 series Engineering manual 670 series Communication set-up for Relion 670 series
1MRK 513 003-BEN 1MRK 512 001-BEN 1MRK 514 012-BEN 1MRK 500 092-WEN 1MRK 500 091-WEN 1MRK 511 240-UEN 1MRK 505 260-UEN
More information can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation.
1.1.5
Revision notes
Revision A B Description Minor corrections made Minor corrections made
16
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 2 Requirements
Section 2
Requirements
About this chapter

This chapter describes current and voltage transformer requirements.
2.1
Current transformer requirements

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured current signal. Saturation of the current transformer (CT) will cause distortion of the current signal and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of some functions. Consequently CT saturation can have an influence on both the dependability and the security of the protection. This protection IED has been designed to permit heavy CT saturation with maintained correct operation.
2.1.1
Current transformer classification

To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able to correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin to saturate. To fulfill the requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs must fulfill the requirements of a minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below. There are several different ways to specify CTs. Conventional magnetic core CTs are usually specified and manufactured according to some international or national standards, which specify different protection classes as well. There are many different standards and a lot of classes but fundamentally there are three different types of CTs: High remanence type CT Low remanence type CT Non remanence type CT
The high remanence type has no limit for the remanent flux. This CT has a magnetic core without any airgap and a remanent flux might remain almost infinite time. In this type of transformers the remanence can be up to around 80% of the saturation flux. Typical examples of high remanence type CT are class P, PX, TPS, TPX according to IEC, class P, X according to BS (old British Standard) and non gapped class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE. The low remanence type has a specified limit for the remanent flux. This CT is made with a small air gap to reduce the remanence to a level that does not exceed 10% of the saturation flux. The small air gap has only very limited influences on
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
the other properties of the CT. Class PR, TPY according to IEC are low remanence type CTs. The non remanence type CT has practically negligible level of remanent flux. This type of CT has relatively big air gaps in order to reduce the remanence to practically zero level. In the same time, these air gaps reduce the influence of the DCcomponent from the primary fault current. The air gaps will also decrease the measuring accuracy in the non-saturated region of operation. Class TPZ according to IEC is a non remanence type CT. Different standards and classes specify the saturation e.m.f. in different ways but it is possible to approximately compare values from different classes. The rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044 6 standard is used to specify the CT requirements for the IED. The requirements are also specified according to other standards.
2.1.2
Conditions
The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator. The current transformer models are representative for current transformers of high remanence and low remanence type. The results may not always be valid for non remanence type CTs (TPZ). The performances of the protection functions have been checked in the range from symmetrical to fully asymmetrical fault currents. Primary time constants of at least 120 ms have been considered at the tests. The current requirements below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Depending on the protection function phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase and threephase faults have been tested for different relevant fault positions for example, close in forward and reverse faults, zone 1 reach faults, internal and external faults. The dependability and security of the protection was verified by checking for example, time delays, unwanted operations, directionality, overreach and stability. The remanence in the current transformer core can cause unwanted operations or minor additional time delays for some protection functions. As unwanted operations are not acceptable at all maximum remanence has been considered for fault cases critical for the security, for example, faults in reverse direction and external faults. Because of the almost negligible risk of additional time delays and the non-existent risk of failure to operate the remanence have not been considered for the dependability cases. The requirements below are therefore fully valid for all normal applications. It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence to avoid the minor risk of an additional time delay. They depend on the performance and economy requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (for example, TPY, PR) are used, normally no additional margin is needed. For current transformers of high remanence type (for example, P, PX, TPS, TPX) the small probability of fully asymmetrical faults, together with high
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
remanence in the same direction as the flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at approximately zero voltage (0). Investigations have shown that 95% of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is between 40 and 90. In addition fully asymmetrical fault current will not exist in all phases at the same time.
2.1.3
Fault current
The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults or single phase-to-earth faults. The current for a single phase-to-earth fault will exceed the current for a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance. When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current for the relevant fault position should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered.
2.1.4
Secondary wire resistance and additional load

The voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals directly affects the current transformer saturation. This voltage is developed in a loop containing the secondary wires and the burden of all relays in the circuit. For earth faults the loop includes the phase and neutral wire, normally twice the resistance of the single secondary wire. For three-phase faults the neutral current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the resistance up to the point where the phase wires are connected to the common neutral wire. The most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it normally is sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case. The conclusion is that the loop resistance, twice the resistance of the single secondary wire, must be used in the calculation for phase-to-earth faults and the phase resistance, the resistance of a single secondary wire, may normally be used in the calculation for three-phase faults. As the burden can be considerable different for three-phase faults and phase-toearth faults it is important to consider both cases. Even in a case where the phase-toearth fault current is smaller than the three-phase fault current the phase-to-earth fault can be dimensioning for the CT depending on the higher burden. In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the phase-to-earth fault is not the dimensioning case and therefore the resistance of the single secondary wire always can be used in the calculation, for this case.
Section 2 Requirements 2.1.5 General current transformer requirements
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data for example, maximum load. However, it should be verified that the current to the protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to be detected with the selected CT ratio. The minimum operating current is different for different functions and normally settable so each function should be checked. The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very sensitive setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive setting of this function will be used it is recommended that the current transformer should have an accuracy class which have an current error at rated primary current that is less than 1% (for example, 5P). If current transformers with less accuracy are used it is advisable to check the actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.
2.1.6
Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements

With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high remanence and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal below can be used. The characteristic of the non remanence type CT (TPZ) is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is concerned. If no explicit recommendation is given for a specific function we therefore recommend contacting ABB to confirm that the non remanence type can be used. The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard. Requirements for CTs specified in different ways are given at the end of this section.
2.1.6.1
Transformer differential protection

The current transformers must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than the maximum of the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:
E al E alreq = 30 I nt
EQUATION1412 V1 EN
Isn I pn
S R CT + R L + R I2 r
(Equation 1)
E al E alreq = 2 I tf
EQUATION1413 V1 EN
Isn S R CT + R L + R I pn I2 r
(Equation 2)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
where: Int Itf Ipn Isn Ir RCT RL The rated primary current of the power transformer (A) Maximum primary fundamental frequency current that passes two main CTs and the power transformer (A) The rated primary CT current (A) The rated secondary CT current (A) The rated current of the protection IED (A) The secondary resistance of the CT (W) The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing the phase and neutral wires must be used for faults in solidly earthed systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance earthed systems. The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and Sr=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A
SR
In substations with breaker-and-a-half or double-busbar double-breaker arrangement, the fault current may pass two main CTs for the transformer differential protection without passing the power transformer. In such cases and if both main CTs have equal ratios and magnetization characteristics the CTs must satisfy equation 1 and equation 3.
E al E alreq = If
EQUATION1414 V1 EN
Isn S R CT + R L + R I pn I2 r
(Equation 3)
where: If Maximum primary fundamental frequency current that passes two main CTs without passing the power transformer (A)
2.1.6.2
Distance protection
The current transformers must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than the maximum of the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:
E al E alreq =
EQUATION1080 V1 EN
I k max Isn S a R CT + R L + R I pn I2 r
(Equation 4)
E al E alreq =
EQUATION1081 V1 EN
I kzone1 Isn S k R CT + R L + R I pn I2 r
(Equation 5)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
where: Ikmax Ikzone1 Ipn Isn Ir RCT RL Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in forward and reverse faults (A) Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for faults at the end of zone 1 reach (A) The rated primary CT current (A) The rated secondary CT current (A) The rated current of the protection IED (A) The secondary resistance of the CT (W) The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). In solidly earthed systems the loop resistance containing the phase and neutral wires should be used for phase-to-earth faults and the resistance of the phase wire should be used for three-phase faults. In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the resistance of the single secondary wire always can be used. The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and Sr=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A This factor is a function of the primary time constant for the dc component in the fault current. a= 2 for the primary time constant Tp 50 ms a = 3 for the primary time constant Tp> 50 ms A factor of the primary time constant for the dc component in the fault current for a three-phase fault at the set reach of zone 1. k = 4 for the primary time constant Tp 30 ms k = 6 for the primary time constant Tp> 30 ms
SR a
2.1.6.3
Restricted earth fault protection (low impedance differential)

The requirements are specified separately for solidly earthed and impedance earthed transformers. For impedance earthed transformers the requirements for the phase CTs are depending whether it is three individual CTs connected in parallel or it is a cable CT enclosing all three phases.
Neutral CTs and phase CTs for solidly earthed transformers
The neutral CT and the phase CTs must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the maximum of the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:
Eal Ealreq = 30 I nt
EQUATION2237 V1 EN
I sn S RCT + RL + R 2 I pn Ir
(Equation 6)
Eal Ealreq = 2 I etf

EQUATION2238 V1 EN
(Equation 6)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where: Int Ietf Ipn Isn Ir RCT RL SR The rated primary current of the power transformer (A) Maximum primary fundamental frequency phase-to-earth fault current that passes the CTs and the power transformer neutral (A) The rated primary CT current (A) The rated secondary CT current (A) The rated current of the protection IED (A) The secondary resistance of the CT () The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (). The loop resistance containing the phase and neutral wires shall be used. The burden of a REx670 current input channel (VA). SR=0,020 VA / channel for IR = 1 A and SR = 0,150 VA / channel for IR = 5 A
In substations with breaker-and-a-half or double-busbar double-breaker arrangement, the fault current may pass two main phase CTs for the restricted earth fault protection without passing the power transformer. In such cases and if both main CTs have equal ratios and magnetization characteristics the CTs must satisfy Requirement (12) and the Requirement (14) below:
Eal Ealreq = I ef
EQUATION2239 V1 EN
I sn I pn
RCT + RL +
SR
2
Ir
(Equation 7)
Where: Ief Maximum primary fundamental frequency phase-to-earth fault current that passes two main CTs without passing the power transformer neutral (A)
Neutral CTs and phase CTs for impedance earthed transformers
The neutral CT and phase CTs must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:
Eal Ealreq = 3 I etf

EQUATION2240 V1 EN
I sn I pn
RCT + RL +
SR
2
Ir
(Equation 8)
Where: Ietf Ipn Isn Ir Maximum primary fundamental frequency phase-to-earth fault current that passes the CTs and the power transformer neutral (A) The rated primary CT current (A) The rated secondary CT current (A) The rated current of the protection IED (A)
Table continues on next page 23 Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RCT RL SR
The secondary resistance of the CT () The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (). The loop resistance containing the phase and neutral wires shall be used. The burden of a REx670 current input channel (VA). SR = 0,020 VA / channel for Ir = 1 A and SR = 0,150 VA / channel for Ir = 5 A
In case of three individual CTs connected in parallel (Holmgren connection) on the phase side the following additional requirements must also be fulfilled. The three individual phase CTs must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the maximum of the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:
Eal Ealreq = 2 I tf
EQUATION2241 V1 EN
(Equation 9)
Where: Itf RLsw Maximum primary fundamental frequency three-phase fault current that passes the CTs and the power transformer (A). The resistance of the single secondary wire and additional load ().
In impedance earthed systems the phase-to-earth fault currents often are relatively small and the requirements might result in small CTs. However, in applications where the zero sequence current from the phase side of the transformer is a summation of currents from more than one CT (cable CTs or groups of individual CTs in Holmgren connection) for example, in substations with breaker-and-a-half or double-busbar double-breaker arrangement or if the transformer has a Tconnection to different busbars, there is a risk that the CTs can be exposed for higher fault currents than the considered phase-to-earth fault currents above. Examples of such cases can be cross-country faults or phase-to-phase faults with high fault currents and unsymmetrical distribution of the phase currents between the CTs. The zero sequence fault current level can differ much and is often difficult to calculate or estimate for different cases. To cover these cases, with summation of zero sequence currents from more than one CT, the phase side CTs must fulfill the Requirement (17) below:
Eal Ealreq = I f
EQUATION2242 V1 EN
I sn I pn
RCT + RL +
SR
2
Ir
(Equation 10)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where: If RL Maximum primary fundamental frequency three-phase fault current that passes the CTs (A) The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (). The loop resistance containing the phase and neutral wires shall be used.
2.1.7
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards

All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to use with the IEDs if they fulfill the requirements corresponding to the above specified expressed as the rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard. From different standards and available data for relaying applications it is possible to approximately calculate a secondary e.m.f. of the CT comparable with Eal. By comparing this with the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq it is possible to judge if the CT fulfills the requirements. The requirements according to some other standards are specified below.
2.1.7.1
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class P, PR

A CT according to IEC 60044-1 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max. The value of the E2max is approximately equal to the corresponding Eal according to IEC 60044-6. Therefore, the CTs according to class P and PR must have a secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max that fulfills the following:
E 2 max > max imum of E alreq
EQUATION1383 V1 EN
(Equation 11)
2.1.7.2
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class PX, IEC 60044-6, class TPS (and old British Standard, class X)
CTs according to these classes are specified approximately in the same way by a rated knee-point e.m.f. Eknee (Ek for class PX, EkneeBS for class X and the limiting secondary voltage Ual for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than the corresponding Eal according to IEC 60044-6. It is not possible to give a general relation between the Eknee and the Eal but normally the Eknee is approximately 80 % of the Eal. Therefore, the CTs according to class PX, X and TPS must have a rated knee-point e.m.f. Eknee that fulfills the following:
Eknee Ek EkneeBS Ual > 0.8 (maximum of Ealreq)
EQUATION2100 V1 EN
(Equation 12)
2.1.7.3 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE are partly specified in different ways. A rated secondary terminal voltage UANSI is specified for a CT of class C. UANSI is the secondary terminal voltage the CT will deliver to a standard burden at 20 times rated secondary current without exceeding 10 % ratio correction. There are a number of standardized UANSI values for example, UANSI is 400 V for a C400 CT. A corresponding rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI can be estimated as follows:
E a lANSI = 20 I s n R C T + U A NSI = 20 I s n R C T + 20 Is n Z b ANSI
EQUATION971 V1 EN
(Equation 13)
where: ZbANSI UANSI The impedance (that is, complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C class (W) The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)
The CTs according to class C must have a calculated rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI that fulfills the following:
E alANSI > max imum of E alreq
EQUATION1384 V1 EN
(Equation 14)
A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is also specified by the knee-point voltage UkneeANSI that is graphically defined from an excitation curve. The knee-point voltage UkneeANSI normally has a lower value than the knee-point e.m.f. according to IEC and BS. UkneeANSI can approximately be estimated to 75 % of the corresponding Eal according to IEC 60044 6. Therefore, the CTs according to ANSI/ IEEE must have a knee-point voltage UkneeANSI that fulfills the following:
EkneeANSI > 0.75 (maximum of Ealreq)
EQUATION2101 V1 EN
(Equation 15)
2.2
Voltage transformer requirements

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured input signal. Transients caused by capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) can affect some protection functions. Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) should fulfill the requirements according to the IEC 600445 standard regarding ferro-resonance and transients. The ferro-resonance requirements of the CVTs are specified in chapter 7.4 of the standard. The transient responses for three different standard transient response classes, T1, T2 and T3 are specified in chapter 15.5 of the standard. CVTs according to all classes can be used. The protection IED has effective filters for these transients, which gives secure and correct operation with CVTs.
2.3
SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5 switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.
2.4
IEC 61850-9-2LE Merging unit requirements

The merging units that supply the IED with measured values via the process bus must fulfill the IEC61850-9-2LE standard. This part of the IEC61850 is specifying Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802, in other words sampled data over Ethernet. The 9-2 part of the IEC61850 protocol uses also definitions from 7-2, Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment Abstract communication service interface (ACSI). The set of functionality implemented in the IED (IEC61850-9-2LE) is a subset of the IEC61850-9-2. For example the IED covers the client part of the standard, not the server part. The standard does not define the sample rate for data, but in the UCA users group recommendations there are indicated sample rates that are adopted, by consensus, in the industry. There are two sample rates defined: 80 samples/cycle (4000 samples/sec. at 50Hz or 4800 samples/sec. at 60 Hz) for a merging unit type1 and 256 samples/cycle for a merging unit type2. The IED can receive data rates of 80 samples/cycle. Note that the IEC 61850-9-2 LE standard does not specify the quality of the sampled values, only the transportation. Thus, the accuracy of the current and
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
voltage inputs to the merging unit and the inaccuracy added by the merging unit must be coordinated with the requirement for actual type of protection function. Factors influencing the accuracy of the sampled values from the merging unit are for example anti aliasing filters, frequency range, step response, truncating, A/D conversion inaccuracy, time tagging accuracy etc. In principle shall the accuracy of the current and voltage transformers, together with the merging unit, have the same quality as direct input of currents and voltages.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application
Section 3
IED application
About this chapter

This chapter describes the use of the included software functions in the IED. The chapter discusses application possibilities and gives guidelines for calculating settings for a particular application.
3.1
General IED application

RET670 provides fast and selective protection, monitoring and control for two- and three-winding transformers, autotransformers, generator-transformer units, phase shifting transformers, special railway transformers and shunt reactors. The transformer IED is designed to operate correctly over a wide frequency range in order to accommodate power system frequency variations during disturbances and generator start-up and shut-down. A very fast differential protection function, with automatic CT ratio matching and vector group compensation, makes this IED the ideal solution even for the most demanding applications. Since RET670 has very low requirements on the main CTs, no interposing CTs are required.It is suitable for differential applications with multi-breaker arrangements with up to six restraint CT inputs. The differential protection function is provided with 2nd harmonic and wave-block restraint features to avoid tripping for magnetizing inrush current, and 5th harmonic restraint to avoid tripping for overexcitation. The differential function offers a high sensitivity for low-level internal faults. The unique and innovative sensitive differential protection feature of the RET670 provides the best possible coverage for winding internal turn-to-turn faults, based on well-known theory of symmetrical components . Low impedance restricted earth-fault protection functions are available as complimentary sensitive and fast main protection against winding earth faults. This function includes a directional zero-sequence current criterion for additional security. Additionally a high impedance differential function is available. It can be used as restricted earth fault or, as three functions are included, also as differential protection on autotransformers, as differential protection for a tertiary connected reactor, as T-differential protection for the transformer feeder in a mesh-corner or ring arrangement, as tertiary bus protection and so on. Tripping from Pressure relief/Buchholz and temperature devices can be done through the transformer IED where pulsing, lock-out contact output and so on, is performed. The binary inputs are heavily stabilized against disturbance to prevent
29
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
incorrect operations at for example, dc system capacitive discharges or DC earth faults. Distance protection functionality for phase-to-phase and/or phase-to-earth faults is available as back-up protection for faults within the transformer and in the connected power system. Versatile phase, earth, positive, negative and zero sequence overcurrent functions, which can optionally be made directional and/or voltage controlled, provide further alternative backup protection. Thermal overload with two time-constants, volts per hertz, over/under voltage and over/under frequency protection functions are also available. A built-in disturbance and event recorder provides valuable data to the user about status and operation for post-fault disturbance analysis. Breaker failure protection for each transformer breaker allows high speed back-up tripping of surrounding breakers. The transformer IED can also be provided with a full control and interlocking functionality including Synchrocheck function to allow integration of the main and/ or a local back-up control. Out of Step function is available to separate power system sections close to electrical centre at occurring out of step. RET670 can be used in applications with the IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus with up to two Merging Units (MU). Each MU has eight analogue channels, normally four current and four voltages. Conventional and Merging Unit channels can be mixed freely in your application. The advanced logic capability, where user logic is prepared with a graphical tool, allows special applications such as automatic opening of disconnectors in multibreaker arrangements, closing of breaker rings, load transfer logic and so on. The graphical configuration tool ensures simple and fast testing and commissioning. Serial data communication is via optical connections to ensure immunity against disturbances. The wide application flexibility makes this product an excellent choice for both new installations and the refurbishment of existing installations.
3.2
3.2.1
Analog inputs
Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly to get correct measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
defined properly. Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Set values are done in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly. A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading. The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module (TRM) type.
3.2.2
Setting guidelines
The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
3.2.2.1
Setting of the phase reference channel

All phase angles are calculated in relation to a defined reference. An appropriate analog input channel is selected and used as phase reference. The parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the analog channel that is used as phase angle reference.
Example
The setting PhaseAngleRef=10 shall be used if a phase-to-earth voltage (usually the L1 phase-to-earth voltage connected to VT channel number 10 of the analog card) is selected to be the phase reference.
Setting of current channels
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless indicated otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be star connected and can be connected with the earthing point to the object or from the object. This information must be set in the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power, and so on means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means direction out from the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
object. For directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse. See figure 1
Definition of direction for directional functions Reverse Forward Definition of direction for directional functions Forward Reverse
Protected Object Line, transformer, etc

e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "ToObject" e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "FromObject" en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN
Figure 1:
Internal convention of the directionality in the IED
With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. The following examples show the principle.
Example 1
Two IEDs used for protection of two objects.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Line
Ip
Transformer
Ip
Ip
Line
Reverse Forward
Is
Transformer protection
Definition of direction for directional functions Is
Line protection
Setting of current input: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Transformer as reference object. Correct setting is "ToObject"
Setting of current input: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Line as reference object. Correct setting is "FromObject"
en05000753.vsd
IEC05000753 V1 EN
Figure 2:
Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in the IED
The figure 2 shows the most normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The settings for CT direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line the direction of the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward. This means that the protection is looking towards the line.
Example 2
Two IEDs used for protection of two objects and sharing a CT.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Transformer Line
Reverse Forward
Transformer protection
Definition of direction for directional functions
Line protection
Setting of current input: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Line as reference object. Correct setting is "FromObject"
en05000460.vsd
IEC05000460 V1 EN
Figure 3:
This example is similar to example 1 but the transformer is feeding just one line and the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT direction is set with different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same current from the same CT that is feeding two IEDs. With these settings the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to look towards the line.
Example 3
One IED used to protect two objects.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Transformer Line
Forward Reverse
Transformer and Line protection
Definition of direction for directional line functions
en05000461.vsd
IEC05000461 V1 EN
Figure 4:
In this example one IED includes both transformer and line protection and the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input channels the CT direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means that the direction Forward for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look towards the line the direction of the directional functions of the line protection must be set to Reverse. The direction Forward/Reverse is related to the reference object that is the transformer in this case. When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction it shall be noted that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach in forward and reverse direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria that can differ. Normally it is not any limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind and check if it is acceptable for the application in question. If the IED has a sufficient number of analog current inputs an alternative solution is shown in figure 5. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and the line and transformer protection functions are configured to the different inputs. The CT direction for the current channels to the line protection is set with the line as reference object and the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to protect the line.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Transformer Line
Reverse Forward
Transformer and Line protection
Definition of direction for directional line functions
Setting of current input for transformer functions: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Transformer as reference object. Correct setting is "ToObject"
Setting of current input for transformer functions: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Transformer as reference object. Correct setting is "ToObject"
Setting of current input for line functions: Set parameter CTStarPoint with Line as reference object. Correct setting is "FromObject"
en05000462.vsd
IEC05000462 V1 EN
Figure 5:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Busbar
Busbar Protection 1
en06000196.vsd
IEC06000196 V1 EN
Figure 6:
For busbar protection it is possible to set the CTStarPoint parameters in two ways. The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT inputs marked with 1 in figure 6, set CTStarPoint = ToObject, and for all CT inputs marked with 2 in figure 6, set CTStarPoint = FromObject. The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that case for all CT inputs marked with 1 in figure 6, set CTStarPoint = FromObject, and for all CT inputs marked with 2 in figure 6, set CTStarPoint = ToObject. Regardless which one of the above two options is selected busbar differential protection will behave correctly.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters CTsec and CTprim for each current channel. For a 1000/1 A CT the following setting shall be used: CTprim = 1000 (value in A) CTsec =1 (value in A).
Examples how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most commonly used CT connections
Figure 7 defines the marking of current transformers terminals commonly used around the world:
P1 (H1)
S1 (X1)
ISec
P2 (H2)
S2 (X2)
IPri
x P2 (H2) a)
IEC06000641 V1 EN
S2 (X2)
x P1 (H1)
S1 (X1)
b)
c)
en06000641.vsd
Figure 7:
Where: a) b) and c)
Commonly used markings of CT terminals
is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a dot indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (that is, positive) polarity are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note that for this two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!
It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices rated secondary current of a CT has typically one of the following values: 1A 5A
However in some cases the following rated secondary currents are as well used: 2A 10A
The IED fully supports all of these rated secondary values.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
It is recommended to: use 1A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with 1A and 2A secondary rating use 5A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with 5A and 10A secondary rating
Example how to connect star connected three-phase CT set to the IED

Figure 8 gives an example how to connect the star connected three-phase CT set to the IED. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
L1 L2 L3
IED
3 1 IL1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AI 01 (I) AI 02 (I) AI 03 (I) AI 04 (I) AI 05 (I) AI 06 (I)
IL2
IL1
IL3
6 4
SMAI2 BLOCK ^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
CT 600/5 Star Connected
IL2 IL3 IR
9 10 11 12
Protected Object
IEC06000642 V3 EN
Figure 8:
Star connected three-phase CT set with star point towards the protected object
Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from star connected three-phase CT set to three CT inputs in the IED. shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth inputs in the IED. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made, the IED will still calculate this current internally by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
Table continues on next page
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3)
is TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the following setting values shall be entered. CTprim=600A CTsec=5A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (that is, currents are already measured towards the protected object). 4) are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), which connects these three current inputs to the first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 6). Depending on the type of functions, which need this current information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs. is a connection made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), which connects the residual/neutral current input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 6). Note that this connection in SMT shall not be done if the residual/neutral current is not connected to the IED. In that case the pre-processing block will calculate it by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents. Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
5)
6)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Another alternative is to have the star point of the three-phase CT set as shown in figure 9:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
L1
L2
L3
IED
3 IR 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
AI 01 (I) AI 02 (I) AI 03 (I) AI 04 (I) AI 05 (I) AI 06 (I)
IL2
IL1
IL3
6 4
BLOCK ^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N
SMAI2 AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
IL3 IL2 CT 800/1 Star Connected IL1
Protected Object
IEC06000644 V3 EN
Figure 9:
Star connected three-phase CT set with star point from the protected object
Please note that in this case everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example, except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters shall be entered: CTprim=800A CTsec=1A CTStarPoint=FromObject
Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will invert the measured currents (that is, turn the currents by 180) in order to ensure that the currents within the IED are measured towards the protected object.
Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED
Figure 10 gives an example how to connect the delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
L1
L2
L3
IED
IL2
IL1
IL3
2 1 IL1-IL2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 AI 06(I) AI 05(I) AI 04(I) AI 03(I) AI 02(I)
# Not used
5 3
SMAI2
CT 600/5 in Delta DAB Connected
AI 01(I)
AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
IL2-IL3 IL3-IL1
Protected Object
.
IEC06000645 V3 EN
Figure 10:
Delta DAB connected three-phase CT set

Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from delta connected three-phase CT set to three CT inputs in the IED. is TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600/1.732=346A CTsec=5A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (that is, currents are already measured towards the protected object). Table continues on next page
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 6). Depending on type of functions which need this current information, more then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs. shows that the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block shall not be connected in SMT. Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
4) 5)
Another alternative is to have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 11:
L1 L2 L3
IED
5 3 IL1-IL3
SMAI2
IL2
IL1
IL3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CT 800/1 in delta DCA Connected
AI 01 (I) AI 02 (I) AI 03 (I) AI 04 (I) 4 AI 05 (I) AI 06 (I)

#Not used
IL2-IL1 IL3-IL2
Protected Object
IEC06000646 V3 EN
Figure 11:
Delta DAC connected three-phase CT set
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Please note that in this case everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example, except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters shall be entered: CTprim=800/1.732=462A CTsec=1A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (that is, currents are already measured towards the protected object).
Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED
Figure 12 gives an example how to connect the single-phase CT to the IED. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
IED
Protected Object
2
1 2 AI 01(I) AI 02(I) AI 03(I) 3
# Not used SMAI2 BLOCK ^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
L1
L2
L3
3 4 5 6 7
CT 1000/1
1 INP
8 9 10 11
AI 04(I) AI 05(I) AI 06(I)
# Not used # Not used
a) b)
INP
12
INP
IEC06000647 V3 EN
Figure 12:
Connections for single-phase CT input
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect single-phase CT input in the IED. is TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the following setting values shall be entered. For connection a) shown in figure 12:
CTprim=1000A CTsec=1A CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (that is, currents are already measured towards the protected object). For connection b) shown in figure 12:
CTprim=1000A CTsec=1A CTStarPoint=FromObject
Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in this example will invert the measured currents (that is, turn the currents by 180) in order to ensure that the currents within the IED are measured towards the protected object. 3) 4) 5) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). shows the connection made in SMT tool, which connect this CT input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5). Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
As the IED uses primary system quantities the main VT ratios must be known. This is done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage channel. The phase-to-phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a phaseto-earth voltage from the VT.
Setting of voltage channels
Example
Consider a VT with the following data:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
132kV 110V 3 3
EQUATION2016 V1 EN
(Equation 16)
The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=110 (value in V)
Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most commonly used VT connections
Figure 13 defines the marking of voltage transformers terminals commonly used around the world.
+
UPri
+
USec
A (H1)
a (X1)
A (H1)
da (X1)
A (H1)
a (X1)
a)
IEC06000591 V1 EN
N (H2)
b)
n (X2)
N (H2)
c)
dn (X2)
B (H2)
d)
b (X2)
en06000591.vsd
Figure 13:
Where: a)
Commonly used markings of VT terminals
is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a dot indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (that is, positive) polarity is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-earth connected VT is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta connected VT is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-tophase connected VT
b) c) d)
It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices rated secondary voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values: 100 V 110 V 115 V 120 V
The IED fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the following examples.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Examples how to connect three phase-to-earth connected VTs to the IED
Figure 14 gives an example how to connect the three phase-to-earth connected VTs to the IED. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
L1 L2 L3 66 kV 3
IED
2 3 5
110V 3
13 14 15 16 17 18 AI 08 (U) AI 09 (U)
#Not used
AI 07 (I)
66 kV 3
19
110V 3
20 21 22 23 24
AI 10 (U) AI 11 (U) AI 12 (U)
66 kV 3
110V 3
.
IEC06000599 V3 EN
Figure 14:
Three phase-to-earth connected VTs
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where : 1) 2) shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-earth voltages to three VT inputs in the IED is TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered: VTprim=66 kV VTsec= 110 V Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.
66 110
66 = 3 110 3
(Equation 17)
EQUATION1903 V1 EN
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate 3Uo inside by vectorial sum from the three phase to earth voltages connected to the first three input channels of the same preprocessing block. Alternatively, the fourth input channel can be connected to open delta VT input, as shown in figure 16. Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
4)
5)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However the following settings shall be set as shown here: UBase=66 kV (that is, rated Ph-Ph voltage) If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Example how to connect two phase-to-phase connected VTs to the IED

Figure 15 gives an example how to connect the two phase-to-phase connected VTs to the IED. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED. It shall be noted that this VT connection is only used on lower voltage levels (that is, rated primary voltage below 40 kV).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
L1 L2 L3
13.8kV 120V 13.8kV 120V
IED
2 3 1
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 AI 12(U) AI 11(U) AI 10(U) AI 09(U)
#Not Used
AI 07(I)
BLOCK
SMAI2 AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN ^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N
AI 08(U)
IEC06000600 V3 EN
Figure 15:
Two phase-to-phase connected VTs

Where: 1) 2) shows how to connect secondary side of two phase-to-phase VTs to three VT inputs in the IED is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered: VTprim=13.8 kV VTsec=120 V Please note that inside the IED only ratio of these two parameters is used.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3)
are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), which connects these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the type of functions, which need this voltage information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT. Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
4) 5)
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However the following settings shall be set as shown here: ConnectionType=Ph-Ph UBase=13.8 kV If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for high impedance earthed or unearthed
Figure 16 gives an example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for high impedance earthed or unearthed power systems. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3Uo to the IED. In case of a solid earth fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Uo will be equal to:
3Uo = 3 U Ph - Ph = 3 U Ph - E
(Equation 18)
EQUATION1921 V1 EN
The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E. Therefore, three series connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal to three times the individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage equal to one third of the rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage (that is, 110/3V in this particular example). Figure 16 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
L1 L2 L3
6.6kV 3
IED
2
13
110V 3
14 15 16 17 18
AI 07 (I) AI 08 (U) AI 09 (U)

SMAI2 BLOCK
# Not Used # Not Used
6.6kV 3
19 20 21 22 23 24
3
AI 10 (U) AI 11 (U) AI 12 (U)
^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N
110V 3
+3Uo
# Not Used
6.6kV 3
110V 3
IEC06000601 V3 EN
Figure 16:
Open delta connected VT in high impedance earthed power system
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where: 1) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in the IED. +3Uo shall be connected to the IED
2)
is TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
EQUATION1923 V1 EN
3 6.6 = 11.43kV
(Equation 19)
VT sec = 3
EQUATION1924 V1 EN
110 3
= 110V
(Equation 20)
Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.
3 6.6 110
6.6 = 3 110 3
(Equation 21)
EQUATION1925 V1 EN
3) 4) 5)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5). Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low impedance earthed or solidly earthed power systems
Figure 17 gives an example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low impedance earthed or solidly earthed power systems. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3Uo to the IED.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In case of a solid earth fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Uo will be equal to:
3Uo = U Ph - Ph 3 = U Ph - E
(Equation 22)
EQUATION1926 V1 EN
The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E Therefore, three series connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to one individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage close to rated phaseto-phase VT secondary voltage, that is, 115V or 115/3V as in this particular example. Figure 17 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
L1 L2 L3
138kV 3
IED
2
13 14 15 16 17 18 AI08 (U) AI09 (U)
BLOCK
# Not Used # Not Used # Not Used
5
AI07 (I)
115V 3
138kV 3
19 20 21 22 23 24
3
AI10 (U) AI11 (U) AI12 (U)
115V 3
+3Uo
138kV 3
115V 3
IEC06000602 V3 EN
Figure 17:
Open delta connected VT in low impedance earthed power system
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where: 1) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in the IED. +3Uo shall be connected to the IED.
2)
VTprim =
EQUATION1928 V1 EN
138 3
= 138kV
(Equation 23)
VT sec =
EQUATION1929 V1 EN
115 3
= 115V
(Equation 24)
Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.
138 115
138 = 3 115 3
(Equation 25)
EQUATION1930 V1 EN
3) 4) 5)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5). preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Example how to connect the neutral point VT to the IED
Figure 18 gives an example how to connect the neutral point VT to the IED. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to Uo to the IED. In case of a solid earth fault in high impedance earthed or unearthed systems the primary value of Uo voltage will be equal to:
Uo = U Ph - Ph 3 = U Ph - E
(Equation 26)
EQUATION1931 V1 EN
Figure 18 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
Protected Object
IED
2 5
13 14 AI07 (I) AI08 (I)
BLOCK
L1
L2
L3
15 16 17 18 19 20 AI09 (I)
3
AI10 (U) AI11 (U) AI12 (U)
# Not Used # Not Used # Not Used
21 22 23
Uo
24
6.6kV 3
IEC06000603 V3 EN
100V
Figure 18:
Neutral point connected VT
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where: 1) shows how to connect the secondary side of neutral point VT to one VT input in the IED. +Uo shall be connected to the IED.
2)
VTprim =
6.6 3
= 3.81kV
(Equation 27)
EQUATION1933 V1 EN
VT sec = 100V
EQUATION1934 V1 EN
(Equation 28)
Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of the neutral point VT. 3) 4) 5) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not connected in SMT tool. shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5). preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate: fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels harmonic content for all four input channels positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)
3.2.3
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 1:
Name PhaseAngleRef
AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) TRM40-Ch1 TRM40-Ch2 TRM40-Ch3 TRM40-Ch4 TRM40-Ch5 TRM40-Ch6 TRM40-Ch7 TRM40-Ch8 TRM40-Ch9 TRM40-Ch10 TRM40-Ch11 TRM40-Ch12 TRM41-Ch1 TRM41-Ch2 TRM41-Ch3 TRM41-Ch4 TRM41-Ch5 TRM41-Ch6 TRM41-Ch7 TRM41-Ch8 TRM41-Ch9 TRM41-Ch10 TRM41-Ch11 TRM41-Ch12 MU1-L1I MU1-L2I MU1-L3I MU1-L4I MU1-L1U MU1-L2U MU1-L3U MU1-L4U MU2-L1I MU2-L2I MU2-L3I MU2-L4I MU2-L1U MU2-L2U MU2-L3U MU2-L4U MU3-L1I MU3-L2I MU3-L3I MU3-L4I MU3-L1U MU3-L2U MU3-L3U MU3-L4U Unit Step Default TRM40-Ch1 Description Reference channel for phase angle presentation
Table 2:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2
TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject Unit A A Step 1 1 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite

Name CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6 CTStarPoint7 CTsec7 CTprim7 CTStarPoint8 CTsec8 CTprim8 CTStarPoint9 CTsec9 CTprim9 CTStarPoint10 CTsec10 CTprim10 CTStarPoint11 CTsec11 CTprim11 CTStarPoint12 CTsec12 CTprim12 Values (Range) 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 Unit A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 3:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6 VTsec7 VTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9 VTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12
TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit A A A A A A A A A A A A V kV V kV V kV V kV V kV V kV Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 4:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6
TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 Unit A A A A A A A A A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current
Table 5:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4

Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 Unit A A A A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit A A A A A A A V kV V kV V kV V kV V kV Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 Description Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage
Name CTprim4 CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6 CTStarPoint7 CTsec7 CTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9 VTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12
Table 6:
Name CTStarPoint1 CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2 CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3 CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4 CTsec4 CTprim4

Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 Unit A A A A A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

Name CTStarPoint5 CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6 CTsec6 CTprim6 CTStarPoint7 CTsec7 CTprim7 CTStarPoint8 CTsec8 CTprim8 CTStarPoint9 CTsec9 CTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12 Values (Range) FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit A A A A A A A A A A V kV V kV V kV Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 ToObject 1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage
3.3
3.3.1
Local human-machine interface

Human machine interface
The local human machine interface is available in a small and a medium sized model. The difference between the two models is the size of the LCD. The small size LCD can display seven lines of text and the medium size LCD can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page. Up to 12 single line diagram pages can be defined, depending on the product capability. The local HMI is divided into zones with different functionality.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Status indication LEDs. Alarm indication LEDs, which consist of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from PCM600. Liquid crystal display (LCD). Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for selection between local and remote control and reset. Isolated RJ45 communication port.
IEC05000055-LITEN V1 EN
Figure 19:
Small, alpha numeric HMI
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC05000056-LITEN V1 EN
Figure 20:
Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects
3.3.2
3.3.2.1
Local HMI related functions

Introduction
The local HMI can be adapted to the application configuration and to user preferences. Function block LocalHMI Function block LEDGEN Setting parameters
3.3.2.2
Table 7:
Name Language DisplayTimeout AutoRepeat ContrastLevel DefaultScreen EvListSrtOrder SymbolFont
General setting parameters

SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) English OptionalLanguage 10 - 120 Off On -10 - 20 0-0 Latest on top Oldest on top IEC ANSI Unit Min % Step 10 1 1 Default English 60 On 0 0 Latest on top IEC Description Local HMI language Local HMI display timeout Activation of auto-repeat (On) or not (Off) Contrast level for display Default screen Sort order of event list Symbol font for Single Line Diagram
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Indication LEDs

Introduction
The function block LEDGEN controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LEDGEN are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the Signal Matrix Tool in PCM600. LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red. LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow.
3.3.3
3.3.3.1
Each indication LED on the local HMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences Two sequences operate as follow type. Four sequences operate as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as signaling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flashing (-F). See the technical reference manual for more information.
3.3.3.2
Table 8:
Name Operation tRestart tMax SeqTypeLED1
Setting parameters
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Unit s s Step 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.0 0.0 Follow-S Description Operation mode for the LED function Defines the disturbance length Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Sequence type for LED 1
SeqTypeLED2
Follow-S
Sequence type for LED 2

Name SeqTypeLED3 Values (Range) Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Unit Step Default Follow-S Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SeqTypeLED4
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED5
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED6
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED7
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED8
Follow-S
sequence type for LED 8
SeqTypeLED9
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED10
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED11
Follow-S
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Unit Step Default Follow-S Description Sequence type for LED 12
Name SeqTypeLED12
SeqTypeLED13
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED14
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED15
Follow-S
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.1.1
Basic IED functions

Self supervision with internal event list
Application
The protection and control IEDs have many functions included . The included selfsupervision with internal event list function block provides good supervision of the IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze and locate a fault. Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate possible faults through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/ or through the software communication. Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure, a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a corresponding event is generated. Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated when the status changes for the: built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order). external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Events are also generated: whenever any setting in the IED is changed.
The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list cannot be cleared and its content cannot be modified. The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during commissioning and fault tracing. The information can only be retrieved with the aid of PCM600 Event Monitoring Tool. The PC can either be connected to the front port, or to the port at the back of the IED.
3.4.1.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
Time synchronization
Application
Use time synchronization to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection and control system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in the system possible. Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when evaluating faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within the IED can be compared to one another. With time synchronization, events and disturbances within the entire station, and even between line ends, can be compared at evaluation. In the IED, the internal time can be synchronized from a number of sources: BIN (Binary Minute Pulse) GPS SNTP IRIG-B SPA LON PPS
For IEDs using IEC61850-9-2LE in "mixed mode" a time synchronization from an external clock is recommended to the IED and all connected merging units. The time synchronization from the clock to the IED can be either optical PPS or IRIGB. For IED's using IEC61850-9-2LE from one single MU as analog data source,
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
the MU and IED still needs to be synchronized to each other. This could be done by letting the MU supply a PPS signal to the IED. Out of these, LON and SPA contains two types of synchronization messages: Coarse time messages are sent every minute and contain complete date and time, that is year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond. Fine time messages are sent every second and comprise only seconds and milliseconds.
The setting tells the IED which of these that shall be used to synchronize the IED. It is possible to set a backup time-sources for GPS signal, for instance SNTP, and in that case the IED will automatically choose the SNTP as the time-source in case the GPS signal quality is bad. At a given point in time, only one time-source will be used.
3.4.2.2
Setting guidelines
System time The time is set with years, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond. Synchronization The setting parameters for the real-time clock with external time synchronization (TIME) are set via local HMI or PCM600. TimeSynch When the source of the time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the parameter is called TimeSynch. The time synchronization source can also be set from PCM600. The setting alternatives are: FineSyncSource which can have the following values: Off SPA LON BIN (Binary Minute Pulse) GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP GPS+IRIG-B IRIG-B PPS
CoarseSyncSrc which can have the following values:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Off SPA LON SNTP DNP
The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronization is called TIMEMINSYNC. The system time can be set manually, either via the local HMI or via any of the communication ports. The time synchronization fine tunes the clock (seconds and milliseconds). Set the course time synchronizing source (CoarseSyncSrc) to Off when GPS time synchronization of line differential function is used. Set the fine time synchronization source (FineSyncSource) to GPS. The GPS will thus provide the complete time synchronization. GPS alone shall synchronize the analogue values in such systems. HWSyncSrc: This parameter must not be set to Off if AppSynch is set to Synch. If set to Off the time quality in the IED will never reach SyncAccLevel and some functions are blocked. See section "IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol" in section "Station communication". AppSynch: If this parameter is set to Synch, some functions are blocked, see section "IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol" in section "Station communication", if the time quality is worse than the limit set by SyncAccLevel. SyncAccLevel: If this parameter is set to Unspecified, time quality will always be not sufficient, thereby some functions are blocked.
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization
For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit. An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.
3.4.2.3
Setting parameters
Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time Path in PCM600 is located under Main menu/Settings/Time/Synchronization
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 9:
Name CoarseSyncSrc
TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off SPA LON SNTP DNP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP IRIG-B GPS+IRIG-B PPS Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Off GPS IRIG-B PPS NoSynch Synch Class T5 (1us) Class T4 (4us) Unspecified Unit Step Default Off Description Coarse time synchronization source
FineSyncSource
Off
Fine time synchronization source
SyncMaster TimeAdjustRate HWSyncSrc
Off Fast Off
Activate IED as synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization Hardware time synchronization source
AppSynch SyncAccLevel
NoSynch Unspecified
Time synchronization mode for application Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Table 10:
Name ModulePosition BinaryInput BinDetection
SYNCHBIN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 3 - 16 1 - 16 PositiveEdge NegativeEdge Unit Step 1 1 Default 3 1 PositiveEdge Description Hardware position of IO module for time synchronization Binary input number for time synchronization Positive or negative edge detection
Table 11:
Name ServerIP-Add RedServIP-Add
SYNCHSNTP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0 - 18 0 - 18 Unit IP Address IP Address Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Description Server IP-address Redundant server IP-address
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 12:
Name MonthInYear
DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 172800 Unit Step Default March Description Month in year when daylight time starts
DayInWeek
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time starts
WeekInMonth
Last
Week in month when daylight time starts
UTCTimeOfDay
3600
UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time starts
Table 13:
Name MonthInYear
DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 172800 Unit Step Default October Description Month in year when daylight time ends
DayInWeek
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time ends
WeekInMonth
Last
Week in month when daylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay
3600
UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time ends
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 14:
Name NoHalfHourUTC
TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) -24 - 24 Unit Step 1 Default 0 Description Number of half-hours from UTC
Table 15:
Name SynchType TimeDomain Encoding
SYNCHIRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) BNC Opto LocalTime UTC IRIG-B 1344 1344TZ MinusTZ PlusTZ Unit Step Default Opto LocalTime IRIG-B Description Type of synchronization Time domain Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
PlusTZ
Time zone as in 1344 standard
3.4.3
3.4.3.1
Parameter setting groups

Application
Six sets of settings are available to optimize IED operation for different system conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios. Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially, if the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the conditions in the power system. Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pretested settings in advance for different protection functions. Six different groups of setting parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the different programmable binary inputs by means of external or internal control signals. A function block, SETGRPS, defines how many setting groups are used. Setting is done with parameter MAXSETGR and shall be set to the required value for each IED. Only the number of setting groups set will be available in the Parameter Setting tool for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.

3.4.3.2 Setting guidelines
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The setting ActiveSetGrp, is used to select which parameter group to be active. The active group can also be selected with configured input to the function block SETGRPS. The length of the pulse, sent out by the output signal SETCHGD when an active group has changed, is set with the parameter t. The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between. Only the selected number of setting groups will be available in the Parameter Setting tool (PST) for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.
3.4.3.3
Table 16:
Name t
Setting parameters
ActiveGroup Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0.0 - 10.0 Unit s Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Description Pulse length of pulse when setting changed
Table 17:
Name ActiveSetGrp
SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) SettingGroup1 SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup5 SettingGroup6 1-6 Unit Step Default SettingGroup1 Description ActiveSettingGroup
MAXSETGR
No
Max number of setting groups 1-6
3.4.4
3.4.4.1
Test mode functionality TEST

Application
The protection and control IEDs may have a complex configuration with many included functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature that allows individual blocking of a single-, several-, or all functions. This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct functionality and to check parts of the configuration, and so on.
3.4.4.2
Setting guidelines
Remember always that there are two possible ways to place the IED in the TestMode= On state. If, the IED is set to normal operation (TestMode = Off), but
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
the functions are still shown being in the test mode, the input signal INPUT on the TESTMODE function block might be activated in the configuration.
3.4.4.3
Table 18:
Name TestMode EventDisable CmdTestBit
Setting parameters
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off On Off On Unit Step Default Off Off Off Description Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off) Event disable during testmode Command bit for test required or not during testmode
3.4.5
3.4.5.1
Change lock CHNGLCK

Application
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to make it impossible to perform inadvertent IED configuration and setting changes. However, when activated, CHNGLCK will still allow the following actions that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED: Monitoring Reading events Resetting events Reading disturbance data Clear disturbances Reset LEDs Reset counters and other runtime component states Control operations Set system time Enter and exit from test mode Change of active setting group
The binary input controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT. The CHNGLCK function is configured using ACT.
LOCK Binary input signal that will activate/deactivate the function, defined in ACT or SMT.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IED configuration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked" will be displayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied by active ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it is controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This guarantees that by setting that signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal path to the CHNGLCK input, that logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently issue a logical one on the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for remedial action.
3.4.5.2
Table 19:
Name Operation
Setting parameters
CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) LockHMI and Com LockHMI, EnableCom EnableHMI, LockCom Unit Step Default LockHMI and Com Description Operation mode of change lock
3.4.6
3.4.6.1
IED identifiers
Application
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country. Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
3.4.6.2
Table 20:
Name StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber
Setting parameters
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 Unit Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Station name 0 Object name 0 Unit name 0 Description Station name Station number Object name Object number Unit name Unit number
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Product information

Application
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important: IEDProdType ProductDef FirmwareVer SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate
3.4.7
3.4.7.1
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
3.4.7.2
Setting parameters
Factory defined settings
The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers The following identifiers are available: IEDProdType Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670 Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0 Describes the firmware version. Example: 1.4.51 Firmware versions numbers are running independently from the release production numbers. For every release numbers (like 1.5.0.17) there can be one or more firmware versions, depending on the small issues corrected in between releases. Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128 (meaning line protection).
ProductDef FirmwareVer
IEDMainFunType
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate
3.4.8
3.4.8.1
Rated system frequency PRIMVAL

Application
The rated system frequency is set under Main menu/General settings/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.
3.4.8.2
Setting guidelines
Set the system rated frequency. Refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI" for description on frequency tracking.
3.4.8.3
Table 21:
Name Frequency
Setting parameters
PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 50.0 - 60.0 Unit Hz Step 10.0 Default 50.0 Description Rated system frequency
3.4.9
3.4.9.1
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI

Application
The Signal matrix for binary inputs function SMBI is used within the Application Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBI represents the way binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.
3.4.9.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI available to the user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user shall give a name to SMBI instance and the SMBI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool. These names will define SMBI function in the Signal Matrix tool. The user defined name for the input or output signal will also appear on the respective output or input signal.
3.4.9.3
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or PCM600.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO

Application
The Signal matrix for binary outputs function SMBO is used within the Application Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBO represents the way binary outputs are sent from one IED configuration. It is important that SMBO inputs are connected when SMBOs are connected to physical outputs through the Signal Matrix Tool. If SMBOs are connected (in SMT) but their inputs not, all the physical outputs will be set by default. This might cause malfunction of primary equipment and/or injury to personnel.
3.4.10
3.4.10.1
3.4.10.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO available to the user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to SMBO instance and SMBO outputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool. These names will define SMBO function in the Signal Matrix tool.
3.4.10.3
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or PCM600.
3.4.11
3.4.11.1
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI

Application
The Signal matrix for mA inputs function SMMI is used within the Application Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMMI represents the way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.
3.4.11.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI available to the user in the Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to SMMI instance and SMMI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool.
3.4.11.3
Setting parameters
79
Application manual
Section 3 IED application 3.4.12

3.4.12.1
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

Application
Signal matrix for analog inputs function SMAI (or the pre-processing function) is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool or the Application Configuration tool. Signal Matrix tool represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.
3.4.12.2
Frequency values
The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive sequence voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is blocked. IntBlockLevel, is set in % of UBase/3 If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage. If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 21 to make SMAI calculating a positive sequence voltage (that is input voltage/3).
IEC10000060 V1 EN
Figure 21:
Connection example
The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available, the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not work properly.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.
3.4.12.3
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) functions are set via the local HMI or PCM600. Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates, and so on 244 values in total). Besides the block group name, the analog inputs type (voltage or current) and the analog input names that can be set directly in ACT. Instantaneous protection function with a 3 ms cycle time, needs to be connected to the processing SMAI function block, which is also running at 3 ms task cycle. In addition, logic function blocks used with these fast cycle protection functions need to have 3 ms task cycle. Same procedure needs to be followed for each cycle time. DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid for function block SMAI1 only. Reference block for external output (SPFCOUT function output). DFTReference: Reference DFT for the block. These DFT reference block settings decide DFT reference for DFT calculations (InternalDFTRef will use fixed DFT reference based on set system frequency. AdDFTRefChn will use DFT reference from the selected group block, when own group selected adaptive DFT reference will be used based on calculated signal frequency from own group. ExternalDFTRef will use reference based on input DFTSPFC. ConnectionType: Connection type for that specific instance (n) of the SMAI (if it is Ph-N or Ph-Ph). Depending on connection type setting the not connected Ph-N or Ph-Ph outputs will be calculated. Negation: If the user wants to negate the 3ph signal, it is possible to choose to negate only the phase signals Negate3Ph, only the neutral signal NegateN or both Negate3Ph+N; negation means rotation with 180 of the vectors. UBase: Base voltage setting (for each instance x). MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated, expressed as percent of UBase (for each instance n).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Examples of adaptive frequency tracking
Task time group 1 SMAI instance 3 phase group SMAI1:1 1 SMAI2:2 2 SMAI3:3 3 SMAI4:4 4 SMAI5:5 5 SMAI6:6 6 SMAI7:7 7 SMAI8:8 8 SMAI9:9 9 SMAI10:10 10 SMAI11:11 11 SMAI12:12 12
Task time group 2 SMAI instance 3 phase group SMAI1:13 1 SMAI2:14 2 SMAI3:15 3 SMAI4:16 4 SMAI5:17 5 SMAI6:18 6 SMAI7:19 7 SMAI8:20 8 SMAI9:21 9 SMAI10:22 10 SMAI11:23 11 SMAI12:24 12 Task time group 3 SMAI instance 3 phase group SMAI1:25 1 SMAI2:26 2 SMAI3:27 3 SMAI4:28 4 SMAI5:29 5 SMAI6:30 6 SMAI7:31 7 SMAI8:32 8 SMAI9:33 9 SMAI10:34 10 SMAI11:35 11 SMAI12:36 12
IEC07000197.vsd
IEC07000197 V2 EN
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh4
Figure 22:
Twelve SMAI instances are grouped within one task time. SMAI blocks are available in three different task times in the IED. Two pointed instances are used in the following examples.
The examples shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the actual application.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Example 1
SMAI1:13 BLOCK DFTSPFC ^GRP1L1 ^GRP1L2 ^GRP1L3 ^GRP1N SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
IEC07000198 V3 EN
Figure 23:
Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT reference
Assume instance SMAI7:7 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration to control the frequency tracking . Observe that the selected reference instance (i.e. frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive sequence voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature. For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 22 for numbering): SMAI1:1: DFTRefExtOut = AdDFTRefCh7 to route SMAI7:7 reference to the SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh7 for SMAI1:1 to use SMAI7:7 as reference (see Figure 23) SMAI2:2 SMAI12:12: DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh7 for SMAI2:2 SMAI12:12 to use SMAI7:7 as reference. For task time group 2 this gives the following settings: SMAI1:13 SMAI12:24: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (SMAI7:7) For task time group 3 this gives the following settings: SMAI1:25 SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (SMAI7:7) Example 2
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC07000199 V3 EN
Figure 24:
Configuration for using an instance in task time group 2 as DFT reference.
Assume instance SMAI4:16 in task time group 2 has been selected in the configuration to control the frequency tracking for all instances. Observe that the selected reference instance (i.e. frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive sequence voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature. For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 22 for numbering): SMAI1:1 SMAI12:12: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (SMAI4:16) For task time group 2 this gives the following settings: SMAI1:13: DFTRefExtOut = AdDFTRefCh4 to route SMAI4:16 reference to the SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh4 for SMAI1:13 to use SMAI4:16 as reference (see Figure 24) SMAI2:14 SMAI12:24: DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh4 to use SMAI4:16 as reference. For task time group 3 this gives the following settings: SMAI1:25 SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (SMAI4:16)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
3.4.12.4
Table 22:
Name DFTRefExtOut
SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Unit Step Default InternalDFTRef Description DFT reference for external output
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType TYPE
Ch
Ph-N 1
Input connection type 1=Voltage, 2=Current
Table 23:
Name Negation
SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit Step Default Off Description Negation
MinValFreqMeas UBase
% kV
1 0.05
10 400.00
Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base voltage
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 24:
Name DFTReference
SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Unit Step Default InternalDFTRef Description DFT reference
ConnectionType TYPE
Ch
Ph-N 1
Input connection type 1=Voltage, 2=Current
Table 25:
Name Negation
SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit Step Default Off Description Negation
MinValFreqMeas UBase
% kV
1 0.05
10 400.00
Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base voltage
3.4.13
3.4.13.1
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

Application
The analog summation block 3PHSUM function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
3.4.13.2
Setting guidelines
The summation block receives the three-phase signals from SMAI blocks. The summation block has several settings. SummationType: Summation type (Group 1 + Group 2, Group 1 - Group 2, Group 2 - Group 1 or (Group 1 + Group 2)). DFTReference: The reference DFT block (InternalDFT Ref,DFTRefGrp1 or External DFT ref) .
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
FreqMeasMinVal: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated, expressed as percent of UBasebase voltage setting (for each instance x). UBase: Base voltage setting.
3.4.13.3
Table 26:
Name SummationType
Setting parameters
3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Group1+Group2 Group1-Group2 Group2-Group1 -(Group1+Group2) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 External DFT ref Unit Step Default Group1+Group2 Description Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
Table 27:
Name FreqMeasMinVal UBase
3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 5 - 200 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit % kV Step 1 0.05 Default 10 400.00 Description Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of Ubase Base voltage
3.4.14
3.4.14.1
Authority status ATHSTAT

Application
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization: the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the output USRBLKED) the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
The two outputs of ATHSTAT function can be used in the configuration for different indication and alarming reasons, or can be sent to the station control for the same purpose.
3.4.14.2
Setting parameters
3.4.15
Denial of service DOS

3.4.15.1 Application
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD) are designed to limit the CPU load that can be produced by Ethernet network traffic on the IED. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network. DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs: LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication
3.4.15.2
Setting guidelines
3.5
3.5.1
Differential protection
Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF
Function description Transformer differential protection, twowinding IEC 61850 identification T2WPDIF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 87T
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
Transformer differential protection, three-winding
T3WPDIF
87T
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
3.5.1.1
Application
The transformer differential protection is a unit protection. It serves as the main protection of transformers in case of winding failure. The protective zone of a differential protection includes the transformer itself, the bus-work or cables between the current transformers and the power transformer. When bushing current
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
transformers are used for the differential IED, the protective zone does not include the bus-work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer. In some substations there is a current differential protection for the busbar. Such a busbar protection will include the bus-work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer. Internal electrical faults are very serious and will cause immediate damage. Short circuits and earth faults in windings and terminals will normally be detected by the differential protection. Interturn faults, which are flashovers between conductors within the same physical winding, is also possible to detect if a large enough number of turns are short-circuited. Interturn faults are the most difficult transformer winding faults to detect with electrical protections. A small interturn fault including just a few turns will result in an undetectable amount of current until it develops into an earth fault. For this reason it is important that the differential protection has a high level of sensitivity and that it is possible to use a sensitive setting without causing unwanted operations for external faults. It is important that the faulty transformer be disconnected as fast as possible. As the differential protection is a unit protection it can be designed for fast tripping, thus providing selective disconnection of the faulty transformer. The differential protection should never operate on faults outside the protective zone. A transformer differential protection compares the current flowing into the transformer with the current leaving the transformer. A correct analysis of fault conditions by the differential protection must take into consideration changes due to voltages, currents and phase angle changes caused by protected transformer. Traditional transformer differential protection functions required auxiliary transformers for correction of the phase shift and ratio. The numerical microprocessor based differential algorithm as implemented in the IED compensate for both the turns-ratio and the phase shift internally in the software. No auxiliary current transformers are necessary. The differential current should theoretically be zero during normal load or external faults if the turn-ratio and the phase shift are correctly compensated. However, there are several different phenomena other than internal faults that will cause unwanted and false differential currents. The main reasons for unwanted differential currents may be: mismatch due to varying tap changer positions different characteristics, loads and operating conditions of the current transformers zero sequence currents that only flow on one side of the power transformer normal magnetizing currents magnetizing inrush currents overexcitation magnetizing currents
3.5.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the Transformer differential protection function are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager ( PCM600).
89
Application manual

Restrained and unrestrained differential protection
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained differential protections have been developed and are now adopted as the general practice in the protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided with a proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage differential current related to the current through the transformer. This stabilizes the protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good basic sensitivity. The bias current can be defined in many different ways. One classical way of defining the bias current has been Ibias = (I1 + I2) / 2, where I1 is the magnitude of the power transformer primary current, and I2 the magnitude of the power transformer secondary current. However, it has been found that if the bias current is defined as the highest power transformer current this will reflect the difficulties met by the current transformers much better. The differential protection function uses the highest current of all restrain inputs as bias current. For applications where the power transformer rated current and the CT primary rated current can differ considerably, (applications with T-connections), measured currents in the T connections are converted to pu value using the rated primary current of the CT, but one additional "measuring" point is introduced as sum of this two T currents. This summed current is converted to pu value using the power transformer winding rated currents. After that the highest pu value is taken as bias current in pu. In this way best possible combination between sensitivity and security for differential protection function with T connection is obtained. The main philosophy behind the principle with the operate bias characteristic is to increase the pickup level when the current transformers have difficult operating conditions. This bias quantity gives the best stability against an unwanted operation during external faults. The usual practice for transformer protection is to set the bias characteristic to a value of at least twice the value of the expected spill current under through faults conditions. These criteria can vary considerably from application to application and are often a matter of judgment. The second slope is increased to ensure stability under heavy through fault conditions which could lead to increased differential current due to saturation of current transformers. Default settings for the operating characteristic with IdMin = 0.3pu of the power transformer rated current can be recommended as a default setting in normal applications. If the conditions are known more in detail, higher or lower sensitivity can be chosen. The selection of suitable characteristic should in such cases be based on the knowledge of the class of the current transformers, availability of information on the load tap changer position, short circuit power of the systems, and so on. Transformers can be connected to buses in such ways that the current transformers used for the differential protection will be either in series with the power transformer windings or the current transformers will be in breakers that are part of the bus, such as a breaker-and-a-half or a ring bus scheme. For current transformers with primaries in series with the power transformer winding, the current transformer primary current for external faults will be limited by the transformer impedance. When the current transformers are part of the bus scheme, as in the breaker-and-a-half or the ring bus scheme, the current transformer primary current is not limited by the power transformer impedance. High primary currents may be
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
expected. In either case, any deficiency of current output caused by saturation of one current transformer that is not matched by a similar deficiency of another current transformer will cause a false differential current to appear. Differential protection can overcome this problem if the bias is obtained separately from each set of current transformer circuits. It is therefore important to avoid paralleling of two or more current transformers for connection to a single restraint input. Each current connected to the IED is available for biasing the differential protection function. Unrestrained operation level has default value of IdUnre = 10pu, which is typically acceptable for most of the standard power transformer applications. However in the following cases these setting need to be changed accordingly: When CT from "T-connection" are connected to IED, as in the breaker-and-ahalf or the ring bus scheme, special care shall be taken in order to prevent unwanted operation of transformer differential IED for through-faults due to different CT saturation of "T-connected" CTs. Thus if such uneven saturation is a possibility it is typically required to increase unrestrained operational level to IdUnre = 20-25pu For differential applications on HV shunt reactors, due to a fact that there is no heavy through-fault conditions, the unrestrained differential operation level can be set to IdUnre = 1.75pu
Overall operating characteristic of transformer differential protection is shown in figure 25.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
operate current [ times IBase ] 5
Operate unconditionally UnrestrainedLimit
Operate conditionally
2 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 SlopeSection3
1 IdMin SlopeSection2 0 0 EndSection1 EndSection2 1 2 3
Restrain 4 5
restrain current [ times IBase ]
en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN
Figure 25:
Representation of the restrained-, and the unrestrained operate characteristics
slope = D Ioperate 100% D Irestrain

EQUATION1246 V1 EN
(Equation 29)
and where the restrained characteristic is defined by the settings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
IdMin EndSection1 EndSection2 SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3
Elimination of zero sequence currents
A differential protection may operate unwanted due to external earth-faults in cases where the zero sequence current can flow only on one side of the power transformer but not on the other side. This is the situation when the zero sequence current cannot be properly transformed to the other side of the power transformer. Power transformer connection groups of Yd or Dy type cannot transform the zero
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
sequence current. If a delta winding of a power transformer is earthed via an earthing transformer inside the zone protected by the differential protection there will be an unwanted differential current in case of an external earth-fault. To make the overall differential protection insensitive to external earth-faults in these situations the zero sequence currents must be eliminated from the power transformer IED currents, so that they do not appear as the differential currents. This had once been achieved by means of interposing auxiliary current transformers. The elimination of zero sequence current is done numerically and no auxiliary transformers or zero sequence traps are necessary. Instead it is necessary to eliminate the zero sequence current from every individual winding by proper setting of setting parameters ZSCurrSubtrWx=Off or On.
Inrush restraint methods
With a combination of the second harmonic restraint and the waveform restraint methods it is possibly to get a protection with high security and stability against inrush effects and at the same time maintain high performance in case of heavy internal faults even if the current transformers are saturated. Both these restraint methods are used by the IED. The second harmonic restraint function has a settable level. If the ratio of the second harmonic to fundamental harmonic in the differential current is above the settable limit, the operation of the differential protection is restrained. It is recommended to set parameter I2/I1Ratio = 15% as default value in case no special reasons exist to choose other value.
Overexcitation restraint method
Overexcitation current contains odd harmonics, because the waveform is symmetrical about the time axis. As the third harmonic currents cannot flow into a delta winding, the fifth harmonic is the lowest harmonic which can serve as a criterion for overexcitation. Differential protection function is provided with a fifth harmonic restraint to prevent the protection from operation during an overexcitation condition of a power transformer. If the ratio of the fifth harmonic to fundamental harmonic in the differential current is above a settable limit the operation is restrained. It is recommended to use I5/I1Ratio = 25% as default value in case no special reasons exist to choose another setting. Transformers likely to be exposed to overvoltage or underfrequency conditions (that is, generator step-up transformers in power stations) should be provided with an overexcitation protection based on V/Hz to achieve trip before the core thermal limit is reached. Basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block operation (that is, tripping) of the other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of the differential current in that phase (waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic content). In the algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between the phases via the setting parameter CrossBlockEn. When parameter CrossBlockEn is set to On, cross blocking between phases will be introduced. There are no time related settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the set bias characteristic will be able to cross-block other two phases if it is self-blocked by any of the previously explained restrained criteria. As soon as the operating point for this phase is below the set bias characteristic cross blocking from that phase will be
Cross-blocking between phases
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the temporary nature is achieved. In should be noted that this is the default (recommended) setting value for this parameter. When parameter CrossBlockEn is set to Off, any cross blocking between phases will be disabled.
External/Internal fault discriminator
The internal/external fault discriminator operation is based on the relative position of the two phasors (in case of two-winding transformer) representing W1 and W2 negative sequence current contributions, defined by matrix expression see the technical reference manual. It practically performs directional comparison between these two phasors. In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand, in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this limit value, called IMinNegSeq, is settable in the range from 1% to 20% of the differential protections IBase current, which is in our case the power transformer HV side rated current. The default value is 4%. Only if magnitudes of both negative sequence current contributions are above the set limit, the relative position between these two phasors is checked. If either of the negative sequence current contributions, which should be compared, is too small (less than the set value for IMinNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to produce a wrong decision. This magnitude check, as well guarantee stability of the algorithm, when power transformer is energized. In cases where the protected transformer can be energized with a load connected on the LV side (e.g. step-up transformer in a power station with directly connected auxiliary transformer on its LV side) the value for this setting shall be increased to at least 12%. This is necessary in order to prevent unwanted operation due to LV side currents during protected transformer inrush. The setting NegSeqROA represents the so-called Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions. It can be selected in the range from 30 degrees to 90 degrees, with a step of 1 degree. The default value is 60 degrees. The default setting 60 degrees somewhat favors security in comparison to dependability. If the user has no well-justified reason for another value, 60 degrees shall be applied. If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence current contributions from the HV side and LV side of the power transformer using the following two rules: If the negative sequence currents contributions from HV and LV sides are in phase or at least in the internal fault region, the fault is internal. If the negative sequence currents contributions from HV and LV sides are 180 degrees out of phase or at least in the external fault region, the fault is external.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Under external fault condition and with no current transformer saturation, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180 degrees. During internal fault and with no current transformer saturation, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to possible different negative sequence source impedance angles on HV and LV side of power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal zero value. As the internal/external fault discriminator has proved to be very reliable, it has been given a great power. If, for example, a fault has been detected, that is, START signals set by ordinary differential protection, and at the same time the internal/ external fault discriminator characterized this fault as internal, then any eventual block signals produced by either the harmonic or the waveform restraints, are ignored. If the bias current is more than 110% of IBase, the negative sequence threshold (IMinNegSeq) is increased internally. This assures the response times of the new and advanced differential protection below one power system cycle (below 20 ms for 50 Hz system) for all more severe internal faults. Even for heavy internal faults with severely saturated current transformers this new differential protection operates well below one cycle because the harmonic distortions in the differential currents do not slow down the differential protection operation. Practically, an unrestrained operation is achieved for all internal faults. External faults happen ten to hundred times more often than internal ones as far as the power transformers are concerned. If a disturbance has been detected and the internal/external fault discriminator characterized this fault as external fault, the additional criteria are posed on the differential algorithm before its trip is allowed. This assures high algorithm stability during external faults. However, in the same time the differential function is still capable to trip for evolving faults. The principle of the internal/external fault discriminator can be extended to power transformers and autotransformers with three windings. If all three windings are connected to their respective networks, then three directional comparisons can be done, but only two comparisons are necessary in order to positively determine the position of the fault with respect to the protected zone. The directional comparisons, which are possible, are: W1 - W2, W1 - W3, and W2 - W3. The rule applied by the internal/external fault discriminator in case of three-winding power transformers is: If all comparisons indicate an internal fault, then it is an internal fault. If any comparison indicates an external fault, then it is an external fault
If one of the windings is not connected, the algorithm automatically reduces to the two-winding version. Nevertheless, the whole power transformer is protected, inclusive the non-connected winding.
On-line compensation for on-load tap-changer position
The Transformer differential (TW2PDIF for two winding and TW3PDIF for three winding) function in the IED has a built-in facility to on-line compensate for onload tap-changer operation. The following parameters which are set under general settings are related to this compensation feature:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Parameter LocationOLTC1 defines the winding where first OLTC (OLTC1) is physically located. The following options are available: Not Used / Winding 1 / Winding 2 / Winding 3. When value Not Used is selected the differential function will assume that OLTC1 does not exist and it will disregard all other parameters related to first OLTC Parameter LowTapPosOLTC1 defines the minimum end tap position for OLTC1 (typically position 1) Parameter RatedTapOLTC1 defines the rated (for example, mid) position for OLTC1 (for example, 11 for OLTC with 21 positions) This tap position shall correspond to the values for rated current and voltage set for that winding Parameter HighTapPsOLTC1 defines the maximum end tap position for OLTC1 (for example, 21 for OLTC with 21 positions) Parameter TapHighVoltTC1 defines the end position for OLTC1 where highest no-load voltage for that winding is obtained (for example, position with maximum number of turns) Parameter StepSizeOLTC1 defines the voltage change per OLTC1 step (for example, 1.5%)
The above parameters are defined for OLTC1. Similar parameters shall be set for second on-load tap-changer designated with OLTC2 in the parameter names, for threewinding differential protection. Differential protection continuously monitors the level of the fundamental frequency differential currents and gives an alarm if the pre-set value is simultaneously exceeded in all three phases. This feature can be used to monitor the integrity of on-load tap-changer compensation within the differential function. The threshold for the alarm pickup level is defined by setting parameter IDiffAlarm. This threshold should be typically set in such way to obtain operation when on-load tap-changer measured value within differential function differs for more than two steps from the actual on-load tap-changer position. To obtain such operation set parameter IDiffAlarm equal to two times the on-load tap-changer step size (For example, typical setting value is 5% to 10% of base current). Set the time delayed defined by parameter tAlarmDelay two times longer than the on-load tapchanger mechanical operating time (For example, typical setting value 10s).
Differential current alarm
Open CT detection
The Transformer differential function has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature. This feature can block the unexpected operation created by the Transformer differential function in case of open CT secondary circuit under normal load condition. An alarm signal can also be issued to substation operational personal to make remedy action once the open CT condition is detected. The following settings parameters are related to this feature:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameter OpenCTEnable enables/disables this feature Setting parameter tOCTAlarmDelay defines the time delay after which the alarm signal will be given Setting parameter tOCTReset defines the time delay after which the open CT condition will reset once the defective CT circuits have been rectified Once the open CT condition has been detected, then all the differential protection functions are blocked except the unrestraint (instantaneous) differential protection
The outputs of open CT condition related parameters are listed below: OpenCT: Open CT detected OpenCTAlarm: Alarm issued after the setting delay OpenCTIN: Open CT in CT group inputs (1 for input 1 and 2 for input 2) OpenCTPH: Open CT with phase information (1 for phase L1, 2 for phase L2, 3 for phase L3)
Transformer differential (TW2PDIF for two winding and TW3PDIF for three winding) function in the IED has a built-in, advanced switch onto fault feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode. When SOTFMode = On this feature is enabled. However it shall be noted that when this feature is enabled it is not possible to test 2nd harmonic blocking feature by simply injecting one current with superimposed second harmonic. In that case the switch on to fault feature will operate and differential protection will trip. However for real inrush case the differential protection function will properly restrain from operation. For more information about operating principles of the switch onto fault feature please read the technical reference manual.
Switch onto fault feature
3.5.1.3
Setting example Introduction

Differential protection for power transformers has been used for decades. In order to correctly apply transformer differential protection proper compensation for: power transformer phase shift (vector group compensation) CT secondary currents magnitude difference on different sides of the protected transformer (ratio compensation) zero sequence current elimination (zero sequence current reduction) shall be done. In the past this was performed with help of interposing CTs or special connection of main CTs (delta connected CTs). With numerical technology all these compensations are done in IED software.
The Differential transformer protection is capable to provide differential protection for all standard three-phase power transformers without any interposing CTs. It has
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
been designed with assumption that all main CTs will be star connected. For such applications it is then only necessary to enter directly CT rated data and power transformer data as they are given on the power transformer nameplate and differential protection will automatically balance itself. These are internal compensation within the differential function. The protected power transformer data are always entered as they are given on the nameplate. Differential function will by itself correlate nameplate data and select proper reference windings. However the IED can as well be used in applications where some of main CTs are connected in delta. In such cases the ratio for main CT connected in delta shall be intentionally set for (3)=1.732 times smaller than actual ratio of individual phase CTs (for example, instead of 800/5 set 462/5) In case the ratio is 800/2.88A, often designed for such typical delta connections, set the ratio as 800/5 in the IED. At the same time the power transformer vector group shall be set as Yy0 because the IED shall not internally provide any phase angle shift compensation. The necessary phase angle shift compensation will be provided externally by delta connected main CT. All other settings should have the same values irrespective of main CT connections. It shall be noted that irrespective of the main CT connections (star or delta) on-line reading and automatic compensation for actual load tap changer position can be used in the IED. Three most typical main CT connections used for transformer differential protection are shown in figure 26. It is assumed that the primary phase sequence is L1-L2-L3.
Typical main CT connections for transformer differential protection
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IL1 L1 Protected Transformer Winding
IL2
L2
IL3
L3
IL3-IL2
IL2-IL1
IL1-IL3
IL3-IL1
IL2-IL3
CT Star Connected
IEC06000549 V1 EN
CT in Delta DAC Connected
CT in Delta DAB Connected
IL1-IL2
IL3
IL2
IL1
en06000549.vsd
Figure 26:
Commonly used main CT connections for Transformer differential protection.
For star connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED: are directly proportional to the measured primary currents are in phase with the measured primary currents contain all sequence components including zero sequence current component
For star connected main CTs, the main CT ratio shall be set as it is in actual application. The StarPoint parameter, for the particular star connection shown in figure 26, shall be set ToObject. If star connected main CTs have their star point away from the protected transformer this parameter should be set FromObject. For delta DAC connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED: are increased 3 times (1.732 times) in comparison with star connected CTs lag by 30 the primary winding currents (this CT connection rotates currents by 30 in clockwise direction) do not contain zero sequence current component
For DAC delta connected main CT ratio shall be set for 3 times smaller than the actual ratio of individual phase CTs. The StarPoint parameter, for this particular connection shall be set ToObject. It shall be noted that delta DAC connected main CTs must be connected exactly as shown in figure 26. For delta DAB connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
are increased 3 times (1.732 times) in comparison with star connected CTs lead by 30 the primary winding currents (this CT connection rotates currents by 30 in anti-clockwise direction) do not contain zero sequence current component
For DAB delta connected main CT ratio shall be set for 3 times smaller in RET 670 then the actual ratio of individual phase CTs. The StarPoint parameter, for this particular connection shall be set ToObject. It shall be noted that delta DAB connected main CTs must be connected exactly as shown in figure 26. For more detailed info regarding CT data settings please refer to the three application examples presented in section "Application Examples".
Application Examples
Three application examples will be given here. For each example two differential protection solutions will be presented: First solution will be with all main CTs star connected. Second solution will be with delta connected main CT on Y (that is, star) connected sides of the protected power transformer.
For each differential protection solution the following settings will be given: 1. 2. Input CT channels on the transformer input modules. General settings for the transformer differential protection where specific data about protected power transformer shall be entered.
Finally the setting for the differential protection characteristic will be given for all presented applications. Example 1: Star-delta connected power transformer without on-load tapchanger Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all relevant application data are given in figure 27.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
CT 300/5 Star
CT 300/5 in Delta (DAC)
20.9 MVA 69/12.5 kV YNd1 (YDAC)
20.9 MVA 69/12.5 kV YNd1 (YDAC)
CT 800/5 Star
CT 800/5 Star
en06000554.vsd
IEC06000554 V1 EN
Figure 27:
Two differential protection solutions for star-delta connected power transformer
For this particular power transformer the 69 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages lead by 30 degrees the 12.5 kV side phase-toearth no-load voltages. Thus when external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main HV CTs in delta, as shown in the right-hand side in figure 27, it must be ensured that the HV currents are rotated by 30 in clockwise direction. Thus the DAC delta CT connection must be used for 69 kV CTs in order to put 69 kV & 12.5 kV currents in phase. To ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer it is necessary to do the following: 1. Check that HV & LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED. 2. For second solution make sure that HV delta connected CTs are DAC connected. 3. For star connected CTs make sure how they are stared (that is, earthed) to/from protected transformer. 4. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs see table 28.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 28:
Setting parameter CTprim CTsec CTStarPoint
CT input channels used for the LV side CTs

Selected value for both solutions 800 5 ToObject
5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs, see table 29.
Table 29:
Setting parameter CTprim
CT input channels used for the HV side CTs

Selected value for both solution 1 (star connected CT) 300 Selected value for both solution 2 (delta connected CT)
300 3
= 173
(Equation 30)
EQUATION1888 V1 EN
CTsec CTStarPoint
5 From Object
5 ToObject
To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 30. 6. Enter the following values for the general settings of the Transformer differential protection function, see table 30.
Table 30:
Setting parameter RatedVoltageW1 RatedVoltageW2 RatedCurrentW1 RatedCurrentW2 ConnectTypeW1 ConnectTypeW2 ClockNumberW2 ZSCurrSubtrW1 ZSCurrSubtrW2 TconfigForW1 TconfigForW2 LocationOLTC1 Other Parameters
1) 2)
General settings of the differential protection function

Select value for both solution 1 (star connected CT) 69 kV 12.5 kV 175 A 965 A STAR (Y) delta=d 1 [30 deg lag] On Off No No Not used Not relevant for this application. Use default value. Selected value for both solution 2 (delta connected CT) 69 kV 12.5 kV 175 A 965 A STAR (Y) star=y 1) 0 [0 deg] 1) Off 2) Off No No Not used Not relevant for this application. Use default value.
To compensate for delta connected CTs Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Delta-star connected power transformer without tap charger Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all relevant application data are given in figure 28.
CT 400/5 Star
CT 400/5 Star
60 MVA 115/24.9 kV Dyn1 (DABY)
60 MVA 115/24.9 kV Dyn1 (DABY)
CT 1500/5 Star
CT 1500/5 in Delta (DAB)
en06000555.vsd
IEC06000555 V1 EN
Figure 28:
Two differential protection solutions for delta-star connected power transformer
For this particular power transformer the 115 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages lead for 30 the 24.9 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages. Thus when external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main 24.9 kV CTs in delta, as shown in the right-hand side in figure 28, it must be ensured that the 24.9 kV currents are rotated by 30 in anti-clockwise direction. Thus, the DAB CT delta connection (see figure 28) must be used for 24.9 kV CTs in order to put 115 kV & 24.9 kV currents in phase. To ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer it is necessary to do the following: 1. Check that HV & LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED. 2. For second solution make sure that LV delta connected CTs are DAB connected. 3. For star connected CTs make sure how they are 'star'red (that is, earthed) to/from protected transformer.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
4. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs, see table 31.
Table 31:
Setting parameter CTprim CTsec CTStarPoint

Selected value for both solutions 400 5 ToObject
5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs, see table "CT input channels used for the LV side CTs".

Setting parameter CTprim Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both (star connected CT) Solution 2 (delta connected CT) 1500
1500 3
= 866
(Equation 31)
EQUATION1889 V1 EN
CTsec CTStarPoint
5 ToObject
5 ToObject
To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 31. 6. Enter the following values for the general settings of the differential protection function, see table32.
Table 32:
Setting parameter RatedVoltageW1 Rated VoltageW2 RatedCurrentW1 RatedCurrentW2 ConnectTypeW1 ConnectTypeW2 ClockNumberW2 ZSCurrSubtrW1 ZSCurrSubtrW2 TconfigForW1 TconfigForW2 Table continues on next page
General settings of the differential protection

selected value for both Solution 1 (star conected CT) 115 kV 24.9 kV 301 A 1391 A Delta (D) star=y 1 [30 deg lag] Off On No No Selected value for both Solution 2 (delta connected CT) 115 kV 24.9 kV 301 A 1391 A STAR (Y) 1) star=y 0 [0 deg] 1) Off On 2) No No
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameter LocationOLTC1 Other parameters
1) 2)
selected value for both Solution 1 (star conected CT) Not Used Not relevant for this application. Use default value.
Selected value for both Solution 2 (delta connected CT) Not Used Not relevant for this application. Use default value.
To compensate for delta connected CTs. Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta.
Star-star connected power transformer with load tap changer and tertiary not loaded delta winding Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all relevant application data are given in figure 29. It shall be noted that this example is applicable for protection of autotransformer with not loaded tertiary delta winding as well.
CT 200/1 Star
CT 200/1 in Delta (DAB) 31.5/31.5/(10.5) MVA 110111.5% /36.75/(10.5) kV YNyn0(d5) 31.5/31.5/(10.5) MVA 110111.5% /36.75/(10.5) kV YNyn0(d5)
CT 500/5 Star
CT 500/5 in Delta (DAB)
en06000558.vsd
IEC06000558 V1 EN
Figure 29:
Two differential protection solutions for star-star connected transformer.
For this particular power transformer the 110 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages are exactly in phase with the 36.75 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages. Thus, when external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main CTs in delta, both set of CTs must be identically connected (that is, either both DAC or both DAB as shown in the right-hand side in figure 29) in order to put 110 kV & 36.75 kV currents in phase. To ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer it is necessary to do the following:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
1. Check that HV CTs are connected to 1 A CT inputs in the IED. 2. Check that LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED. 3. When delta connected CTs are used make sure that both CT sets are identically connected (that is, either both DAC or both DAB). 4. For star connected CTs make sure how they are 'star'red (that is, earthed) towards or away from the protected transformer. 5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs, see table 33.
Table 33:

Selected value for both solution 1 (star connected CTs) 200 Selected value for both Solution 2 (delta connected CTs)
200 3
= 115
(Equation 32)
EQUATION1891 V1 EN
CTsec CTStarPoint
1 FromObject
1 ToObject
To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 32. 6. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs
Table 34:

Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2 (star connected) (delta connected) 500
500 3
= 289
(Equation 33)
EQUATION1892 V1 EN
CTsec CTStarPoint
5 ToObject
5 ToObject
To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 33. 7. Enter the following values for the general settings of the differential protection function, see table 35
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 35:
Setting parameter RatedVoltageW1 RatedVoltageW2 RatedCurrentW1 RatedCurrentW2 ConnectTypeW1 ConnectTypeW2 ClockNumberW2 ZSCurrSubtrW1 ZSCurrSubtrW2 TconfigForW1 TconfigForW2 LocationOLT1
General settings of the differential protection function

Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2 (star connected) (delta connected) 110 kV 36.75 kV 165 A 495 A STAR (Y) star=y 0 [0 deg] On On No No Winding 1 (W1) 1 12 23 23 1.5% Not relevant for this application. Use default value. 110 kV 36.75 kV 165 A 495 A STAR (Y) star=y 0 [0 deg] Off 1) Off 1) No No Winding 1 (W1) 1 12 23 23 1.5% Not relevant for this application. Use default value.
LowTapPosOLTC1 RatedTapOLTC1 HighTapPsOLTC1 TapHighVoltTC1 StepSizeOLTC1 Other parameters

1)
Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta.
Summary and conclusions
The IED can be used for differential protection of three-phase power transformers with main CTs either star or delta connected. However the IED has been designed with assumption that all main CTS are star connected. The IED can be used in applications where main CTs are delta connected. For such applications the following shall be kept in mind: 1. 2. 3. Ratio for delta connected CTs shall be set (3)=1.732 times smaller then actual individual phase CT ratio. Power transformer vector group shall be typically set as Yy0 because the compensation for power transformer actual phase shift is provided by external delta CT connection. Zero sequence current is eliminated by main CT delta connection. Thus on sides where CTs are connected in delta the zero sequence current elimination shall be set to Off in the IED.
The following table summarizes the most commonly used star-delta vector group around the world and provides information about required type of main CT delta connection on the star sides of the protected transformer.

IEC vector group Positive sequence no-load voltage phasor diagram
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Required delta CT connection type on star side of the protected power transformer and internal vector group setting in the IED DAC/Yy0
YNd1
IEC06000559 V1 EN
Dyn1
DAB/Yy0
IEC06000560 V1 EN
YNd11
DAB/Yy0
IEC06000561 V1 EN
Dyn11
DAC/Yy0
IEC06000562 V1 EN
YNd5
DAB/Yy6
IEC06000563 V1 EN
Dyn5
DAC/Yy6
Y
IEC06000564 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
3.5.1.4
Table 36:
Name Operation SOTFMode tAlarmDelay IDiffAlarm IdMin IdUnre CrossBlockEn NegSeqDiffEn IMinNegSeq NegSeqROA
T2WPDIF Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.00 0.05 - 0.60 1.00 - 50.00 Off On Off On 0.02 - 0.20 30.0 - 120.0 Unit s IB IB IB IB Deg Step 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 Default Off On 10.000 0.20 0.30 10.00 On On 0.04 60.0 Description Operation Off / On Operation mode for switch onto fault Time delay for diff currents alarm level Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr, usually W1 curr. Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr, usually W1 curr. Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of Winding 1 rated current Operation Off/On for cross-block logic between phases Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential protections Neg. seq. curr. must be higher than this level to be used Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq. fault discriminator
Table 37:
Name EndSection1 EndSection2 SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3 I2/I1Ratio I5/I1Ratio OpenCTEnable tOCTAlarmDelay tOCTResetDelay tOCTUnrstDelay
T2WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.20 - 1.50 1.00 - 10.00 10.0 - 50.0 30.0 - 100.0 5.0 - 100.0 5.0 - 100.0 Off On 0.100 - 10.000 0.100 - 10.000 0.10 - 6000.00 Unit IB IB % % % % s s s Step 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.01 Default 1.25 3.00 40.0 80.0 15.0 25.0 Off 3.000 0.250 10.00 Description End of section 1, multiple of Winding 1 rated current End of section 2, multiple of Winding 1 rated current Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated Unrestrained diff. protection blocked after this delay, in s
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 38:
Name RatedVoltageW1 RatedVoltageW2 RatedCurrentW1 RatedCurrentW2 ConnectTypeW1 ConnectTypeW2 ClockNumberW2
T2WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D) 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] Off On Off On No Yes 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 No Yes 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) 0 - 10 1 - 100 Unit kV kV A A Step 0.05 0.05 1 1 Default 400.00 231.00 577 1000 WYE (Y) WYE (Y) 0 [0 deg] Description Rated voltage of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 2 in kV Rated current of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in A Rated current of transformer winding 2 in A Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or Ddelta Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or Ddelta Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV winding, hour notation
ZSCurrSubtrW1 ZSCurrSubtrW2 TconfigForW1 CT1RatingW1 CT2RatingW1 TconfigForW2 CT1RatingW2 CT2RatingW2 LocationOLTC1
A A A A -
1 1 1 1 -
On On No 3000 3000 No 3000 3000 Not Used
Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W1 side, On / Off Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W2 side, On / Off Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W1 side CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W1 side Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 2, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W2 side CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W2 side Transformer winding where OLTC1 is located OLTC1 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position designation (e.g. 6)
LowTapPosOLTC1 RatedTapOLTC1
1 1
1 6
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 1 - 100 1 - 100 0.01 - 30.00 Unit % Step 1 1 0.01 Default 11 1 1.00 Description OLTC1 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC1 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC1 step in percent of rated voltage
Name HighTapPsOLTC1 TapHighVoltTC1 StepSizeOLTC1
Table 39:
Name Operation SOTFMode tAlarmDelay IDiffAlarm IdMin IdUnre CrossBlockEn NegSeqDiffEn IMinNegSeq NegSeqROA
T3WPDIF Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.00 0.05 - 0.60 1.00 - 50.00 Off On Off On 0.02 - 0.20 30.0 - 120.0 Unit s IB IB IB IB Deg Step 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 Default Off On 10.000 0.20 0.30 10.00 On On 0.04 60.0 Description Operation Off / On Operation mode for switch onto fault feature Time delay for diff currents alarm level Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr, usually W1 curr. Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr, usually W1 curr. Unrestr. prot. limit, multi. of base curr. usually W1 curr. Operation Off/On for cross-block logic between phases Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential protections Neg. seq. curr. limit, mult. of base curr, usually W1 curr. Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq. fault discriminator
Table 40:
Name EndSection1 EndSection2 SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3 I2/I1Ratio I5/I1Ratio OpenCTEnable
T3WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.20 - 1.50 1.00 - 10.00 10.0 - 50.0 30.0 - 100.0 5.0 - 100.0 5.0 - 100.0 Off On Unit IB IB % % % % Step 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Default 1.25 3.00 40.0 80.0 15.0 25.0 Off Description End of section 1, multi. of base current, usually W1 curr. End of section 2, multi. of base current, usually W1 curr. Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On

Name tOCTAlarmDelay tOCTResetDelay tOCTUnrstDelay Values (Range) 0.100 - 10.000 0.100 - 10.000 0.10 - 6000.00 Unit s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.01 Default 3.000 0.250 10.00 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated Unrestrained diff. protection blocked after this delay, in s
Table 41:
Name RatedVoltageW1 RatedVoltageW2 RatedVoltageW3 RatedCurrentW1 RatedCurrentW2 RatedCurrentW3 ConnectTypeW1 ConnectTypeW2 ConnectTypeW3 ClockNumberW2
T3WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D) 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] Off On Unit kV kV kV A A A Step 0.05 0.05 0.05 1 1 1 Default 400.00 231.00 10.50 577 1000 7173 WYE (Y) WYE (Y) Delta (D) 0 [0 deg] Description Rated voltage of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 2 in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 3 in kV Rated current of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in A Rated current of transformer winding 2 in A Rated current of transformer winding 3 in A Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or Ddelta Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or Ddelta Connection type of winding 3: Y-wye or Ddelta Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV winding, hour notation
ClockNumberW3
5 [150 deg lag]
Phase displacement between W3 & W1=HV winding, hour notation
ZSCurrSubtrW1
On
Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W1 side, On / Off
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Off On Off On No Yes 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 No Yes 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 No Yes 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) Winding 3 (W3) 0 - 10 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 0.01 - 30.00 Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) Winding 3 (W3) 0 - 10 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 0.01 - 30.00 Unit A A A A A A Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default On On No 3000 3000 No 3000 3000 No 3000 3000 Not Used Description Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W2 side, On / Off Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W3 side, On / Off Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W1 side CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W1 side Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 2, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W2 side CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W2 side Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 3, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W3 side CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W3 side Transformer winding where OLTC1 is located
Name ZSCurrSubtrW2 ZSCurrSubtrW3 TconfigForW1 CT1RatingW1 CT2RatingW1 TconfigForW2 CT1RatingW2 CT2RatingW2 TconfigForW3 CT1RatingW3 CT2RatingW3 LocationOLTC1
LowTapPosOLTC1 RatedTapOLTC1 HighTapPsOLTC1 TapHighVoltTC1 StepSizeOLTC1 LocationOLTC2
% -
1 1 1 1 0.01 -
1 6 11 1 1.00 Not Used
OLTC1 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position designation (e.g. 6) OLTC1 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC1 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC1 step in percent of rated voltage Transformer winding where OLTC2 is located
LowTapPosOLTC2 RatedTapOLTC2 HighTapPsOLTC2 TapHighVoltTC2 StepSizeOLTC2
1 1 1 1 0.01
1 6 11 1 1.00
OLTC2 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC2 rated tap/mid-tap position designation (e.g. 6) OLTC2 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC2 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC2 step in percent of rated voltage
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF

Function description Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance IEC 61850 identification REFPDIF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 87N
IdN/I
SYMBOL-AA V1 EN
3.5.2.1
Application
Breakdown of the insulation between a phase conductor and earth in an effectively or low impedance earthed power system results in a large fault current. A breakdown of the insulation between a transformer winding and the core or the tank may result in a large fault current which causes severe damage to the windings and the transformer core. A high gas pressure may develop, damaging the transformer tank. Fast and sensitive detection of earth faults in a power transformer winding can be obtained in solidly earthed or low impedance earthed networks by the restricted earth fault protection. The only requirement is that the power transformer winding is connected to earth in the star point (in case of star-connected windings) or via separate earthing transformer (in case of delta-connected windings). Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF is used as a unit protection function. It protects the power transformer winding against the faults involving earth. Please note that single phase-to-earth faults are the most common fault-types in transformers. A sensitive earth-fault protection is therefore desirable. Restricted earth fault protection is the fastest and the most sensitive protection a power transformer winding can have and will detect faults such as: earth faults in the transformer winding when the network is earthed through an impedance earth faults in the transformer winding in solidly earthed network when the point of the fault is close to the winding star point.
The restricted earth fault protection is not affected, as differential protection, with the following power transformer related phenomena: magnetizing inrush currents overexcitation magnetizing currents load tap changer external and internal phase faults which do not involve earth symmetrical overload conditions
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Due to its properties, REFPDIF is often used as a main protection of the transformer winding for all faults involving earth.
Transformer winding, solidly earthed
The most common application is on a solidly earthed transformer winding. The connection is shown in figure 30.
REFPDIF I3PW1CT1
IdN/I
I3P
IEC09000109 V2 EN
Figure 30:
Connection of the low impedance Restricted earth fault function REFPDIF for a directly (solidly) earthed transformer winding
Transformer winding, earthed through zig-zag earthing transformer
A common application is for low reactance earthed transformer where the earthing is through separate zig-zag earthing transformers. The fault current is then limited to typical 800 to 2000A for each transformer. The connection of Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF for this application is shown in figure 31.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
REFPDIF I3PW1CT1
IdN/I
I3P
HV winding REF protection
REFPDIF I3P
IdN/I
I3PW1CT1
LV winding REF protection
IEC09000110 V2 EN
Figure 31:
Connection of the low impedance Restricted earth fault function REFPDIF for a zig-zag earthing transformer
Autotransformer winding, solidly earthed
Autotransformers can be protected with low impedance Restricted earth fault protection function REFPDIF. The complete transformer will then be protected
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
including HV side, neutral connection and the LV side. The connection of a REFPDIF for this application is shown in figure 32.
REFPDIF I3PW1CT1
IdN/I
I3PW2CT1 I3P
IEC09000111 V2 EN
Figure 32:
Connection of Restricted earth fault, low impedance function REFPDIF for an autotransformer, solidly earthed
Reactor winding, solidly earthed
Reactors can be protected with Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF. The connection of REFPDIF for this application is shown in figure 33.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
REFPDIF I3PW1CT1 IdN/I I3P
IEC09000112 V2 EN
Figure 33:
Connection of Restricted earth fault, low impedance function REFPDIF for a solidly earthed reactor
Multi-breaker applications
Multi-breaker arrangements including ring, one and a half breaker, double breaker and mesh corner arrangements will have 2 sets of current transformers on the phase side. Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF has inputs to allow two current inputs from each side of the transformer the second winding set is then basically only applicable for autotransformers. A typical connection for a star-delta transformer, is shown in figure 34.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
REFPDIF I3PW1CT1 I3PW1CT2 IdN/I I3P
IEC09000113 V2 EN
Figure 34:
Connection of Restricted earth fault, low impedance function REFPDIF in multi-breaker arrangements
To make Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF to work, the main CT's are always supposed to be star connected. The main CT's neutral (star) formation can be done in any way (that is, either ToObject or FromObject). However internally REFPDIF always uses reference directions towards the protected transformer. Thus the IED always measures the primary currents on all sides and in the neutral of the power transformer with the same reference direction towards the power transformer windings. The earthing can, therefore, be freely selected for each of the involved current transformers.
CT earthing direction
3.5.2.2
Setting guidelines Setting and configuration

Recommendation for analog inputs I3P: Neutral point current (connected as 3Ph group in ACT) I3PW1CT1: Phase currents for winding 1 first current transformer set. I3PW1CT2: Phase currents for winding1 second current transformer set for multibreaker arrangements. When not required configure input to "GRP-OFF" I3PW2CT1: Phase currents for winding 2 first current transformer set. Used for Autotransformers.
119
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
I3PW2CT2: Phase currents for winding 2 second current transformer set for multibreaker arrangements. Used for Autotransformers. When not required configure input to"GRP-OFF" Recommendation for input signals Refer to pre-configured configurations for examples. BLOCK: The input will block the operation of the function. Can be used for example, to block for a limited time the operation during special service conditions. Recommendation for output signals Refer to pre-configured configurations for examples. START: The start output indicates that Idiff is in the operate region of the characteristic. It can be used to initiate disturbance recorder. TRIP: The trip output is activated when all operating criteria are fulfilled. DIROK: The output is activated when the directional criteria has been fulfilled. Output can be used for information purpose normally during testing. It can, for example, be checked from the debug tool or connected as an event to the event log. BLK2H: The output is activated when the function is blocked due to too high level of second harmonic. Output can be used for information purpose normally during testing. It can, for example, be checked from the debug tool or connected as an event to the event log.
Setting parameters
The parameters for Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF are set via the local HMI or PCM600. Operation: The operation of REFPDIF can be switched On/Off. IBase: The IBase setting is the setting of the base (per unit) current on which all percentage settings are based. Normally the protected power transformer winding rated current is used but alternatively the current transformer primary rated current can be set. IdMin: The setting gives the minimum operation value. The setting is in percent of the IBase value. The neutral current must always be bigger than half of this value. A normal setting is 30% of power transformer rated current for the solidly earthed winding. CTFactorPri1: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement where the rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer winding. The stabilizing can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be required. The setting is normally 1.0 but in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall be CT primary rating/IBase. CTFactorPri2: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement where the rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
transformer winding. The stabilizing can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be required. The setting is normally 1.0 but in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall be CT primary rating/IBase. CTFactorSec1: See setting CTFactorPri1. Only difference is that CTFactorSec1 is related to W2 side. CTFactorSec2: See setting CTFactorPri2. Only difference is that CTFactorSec2 is related to W2 side.
3.5.2.3
Table 42:
Name Operation IBase IdMin CTFactorPri1 CTFactorPri2 CTFactorSec1 CTFactorSec2
Setting parameters
REFPDIF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 4.0 - 100.0 1.0 - 10.0 1.0 - 10.0 1.0 - 10.0 1.0 - 10.0 Unit A %IB Step 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Default Off 3000 10.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Description Operation Off / On Base current Maximum sensitivity in % of Ibase CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/ HVrated current) CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/ HVrated current) CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/ MVrated current) CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/ MVrated current)
Table 43:
Name ROA
REFPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 60 - 90 Unit Deg Step 1 Default 60 Description Relay operate angle for zero sequence directional feature
3.5.3
3.5.3.1
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
1Ph High impedance differential protection
HZPDIF
Id
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN
87

3.5.3.2 Application
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection function HZPDIFcan be used as: Autotransformer differential protection Restricted earth fault protection T-feeder protection Tertiary (or secondary busbar) protection Tertiary connected reactor protection Generator differential protection
The application will be dependent on the primary system arrangements and location of breakers, available independent cores on CTs and so on.
3Id Z<
3Id Z<
IEC05000738 V2 EN
Figure 35:
Different applications of a 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function
The basics of the high impedance principle
The high impedance differential protection principle has been used for many years and is well documented. The operating characteristic provides very good sensitivity and high speed operation. One main benefit offered by the principle is an absolute stability (that is, non-operation) for external faults even in the presence of heavy CT saturation. The principle is based on the CT secondary current circulating between involved current transformers and not through the IED due to its high impedance, normally in the range of hundreds of ohms and sometimes above kohm. When an internal fault occurs the current cannot circulate and is forced through the differential circuit causing operation.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Id
Metrosil
IEC05000164 V3 EN
Figure 36:
Example for the high impedance restricted earth fault protection application
For a through fault one current transformer might saturate when the other CTs still will feed current. For such a case a voltage will be developed across the stabilising resistor. The calculations are made with the worst situations in mind and a minimum operating voltage UR is calculated according to equation 34
UR > IF max ( Rct + Rl )

EQUATION1531 V1 EN
(Equation 34)
where:
IFmax Rct Rl
is the maximum through fault current at the secondary side, is the current transformer secondary resistance and is the maximum loop resistance of the circuit at any CT.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The minimum operating voltage has to be calculated (all loops) and the IED function is set higher than the highest achieved value (setting U>Trip). As the loop resistance is the value to the connection point from each CT it is advisable to do all the CT core summations in the switchgear to have shortest possible loops. This will give lower setting values and also a better balanced scheme. The connection in to the control room can then be from the most central bay. For an internal fault circulation is not possible due to the high impedance, depending on the size of current transformer relatively high voltages will be developed across the series resistor. Note that very high peak voltages can appear. To prevent the risk of flashover in the circuit, a voltage limiter must be included. The voltage limiter is a voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil). The external unit with stabilizing resistor has a value of either 6800 ohms or 2200 ohms (depending on ordered alternative) with a shorting link to allow adjustment to the required value. Select a suitable value of the resistor based on the UR voltage calculated. A higher resistance value will give a higher sensitivity and a lower value a lower sensitivity. The function has a recommended operating current range 40 mA to 1.0A for 1 A inputs and 200 mA to 5A for 5A inputs. This, together with the selected and set value, is used to calculate the required value of current at the set U>Trip and SeriesResitor values. The CT inputs used for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function, shall be set to have ratio 1:1 The tables 44, 45 below show, the operating currents for different sets of operating voltages and selected resistances. Adjust as required based on tables 44, 45 or to values in between as required for the application. Minimum ohms can be difficult to adjust due to the small value compared to the total value. Normally the voltage can be increased to higher values than the calculated minimum U>Trip with a minor change of total operating values as long as this is done by adjusting the resistor to a higher value. Check the sensitivity calculation below for reference.
Table 44:
Operating voltage 20 V 40 V 60 V 80 V
Operating voltages for 1A

Stabilizing resistor R ohms 1000 2000 3000 4000 Operating current level 1A 0.020 A 0.020 A 0.020 A 0.020 A Stabilizing resistor R ohms -1000 1500 2000 Operating current level 1A -0.040 A 0.040 A 0.040 A Stabilizing resistor R ohms --600 800 Operating current level 1A --0.100 A 0.100 A
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Operating voltage 100 V 150 V 200 V Stabilizing resistor R ohms 5000 6000 6800 Operating current level 1A 0.020 A 0.020 A 0.029 A Stabilizing resistor R ohms 2500 3750 5000 Operating current level 1A 0.040 A 0.040 A 0.040 A Stabilizing resistor R ohms 1000 1500 2000 Operating current level 1A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A
Table 45:
Operating voltage 20 V 40 V 60 V 80 V 100 V 150 V 200 V
5 A input with minimum operating down to 100 mA

Stabilizing resistor R1 ohms 200 400 600 800 1000 1500 2000 Operating current level 5A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A Stabilizing resistor R1 ohms 100 200 300 400 500 750 1000 Operating current level 5A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A 0.200 A Stabilizing resistor R1 ohms -100 150 800 1000 1500 2000 Operating current level 5A -0.400 0.400 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A 0.100 A
The current transformer saturating voltage must be at least 2 U>Trip to have sufficient operating margin. This must be checked after calculation of U>Trip. When the R value has been selected and the U>Trip value has been set, the sensitivity of the scheme IP can be calculated. The IED sensitivity is decided by the total current in the circuit according to equation 35.
IP = n ( IR + Ires + lmag )
EQUATION1747 V1 EN
(Equation 35)
where: n IP IR Ires Imag is the CT ratio primary current at IED pickup, IED pickup current is the current through the voltage limiter and is the sum of the magnetizing currents from all CTs in the circuit (for example, 4 for restricted earth fault protection, 2 for reactor differential protection, 3-5 for autotransformer differential protection).
It should be remembered that the vectorial sum of the currents must be used (IEDs, Metrosil and resistor currents are resistive). The current measurement is insensitive to DC component in fault current to allow a use of only the AC components of the fault current in the above calculations.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil) characteristic is shown in figure 45. Series resistor thermal capacity The series resistor is dimensioned for 200 W. Preferable the U>Trip2/ SeriesResistor should always be lower than 200 W to allow continuous activation on during testing. If this value is exceeded, testing should be done with transient faults.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Rl Rct R Rres UR
Rl Rct
I>
Protected Object
UR a) Through load situation
UR
b) Through fault situation
UR
c) Internal faults
IEC05000427 V2 EN
Figure 37:
The high impedance principle for one phase with two current transformer inputs

3.5.3.3
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Connection examples for high impedance differential protection

WARNING! USE EXTREME CAUTION! Dangerously high voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national law or standard, enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a separate box.
Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection
Generator, reactor or busbar differential protection is a typical application for threephase high impedance differential protection. Typical CT connections for threephase high impedance differential protection scheme are shown in figure 38.
L1 (A) L2 (B) L3 (C)
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2
8
SMAI2
CT 1200/1 Star/Wye Connected
AI01 (I) AI02 (I) AI03 (I) AI04 (I) AI05 (I) AI06 (I)
BLOCK ^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N TYPE
9 10
Protected Object
N L3 (C) L2 (B) L1 (A) N L3 (C) L2 (B)
IED
4 5
X1 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CT 1200/1 Star/Wye Connected
L1 (A)
3
1 1 1 1 1 3 3 R4 R5 R6 R1 R2 2 U 2 U 2 U 4 4 R3 3 2 4 1
L1 (A)
IEC07000193 V2 EN
L2 (B)
L3 (C)
3-Ph Plate with Metrosils and Resistors

IEC07000193_2_en.vsd
Figure 38:
Pos 1 Description
CT connections for high impedance differential protection
Scheme earthing point Note that it is of outmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exist in such scheme.
Three-phase plate with setting resistors and metrosils.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3 4 5 6
Necessary connection for three-phase metrosil set. Shown connections are applicable for both types of three-phase plate. Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED. Necessary connection for setting resistors. Shown connections are applicable for both types of three-phase plate. The factory made star point on a three-phase setting resistor set. Shall be removed for installations with 650 and 670 series IEDs. This star point is required for RADHA schemes only.
7 8
How to connect three individual phase currents for high impedance scheme to three CT inputs in the IED. Transformer input module, where the current inputs are located. Note that the CT ratio for high impedance differential protection application must be set as one.
For main CTs with 1A secondary rating the following setting values shall be entered: CTprim = 1A and CTsec = 1A For main CTs with 5A secondary rating the following setting values shall be entered: CTprim = 5A and CTsec = 5A The parameter CTStarPoint shall be always left to the default value ToObject.
Three connections made in the Signal Matrix, which connect these three current inputs to the first three input channels of the preprocessing function block (10). For high impedance differential protection preprocessing function block in 3ms task shall be used. Preprocessing block, to digitally filter the connected analogue inputs. Preprocessing block outputs AI1, AI2 and AI3 shall be connected to three instances of 1Ph high impedance differential protection HZPDIF function blocks, for example instance 1, 2 and 3 of HZPDIF in the configuration tool.
10
Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

Restricted earth fault protection REFPDIFis a typical application for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF. Typical CT connections for high impedance based REFPDIF protection scheme are shown in figure 39.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
L1 (A)
L2 (B)
L3 (C)
1
7
AI01 (I)
SMAI2
CT 1500/5 Star/Wye Connected 6
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AI02 (I) AI03 (I) AI04 (I) AI05 (I) AI06 (I)
BLOCK ^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N TYPE
Protected Object
L1 (A) L2 (B) L3 (C)
N
11 12
IED
4 1
N
CT 1500/5
X1
3 5
4 2 1 R1 R2 3 1
2 U
1-Ph Plate with Metrosil and Resistor

IEC07000194 V2 EN
Figure 39:
Pos 1 Description
CT connections for restricted earth fault protection
Scheme earthing point Note that it is of outmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exist in such scheme.
2 3 4 5 6 7
One-phase plate with setting resistor and metrosil. Necessary connection for the metrosil. Shown connections are applicable for both types of onephase plate. Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED. Necessary connection for setting resistor. Shown connections are applicable for both types of one-phase plate. How to connect REFPDIF high impedance scheme to one CT input in IED. Transformer input module where this current input is located. Note that the CT ratio for high impedance differential protection application must be set as one.
For main CTs with 1A secondary rating the following setting values shall be entered: CTprim = 1A and CTsec = 1A For main CTs with 5A secondary rating the following setting values shall be entered: CTprim = 5A and CTsec = 5A The parameter CTStarPoint shall always be left to the default value ToObject
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Connection made in the Signal Matrix, which connects this current input to first input channel of the preprocessing function block (10). For high impedance differential protection preprocessing function block in 3ms task shall be used. Preprocessing block, which has a task to digitally filter the connected analogue inputs. Preprocessing block output AI1 shall be connected to one instances of 1Ph high impedance differential protection function HZPDIF (for example, instance 1 of HZPDIF in the configuration tool).
3.5.3.4
Setting guidelines
The setting calculations are individual for each application. Refer to the different application descriptions below.
Configuration
The configuration is done in the Application Configuration tool. Signals from for example, check if criteria are connected to the inputs as required for the application. BLOCK input is used to block the function for example, from external check criteria. BLKTR input is used to block the function tripping for example, from external check criteria. The alarm level will be operative.
Settings of protection function
Operation: The operation of the high impedance differential function can be switched On or Off. U>Alarm: Set the alarm level. The sensitivity can roughly be calculated as a divider from the calculated sensitivity of the differential level. A typical setting is 10% of U>Trip It can be used as scheme supervision stage. tAlarm: Set the time for the alarm. A typical setting is 2-3 seconds. U>Trip: Set the trip level according to the calculations in the examples for each application example. The level is selected with margin to the calculated required voltage to achieve stability. Values can be 20-200 V dependent on the application. SeriesResistor: Set the value of the stabilizing series resistor. Calculate the value according to the examples for each application. Adjust the resistor as close as possible to the calculated example. Measure the value achieved and set this value here. The value shall always be high impedance. This means for example, for 1A circuits say bigger than 400 ohms (400 VA) and for 5 A circuits say bigger than 100 ohms (2500 VA). This ensures that the current will circulate and not go through the differential circuit at through faults.

T-feeder protection
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In many busbar arrangements such as one-and a half breaker, ring breaker, mesh corner, there will be a T-feeder from the current transformer at the breakers up to the current transformers in the transformer bushings. It is often required to separate the zones so the zone up to the bushing is covered from one differential function and the transformer from another. The 1Ph high impedance differential HZPDIF function in the IED allows this to be done efficiently, see figure 40.
3Id
IEC05000739 V2 EN
Figure 40:
The protection scheme utilizing the high impedance function for the T-feeder
Normally this scheme is set to achieve a sensitivity of around 20 percent of the rated current so that a low value can be used on the resistor. It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to autotransformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting example
Basic data: Current transformer ratio: CT Class: Secondary resistance: Cable loop resistance: 2000/1 A 20 VA 5P20 6.2 ohms <100 m 2.5mm2(one way) gives 2 0,8 ohm at 75 C<200 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point and the farthest CT) to be limited to approx. 0.2 Ohms at 75deg C gives loop resistance 2 0.2 = 0.4 Ohms. Equal to switchgear rated fault current 40 kA
Max fault current:
Calculation:
UR >
4000 2000
( 6.2 + 1.6 ) = 156V

(Equation 36)
EQUATION1207 V1 EN
Select a setting of U>Trip=200 V. The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least, twice the set operating voltage U>Trip.
E 5 P > ( 20 + 6.2 ) 20 = 524V

EQUATION1208 V1 EN
(Equation 37)
that is, bigger than 2 U>Trip
Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use. As this application does not need to be so sensitive select SeriesResistor= 2000 ohm, which gives an IED operating current of 100 mA. Calculate the primary sensitivity at operating voltage, ignoring the current drawn by the non-linear resistor.
IP = 2000 1
(100 0 + 20 0 + 3 10 -60 ) 10 -3 approx.220 A

(Equation 38)
EQUATION1209 V1 EN
where 200mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and 50mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores which should be available. The value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent resistor current the top value of voltage 200 2 is used and the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
top current used. Then the RMS current is calculated by dividing with2. Use the maximum value from the curve. It can clearly be seen that the sensitivity is not so much influenced by the selected voltage level so a sufficient margin should be used. The selection of the stabilizing resistor and the level of the magnetizing current (mostly dependent of the number of turns) are the most important factors.
Autotransformer differential protection
When Autotransformers are used it is possible to use the high impedance scheme covering the Autotransformer windings, however not a possible tertiary winding. The zone and connection of the 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function is shown in figure 41.
3Id
IEC05000173 V3 EN
Figure 41:
Application of the 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function on an autotransformer
Setting example
It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. If a lower tap of the CT is used, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the nonlinear resistor, but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Basic data: Transformer rated current Irated (on low voltage tap): Current transformer ratio: CT Class: Secondary resistance: Cable loop resistance: Max fault current: 1150 A 1200/1 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations) 20 VA 5P20 3.8 Ohms <100 m 2.5mm2(one way) gives 2 0.8 ohm at 75 C The maximum through fault current. Use 15 Irated for power transformer.
Calculation:
UR > 15
EQUATION1210 V1 EN
1150 1200
( 3.8 + 1.6 ) = 77.625V

(Equation 39)
Select a setting of U>Trip=100 V The current transformer knee point voltage at 5% error can roughly be calculated from the rated values, considering knee point voltage to be about 70% of the accuracy limit voltage.
E 5 P > ( 20 + 3.6 ) 20 = 472V

EQUATION1211 V1 EN
(Equation 40)
that is, bigger than 2 U>Trip
Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use. As this application it is required to have a good sensitive so select SeriesResistor= 2500 ohm which gives a total IED current of 40 mA. To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 41 which gives an acceptable value, ignoring the current drawn by the non-linear resistor.
IP = 1200 1 ( 40 0 + 20 0 + 3 20 -60 ) approx.108 A
(Equation 41)
EQUATION1212 V1 EN
where: 100mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit 40mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
If a higher sensitivity is required the series resistor can be selected to 5000 ohm. The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores which should be available. The value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent resistor current the top value of voltage 100 2 is used and the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
top current used. Then the RMS current is calculated by dividing with 2. Use the maximum value from the curve. It can clearly be seen that the sensitivity is not so much influenced by the selected voltage level so a sufficient margin should be used. The selection of the stabilizing resistor and the level of the magnetizing current (mostly dependent of the number of turns) are the most important factors. For many transformers there can be a secondary system for local distribution and/ or shunt compensation. The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function can be used to protect the tertiary busbar, normally 10-33 kV level and with relatively few feeders.
3Id
IEC05000774 V2 EN
Figure 42:
Application of the high impedance differential function on tertiary busbar
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting example
It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to autotransformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.
Basic data: Current transformer ratio: CT Class: Secondary resistance: Cable loop resistance: 2000/1 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations) 10VA 5P20 5.5 ohms <50 m 2.5mm2(one way) gives 1 0.4 ohm at 75 C. Note! Only one way as the system earthing is limiting the earth-fault current. If high earth-fault current exists use two way cable. The maximum through fault current given by the transformer reactance for example, 28 kA.
Max fault current:
Calculation:
UR >
28000 2000
( 5.5 + 0.4 ) = 82.6V

(Equation 42)
EQUATION1213 V1 EN
Select a setting of U>Trip=100 V. The current transformer saturation voltage at 5% error can roughly be calculated from the rated values.
E 5 P > (10 + 5.5 ) 20 = 310V

EQUATION1214 V1 EN
(Equation 43)
that is, greater than 2 U>Trip.
Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use. As this application it is not required to be so sensitive so select SeriesResistor=1000 ohm, which gives an IED current of 100 mA. To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 44 which gives an acceptable value, ignoring the current drawn by the non-linear resistor:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IP =
2000 1
(100 0 + 20 0 + 4 15 -60 ) approx.220 A

(Equation 44)
EQUATION1215 V1 EN
Where 200mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit 50mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores which should be available. The value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent resistor current the top value of voltage 100 2 is used and the top current used. Then the RMS current is calculated by dividing with 2. Use the maximum value from the curve.
Tertiary reactor protection
For many transformers there can be a secondary system for local distribution and/ or shunt compensation. The 1Ph High impedance differential protection function HZPDIF can be used to protect the tertiary reactor for phase as well as earth faults if the earthing is direct or low impedance.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3Id
IEC05000176 V3 EN
Figure 43:
Application of the1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function on an autotransformer
Setting example
It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to autotransformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.

Basic data: Current transformer ratio: CT Class: Secondary resistance: Cable loop resistance:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
100/5 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations) 10 VA 5P20 0.26 ohms <50 m 2.5mm2 (one way) gives 1 0.4 ohm at 75 C Note! Only one way as the system earthing is limiting the earth-fault current. If high earth-fault current exists use two way cable. The maximum through fault current is limited by the reactor reactance and the inrush will be the worst for a reactor for example, 800 A.
Max fault current:
Calculation:
UR >
800 1000
( 0.26 + 0.4 ) = 5.28V

(Equation 45)
EQUATION1216 V1 EN
E 5P >
10 + 0.26 20 5 = 66V 25
(Equation 46)
EQUATION1217 V1 EN
that is, greater than 2 U>Trip.
Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use. As this application it is required to be so sensitive so select SeriesResistor = 200 ohm, which gives an IED current of 100 mA. To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 47, which gives an acceptable value. A little lower sensitivity could be selected by using a lower resistance value.
IP = 100 5 (100 0 + 5 0 + 2 100 -60 ) approx.5 A
(Equation 47)
EQUATION1218 V1 EN
The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores, which should be available. The value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent resistor current the top value of voltage 20 2 is used and the top current used. Then the RMS current is calculated by dividing with 2. Use the maximum value from the curve.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF
For solidly earthed systems a Restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF is often provided as a complement to the normal transformer differential IED. The advantage with the restricted earth fault IEDs is their high sensitivity. Sensitivities of 2-8% can be achieved whereas the normal differential IED will have sensitivities of 20-40%. The level for high impedance restricted earth fault function is dependent of the current transformers magnetizing currents. Restricted earth fault IEDs are also very quick due to the simple measuring principle and the measurement of one winding only. The connection of a restricted earth fault IED is shown in figure 44. It is connected across each directly or low ohmic earthed transformer winding in figure 44. It is quite common to connect the restricted earth fault IED in the same current circuit as the transformer differential IED. This will due to the differences in measuring principle limit the possibility for the differential IEDs to detect earth faults. Such faults are then only detected by REFPDIF function. The mixed connection using the 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function should be avoided and the low impedance scheme should be used instead.
Id
IEC05000177 V2 EN
Figure 44:
Application of HZPDIF function as a restricted earth fault IED for an YNd transformer
Setting example
It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing to auto141 Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
transformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be induced.
Basic data: Transformer rated current on HV winding: Current transformer ratio: CT Class: Cable loop resistance: Max fault current: 250 A 300/1 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations) 10 VA 5P20 <50 m 2.5mm2 (one way) gives 2 0.4 ohm at 75 C The maximum through fault current is limited by the transformer reactance, use 15 rated current of the transformer
Calculation:
UR > 15
EQUATION1219 V1 EN
250 300
( 0.66 + 0.8 ) = 18.25V

(Equation 48)
E 5 P > (10 + 0.66 ) 20 = 213.2V

EQUATION1220 V1 EN
(Equation 49)
that is, greater than 2 U>Trip
Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to use. As this application it is required to be so sensitive so select SeriesResistor= 1000 ohm which gives a current of 20 mA. To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 50 which is acceptable as it gives around 10% minimum operating current.
IP =
300 1
( 20 0 + 5 0 + 4 20 -60 ) approx.25.5 A
(Equation 50)
EQUATION1221 V1 EN
The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer cores which should be available. The value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent resistor current the top value of voltage 20 2 is used and the top current used. Then the RMS current is calculated by dividing with2. Use the maximum value from the curve.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Alarm level operation
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function has a separate alarm level, which can be used to give alarm for problems with an involved current transformer circuit. The setting level is normally selected to be around 10% of the operating voltage U>Trip. As seen in the setting examples above the sensitivity of HZPDIF function is normally high, which means that the function will in many cases operate also for short circuits or open current transformer secondary circuits. However the stabilizing resistor can be selected to achieve sensitivity higher than normal load current and/or separate criteria can be added to the operation, a check zone. This can be another IED with the same HZPDIF function, it could be a check that the fault is there with an earth overcurrent function or neutral point voltage function. For such cases where operation is not expected during normal service the alarm output should be used to activate an external shorting of the differential circuit avoiding continuous high voltage in the circuit. A time delay of a few seconds is used before the shorting and alarm is activated.
IEC05000749 V1 EN
Figure 45:
Current voltage characteristics for the non-linear resistors, in the range 10-200 V, the average range of current is: 0.0110 mA

3.5.3.5
Table 46:
Name Operation U>Alarm tAlarm U>Trip SeriesResistor
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameters
HZPDIF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 2 - 500 0.000 - 60.000 5 - 900 10 - 20000 Unit V s V ohm Step 1 0.001 1 1 Default Off 10 5.000 100 250 Description Operation Off / On Alarm voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Time delay to activate alarm Operate voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Value of series resistor in Ohms
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.1.1
Impedance protection
Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR
Identification
Function description Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (zone 1) IEC 61850 identification ZMQPDIS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21
S00346 V1 EN
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (zone 2-5)
ZMQAPDIS
21
S00346 V1 EN
Directional impedance quadrilateral
ZDRDIR
21D
Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN
3.6.1.2
Application
Sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the power system.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The distance protection function in the IED is designed to meet basic requirements for application on transmission and sub-transmission lines (solid earthed systems) although it also can be used on distribution levels.
System earthing
The type of system earthing plays an important role when designing the protection system. Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below. Solid earthed networks In solidly earthed systems, the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.
xx05000215.vsd
IEC05000215 V1 EN
Figure 46:
Solidly earthed network
The earth-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very limited influence on the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some marginal influence on the earth-fault current in networks with long transmission lines. The earth-fault current at single phase-to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 51:
3I 0 = 3 U L1 Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f = U L1 Z1 + Z N + Z f
(Equation 51)
EQUATION1267 V3 EN
Where: UL1 Z1 Z2 Z0 Zf ZN is the phase-to-earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault is the positive sequence impedance (/phase) is the negative sequence impedance (/phase) is the zero sequence impedance (/phase) is the fault impedance (), often resistive is the earth-return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phaseto-earth voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage. The high zero-sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance measuring techniques to detect earth faults. However, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases. Effectively earthed networks A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-fault factor is defined according to equation 52.
fe = U max U pn
(Equation 52)
EQUATION1268 V3 EN
Where: Umax Upn is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single phaseto-earth fault. is the phase-to-earth fundamental frequency voltage before fault.
Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, see equation 53 and equation 54.
X 0 < 3 X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN
(Equation 53)
R0 R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN
(Equation 54)
Where R0 X0 R1 X1 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach
The magnitude of the earth-fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for impedance measuring elements to detect earth faults. However, in the same way as for solid earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case. High impedance earthed networks In high impedance networks, the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the earth through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor. This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating meshed networks. What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth-fault current is very low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a magnitude of 3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence voltage (3U0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop distribution. The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation 55.
3I 0 = I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
EQUATION1271 V3 EN
(Equation 55)
Where: 3I0 IR IL IC is the earth-fault current (A) is the current through the neutral point resistor (A) is the current through the neutral point reactor (A) is the total capacitive earth-fault current (A)
The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position where the reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:
wL =
1 3 w C
(Equation 56)
EQUATION1272 V1 EN
Ic
Ic
Ic
IR
IL
en05000216.vsd
IEC05000216 V1 EN
Figure 47:
High impedance earthing network
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compared to solid earthed networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-toearth faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross-country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth faults. To handle this type phenomenon, a separate function called Phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common to be used in transmission applications. In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and clearance of earth faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of the zero-sequence measurement elements or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-toearth fault.
Fault infeed from remote end
All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault occurs on the protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection system and making the settings. With reference to figure 48, the equation for the bus voltage UA at A side is:
UA = IA p ZL + (IA+IB) Rf
EQUATION1273-IEC-650 V1 EN
(Equation 57)
If we divide UA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side.
ZA =
UA IA
= p ZL +
IA + IB Rf IA
(Equation 58)
EQUATION1274-IEC-650 V1 EN
The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source impedances at local and remote end.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ESA
ZSA
UA A
IA
p*ZL ZL
(1-p)*ZL
IB
UB B ZSB
ESB
Z<
Rf
Z<
IEC09000247 V1 EN
Figure 48:
Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end
The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection. When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built-in algorithm, which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1, at the exporting end. No settings are required for this function.
Load encroachment
In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 49. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not allowed and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults. The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure of figure 49. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd for Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function (FDPSPDIS), the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the figure 49 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions. The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferably be
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
switched off. See section "Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function". The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in FDPSPDIS function.
X Z1 X Z1
Load impedance area in forward R direction
ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv RLdFw
ArgLd R ArgLd
IEC09000248 V1 EN
Figure 49:
Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment characteristic defined in Phase selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS
Short line application
In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see table 47.
Table 47:
Line category Very short line Short line
Definition of short and very short line

Un 110 kV 1.1-5.5 km 5.5-11 km Un 500 kV 5-25 km 25-50 km
The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 49. For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to the voltage drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching. Load encroachment is normally no problem for short line applications.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Long transmission line application
For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-earth fault at remote line end of long lines when the line is heavy loaded. What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection can generally be described as in table 48, long lines have Source impedance ratio (SIRs) less than 0.5.
Table 48:
Line category Long lines Very long lines
Definition of long and very long lines

Un 110 kV 77 km - 99 km > 99 km Un 500 kV 350 km - 450 km > 450 km
The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated), see figure 49.
Parallel line application with mutual coupling

General Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary area for new lines. Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The mutual coupling does influence the zero sequence impedance to the fault point but it does not normally cause voltage inversion. It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is a practice to neglect them. From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. The different network configuration classes are: 1. 2. 3. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400kV line and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is not treated any further in this manual. For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can be in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends. The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the operation condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different setting groups for handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both ends. The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by using: The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters. Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected multi circuit line.
Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. Parallel line applications This type of networks is defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines terminate at common nodes at both ends. The three most common operation modes are: 1. 2. 3. Parallel line in service. Parallel line out of service and earthed. Parallel line out of service and not earthed.
Parallel line in service This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and transmission networks. Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 50. From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 59.
Z = Uph Iph + 3I 0
IECEQUATION1275 V1 EN
Z 0 - Z1 3 Z1
Uph Iph + 3I 0 KN
(Equation 59)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where: Uph Iph 3I0 Z1 Z0 is phase to earth voltage at the relay point is phase current in the faulty phase is earth fault current is positive sequence impedance is zero sequence impedance
A Z0m Z<
IEC09000250 V1 EN
Z<
Figure 50:
Class 1, parallel line in service
The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 51.
Z0 -Z0m A Z0m C Z0 -Z0m B
IEC09000253 V1 EN
Figure 51:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed according to equation 60.
Uph = Z1L Iph + 3I 0
Z0L - Z1L 3 Z1L
+ 3I 0p
Z0m 3 Z1L
(Equation 60)
By dividing equation 60 by equation 59 and after some simplification we can write the impedance present to the relay at A side as:
3I 0 KNm Z = ZL 1 + Iph + 3I 0 KN
EQUATION1277 V1 EN
(Equation 61)
Where: KNm = Z0m/(3 Z1L) 153 Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line impedance. If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach. Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is weak. If considering a single phase-to-earth fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end is zero, the voltage UA in the faulty phase at A side as in equation 62.
UA = p Z1L ( Iph + KN 3I0 + KNm 3I0p )
(Equation 62)
One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:
3 I 0 Z 0 L = 3 I 0 p Z 0 L (2 - p )
EQUATION1279 V1 EN
(Equation 63)
Simplification of equation 63, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into equation 62 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:
UA = p Z1L Iph + KN 3I0 + KNm
3I0 p 2-p

(Equation 64)
If we finally divide equation 64 with equation 59 we can draw the impedance present to the IED as
3I 0 p Iph + KN 3I 0 + KNm 2- p Z = p Z1L Iph + 3I 0 KN

EQUATION1379 V1 EN
(Equation 65)
Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with X1L=0.303 /km, X0L=0.88 /km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%. The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
This reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme. Parallel line out of service and earthed
A Z0m Z<
IEC09000251 V1 EN
Z<
Figure 52:
The parallel line is out of service and earthed
When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both line ends on the bus bar side of the line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 53.
A
I0
Z0 - Z0m Z0m
I0
C
Z0 -Z0m
IEC09000252 V1 EN
Figure 53:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends
Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 66.
Z0 E =
Z 0 - Z0 m Z0
(Equation 66)
EQUATION2002 V1 EN
The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerably when the line is in operation. All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence, mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
sequence parameters according to equation 67 and equation 68 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.
X 2 R0 E = R0 1 + 2 0 m 2 R0 + X 0
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V1 EN
(Equation 67)
X 2 X 0 E = X 0 1 - 2 0 m 2 R0 + X 0
(Equation 68)
Parallel line out of service and not earthed

A Z0m Z<
IEC09000254 V1 EN
Z<
Figure 54:
Parallel line is out of service and not earthed
When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero-sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 54 The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and earthed at both ends.
A I0
Z0 - Z0m Z0m Z0 - Z0m

I0 C
B
IEC09000255 V1 EN
Figure 55:
Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one circuit disconnected and not earthed
The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 69.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
1 2 2 Z1 + Z 0 E + R f Zm0 3 KU = = 11 Z 0 2 Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f 2 Z1 + Z 0 + R f 3
( (
) )
)
(Equation 69)
EQUATION1284 V1 EN
This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 70 and equation 71.
Re( A ) = R 0 (2 R1 + R 0 + 3 Rf ) - X 0 ( X 0 + 2 X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN
(Equation 70)
Im( A ) = X 0 (2 R1 + R0 + 3 R1 ) + R0 (2 X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN
(Equation 71)
The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 72.
Re K U = 1 +
EQUATION1287 V1 EN
( )
( ) Re ( A ) + Im ( A )
Re A X m 0 2
2
(Equation 72)
The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 73.

Im ( KU ) = Im ( A ) Xm02 Re ( A )
EQUATION1288 V1 EN
+ Im ( A )
Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.
Tapped line application
Application manual
(Equation 73)
157
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IA T Z<
IB
IC
Z< -IB
Z< C
IEC09000160 V2 EN
Figure 56:
Example of tapped line with Auto transformer
This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed from remote end" , that is increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will be
ZA =ZAT +
IA + IC ZTF IA
(Equation 74)
ZC = ZTrf + ( ZCT +
U2 IA + IC ZTF) ( )2 U1 IC
(Equation 75)
Where: ZAT and ZCT IA and IC U2/U1 is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point. is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B. Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer). is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F). Transformer impedance
ZTF ZTrf
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio. Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 56), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure wrong direction. In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone 2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end. Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone 1 settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication. Fault resistance The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:
Rarc = 28707 L I1.4
(Equation 76)
EQUATION1456 V1 EN
where: L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1. Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately 50 km/h is the actual fault current in A.
In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth RFPE and phase-tophase RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance in order to obtain reliable fault detection.

3.6.1.3 Setting guidelines General
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS) are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in ZMQPDIS. The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting calculations: Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under transient conditions. Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated value of the earth-return compensation factor. The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources. The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance. The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is considerable, the effect must be recognized. Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.
Setting of zone 1
The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line. In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in the particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. The setting of earth-fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).
Setting of overreaching zone
The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end is considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location. The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest adjacent line. The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected line.
Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current infeed from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations. If any of the above gives a zone 2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone 2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone 2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions. The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at remote end is highlighted in the example below. If a fault occurs at point F see figure 57, the IED at point A senses the impedance:
ZAF = ZAC +
EQUATION302 V2 EN
IB IA + IB ZCF = ZAC + (1+ IA IA
ZCF
(Equation 77)
Z AC
Z CB F
IA
Z CF
I A+ I B Z< IB
IEC09000256 V1 EN
Figure 57:
Setting of reverse zone
The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the backup protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes. Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines. Equation 78 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed, and so on.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Zrev 1.2 ZL Z2rem

EQUATION1525 V3 EN
(Equation 78)
Where: ZL Z2rem is the protected line impedance is zone 2 setting at remote end of protected line.
In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.
Setting of zones for parallel line application

Parallel line in service Setting of zone 1 With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85% of protected line. However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account. Parallel line in service setting of zone 2 Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 51 in section "Parallel line in service". The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to at least:
R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN
(Equation 79)
X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
EQUATION554 V1 EN
(Equation 80)
Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:
K 0 = 1Z 0m 2 Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
(Equation 81)
EQUATION1426 V1 EN
If the denominator in equation 81 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the real and imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be written as:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Re( K 0) = 1 EQUATION1427 V1 EN
X 0m Im( B ) Re( B ) 2 + Im( B ) 2

(Equation 82)
Im( K 0) = 1 EQUATION1428 V1 EN
X 0 m Re( B ) Re( B ) 2 + Im( B ) 2

(Equation 83)
Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single phase-to-earth faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:
Xm0 R 0E = R 0 1 + ------------------------- 2 2 R0 + X0
EQUATION561 V1 EN
(Equation 84)
X m0 X 0E = X 0 1 ------------------------- 2 2 R0 + X0
EQUATION562 V1 EN
(Equation 85)
Setting of reach in resistive direction
Set the resistive reach R1 independently for each zone. Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the phase-to-earth faults RFPE for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining reach setting parameters independently of each other. The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 86.
R= 1 3
( 2 R1 + R0 ) + RFPE
(Equation 86)
j loop = arctan
EQUATION2304 V1 EN
2 X1 + X0 2 R1 + R0
(Equation 87)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition to minimize the risk for overreaching:
RFPE 4.5 X1
(Equation 88)
The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault resistance for phase-to-earth faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit the setting of the zone 1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement to:
RFPP 3 X1
(Equation 89)
The following instructions are valid when Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS is not activated. To deactivate the function, the setting of the load resistance RLdFw and RLdRv in FDPSPDIS must be set to max value (3000). If FDPSPDISis to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance (/phase) is calculated as:
U Z loadmin = -----S
EQUATION571 V1 EN
Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function
(Equation 90)
Where: U S is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV is the maximum apparent power in MVA.
The load impedance [/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the maximum load current:
Umin Z load = --------------------3 Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN
(Equation 91)
Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions. As a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation under combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults,
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
consider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics. To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.
RFPE 0.8 Z load
EQUATION792 V1 EN
(Equation 92)
This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected loadimpedance angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three times the load-impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 93.
RFPE 0.8 Z load min cos EQUATION578 V3 EN
2 R1 + R 0 2 X1+ X 0
sin

(Equation 93)
Where: is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.
To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum load impedance.
RFPP 1.6 Zload
EQUATION579 V2 EN
(Equation 94)
Equation 94 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-tophase faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected loadimpedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 95.
RFPP 1.6 Z load min
Application manual
RFP
R1 cos J - sin J X1
(Equation 95) 165
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no Power swing detection function ZMRPSB is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a ZMRPSB function is activated in the IED, refer to the description of Power swing detection function ZMRPSB.
Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function activated
The parameters for shaping of the load encroachment characteristic are found in the description of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function (FDPSPDIS).
Setting of minimum operating currents
The operation of Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS) can be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE. The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen current for the analogue input channels. The value has been proven in practice to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of IBase. This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines. Setting IMinOpIN blocks the phase-to-earth loop if 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of IMinOpIN is 5% of IBase. The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 96 and equation 97 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg
EQUATION725 V2 EN
0.8 U 1L1 + 0.2 U 1L1 M I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 96)
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
- ArgDir < arg

EQUATION726 V2 EN
0.8 U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 U 1L1 L 2 M I L1 L 2
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 97)
where: ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 58. U1L1 U1L1M IL1 U1L1L2 U1L1L2M IL1L2 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1 is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1 is phase current in phase L1 is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (as shown in figure 58). It should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity. ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output STDIRCND.
STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+ +STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+ +STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN
Figure 58:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100ms the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting of timers for distance protection zones
The required time delays for different distance protection zones are independent of each other. Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity reasons. Time delays for all zones can be set in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the phase-to-earthtPE and for the phase-to-phase tPP measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.
3.6.1.4
Setting parameters
Signals and settings for ZMQPDIS are valid for zone 1 while signals and settings for ZMQAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5
Table 49:
Name Operation IBase UBase OperationDir
ZMQPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 - 3000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1 R1 X0 R0 RFPP RFPE OperationPP Timer tPP tPP OperationPE Timer tPE tPE
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/l s s
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001
30.00 5.00 100.00 15.00 30.00 100.00 On On 0.000 On On 0.000
Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay of trip, Ph-E

Name IMinOpPP IMinOpPE IMinOpIN Values (Range) 10 - 1000 10 - 1000 5 - 1000 Unit %IB %IB %IB Step 1 1 1 Default 20 20 5 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Earth loops
Table 50:
ZMQAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 - 3000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 1000 10 - 1000 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1 R1 X0 R0 RFPP RFPE OperationPP Timer tPP tPP OperationPE Timer tPE tPE IMinOpPP IMinOpPE
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/l s s %IB %IB
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 1 1
40.00 5.00 120.00 15.00 30.00 100.00 On On 0.000 On On 0.000 20 20
Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay of trip, Ph-E Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 51:
Name IBase UBase IMinOpPP IMinOpPE ArgNegRes ArgDir
ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 5 - 30 5 - 30 90 - 175 5 - 45 Unit A kV %IB %IB Deg Deg Step 1 0.05 1 1 1 1 Default 3000 400.00 10 5 115 15 Description Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction
3.6.2
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR
Function description Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (zone 1) IEC 61850 identification ZMCPDIS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21
S00346 V1 EN
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (zone 2-5)
ZMCAPDIS
21
S00346 V1 EN
Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series compensation
ZDSRDIR
21D
Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN
3.6.2.1
Application Introduction
Sub transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the power system. The distance protection function is designed to meet basic requirements for application on transmission and sub transmission lines (solid earthed systems) although it also can be used on distribution levels.

System earthing
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The type of system earthing plays an important roll when designing the protection system. In the following sections, some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted. Solid earthed networks In solid earthed systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.
xx05000215.vsd
IEC05000215 V1 EN
Figure 59:
The earth fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very limited influence on the earth fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some marginal influence on the earth fault current in networks with long transmission lines. The earth fault current at single phase -to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 98:
3I 0 =
3 U L1 Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f
U L1 Z1 + Z N + Z f
(Equation 98)
EQUATION1267 V3 EN
Where: UL1 Z1 Z2 Z0 Zf ZN is the phase-to-earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault is the positive sequence impedance (/phase) is the negative sequence impedance (/phase) is the zero sequence impedance (/phase) is the fault impedance (), often resistive is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3
The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phaseto-earth voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The high zero sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance measuring technique to detect earth-fault. However, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and must, therefore, always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases. Effectively earthed networks A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-fault factor is defined according to equation 52.
fe = U max U pn
(Equation 99)
EQUATION1268 V3 EN
Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, as shown in equation 100 and equation 101.
X 0 = 3 X1
EQUATION1269 V3 EN
(Equation 100)
R0 R1
EQUATION1270 V3 EN
(Equation 101)
The magnitude of the earth fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for impedance measuring element to detect earth-fault. However, in the same way as for solid earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and must, therefore, always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case.
All transmission and most all sub transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault occurs on the protected line. The fault infeed may enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection system and making the settings. With reference to figure 60, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage Va at left side as:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
VA = IA p ZL + ( IA + IB ) Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN
(Equation 102)
If we divide Va by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side
ZA =
Va IA
= p ZL +
IA + IB IA
Rf
(Equation 103)
EQUATION1274 V2 EN
EsA
ZSA
VA A
IA
p*ZL ZL
(1-p)*ZL
IB
VA B ZSB
EsB
Z<
Rf
Z<
en05000217.vsd
IEC05000217 V1 EN
Figure 60:
Influence of fault infeed from remote end
The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors to justify complementary protection to distance protection.
Load encroachment
Sometimes the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 61. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is not allowed and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection that is, the ability to detect resistive faults. The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure 61. The load encroachment algorithm increases the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for line to earth faults at remote end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ARGLd for the load encroachment function, the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the right in figure 61 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferable be switched off. The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in the Phase selection with load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function.
X Zm Zm
ZL
ARGLd
ARGLd R
ARGLd RLdRv RLdFw
ARGLd
en05000495.vsd
IEC05000495 V1 EN
Figure 61:
Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment characteristic
For long transmission lines the margin to the load impedance that is, to avoid load encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for line to earth-fault at remote end of a long lines when the line is heavy loaded. Definition of long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection can generally be described as in table 52, long lines have SIRs less than 0.5.
Table 52:
Definition of long lines

The possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-tophase and phase-to-earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated), as shown in figure 62.
Zm
ZL
ARGLd ARGLd RLdRv RLdFw
ARGLd
R
ARGLd
en05000220.vsd
IEC05000220 V1 EN
Figure 62:
Characteristic for zone measurement for long line with load encroachment activated

General Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary area for new lines. Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage to experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The reason to the introduced error in measuring due to mutual coupling is the zero sequence voltage inversion that occurs. It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is practice to neglect them. From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. Those are: Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero-sequence network Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is not treated any further in this manual. For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line can be in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends. The reach of the distance protection zone1 will be different depending on the operation condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting groups to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both ends. The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zerosequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by using: The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters. Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected multi circuit line.
Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide mentioned below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic principles also apply to other multi circuit lines. Parallel line applications This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common operation modes: parallel line in service parallel line out of service and earthed parallel line out of service and not earthed
Parallel line in service This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and transmission networks. Here is the description of what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line, as shown in figure 63. From symmetrical components, it is possible to derive the impedance Z at the IED point for normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 104.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Z =
Vph Iph + 3I 0 Z 0 - Z1 3 Z1
Vph Iph + 3I 0 KN
(Equation 104)
EQUATION1275 V2 EN
Where: Vph Iph 3I0 Z1 Z0 is phase-to-earth voltage at the IED point is phase current in the faulty phase is earth-fault current is positive sequence impedance is zero sequence impedance
A Z0m
Z<
IEC05000221 V1 EN
Z<
en05000221.vsd
Figure 63:
Class 1, parallel line in service
The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, as shown in figure 64.
Z0 - Z0m Z0m C Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
IEC99000038 V1 EN
Figure 64:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-earth-fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the IED point A is changed, according to equation 105.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Vph = Z1L Iph + 3I 0
Z0L - Z1L 3 Z1L
+ 3I 0p
Z0m 3 Z1L
(Equation 105)
EQUATION1276 V2 EN
By dividing equation 105 by equation 104 and after some simplification we can write the impedance present to the IED at A side as:
3I 0 KNm Z = ZL 1 + Iph + 3I 0 KN
EQUATION1277 V1 EN
(Equation 106)
Where: KNm = Z0m/(3 Z1L)
The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line impedance. If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected line that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current on the protected line, the distance function overreaches. If the currents have the same direction, the distance protection underreaches. Maximum overreach occurs if the fault infeed from remote end is weak. If we consider a single phase-to-earth fault at "p" unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel line for the case when the fault infeed from remote end is zero, we can draw the voltage V in the faulty phase at A side as in equation 107.
VA = p Z1L ( Iph + KN 3I0 + KNm 3I0p )

EQUATION1278 V3 EN
(Equation 107)
Notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:
3 I 0 Z 0 L = 3 I 0 p Z 0 L (2 - p )
EQUATION1279 V1 EN
(Equation 108)
3I 0 p VA = p Z 1L Iph + KN 3I 0 + KNm 2- p
EQUATION1280 V1 EN
(Equation 109)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

EQUATION1379 V1 EN
(Equation 110)
Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with X1L=0.303 /km, X0L=0.88 /km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%. The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is most pronounced with no infeed in the line IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreach scheme. Parallel line out of service and earthed
A Z0m
Z<
Z<
en05000222.vsd
Figure 65:
When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends on the bus bar side of the line CT so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 65.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
I0
Z 0 Zm0 Zm0
I0
Z 0 Zm0
99000039.vsd
Figure 66:
Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends
Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 111.
Z0 E =
Z 0 - Z0 m Z0
(Equation 111)
EQUATION2002 V1 EN
The influence on the distance measurement can be a considerable overreach, which must be considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate setting group for this operation condition, since it reduces the reach considerably when the line is in operation. All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero-sequence, mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero-sequence parameters according to equation 112 and equation 113 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.
R0 E
X 0m2 = R0 1 + 2 2 R0 + X 0
(Equation 112)
X 0E
X 0m2 = X 0 1 - 2 2 R0 + X 0
(Equation 113)

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
A Z0m
Z<
IEC05000223 V1 EN
Z<
en05000223.vsd
Figure 67:
Parallel line is out of service and not earthed
When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 67. The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and earthed at both ends.
I0
Z0 Z0m Z0m Z0 Z0m

99000040.vsd
I0
B
IEC99000040 V1 EN
Figure 68:
Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one circuit disconnected and not earthed
( (
) )
)
(Equation 114)
EQUATION1284 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Re( A ) = R 0 (2 R1 + R 0 + 3 Rf ) - X 0 ( X 0 + 2 X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN
(Equation 115)
Im( A ) = X 0 (2 R1 + R0 + 3 R1 ) + R0 (2 X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN
(Equation 116)
Re K U = 1 +
EQUATION1287 V1 EN
( )
( ) Re ( A ) + Im ( A )
Re A X m 0 2
2
(Equation 117)

Im ( KU ) = Im ( A ) Xm02 Re ( A )
EQUATION1288 V1 EN
+ Im ( A )
Application manual
(Equation 118)
183
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IA T Z<
IB
IC
Z< -IB
Z< C
en05000224.vsd
Figure 69:
This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed from remote end" that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C is as follows:
ZA =ZAT +
IA + IC ZTF IA
(Equation 119)
ZC = ZTrf + ( ZCT +
(Equation 120)
Where: ZAT and ZCT IA and IC U2/U1 is the line impedance from the B respective C station to the T point. is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B. Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).
For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to the fault can be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
from T point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio. Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters (as shown in the dotted line in figure 69), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure wrong direction. In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end. Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone1 that both gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone1 settings that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication. Fault resistance The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:
Rarc = 28707 L I1.4
(Equation 121)
EQUATION1456 V1 EN
where: L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1. Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately 50 km/h is the actual fault current in A.
In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth (RFPE) and phaseto-phase (RFPP) must be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance to obtain reliable fault detection.
Series compensation in power systems
The main purpose of series compensation in power systems is virtual reduction of line reactance in order to enhance the power system stability and increase loadability of transmission corridors. The principle is based on compensation of distributed line reactance by insertion of series capacitor (SC). The generated reactive power provided by the capacitor is continuously proportional to the square of the current flowing at the same time through the compensated line and series
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
capacitor. This means that the series capacitor has a self-regulating effect. When the system loading increases, the reactive power generated by series capacitors increases as well. The response of SCs is automatic, instantaneous and continuous. The main benefits of incorporating series capacitors in transmission lines are: Steady state voltage regulation and raise of voltage collapse limit Increase power transfer capability by raising the transient stability limit Improved reactive power balance Increase in power transfer capacity Active load sharing between parallel circuits and loss reduction Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new power lines
Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage collapse limit A series capacitor is capable of compensating the voltage drop of the series inductance in a transmission line, as shown in figure 70. During low loading, the system voltage drop is lower and at the same time, the voltage drop on the series capacitor is lower. When the loading increases and the voltage drop become larger, the contribution of the series capacitor increases and therefore the system voltage at the receiving line end can be regulated. Series compensation also extends the region of voltage stability by reducing the reactance of the line and consequently the SC is valuable for prevention of voltage collapse. Figure 71 presents the voltage dependence at receiving bus B (as shown in figure 70) on line loading and compensation degree KC, which is defined according to equation 122. The effect of series compensation is in this particular case obvious and self explanatory.
KC = XC X Line
(Equation 122)
EQUATION1895 V1 EN
A typical 500 km long 500 kV line is considered with source impedance
Z SA1 = 0
EQUATION1896 V1 EN
(Equation 123)
A EA
B Power line Seires capacitor Load
Z SA1
en06000585.vsd
IEC06000585 V1 EN
Figure 70:
A simple radial power system
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
500 U limit 400
U[kV]
300
P30
P50
100
200
400
600
800
1000 P[MW]
1200
1400
1600
1800
en06000586.vsd
IEC06000586 V1 EN
Figure 71:
Voltage profile for a simple radial power line with 0, 30, 50 and 70% of compensation
Increased power transfer capability by raising the first swing stability limit Consider the simple one-machine and infinite bus system shown in figure 72.
A PMech EA B -jXC +jXLine System
ZSA1
en06000587.vsd
IEC06000587 V1 EN
Figure 72:
One machine and infinite bus system
The equal-areas criterion is used to show the effectiveness of a series capacitor for improvement of first swing transient stability (as shown in figure 73). In steady state, the mechanical input power to the generator (PMech) is equal to the electrical output power from the generator (PE ) and the generator angle is d0. If a 3phase fault occurs at a point near the machine, the electrical output of the generator reduces to zero. This means that the speed of the generator increases and the angle difference between the generator and the infinite bus increases during the fault. At the time of fault clearing, the angle difference has increased to C. After reclosing of the system, the transmitted power exceeds the mechanical input power and the generator deaccelerates. The generator decelerates as long as equal area condition AACC=ADEC has not been fulfilled. The critical condition for post-fault system stability is that the angular displacement after fault clearing and during the deceleration does not exceed its critical limit CR, because if it does, the system cannot get back to equilibrium and the synchronism is lost. The first swing stability and the stability margin can be evaluated by studying the different areas in figure 73 for the same system, once without SC and once with series compensation. The areas under the corresponding P curves correspond to energy and the system remains stable if the accelerating energy that the generator picks up during the fault is lower than the decelerating energy that is transferred across the transmission line during the first system swing upon fault clearing.
P70
P0
200
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
without SC
with SC
P [ pu ]
P [ pu ]
A SM A DEC PMech A DEC A SM P Mech
AACC
AACC
EA
CR
EA
CR en06000588.vsd
IEC06000588 V1 EN
Figure 73:
Equal area criterion and first swing stability without and with series compensation
This means that the system is stable if AACC (ADEC + ASM). The stability margin is given by the difference between the available decelerating energy (area between the P () and PMech and the angular difference between C and CR ) and the accelerating energy. It is represented in figure 73 by the area ASM. Notice that a substantial increase in the stability margin is obtained by installing a series capacitor. The series compensation can improve the situation in two ways, it can decrease the initial angle difference 0 corresponding to a certain power transfer and it also shifts the P curve upwards. Improve reactive power balance A series capacitor increases its output of reactive power instantaneously, continuously and automatically with increasing line load. It is thus a self-regulating device, which improves voltage regulation and reduces the need for other means of voltage control for example, shunt compensation. The reactive power balance of a series compensated line is shown in figure 74 as an example for 500 km long 500 kV transmission line with 50% compensation degree.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Q (Mvar) 600 400 Capacitive 200 500 1000
(S.C.)
Power flow (MW)
200 Inductive 400 600 800 1000
1500
(T.L. + S.C.)
Transmission Line
500 kV 500 km
(T.L.)
Series Compensation k = 50 %
en06000589.vsd
IEC06000589 V1 EN
Figure 74:
Self-regulating effect of reactive power balance
Increase in power transfer The increase in power transfer capability as a function of the degree of compensation for a transmission line can be explained by studying the circuit shown in figure 75. The power transfer on the transmission line is given by the equation 124:
P= U A U B sin (d ) X Line - X C = U A U B sin ( d ) X Line (1 - K C )
(Equation 124)
EQUATION1897 V1 EN
The compensation degree Kc is defined as equation 122

UA PA QA UA A
-jX C +jXL
DU
UB
B UB
PB QB
en06000590.vsd
IEC06000590 V1 EN
Figure 75:
Transmission line with series capacitor
The effect on the power transfer when considering a constant angle difference () between the line ends is illustrated in figure 76. Practical compensation degree runs from 20 to 70 percent. Transmission capability increases of more than two times can be obtained in practice.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Multiple of power over a non-compensated line

3.5
Powe r tra nsfe r with co ns ta nt a ng le diffe re nce
Inc re a se in powe r tra ns fe r
2.5
1.5
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
D e gre e of se rie s c ompe nsa tio n [%]
Degree of compensation en06000592.vsd
IEC06000592 V1 EN
Figure 76:
Increase in power transfer over a transmission line depending on degree of series compensation
Active load sharing between parallel circuits and loss reduction A series capacitor can be used to control the distribution of active power between parallel transmission circuits. The compensation of transmission lines with sufficient thermal capacity can relieve the possible overloading of other parallel lines. This distribution is governed by the reactance, while the losses are determined by the resistance. A properly designed series compensation system can considerably reduce the total transmission system losses, as shown in figure 77.
-jXC jXL1 Line 1 jXL2 Line 2 R L2 RL1
en06000593.vsd
IEC06000593 V1 EN
Figure 77:
Two parallel lines with series capacitor for optimized load sharing and loss reduction
To minimize the losses, the series capacitor must be installed in the transmission line with the lower resistance. The size of the series capacitor that minimizes the total losses is given the following expression:
X L1 - X C X L2
EQUATION1899 V1 EN
RL1 RL 2
(Equation 125)
Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new power line As shown in figure 76 the line loading can easily be increased 1.5-2 times by series compensation. Thus, the required number of transmission lines needed for a certain power transfer can be significantly reduced. The cost of series compensation is small compared to the cost of a transmission line. When evaluating the cost of a
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
transmission system upgrade also the cost of secondary equipment such as eventual upgrading of line protections on the compensated as well as, adjacent lines should be considered. The main advantages of series compensation against the new transmission line within the same corridor are: Significantly reduced investment costs; the same increase in power transmission for up to 90% reduced costs In many cases, the only practical way to increase the transmission capacity of a corridor Series compensation shortens the lead times Environmental impact
EA
Series compensation
EB
New transmission line
en06000594.vsd
IEC06000594 V1 EN
Figure 78:
Series compensation is an important alternative to new transmission lines
Advancements in series compensation using thyristor switching technology A thyristor switched series capacitor (TSSC) can be used for power flow control. This is performed by changing the reactance of the transmission circuit in discrete steps, as shown in figure 79. A TSSC typically consists of a few segments in series that can be inserted independently of each other in order to achieve different total series capacitor reactance.
-jXC -jX C -jXC
Fw
Fw
Fw
Rv
Rv
Rv
en06000595.vsd
IEC06000595 V1 EN
Figure 79:
Thyristor switched series capacitor
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IL
-jXC
+ -
FW
UC jXL
IV
Rv
IEC06000596 V1 EN
en06000596.vsd
Figure 80:
IL IV Line current
Thyristor controlled series capacitor
Current through the thyristor
UC Voltage over the series capacitor XC Rated reactance of the series capacitor
A thyristor controlled series capacitor (TCSC) allows continuous control of the series capacitor reactance. This is achieved by adding current through the capacitor via the parallel thyristor valve path see figure 80. The main circuit of the TCSC consists of a capacitor bank and a thyristor controlled inductive branch connected in parallel. The capacitor bank may have a value of for example, 10...30 /phase and a rated continuous current of 1500...3000 A. The capacitor bank for each phase is mounted on a platform providing full insulation towards earth. The thyristor valve contains a string of series connected high power thyristors with a maximum total blocking voltage in the range of hundreds of kV. The inductor is an air-core reactor with a few mH inductance. The wave forms of a TCSC in capacitive boost mode are shown in figure 81.
2
IL IV UC XC
0 -2 5 0 -5 50 0 -50 0 -20 -40 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.2
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.2
en06000597.vsd
IEC06000597 V1 EN
Figure 81:
TCSC wave forms presented in capacitive boost mode for a typical 50Hz system
The apparent impedance of the TCSC (the impedance seen by the power system) can typically be increased to up to 3 times the physical impedance of the capacitor,
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
see figure 82. This high apparent reactance will mainly be used for damping of power oscillations.
Imperatriz TCSC, Operating range
3.2 3 2.8 2.6 2.4 2.2 2 1.8
Xtcsc/Xc (pu)
Continuous
30 min
10s
1.6 1.4 1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 -0.2 -0.4 0 300 600 900 1200 Continuous 30 min. overload 10s overload
E
1500 Line current (Arms) 1800 2100
F
2400 2700
G
3000
Bypass mode Series5
en06000598.vsd
IEC06000598 V1 EN
Figure 82:
Operating range of a TCSC installed for damping of power oscillations (example)
During continuous valve bypass the TCSC represents an inductive impedance of about 20% of the capacitor impedance. Both operation in capacitive boost mode and valve bypass mode can be used for damping of power swings. The utilization of valve bypass increases the dynamic range of the TCSC and improves the TCSC effectiveness in power oscillation damping.
Challenges in protection of series compensated and adjacent power lines
System planning does not consider any more possible protection issues and difficulties, when deciding for a particular, non conventional solution of certain operation and stability problems. It is supposed that modern communication and state of the art computer technologies provides good basis for the required solution. This applies also to protection issues in series compensated networks. Different physical phenomena, which influence conventional principles of IED protection, like distance protection, phase comparison protection, are well known and accordingly considered in IED design. Some other issues, like influence of controlled thyristors in series capacitor banks are getting increased importance, although not as high as they would deserve. The most important challenges, which influence the operation of different protection functions in the greatest extent, are described in this chapter.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Voltage and current inversion Series capacitors influence the magnitude and the direction of fault currents in series compensated networks. They consequently influence phase angles of voltages measured in different points of series compensated networks and this performances of different protection functions, which have their operation based on properties of measured voltage and current phasors. Voltage inversion Figure 83 presents a part of series compensated line with reactance XL1 between the IED point and the fault in point F of series compensated line. The voltage measurement is supposed to be on the bus side, so that series capacitor appears between the IED point and fault on the protected line. Figure 84 presents the corresponding phasor diagrams for the cases with bypassed and fully inserted series capacitor. Voltage distribution on faulty lossless serial compensated line from fault point F to the bus is linearly dependent on distance from the bus, if there is no capacitor included in scheme (as shown in figure 84). Voltage UM measured at the bus is equal to voltage drop D UL on the faulty line and lags the current IF by 90 electrical degrees. The situation changes with series capacitor included in circuit between the IED point and the fault position. The fault current IF (see figure 84) is increased due to the series capacitor, generally decreases total impedance between the sources and the fault. The reactive voltage drop D UL on XL1 line impedance leads the current by 90 degrees. Voltage drop DUC on series capacitor lags the fault current by 90 degrees. Note that line impedance XL1 could be divided into two parts: one between the IED point and the capacitor and one between the capacitor and the fault position. The resulting voltage UM in IED point is this way proportional to sum of voltage drops on partial impedances between the IED point and the fault position F, as presented by
U M = I F j ( X L1 - X C )
EQUATION1901 V1 EN
(Equation 126)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Source voltage
With bypassed capacitor
With inserted capacitor
Pre -fault voltage
U M UM U
Fault voltage
Source
~
IF
XS XC Z<
XL1 F
en06000605.vsd
IEC06000605 V1 EN
Figure 83:
US xUS
Voltage inversion on series compensated line

xUS US
UM=xU L
IF
x UL
IF
x UC
UM
en06000606.vsd
IEC06000606 V1 EN
Figure 84:
Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and inserted series capacitor during voltage inversion
It is obvious that voltage UM will lead the fault current IF as long as XL1> XC. This situation corresponds, from the directionality point of view, to fault conditions on line without series capacitor. Voltage UM in IED point will lag the fault current IF in case when:
X L1 < X C < X S + X L1
EQUATION1902 V1 EN
(Equation 127)
Where XS is the source impedance behind the IED
The IED point voltage inverses its direction due to presence of series capacitor and its dimension. It is a common practice to call this phenomenon voltage inversion. Its consequences on operation of different protections in series compensated networks depend on their operating principle. The most known effect has voltage
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
inversion on directional measurement of distance IEDs (see chapter "Distance protection" for more details), which must for this reason comprise special measures against this phenomenon. There will be no voltage inversion phenomena for reverse faults in system with VTs located on the bus side of series capacitor. The allocation of VTs to the line side does not eliminate the phenomenon, because it appears again for faults on the bus side of IED point. Current inversion Figure 85 presents part of a series compensated line with corresponding equivalent voltage source. It is generally anticipated that fault current IF flows on noncompensated lines from power source towards the fault F on the protected line. Series capacitor may change the situation.
Source voltage U With inserted capacitor
UM
Pre -fault voltage With bypassed capacitor
U M
Fault voltage
Source
~
IF
XS XC Z<
XL1 F
en06000607.vsd
IEC06000607 V1 EN
Figure 85:
Current inversion on series compensated line
The relative phase position of fault current IF compared to the source voltage US depends in general on the character of the resultant reactance between the source and the fault position. Two possibilities appear:
X S - X C + X L1 > 0 X S - X C + X L1 < 0
EQUATION1935 V1 EN
(Equation 128)
The first case corresponds also to conditions on non compensated lines and in cases, when the capacitor is bypassed either by spark gap or by the bypass switch, as shown in phasor diagram in figure 86. The resultant reactance is in this case of inductive nature and the fault currents lags source voltage by 90 electrical degrees. The resultant reactance is of capacitive nature in the second case. Fault current will for this reason lead the source voltage by 90 electrical degrees, which means that reactive current will flow from series compensated line to the system. The system conditions are in such case presented by equation 129
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X C > X S + X L1
EQUATION1936 V1 EN
(Equation 129)
HUS
US HUS
IF IF
US
UM=HU L
HUC HUL
en06000608.vsd
IEC06000608 V1 EN
Figure 86:
Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and inserted series capacitor during current inversion
It is a common practice to call this phenomenon current inversion. Its consequences on operation of different protections in series compensated networks depend on their operating principle. The most known effect has current inversion on operation of distance IEDs (as shown in section "Distance protection" for more details), which cannot be used for the protection of series compensated lines with possible current inversion. Equation 129 shows also big dependence of possible current inversion on series compensated lines on location of series capacitors. XL1 = 0 for faults just behind the capacitor when located at line IED and only the source impedance prevents current inversion. Current inversion has been considered for many years only a theoretical possibility due to relatively low values of source impedances (big power plants) compared to the capacitor reactance. The possibility for current inversion in modern networks is increasing and must be studied carefully during system preparatory studies. The current inversion phenomenon should not be studied only for the purposes of protection devices measuring phase currents. Directional comparison protections, based on residual (zero sequence) and negative sequence currents should be considered in studies as well. Current inversion in zero sequence systems with low zero sequence source impedance (a number of power transformers connected in parallel) must be considered as practical possibility in many modern networks. Low frequency transients Series capacitors introduce in power systems oscillations in currents and voltages, which are not common in non-compensated systems. These oscillations have frequencies lower than the rated system frequency and may cause delayed increase of fault currents, delayed operation of spark gaps as well as, delayed operation of protective IEDs. The most obvious difference is generally seen in fault currents. Figure 87 presents a simplified picture of a series compensated network with basic
UM
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
line parameters during fault conditions. We study the basic performances for the same network with and without series capacitor. Possible effects of spark gap flashing or MOV conducting are neglected. The time dependence of fault currents and the difference between them are of interest.
i L(t) RL jXL -jXC
eG (t)
en06000609.vsd
IEC06000609 V1 EN
Figure 87:
Simplified equivalent scheme of SC network during fault conditions
We consider the instantaneous value of generator voltage following the sine wave according to equation 130
eG = EG sin (w t + l )
EQUATION1904 V1 EN
(Equation 130)
The basic loop differential equation describing the circuit in figure 87 without series capacitor is presented by equation 131
LL
diL + RL iL = EG sin (w t + l ) dt
(Equation 131)
EQUATION1905 V1 EN
The solution over line current is presented by group of equations 132

L EG EG - t LL iL = sin (w t + l - j ) + I L ( t = 0) sin ( l - j ) e Z Z
Z = RL 2 + (w LL ) w LL j = atg RL
EQUATION1906 V1 EN
(Equation 132)
The line fault current consists of two components: The steady-state component which magnitude depends on generator voltage and absolute value of impedance included in the circuit The transient DC component, which magnitude depends on the fault incident angle decays with the circuit time constant
LL RL [ s ]
EQUATION1907 V1 EN
(Equation 133)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The basic loop differential equation describing the circuit in figure 87 with series capacitor is presented by equation 134.
d 2il di 1 LL 2 + RL L + iL (t ) = EG w cos (w t + l ) dt dt C L
EQUATION1908 V1 EN
(Equation 134)
The solution over line current is in this case presented by group of equations 135. The fault current consists also here from the steady-state part and the transient part. The difference with non-compensated conditions is that The total loop impedance decreases for the negative reactance of the series capacitor, which in fact increases the magnitude of the fault current The transient part consists of the damped oscillation, which has an angular frequency b and is dying out with a time constant a
EG Z SC sin (w t + l - j ) + [ K1 cos ( b t ) + K 2 sin ( b t )] e -a t
2 2
iL =
Z SC
1 = RL + w LL w CL
EG Z SC sin ( l - j )
K1 = I L ( t = 0) -
EG w LL RL cos ( l - j ) - EG sin ( l ) - U C ( t = 0) - 2 I L ( t = 0) - Z 1 SC K2 = b LL EG RL - 2 Z sin ( l - j ) SC
a= b=
RL 2 LL 1 LL C L 2 RL
4 L2 L
(Equation 135)
EQUATION1909 V1 EN
The transient part has an angular frequency b and is damped out with the timeconstant . The difference in performance of fault currents for a three-phase short circuit at the end of a typical 500 km long 500 kV line is presented in figure 88. The short circuit current on a non-compensated line is lower in magnitude, but comprises at the beginning only a transient DC component, which diminishes completely in approximately 120ms. The final magnitude of the fault current on compensated line is higher due to the decreased apparent impedance of a line (60%
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
compensation degree has been considered for a particular case), but the low frequency oscillation is also obvious. The increase of fault current immediately after the fault incidence (on figure 88 at approximately 21ms) is much slower than on non-compensated line. This occurs due to the energy stored in capacitor before the fault.
10
I[pu]
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.2
10
t[ms ]
en06000610.vsd
IEC06000610 V1 EN
Figure 88:
Short circuit currents for the fault at the end of 500 km long 500 kV line without and with SC
Location of instrument transformers Location of instrument transformers relative to the line end series capacitors plays an important role regarding the dependability and security of a complete protection scheme. It is on the other hand necessary to point out the particular dependence of those protection schemes, which need for their operation information on voltage in IED point. Protection schemes with their operating principle depending on current measurement only, like line current differential protection are relatively independent on CT location. Figure 89 shows schematically the possible locations of instrument transformers related to the position of line-end series capacitor.
CT 1 - jX C CT 2
VT1
IEC06000611 V1 EN
VT 2
en06000611.vsd
Figure 89:
Possible positions of instrument transformers relative to line end series capacitor
Bus side instrument transformers

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
CT1 and VT1 on figure 89 represent the case with bus side instrument transformers. The protection devices are in this case exposed to possible voltage and current inversion for line faults, which decreases the required dependability. In addition to this may series capacitor cause negative apparent impedance to distance IEDs on protected and adjacent lines as well for close-in line faults (see also figure 91 LOC=0%), which requires special design of distance measuring elements to cope with such phenomena. The advantage of such installation is that the protection zone covers also the series capacitor as a part of protected power line, so that line protection will detect and cleared also parallel faults on series capacitor. Line side instrument transformers CT2 and VT2 on figure 89 represent the case with line side instrument transformers. The protective devices will not be exposed to voltage and current inversion for faults on the protected line, which increases the dependability. Distance protection zone 1 may be active in most applications, which is not the case when the bus side instrument transformers are used. Distance IEDs are exposed especially to voltage inversion for close-in reverse faults, which decreases the security. The effect of negative apparent reactance must be studied seriously in case of reverse directed distance protection zones used by distance IEDs for teleprotection schemes. Series capacitors located between the voltage instruments transformers and the buses reduce the apparent zero sequence source impedance and may cause voltage as well as current inversion in zero sequence equivalent networks for line faults. It is for this reason absolutely necessary to study the possible effect on operation of zero sequence directional earth-fault overcurrent protection before its installation. Dual side instrument transformers Installations with line side CT2 and bus side VT1 are not very common. More common are installations with line side VT2 and bus side CT1. They appear as de facto installations also in switchyards with double-bus double-breaker and 1 breaker arrangement. The advantage of such schemes is that the unit protections cover also for shunt faults in series capacitors and at the same time the voltage inversion does not appear for faults on the protected line. Many installations with line-end series capacitors have available voltage instrument transformers on both sides. In such case it is recommended to use the VTs for each particular protection function to best suit its specific characteristics and expectations on dependability and security. The line side VT can for example be used by the distance protection and the bus side VT by the directional residual OC earth fault protection. Apparent impedances and MOV influence Series capacitors reduce due to their character the apparent impedance measured by distance IEDs on protected power lines. Figure 90 presents typical locations of capacitor banks on power lines together with corresponding compensation degrees. Distance IED near the feeding bus will see in different cases fault on remote end bus depending on type of overvoltage protection used on capacitor bank (spark gap or MOV) and SC location on protected power line.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
0% EA
~
33 %
50 %
66 %
100 %
K C = 80% Z<
33%
50 %
33 %
80 %
en06000612.vsd
IEC06000612 V1 EN
Figure 90:
Typical locations of capacitor banks on series compensated line
Implementation of spark gaps for capacitor overvoltage protection makes the picture relatively simple, because they either flash over or not. The apparent impedance corresponds to the impedance of non-compensated line, as shown in figure 91 case KC = 0%.
KC = 80% KC = 0% LOC = 0% KC = 50% LOC = 50% KC = 2 x 33% LOC = 33%, 66% KC = 80% LOC = 100%
jX
jX
jX
jX
jX
en06000613.vsd
IEC06000613 V1 EN
Figure 91:
Apparent impedances seen by distance IED for different SC locations and spark gaps used for overvoltage protection
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
iM
M OV
iL
iC
-jXC
uC
MOV protected series capacitor

20
100
10
50
0 10
10
20
30
40
50
60
50
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
100
Line current as a function of time

20
Capacitor voltage as a function of time
20
10
10
0 10
10
20
30
40
50
60
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
20
20
Capacitor current as a function of time
MOV current as a function of time

en06000614.vsd
IEC06000614 V1 EN
Figure 92:
MOV protected capacitor with examples of capacitor voltage and corresponding currents
The impedance apparent to distance IED is always reduced for the amount of capacitive reactance included between the fault and IED point, when the spark gap does not flash over, as presented for typical cases in figure 91. Here it is necessary to distinguish between two typical cases: Series capacitor only reduces the apparent impedance, but it does not cause wrong directional measurement. Such cases are presented in figure 91 for 50% compensation at 50% of line length and 33% compensation located on 33% and 66% of line length. The remote end compensation has the same effect. The voltage inversion occurs in cases when the capacitor reactance between the IED point and fault appears bigger than the corresponding line reactance, Figure 23, 80% compensation at local end. A voltage inversion occurs in IED point and the distance IED will see wrong direction towards the fault, if no special measures have been introduced in its design.
The situation differs when metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used for capacitor overvoltage protection. MOVs conduct current, for the difference of spark gaps, only when the instantaneous voltage drop over the capacitor becomes higher than the protective voltage level in each half-cycle separately, see figure 92. Extensive studies at Bonneville Power Administration in USA ( ref. Goldsworthy, D,L A Linearized Model for MOV-Protected series capacitors Paper 86SM357 8 IEEE/PES summer meeting in Mexico City July 1986) have resulted in
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
construction of a non-linear equivalent circuit with series connected capacitor and resistor. Their value depends on complete line (fault) current and protection factor kp. The later is defined by equation 136.
kp =
U MOV U NC
(Equation 136)
EQUATION1910 V1 EN
Where UMOV UNC is the maximum instantaneous voltage expected between the capacitor immediately before the MOV has conducted or during operation of the MOV, divaded by 2 is the rated voltage in RMS of the series capacitor
jX
jX
I
Kp In
I
Kp In
=2 I
Kp In
jX
= 10
en06000615.vsd
IEC06000615 V1 EN
Figure 93:
Equivalent impedance of MOV protected capacitor in dependence of protection factor KP
Figure 93 presents three typical cases for series capacitor located at line end (case LOC=0% in figure 91). Series capacitor prevails the scheme as long as the line current remains lower or equal to its protective current level (I kp INC). Line apparent impedance is in this case reduced for the complete reactance of a series capacitor. 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times the protective current level (I 2 kp INC). This information has high importance for setting of distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to earth fault measurement as well as for phase to phase measurement. Series capacitor becomes nearly completely bridged by MOV when the line current becomes higher than 10-times the protective current level (I 10 kp INC).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines
Voltage inversion is not characteristic for the buses and IED points closest to the series compensated line only. It can spread also deeper into the network and this way influences the selection of protection devices (mostly distance IEDs) on remote ends of lines adjacent to the series compensated circuit, and sometimes even deeper in the network.
EA
ZSA
UA ZLA
IA
UD
A UB
IF EB ZSB IB ZLB D ZLF
-jX C F
en06000616.vsd
IEC06000616 V1 EN
Figure 94:
Voltage inversion in series compensated network due to fault current infeed
Voltage at the B bus (as shown in figure 94) is calculated for the loss-less system according to the equation below.
U B = U D + I B jX LB = ( I A + I B ) j ( X LF - X C ) + I B jX LB
EQUATION1911 V1 EN
(Equation 137)
Further development of equation 137 gives the following expressions:

U B = jI B X LB + 1 +
( X LF - X C ) IB
IA
(Equation 138)
EQUATION1912 V1 EN
X C (U B = 0 ) =
X LB + X LF I 1+ A IB
(Equation 139)
EQUATION1913 V1 EN
Equation 138 indicates the fact that the infeed current IA increases the apparent value of capacitive reactance in system: bigger the infeed of fault current, bigger the apparent series capacitor in a complete series compensated network. It is possible to say that equation 139 indicates the deepness of the network to which it will feel the influence of series compensation through the effect of voltage inversion. It is also obvious that the position of series capacitor on compensated line influences in great extent the deepness of voltage inversion in adjacent system. Line impedance XLF between D bus and the fault becomes equal to zero, if the capacitor is installed near the bus and the fault appears just behind the capacitor. This may cause the phenomenon of voltage inversion to be expanded very deep into the adjacent network, especially if on one hand the compensated line is very
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
long with high degree of compensation, and the adjacent lines are, on the other hand, relatively short. Extensive system studies are necessary before final decision is made on implementation and location of series capacitors in network. It requires to correctly estimate their influence on performances of (especially) existing distance IEDs. It is possible that the costs for number of protective devices, which should be replaced by more appropriate ones due to the effect of applied series compensation, influences the future position of series capacitors in power network. Possibilities for voltage inversion at remote buses should not be studied for short circuits with zero fault resistance only. It is necessary to consider cases with higher fault resistances, for which spark gaps or MOVs on series capacitors will not conduct at all. At the same time this kind of investigation must consider also the maximum sensitivity and possible resistive reach of distance protection devices, which on the other hand simplifies the problem. Application of MOVs as non-linear elements for capacitor overvoltage protection makes simple calculations often impossible. Different kinds of steady-state network simulations are in such cases unavoidable.
Distance protection
Distance protection due to its basic characteristics, is the most used protection principle on series compensated and adjacent lines worldwide. It has at the same time caused a lot of challenges to protection society, especially when it comes to directional measurement and transient overreach. Distance IED in fact does not measure impedance or quotient between line current and voltage. Quantity 1= Operating quantity - Restraing quantity Quantity 2= Polarizing quantity. Typically Operating quantity is the replica impedance drop. Restraining quantity is the system voltage Polarizing quantity shapes the characteristics in different way and is not discussed here. Distance IEDs comprise in their replica impedance only the replicas of line inductance and resistance, but they do not comprise any replica of series capacitor on the protected line and its protection circuits (spark gap and or MOV). This way they form wrong picture of the protected line and all solutions related to distance protection of series compensated and adjacent lines are concentrated on finding some parallel ways, which may help eliminating the basic reason for wrong measurement. The most known of them are decrease of the reach due to presence of series capacitor, which apparently decreases the line reactance, and introduction of permanent memory voltage in directional measurement. Series compensated and adjacent lines are often the more important links in a transmission networks and delayed fault clearance is undesirable. This makes it necessary to install distance protection in combination with telecommunication. The most common is distance protection in Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip mode (POTT).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Underreaching and overreaching schemes It is a basic rule that the underreaching distance protection zone should under no circumstances overreach for the fault at the remote end bus, and the overreaching zone should always, under all system conditions, cover the same fault. In order to obtain section selectivity, the first distance (underreaching) protection zone must be set to a reach less than the reactance of the compensated line in accordance with figure 95.
Zone 2 A A
-j X
C
B Zone 1 A X 12 G Zone 1 B DB
X 11 DA Zone 2 B
en06000618.vsd
IEC06000618 V1 EN
Figure 95:
Underreaching (Zone 1) and overreaching (Zone 2) on series compensated line
The underreaching zone will have reduced reach in cases of bypassed series capacitor, as shown in the dashed line in figure 95. The overreaching zone (Zone 2) can this way cover bigger portion of the protected line, but must always cover with certain margin the remote end bus. Distance protection Zone 1 is often set to
X Z 1 = K S ( X 11 + X 12 - X C )
EQUATION1914 V1 EN
(Equation 140)
Here KS is a safety factor, presented graphically in figure 96, which covers for possible overreaching due to low frequency (sub-harmonic) oscillations. Here it should be noted separately that compensation degree KC in figure 96 relates to total system reactance, inclusive line and source impedance reactance. The same setting applies regardless MOV or spark gaps are used for capacitor overvoltage protection. Equation 140 is applicable for the case when the VTs are located on the bus side of series capacitor. It is possible to remove XC from the equation in cases of VTs installed in line side, but it is still necessary to consider the safety factor KS . If the capacitor is out of service or bypassed, the reach with these settings can be less than 50% of protected line dependent on compensation degree and there will be a section, G in figure 95, of the power line where no tripping occurs from either end.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
KS
1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 20 40 60 80 100 KC[%]

en06000619.vsd
IEC06000619 V1 EN
Figure 96:
Underreaching safety factor KS in dependence on system compensation degree KC
For that reason permissive underreaching schemes can hardly be used as a main protection. Permissive overreaching distance protection or some kind of directional or unit protection must be used. The overreach must be of an order so it overreaches when the capacitor is bypassed or out of service. Figure 97 shows the permissive zones. The first underreaching zone can be kept in the total protection but it only has the feature of a back-up protection for close up faults. The overreach is usually of the same order as the permissive zone. When the capacitor is in operation the permissive zone will have a very high degree of overreach which can be considered as a disadvantage from a security point of view.
A - jX C X 11
Permissive Zone
DA
B
B
Permissive Zone
A
X 12
DB
en06000620.vsd
IEC06000620 V1 EN
Figure 97:
Permissive overreach distance protection scheme
Negative IED impedance, positive fault current (voltage inversion) Assume in equation 141
X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN
(Equation 141)
and in figure 98 a three phase fault occurs beyond the capacitor. The resultant IED impedance seen from the DB IED location to the fault may become negative (voltage inversion) until the spark gap has flashed. Distance protections of adjacent power lines shown in figure 98 are influenced by this negative impedance. If the intermediate infeed of short circuit power by other lines is taken into consideration, the negative voltage drop on XC is amplified and a
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
protection far away from the faulty line can maloperate by its instantaneous operating distance zone, if no precaution is taken. Impedances seen by distance IEDs on adjacent power lines are presented by equations 142 to 145.
I = I1 + I 2 + I 3
EQUATION1915 V1 EN
(Equation 142)
X DA1 = X A1 EQUATION1916 V1 EN
IF I A1
( X C - X 11 )
(Equation 143)
X DA 2 = X A 2 EQUATION1917 V1 EN
IF I A2
( X C - X 11 )
(Equation 144)
X DA 3 = X A 3 EQUATION1918 V1 EN
IF I A3
( X C - X 11 )
(Equation 145)
A1 jX 1 A2 jX 2 A3 jX 3
DA1 DA2 DA3
B
IA1
jX11
IA2 IF
-jX C F
IA3
DB
en06000621.vsd
IEC06000621 V1 EN
Figure 98:
Distance IED on adjacent power lines are influenced by the negative impedance
Normally the first zone of this protection must be delayed until the gap flashing has taken place. If the delay is not acceptable, some directional comparison must also be added to the protection of all adjacent power lines. As stated above, a good protection system must be able to operate correctly both before and after gap flashing occurs. Distance protection can be used, but careful studies must be made for each individual case. The rationale described applies to both conventional spark gap and MOV protected capacitors. Special attention should be paid to selection of distance protection on shorter adjacent power lines in cases of series capacitors located at the line end. In such case the reactance of a short adjacent line may be lower than the capacitor
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
reactance and voltage inversion phenomenon may occur also on remote end of adjacent lines. Distance protection of such line must have built-in functionality which applies normally to protection of series compensated lines. It usually takes a bit of a time before the spark gap flashes, and sometimes the fault current will be of such a magnitude that there will not be any flashover and the negative impedance will be sustained. If equation 146
X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN
(Equation 146)
in figure 99, the fault current will have the same direction as when the capacitor is bypassed. So, the directional measurement is correct but the impedance measured is negative and if the characteristic crosses the origin shown in figure 99 the IED cannot operate. However, if there is a memory circuit designed so it covers the negative impedance, a three phase fault can be successfully cleared by the distance protection. As soon as the spark gap has flashed the situation for protection will be as for an ordinary fault. However, a good protection system should be able to operate correctly before and after gap flashing occurs.
jX X 12
jX
X12
R RV
X 11
X FW
X11
R
R
R FW
X RV
ZS XC
ZS XC
en06000625.vsd
IEC06000625 V1 EN
en06000584_small.vsd
IEC06000584-SMALL V1 EN
Figure 99:
Cross-polarized quadrilateral characteristic
Figure 100:
Quadrilateral characteristic with separate impedance and directional measurement
If the distance protection is equipped with an earth-fault measuring unit, the negative impedance occurs when
3 X C > 2 X 1 _ 11 + X 0 _ 11
EQUATION1919 V1 EN
(Equation 147)
Cross-polarized distance protection (either with mho or quadrilateral characteristic) will normally handle earth-faults satisfactory if the negative impedance occurs
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
inside the characteristic. The operating area for negative impedance depends upon the magnitude of the source impedance and calculations must be made on a case by case basis, as shown in figure 99. Distance IEDs with separate impedance and directional measurement offer additional setting and operational flexibility when it comes to measurement of negative apparent impedance (as shown in figure 100). Negative IED impedance, negative fault current (current inversion) If equation 148
XC > X S + X l1
EQUATION2036 V1 EN
(Equation 148)
in figure 85 and a fault occurs behind the capacitor, the resultant reactance becomes negative and the fault current will have an opposite direction compared with fault current in a power line without a capacitor (current inversion). The negative direction of the fault current will persist until the spark gap has flashed. Sometimes there will be no flashover at all, because the fault current is less than the setting value of the spark gap. The negative fault current will cause a high voltage on the network. The situation will be the same even if a MOV is used. However, depending upon the setting of the MOV, the fault current will have a resistive component. The problems described here are accentuated with a three phase or phase-to-phase fault, but the negative fault current can also exist for a single-phase fault. The condition for a negative current in case of an earth fault can be written as follows:
3 X C > 2 X 1_ L1 + X 0 _ L1 + 2 X 0 _ S + X 1_ S
EQUATION1920 V1 EN
(Equation 149)
All designations relates to figure 85. A good protection system must be able to cope with both positive and negative direction of the fault current, if such conditions can occur. A distance protection cannot operate for negative fault current. The directional element gives the wrong direction. Therefore, if a problem with negative fault current exists, distance protection is not a suitable solution. In practice, negative fault current seldom occurs. In normal network configurations the gaps will flash in this case. Double circuit, parallel operating series compensated lines Two parallel power lines running in electrically close vicinity to each other and ending at the same busbar at both ends (as shown in figure 101) causes some challenges for distance protection because of the mutual impedance in the zero sequence system. The current reversal phenomenon also raises problems from the protection point of view, particularly when the power lines are short and when permissive overreach schemes are used.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ZAC
-jXC
ZCB
Zm0AC ZAC
-jXC
Zm0CB ZCB
en06000627.vsd
IEC06000627 V1 EN
Figure 101:
Double circuit, parallel operating line
Zero sequence mutual impedance Zm0 cannot significantly influence the operation of distance protection as long as both circuits are operating in parallel and all precautions related to settings of distance protection on series compensated line have been considered. Influence of disconnected parallel circuit, which is earthed at both ends, on operation of distance protection on operating circuit is known. Series compensation additionally exaggerates the effect of zero sequence mutual impedance between two circuits, see figure 102. It presents a zero sequence equivalent circuit for a fault at B bus of a double circuit line with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both IEDs. The effect of zero sequence mutual impedance on possible overreaching of distance IEDs at A bus is increased compared to non compensated operation, because series capacitor does not compensate for this reactance. The reach of underreaching distance protection zone 1 for phase-to-earth measuring loops must further be decreased for such operating conditions.
A jXm0 j(X0L -Xm0) -jXC j(X0L -Xm0) -jXC B
en06000628.vsd
IEC06000628 V1 EN
Figure 102:
Zero sequence equivalent circuit of a series compensated double circuit line with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both IEDs
Zero sequence mutual impedance may disturb also correct operation of distance protection for external evolving faults, when one circuit has already been disconnected in one phase and runs non-symmetrical during dead time of single pole autoreclosing cycle. All such operating conditions must carefully be studied in advance and simulated by dynamic simulations in order to fine tune settings of distance IEDs. If the fault occurs in point F of the parallel operating circuits, as presented in figure 103, than also one distance IED (operating in POTT teleprotection scheme) on parallel, healthy circuit will send a carrier signal CSAB to the remote line end, where this signal will be received as a carrier receive signal CRBB.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RAA
IFC1
F
IFC1 RBA
RAA
IFC1
F
RBA
RAB
CSAB
IFC2
RBB
CRBB
RAB
CSAB
IFC2
RBB
CRBB
en06000629.vsd
IEC06000629 V1 EN
Figure 103:
Current reversal phenomenon on parallel operating circuits
It is possible to expect faster IED operation and breaker opening at the bus closer to fault, which will reverse the current direction in healthy circuit. Distance IED RBB will suddenly detect fault in forward direction and, if CRBB signal is still present due to long reset time of IED RAB and especially telecommunication equipment, trip its related circuit breaker, since all conditions for POTT have been fulfilled. Zero sequence mutual impedance will additionally influence this process, since it increases the magnitude of fault current in healthy circuit after the opening of first circuit breaker. The so called current reversal phenomenon may cause unwanted operation of protection on healthy circuit and this way endangers even more the complete system stability. To avoid the unwanted tripping, some manufacturers provide a feature in their distance protection which detects that the fault current has changed in direction and temporarily blocks distance protection. Another method employed is to temporarily block the signals received at the healthy line as soon as the parallel faulty line protection initiates tripping. The second mentioned method has an advantage in that not the whole protection is blocked for the short period. The disadvantage is that a local communication is needed between two protection devices in the neighboring bays of the same substation. Distance protection used on series compensated lines must have a high overreach to cover the whole transmission line also when the capacitors are bypassed or out of service. When the capacitors are in service, the overreach will increase tremendously and the whole system will be very sensitive for false teleprotection signals. Current reversal difficulties will be accentuated because the ratio of mutual impedance against self-impedance will be much higher than for a non-compensated line. If non-unit protection is to be used in a directional comparison mode, schemes based on negative sequence quantities offer the advantage that they are insensitive to mutual coupling. However, they can only be used for phase-to-earth and phase-tophase faults. For three-phase faults an additional protection must be provided.
3.6.2.2
Setting guidelines General

The settings for the distance protection function are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in the distance protection function.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting calculations: Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under transient conditions. Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated value of the earth-return compensation factor. The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources. The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance. The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is considerable, the effect must be recognized. Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.
Setting of zone1
The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line. In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in your application. We recommend to compensate setting for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. The setting of earth fault reach should be selected to be <85% also when parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).
The first overreaching zone (normally zone2) must detect faults on the whole protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for zone1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location. The setting must not exceed 80% of the following impedances: The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest adjacent line. The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected line.
If the requirements in the bulletlisted paragraphs above gives a zone2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone2 must not be reduced
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions. The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at remote end is highlighted with a simple example below. If a fault occurs at point F (as shown in figure 104, also for the explanation of all abbreviations used), the IED at point A senses the impedance:
ZAF = ZAC +
EQUATION302 V2 EN
ZCF
(Equation 150)
Z AC
Z CD
IA
Z CF
I A+ IB Z< IB
en05000457.vsd
IEC05000457 V1 EN
Figure 104:
The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the backup protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes. Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines. Equation 151 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed and so on.
Zrev 1.2 ZL Z2rem

EQUATION1525 V3 EN
(Equation 151)
Where: ZL Z2rem is the protected line impedance is zone2 setting at remote end of protected line.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction to obtain certain sensitivity.
Series compensated and adjacent lines

Directional control The directional function (ZDSRDIR) which is able to cope with the condition at voltage reversal, shall be used in all IEDs with conventional distance protection (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS). This function is necessary in the protection on compensated lines as well as all non-compensated lines connected to this busbar (adjacent lines). All protections that can be exposed to voltage reversal must have the special directional function, including the protections on busbar where the voltage can be reversed by series compensated lines not terminated to this busbar. The directional function is controlled by faulty phase criteria. These criteria must identify all forward and reverse faults that can cause voltage reversal. Setting of the corresponding reach of the impedance measuring elements is separate for reactive and resistive reach and independent of each other for phase-to-earth and for phaseto-phase measurement. It is also necessary to consider the minimum load impedance limiting conditions: Setting of zone 1 A voltage reversal can cause an artificial internal fault (voltage zero) on faulty line as well as on the adjacent lines. This artificial fault always have a resistive component, this is however small and can mostly not be used to prevent tripping of a healthy adjacent line. An independent tripping zone 1 facing a bus which can be exposed to voltage reversal have to be set with reduced reach with respect to this false fault. When the fault can move and pass the bus, the zone 1 in this station must be blocked. Protection further out in the net must be set with respect to this apparent fault as the protection at the bus. Different settings of the reach for the zone (ZMCPDIS) characteristic in forward and reverse direction makes it possible to optimize the settings in order to maximize dependability and security for independent zone1. Due to the sub-harmonic oscillation swinging caused by the series capacitor at fault conditions the reach of the under-reaching zone 1 must be further reduced. Zone 1 can only be set with a percentage reach to the artificial fault according to the curve in 105
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
% 100 80 60 40 20 0
C 20 40 60 80 100 %
99000202.vsd
IEC99000202 V1 EN
Figure 105:
Reduced reach due to the expected sub-harmonic oscillations at different degrees of compensation
X c = degree of compensation c X l
EQUATION1894 V1 EN
(Equation 152)
Xc is the reactance of the series capacitor p is the maximum allowable reach for an under-reaching zone with respect to the subharmonic swinging related to the resulting fundamental frequency reactance the zone is not allowed to over-reach. The degree of compensation C in figure 105 has to be interpreted as the relation between series capacitor reactance XC and the total positive sequence reactance X1 to the driving source to the fault. If only the line reactance is used the degree of compensation will be too high and the zone 1 reach unnecessary reduced. The highest degree of compensation will occur at three phase fault and therefore the calculation need only to be performed for three phase faults. The compensation degree in earth return path is different than in phases. It is for this reason possible to calculate a compensation degree separately for the phase-tophase and three-phase faults on one side and for the single phase-to-earth fault loops on the other side. Different settings of the reach for the ph-ph faults and ph-E loops makes it possible to minimise the necessary decrease of the reach for different types of faults.

Reactive Reach
Compensated lines with the capacitor into the zone 1 reach :
A XLLOC XL
en07000063.vsd
IEC07000063 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
XC
Figure 106:
Simplified single line diagram of series capacitor located at XLLOC ohm from A station
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
jX
X12
R RV
X FW
X11
R R FW
X RV
ZS ZS
XC
en06000584.vsd
IEC06000584 V1 EN
Figure 107:
Forward direction: Where XLLoc
Measured impedance at voltage inversion
equals line reactance up to the series capacitor(in the picture approximate 33% of XLine) is set to (XLindex-XC) p/100. is defined according to figure 105 is safety factor for fast operation of Zone 1
X1
p 1,2 Compensated line with the series capacitor not into the reach of zone 1. The setting is thus:
X1
is set to (XLine-XC) p/100.
When the calculation of XFw gives a negative value the zone 1 must be permanently blocked. For protection on non compensated lines facing series capacitor on next line. The setting is thus:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X1 is set to (XLine-XC K) p/100. K equals side infeed factor at next busbar. When the calculation of XFw gives a negative value the zone 1 must be permanently blocked.
Fault resistance The resistive reach is, for all affected applications, restricted by the set reactive reach and the load impedance and same conditions apply as for a non-compensated network. However, special notice has to be taken during settings calculations due to the ZnO because 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times the protective current level. This information has high importance for setting of distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to earth- fault measurement as well as, for phase-to-phase measurement. Overreaching zone 2 In series compensated network where independent tripping zones will have reduced reach due to the negative reactance in the capacitor and the sub-harmonic swinging the tripping will to a high degree be achieved by the communication scheme. With the reduced reach of the under-reaching zones not providing effective protection for all faults along the length of the line, it becomes essential to provide over-reaching schemes like permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) or blocking scheme can be used. Thus it is of great importance that the zone 2 can detect faults on the whole line both with the series capacitor in operation and when the capacitor is bridged (short circuited). It is supposed also in this case that the reactive reach for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-earth faults is the same. The X1Fw, for all lines affected by the series capacito, are set to: X1 >= 1,5 XLine
The safety factor of 1.5 appears due to speed requirements and possible under reaching caused by the sub harmonic oscillations. The increased reach related to the one used in non compensated system is recommended for all protections in the vicinity of series capacitors to compensate for delay in the operation caused by the sub harmonic swinging. Settings of the resistive reaches are limited according to the minimum load impedance.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Reverse zone The reverse zone that is normally used in the communication schemes for functions like fault current reversal logic, weak-in-feed logic or issuing carrier send in blocking scheme must detect all faults in the reverse direction which is detected in the opposite IED by the overreaching zone 2. The maximum reach for the protection in the opposite IED can be achieved with the series capacitor in operation. The reactive reach can be set according to the following formula: X1=1.3X12Rem-0.5(X1L-XC) Settings of the resistive reaches are according to the minimum load impedance: Optional higher distance protection zones When some additional distance protection zones (zone 4, for example) are used they must be set according to the influence of the series capacitor.

Parallel line in service Setting of zone1 With reference to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling", the zone reach can be set to 85% of protected line. Parallel line in service setting of zone2 Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 64 in section "Parallel line in service". The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to at least:
R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN
(Equation 153)
X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
EQUATION554 V1 EN
(Equation 154)
K 0 = 1Z 0m 2 Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
(Equation 155)
EQUATION1426 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X 0m Im( B ) Re( B ) 2 + Im( B ) 2

(Equation 156)
X 0 m Re( B ) Re( B ) 2 + Im( B ) 2

(Equation 157)
Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single phase-to-earth-faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zerosequence resistance and reactance) equal to:
R 0E Xm0 = R 0 1 + ------------------------- 2 2 R0 + X0
(Equation 158)
2
EQUATION561 V1 EN
X m0 X 0E = X 0 1 ------------------------- 2 2 R0 + X0
EQUATION562 V1 EN
(Equation 159)
Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, and separately for phase-tophase (R1PP), and phase-to-earth loop (R1PE) measurement. Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults (R1PP) and for the phase-to-earth faults (RFPE) for each zone. Set all remaining reach setting parameters independently of each other for each distance zone. The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 160.
1 R = -- ( 2 R1PE + R0PE ) + RFPE 3
EQUATION567 V1 EN
(Equation 160)
+ X0 j loop = arctan 2X1PE + R0 2 R1PE

(Equation 161)
EQUATION1457 V1 EN
Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone1 must follow the following condition:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RFPE 4.5 X 1
EQUATION569 V2 EN
(Equation 162)
The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault resistance for phase-to-earth faults. Limit the setting of the zone1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement to:
RFPP 3 X 1
EQUATION570 V2 EN
(Equation 163)
The following instructions is valid when the load encroachment function is not activated, which is done by setting the parameter Rld for the Phase Selector to its upper limit. If the load encroachment function is to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the IED boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance (/phase) is calculated as:
EQUATION571 V1 EN
(Equation 164)
Umin Z load = --------------------3 Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN
(Equation 165)
Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions. Because a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation under combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.
RFPE 0.8 Z load
EQUATION792 V1 EN
(Equation 166)
This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected loadimpedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation below:
2 R1 + R 0 2 X1+ X 0
sin

(Equation 167)
Where: is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimum load impedance conditions.
RFPP 1.6 Zload
EQUATION579 V2 EN
(Equation 168)
R1PP RFPP 1.6 Z loadmin cosJ -------------- sinJ X1PP
EQUATION580 V1 EN
All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element is in the protection scheme. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the description of Power swing detection (ZMRPSB) function.
224
RFP
(Equation 169) Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated
The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the description of the phase selection with load encroachment function, section "Setting guidelines". If the characteristic for the impedance measurement is shaped with the load encroachment algorithm, the parameter RLdFw and the corresponding load angle ArgLd must be set according to the minimum load impedance.
The operation of the distance function can be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE. The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen base current for the analog input channels. The value has been proven in practice to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of IED base current. This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines. If the load current compensation is activated, there is an additional criteria IMinOpIN that will block the phase-earth loop if the 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of IMinOpIN is 5% of the IED base current IBase. The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.
The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of each other. Distance protection zone1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the ph-E (tPE) and for the ph-ph (tPP) measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.
3.6.2.3
Setting parameters
Settings for ZMCPDIS are valid for zone 1, while settings for ZMCAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 53:
ZMCPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 - 3000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 1000 10 - 1000 5 - 1000 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
OperationPP X1FwPP R1PP RFFwPP X1RvPP RFRvPP Timer tPP tPP OperationPE X1FwPE R1PE X0PE R0PE RFFwPE X1RvPE RFRvPE Timer tPE tPE IMinOpPP IMinOpPE IMinOpIN
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/l s ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/l s %IB %IB %IB
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 1 1 1
On 30.00 5.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 On 0.000 On 30.00 5.00 100.00 47.00 100.00 30.00 100.00 On 0.000 20 20 5
Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay of trip, Ph-E Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Earth loops
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 54:
ZMCAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 - 3000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 1000 10 - 1000 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
OperationPP X1FwPP R1PP RFFwPP X1RvPP RFRvPP Timer tPP tPP OperationPE X1FwPE R1PE X0PE R0PE RFFwPE X1RvPE RFRvPE Timer tPE tPE IMinOpPP IMinOpPE
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/l s ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/l s %IB %IB
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 1 1
On 30.00 5.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 On 0.000 On 30.00 5.00 100.00 47.00 100.00 30.00 100.00 On 0.000 20 20
Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay of trip, Ph-E Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 55:
Name OperationSC IBase UBase IMinOpPE IMinOpPP ArgNegRes ArgDir INReleasePE INBlockPP OperationLdCh RLdFw RLdRv ArgLd X1FwPP R1PP RFFwPP X1RvPP RFRvPP X1FwPE R1PE X0FwPE R0PE RFFwPE X1RvPE X0RvPE RFRvPE
ZDSRDIR Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) NoSeriesComp SeriesComp 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 5 - 30 5 - 30 90 - 175 5 - 45 10 - 100 10 - 100 Off On 1.00 - 3000.00 1.00 - 3000.00 5 - 70 0.50 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 Unit A kV %IB %IB Deg Deg %IPh %IPh ohm/p ohm/p Deg ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l Step 1 0.05 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default SeriesComp 3000 400.00 5 10 130 15 20 40 On 80.00 80.00 30 40.00 7.00 30.00 40.00 30.00 40.00 7.00 120.00 20.00 100.00 40.00 120.00 100.00 Description Special directional criteria for voltage reversal Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops Operation of load discrimination characteristic Forward resistive reach within the load impedance area Reverse resistive reach within the load impedance area Load angle determining the load impedance area Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhPh, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E, forward Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, PhE, reverse Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS
Identification
Function description Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic IEC 61850 identification FDPSPDIS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21
3.6.3
3.6.3.1
Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
3.6.3.2
Application
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance measuring function depending on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the measuring zones without interfering with the load. A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set values. The extensive output signals from FDPSPDIS give also important information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.
3.6.3.3
Setting guidelines
The following setting guideline consider normal overhead lines applications where loop and line is greater than 60.
Load encroachment characteristics
The phase selector must at least cover the overreaching zone 2 in order to achieve correct phase selection for utilizing single-phase autoreclosing for faults on the entire line. It is not necessary to cover all distance protection zones. A safety margin of at least 10% is recommended. In order to get operation from distance zones , the phase selection outputs STCNDZ or STCNDLE must be connected to input on ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
For normal overhead lines, the angle for the loop impedance for phase-to-earth fault is defined according to equation 170.
arctan j =
EQUATION2115 V1 EN
X1L + XN R1L + RN
(Equation 170)
In some applications, for instance cable lines, the angle of the loop might be less than 60. In these applications, the settings of fault resistance coverage in forward and reverse direction, RFFwPE and RFRvPE for phase-to-earth faults and RFFwPP and RFRvPP for phase-to-phase faults have to be increased to avoid that FDPSPDIS characteristic shall cut off some part of the zone characteristic. The necessary increased setting of the fault resistance coverage can be derived from trigonometric evaluation of the basic characteristic for respectively fault type. Phase-to-earth fault in forward direction With reference to figure 108, the following equations for the setting calculations can be obtained. Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS and index Zm reference settings for Distance protection function (ZMQPDIS).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X
( W / loop)
3 1 6 2 6 4 5
60
60
8
R ( W / loop)
3
IEC09000043 V1 EN
5 IEC09000043_1_en.vsd
Figure 108:
Relation between distance protection ZMQPDIS and FDPSPDIS for phase-to-earth fault loop>60 (setting parameters in italic)
1 FDPSPDIS (red line) 2 ZMQPDIS 3 RFRvPEPHS 4 (X1PHS+XN)/tan(60) 5 RFFwPEPHS 6 RFPEZm 7 X1PHS+XN 8 loop 9 X1ZM+XN
Reactive reach The reactive reach in forward direction must as minimum be set to cover the measuring zone used in the Teleprotection schemes, mostly zone 2. Equation 171 and equation 172 gives the minimum recommended reactive reach.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X1PHS 1.44 X1Zm

EQUATION1309 V1 EN
(Equation 171)
X0 PHS 1.44 X0 Zm
EQUATION1310 V1 EN
(Equation 172)
where: X1Zm 1.44 X0Zm is the reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS, and the constant is a safety margin is the zero-sequence reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS
The reactive reach in reverse direction is automatically set to the same reach as for forward direction. No additional setting is required. Fault resistance reach The resistive reach must cover RFPE for the overreaching zone to be covered, mostly zone 2. Consider the longest overreaching zone if correct fault selection is important in the application. Equation 173 gives the minimum recommended resistive reach.
RFFwPEmin
EQUATION1312 V2 EN
1.1 RFPEzm
(Equation 173)
where:
RFPEZm is the setting RFPE for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS .
The security margin has to be increased to at least 1.2 in the case where loop<60 to avoid that FDPSPDIS characteristic shall cut off some part of the zone measurement characteristic. Phase-to-earth fault in reverse direction Reactive reach The reactive reach in reverse direction is the same as for forward so no additional setting is required. Resistive reach The resistive reach in reverse direction must be set longer than the longest reverse zones. In blocking schemes it must be set longer than the overreaching zone at remote end that is used in the communication scheme. In equation 174 the index ZmRv references the specific zone to be coordinated to.
RFRvPE min 1.2 RFPE ZmRv
EQUATION1316 V1 EN
(Equation 174)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction Reactive reach The reach in reactive direction is determined by phase-to-earth reach setting X1. No extra setting is required. Resistive reach In the same way as for phase-to-earth fault, the reach is automatically calculated based on setting X1. The reach will be X1/tan(60) =X1/(3). Fault resistance reach The fault resistance reaches in forward direction RFFwPP, must cover RFPPZm with at least 25% margin. RFPPZm is the setting of fault resistance for phase-tophase fault for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS, see figure 109. The minimum recommended reach can be calculated according to equation 175.
RFFwPP 1.25 RFPP zm
where:
RFPPZm is the setting of the longest reach of the overreaching zones that must be covered by FDPSPDIS .
Equation 175 modified is applicable also for the RFRvPP as follows:
RFRvPPmin
EQUATION2264 V1 EN
1.25 RFPPzmRv
Equation 175 is also valid for three-phase fault. The proposed margin of 25% will cater for the risk of cut off of the zone measuring characteristic that might occur at three-phase fault when FDPSPDIS characteristic angle is changed from 60 degrees to 90 degrees (rotated 30 anti-clock wise).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X ( W / phase)
3 1
6 2
60
60
8
R (W / phase)
5 IEC09000257_1_en.vsd
IEC09000257 V1 EN
Figure 109:
Relation between distance protection (ZMQPDIS) and FDPSPDIScharacteristic for phase-to-phase fault for line>60 (setting parameters in italic)
1 FDPSPDIS (red line) 2 ZMQPDIS 3 0.5 RFRvPP PHS 4
tan ( 60 )
5 0.5 RFFwPPPHS 6 0.5 RFPPZm 7 X1PHS 8 X1Zm
X1PHS
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic
The procedure for calculating the settings for the load encroachment consist basically to define the load angle ArgLd, the blinder RLdFw in forward direction and blinder RLdRv in reverse direction, as shown in figure 110.
X
RLdFw ArgLd ArgLd R
ArgLd
RLdRv
ArgLd
IEC09000050 V1 EN
Figure 110:
Load encroachment characteristic
The load angle ArgLd is the same in forward and reverse direction, so it could be suitable to begin to calculate the setting for that parameter. Set the parameter to the maximum possible load angle at maximum active load. A value bigger than 20 must be used. The blinder in forward direction, RLdFw, can be calculated according to equation 176.
RLdFw = 0.8 U min P exp max
2
where:
Pexp max is the maximum exporting active power Umin

0.8 is the minimum voltage for which the Pexp max occurs is a security factor to ensure that the setting of RLdFw can be lesser than the calculated minimal resistive load.
The resistive boundary RLdRv for load encroachment characteristic in reverse direction can be calculated in the same way as RLdFw, but use maximum importing power that might occur instead of maximum exporting power and the relevant Umin voltage for this condition.
Minimum operate currents
FDPSPDIShas two current setting parameters which blocks the respective phase-toearth loop and phase-to-phase loop if the RMS value of the phase current (ILn) and phase difference current (ILmILn) is below the settable threshold.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The threshold to activate the phase selector for phase-to-earth (IMinOpPE) is set to securely detect a single phase-to-earth fault at the furthest reach of the phase selection. It is recommended to set IMinOpPP to double value of IMinOpPE. The threshold for opening the measuring loop for phase-to-earth fault (INReleasePE) is set securely detect single line-to-earth fault at remote end on the protected line. It is recommended to set INBlockPP to double value of INReleasePE.
3.6.3.4
Table 56:
Name IBase UBase INBlockPP INReleasePE RLdFw RLdRv ArgLd X1 X0 RFFwPP RFRvPP RFFwPE RFRvPE IMinOpPP IMinOpPE
Setting parameters
FDPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 100 10 - 100 1.00 - 3000.00 1.00 - 3000.00 5 - 70 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 5 - 500 5 - 500 Unit A kV %IPh %IPh ohm/p ohm/p Deg ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/l ohm/l ohm/l %IB %IB Step 1 0.01 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 Default 3000 400.00 40 20 80.00 80.00 30 40.00 120.00 30.00 30.00 100.00 100.00 10 5 Description Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops Forward resistive reach within the load impedance area Reverse resistive reach within the load impedance area Load angle determining the load impedance area Positive sequence reactance reach Zero sequence reactance reach Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
Table 57:
Name OperationZ< OperationI> IPh> IN>
FDPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off On Off On 10 - 2500 10 - 2500 Unit %IB %IB Step 1 1 Default On Off 120 20 Description Operation of impedance based measurement Operation of current based measurement Start value for phase over-current element Start value for trip from 3I0 over-current element
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s Step 0.001 0.001 Default Off 3.000 Off 3.000 Description Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay to trip, Ph-E
Name TimerPP tPP TimerPE tPE
3.6.4
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS

Function description IEC 61850 identification ZMHPDIS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21
Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic
S00346 V1 EN
3.6.4.1
Transmission and sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the power system. Full-scheme distance measuring, mho characteristic function (ZMHPDIS) in the IED is designed to meet basic requirements for application on transmission and subtransmission lines (solid earthed systems) although it also can be used on distribution levels.
System earthing
The type of system earthing plays an important role when designing the protection system. In the following some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted. Solid earthed networks In solid earthed systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
xx05000215.vsd
IEC05000215 V1 EN
Figure 111:
The earth-fault current is as high as or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series impedances determine the magnitude of the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance has very limited influence on the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some marginal influence on the earth-fault current in networks with long transmission lines. The earth-fault current at single phase-to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 177:
3I 0 =
3 U L1 Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f
U L1 Z1 + Z N + Z f
(Equation 177)
EQUATION1267 V3 EN
Where: UL1 Z1 Z2 Z0 Zf ZN is the phase to earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault is the positive sequence impedance (/phase) is the negative sequence impedance (/phase) is the zero sequence impedance (/phase) is the fault impedance (), often resistive is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3
The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phaseto-earth voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage. The high zero-sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance measuring technique to detect earth fault. However, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases. Effectively earthed networks A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-fault factor is defined according to equation 52.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
fe =
U max U pn
(Equation 178)
EQUATION1268 V3 EN
X 0 = 3 X1
EQUATION1269 V3 EN
(Equation 179)
R0 R1
EQUATION1270 V3 EN
(Equation 180)
The magnitude of the earth-fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for impedance measuring element to detect earth fault. However, in the same way as for solid earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case. High impedance earthed networks In high impedance networks the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the earth through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor. This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating meshed networks. What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth-fault current is very low compared to the short-circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a magnitude of 3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero-sequence voltage (3U0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop distribution. The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation 181.
3I 0 =
I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
EQUATION1271 V3 EN
(Equation 181)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
where 3I0 IR IL IC is the earth-fault current (A) is the current through the neutral point resistor (A) is the current through the neutral point reactor (A) is the total capacitive earth-fault current (A)
The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position where the inductive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:
wL =
1 3 w C
(Equation 182)
EQUATION1272 V1 EN
Ic
Ic
Ic
IR
IL
en05000216.vsd
IEC05000216 V1 EN
Figure 112:
The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compared to solid earthed networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-toearth faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross-country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth faults. To handle this type phenomena Phase preference logic function (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common to be used in transmission applications. In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and clearance of earth faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of the zero-sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-toearth fault.
All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault occurs on the protected line. The fault infeed will enlarge the fault
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
impedance seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection system and making the settings. With reference to figure 113, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage VA at left side as:
EQUATION1273 V1 EN
(Equation 183)
If we divide VA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side

ZA = Va IA = p ZL + IA + IB IA Rf
(Equation 184)
EQUATION1274 V2 EN
EsA
ZSA
VA A
IA
p*ZL ZL
(1-p)*ZL
IB
VA B ZSB
EsB
Z<
Rf
Z<
en05000217.vsd
IEC05000217 V1 EN
Figure 113:
Influence of fault current infeed from remote end.
The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection. In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment for the mho circle is illustrated to the left in figure 114. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not allowed and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.
Load encroachment
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
jX
jX
Load Load
Load Load
Load Load No operation
Load Load
en06000403.vsd
IEC06000403 V1 EN
Figure 114:
The Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function shapes the characteristic according to the diagram on the right in figure 114. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd (see figure 115) for the Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function (FMPSPDIS), the zone reach can be expanded according to the diagram on the right in figure 114 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. The part of the load encroachment sector that comes inside the mho circle will not cause a trip if FMPSPDIS is activated for the zone measurement. This is valid in both directions.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RLdFw ArgLd ArgLd R
ArgLd
RLdRv
ArgLd
IEC09000127 V1 EN
Figure 115:
Load encroachment of Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS characteristic
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferably be switched off. The main settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS. The operation of load encroachment function is always activated. To deactivate the function, setting LoadEnchMode should be set off or the setting of RLdFw and RLdRv must be set to a value much higher than the maximal load impedance.
The definition of short, medium and long lines is found in IEEE Std C37.113-1999. The length classification is defined by the ratio of the source impedance at the protected lines terminal to the protected lines impedance (SIR). SIRs of about 4 or greater generally define a short line. Medium lines are those with SIRs greater than 0.5 and less than 4. In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see table 47.
Table 58:

Un 110 kV 1.1-5.5 km 5-11 km Un 500 kV 5-25 km 25-50 km
The use of load encroachment algorithm in Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic function (ZMHPDIS) improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance (see to the right of figure 114). For very short line applications the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to that the voltage drop distribution through out the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching. Load encroachment is normally no problems for short line applications so the load encroachment function could be switched off meaning LoadEnchMode = Off. This will increase the possibility to detect resistive close-in faults.
For long transmission lines the load encroachment will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for phase-toearth fault at remote end of a long line when the line is heavy loaded. What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection is noted in table 59.
Table 59:

The possibility to use the binary information from the load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated). The possibility to also use blinder together with load encroachment algorithm will considerable increase the security but might also lower the dependability since the blinder might cut off a larger part of the operating area of the circle (see to the right of figure 114). It is recommended to use at least one of the load discrimination functions for long heavy loaded transmission lines.

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

General Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary area for new lines. Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the lines. The lines need not to be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The reason to the introduced error in measuring due to mutual coupling is the zero sequence voltage inversion that occurs. It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2% of the self impedance) and it is a practice to neglect them. From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. Those are: 1. 2. 3. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.
One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is not treated any further in this manual. For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line can be in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends. The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the operation condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting groups to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both ends. Five zone distance protection, mho characteristic function (ZMHPDIS) can compensate for the influence of a zero sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by using: The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters. Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected multi circuit line.
Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide mentioned below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic principles also apply to other multi circuit lines.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Parallel line applications In this type of networks, the parallel transmission lines terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common operation modes: 1. 2. 3. parallel line in service. parallel line out of service and earthed. parallel line out of service and not earthed.
Parallel line in service This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and transmission networks. Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 116.
A Z0m
Z<
IEC05000221 V1 EN
Z<
en05000221.vsd
Figure 116:
Class 1, parallel line in service.
Z0 - Z0m Z0m C Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
IEC99000038 V1 EN
Figure 117:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar.
If the current on the parallel line have negative sign compared to the current on the protected line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compare to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach. Calculation for a 400 kV line, where the resistance is excluded, gives with X1L=0.303 /km, X0L=0.88 /km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71%, that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is most pronounced with no infeed in the line terminal closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreach scheme. Parallel line out of service and earthed
A Z0m
Z<
Z<
en05000222.vsd
Figure 118:
A
I0
Z0 Z0m Z0m
I0
Z0 Z0m
99000039.vsd
IEC99000039 V1 EN
Figure 119:
Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends
Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m, which is equal to equation 185.
Z0 E = Z 0 - Z0 m Z0
(Equation 185)
2 2
EQUATION2002 V1 EN
The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be considered when calculating the settings. It is a recommendation to use a
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
separate setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerable when the line is in operation. Parallel line out of service and not earthed
A Z0m
Z<
IEC05000223 V1 EN
Z<
en05000223.vsd
Figure 120:
Parallel line is out of service and not earthed.
When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 120 The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and earthed at both ends.
I0
Z0 Z0m Z0m Z0 Z0m

99000040.vsd
I0
B
IEC99000040 V1 EN
Figure 121:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one circuit disconnected and not earthed.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
1 (2 Z1 + Z0 E + R f 2 Z 0m 3 KU = = 11 Z0 (2 Z1 + Z0 + 3R f (2 Z1 + Z0 ) + R f 3
EQUATION2008 V1 EN
(Equation 186)
This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

A IA T Z< F IB B
IC
Z< -IB
Z< C
IEC09000160 V2 EN
Figure 122:
This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed from remote end", that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will be
Z A = Z AT +
EQUATION2302 V1 EN
IA + IC IA
Z TF
(Equation 187)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
I +I U2 ZC = Z Trf + ZCT + A C Z TF IC U1
(Equation 188)
where ZAT and ZCT IA and IC U2/U1 is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point. is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B. Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).
For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio. Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 122), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure wrong direction. In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone 2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end. Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone 1 settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.
3.6.4.2

The settings for Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic function (ZMHPDIS) are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in ZMHPDIS. The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting calculations:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under transient conditions. Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated value of the earth-return compensation factor. The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources. The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance. The effect of a load transfer between the terminals of the protected fault resistance is considerable, the effect must be recognized. Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.
The setting values of all parameters that belong to ZMHPDIS must correspond to the parameters of the protected line and be coordinated to the selectivity plan for the network. Use different setting groups for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. In this way it is possible to optimize the settings for each system condition. When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection, mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for parameter DirEvalType in ZDMRDIR is vital: alternative Comparator is strongly recommended alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used alternative Impedance should not be used. This alternative is intended for use together with Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)
Setting of zone 1
The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line. In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in your application. We recommend to compensating the setting for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. The setting of earth-fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).
The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
measurement in the same way as for zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end is considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location. The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances: The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest adjacent line. The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected line.
If the requirements in the bullet list above gives a zone 2 reach that gives nonselectivity between the overreaching zone and the shortest outgoing line at the remote end, the time delay of zone 2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone 2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions. The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at remote end is highlighted in the example below. If a fault occurs at point F (see figure 123, also for the explanation of all abbreviations used), the IED at point A senses the impedance:
ZAF = ZAC +
EQUATION302 V2 EN
ZCF
(Equation 189)
Z AC
Z CB F
IA
Z CF
I A+ I B Z< IB
IEC09000256 V1 EN
Figure 123:
The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the backup protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
always covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line terminal for the telecommunication purposes. Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines. Equation 190 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed, and so on.
Zrev 1.2 ZL Z2rem

EQUATION1525 V3 EN
(Equation 190)
In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.

Parallel line in service Setting of zone 1 With reference to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling", the zone reach can be set to 85% of protected line. Parallel line in service Setting of zone 2 Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 117 in section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling". The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to at least:
R0 E = R0 + R0m
EQUATION2009 V1 EN
(Equation 191)
X 0 E = X 0 + X 0m
EQUATION2010 V1 EN
(Equation 192)
Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero-sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
K 0 = 1EQUATION1426 V1 EN
Z 0m 2 Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
(Equation 193)
If needed, enlarge the zone reach due to the reduction by mutual coupling. Consider also the influence on the zone reach due to fault current infeed from adjacent lines. Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single phase-to-earth faults. The equivalent impedance will be according to equation 185. The following instruction is valid when the load encroachment function or blinder function is not activated (BlinderMode=Off).The load encroachment function will not be activated if RLdFw and RLdRv is set to a value higher than expected minimal load impedance. If the load encroachment or blinder function is to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the relay boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance (/phase) is calculated as:
EQUATION571 V1 EN
(Equation 194)
Umin Z load = --------------------3 Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN
(Equation 195)
Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set impedance reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance. For setting of the earth-fault loop, the following formula can be used:
ZPE 1.6
EQUATION1604 V1 EN
Z Load 2(1 - cos( b ))

(Equation 196)
where: Zload jPE = magnitude of minimum load impedance = 180-2g =1802(ArgPE-QLoad)
The formula is derived by trigonometric analyze of the figure 124. The length of the vector from the origin O to the point F on the circle is defined by the law of cosine. The result gives the maximum diameter (RFPE) for which the load impedance touch the circle with the given load condition. Use an extra margin of 20% to give sufficient distance between the calculated minimum load impedance and relay boundary.
jX
rc
ZPE/2
(Ref)
? O
oa |Zl d|/ 2
F ArgLd Load
d|
R
Ohm/phase
|Zl
oa
en06000406.vsd
IEC06000406 V1 EN
Figure 124:
Definition of the setting condition to avoid load encroachment for earth-fault loop
The maximum setting for phase-to-phase fault can be defined by trigonometric analyze of the same figure 124. The formula to avoid load encroachment for the phaseto-phase measuring elements will thus be according to equation 197.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ZPP 1.6
EQUATION1605 V1 EN
Z Load 2 (1 - cos(j PP))

(Equation 197)
where: jPP = 1802(ArgPP-QLoad)
All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element or blinder is activated for the protection zones. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the description of the power swing detection function.

The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the description of Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS), refer to section "Load encroachment characteristics".
The operation of the distance function will be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE. The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen base current for the analog input channels. The values have been proven in practice to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of IBase. The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.
Setting of directional mode
Setting of the directional mode is by default set to forward by setting the parameter DirMode to Forward. The selection of Offset mho can be used for sending block signal in blocking teleprotection scheme, switch onto fault application and so on. The Reverse mode might be use in comparison schemes where it is necessary to absolute discriminate between forward and reverse fault.
Setting of direction for offset mho
If offset mho has been selected, one can select if the offset mho shall be NonDirectional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter OfffsetMhoDir.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
When forward or reverse operation is selected, then the operation characteristic will be cut off by the directional lines used for the mho characteristic. The setting is by default set to Non-Directional.
The required time delays for different distance protection zones are independent of each other. Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to OffDisable-Zone. Different time delays are possible for the phase-to-earthtPE and for the phase-tophase tPP measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.
3.6.4.3
Table 60:
Name Operation IBase UBase DirMode
Setting parameters
ZMHPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Offset Forward Reverse Off On Overreach Underreach Off On 0.005 - 3000.000 10 - 90 0.00 - 3.00 -180 - 180 0.005 - 3000.000 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30 Off On Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off/On Base current Base voltage Direction mode
LoadEncMode ReachMode OpModePE ZPE ZAngPE KN KNAng ZRevPE tPE IMinOpPE OpModePP
ohm/p Deg Deg ohm/p s %IB -
0.001 1 0.01 1 0.001 0.001 1 -
Off Overreach On 30.000 80 0.80 -15 30.000 0.000 20 On
Load encroachment mode Off/On Reach mode Over/Underreach Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Positive sequence impedance setting for Phase-Earth loop Angle for positive sequence line impedance for Phase-Earth loop Magnitud of earth return compensation factor KN Angle for earth return compensation factor KN Reverse reach of the phase to earth loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to earth elements Minimum operation phase to earth current Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops

Name ZPP ZAngPP ZRevPP tPP IMinOpPP Values (Range) 0.005 - 3000.000 10 - 90 0.005 - 3000.000 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30 Unit ohm/p Deg ohm/p s %IB Step 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 1 Default 30.000 85 30.000 0.000 20 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Impedance setting reach for phase to phase elements Angle for positive sequence line impedance for Phase-Phase elements Reverse reach of the phase to phase loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to phase Minimum operation phase to phase current
Table 61:
Name OffsetMhoDir
ZMHPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Non-directional Forward Reverse Off On Off On Unit Step Default Non-directional Description Direction mode for offset mho
OpModetPE OpModetPP
On On
Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-ph
3.6.5
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS

Function description Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1) IEC 61850 identification ZMMPDIS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21
S00346 V1 EN
Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)
ZMMAPDIS
21
S00346 V1 EN
3.6.5.1
Sub transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the power system.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The distance protection function in IED is designed to meet basic requirements for application on transmission and sub transmission lines (solid earthed systems) although it also can be used on distribution levels.
System earthing
The type of system earthing plays an important roll when designing the protection system. In the following some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted. Solid earthed networks In solid earthed systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.
xx05000215.vsd
IEC05000215 V1 EN
Figure 125:
The earth fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series impedances determine the magnitude of the earth fault current. The shunt admittance has very limited influence on the earth fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some marginal influence on the earth fault current in networks with long transmission lines. The earth fault current at single phase-to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation198:
3I 0 =
3 U L1 Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f
U L1 Z1 + Z N + Z f
(Equation 198)
EQUATION1267 V3 EN
Where: UL1 Z1 Z2 Z0 Zf ZN is the phase-to-earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault is the positive sequence impedance (/phase) is the negative sequence impedance (/phase) is the zero sequence impedance (/phase) is the fault impedance (), often resistive is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phaseto-earth voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage. The high zero sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance measuring technique to detect earth fault. However, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases. Effectively earthed networks A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth fault factor is defined according to equation "".
fe = U max U pn
(Equation 199)
EQUATION1268 V3 EN
X 0 = 3 X1
EQUATION1269 V3 EN
(Equation 200)
R0 R1
EQUATION1270 V3 EN
(Equation 201)
The magnitude of the earth fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for impedance measuring element to detect fault. However, in the same way as for solid earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case. High impedance earthed networks In high impedance networks the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the earth through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating meshed. Typically, for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth fault current is very low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a magnitude of 3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence voltage (3U0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop distribution. The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to the formula below:
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN
I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
(Equation 202)
wL =
1 3 w C
(Equation 203)
EQUATION1272 V1 EN
Ic
Ic
Ic
IR
IL
en05000216.vsd
IEC05000216 V1 EN
Figure 126:
The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compare to solid earthed networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-toearth faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
case of cross country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth-faults. To handle this type phenomena a separate function called Phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common to be used in transmission applications. In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and clearance of earth-faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of the zero sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-toearth fault.
All transmission and most all sub transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault occurs on the protected line. The fault infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection system and making the settings. With reference to figure 127, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage Va at left side as:
EQUATION1273 V1 EN
(Equation 204)
If we divide Va by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side
ZA =
Va IA
= p ZL +
IA + IB IA
Rf
(Equation 205)
EQUATION1274 V2 EN
EsA
ZSA
VA A
IA
p*ZL ZL
(1-p)*ZL
IB
VA B ZSB
EsB
Z<
Rf
Z<
en05000217.vsd
IEC05000217 V1 EN
Figure 127:
Influence of fault infeed from remote end.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection.
Load encroachment
In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 128. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of cause not allowed and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection that is, the ability to detect resistive faults. The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure 4. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at remote end. For example for a given setting of the load angle ARGLd for the load encroachment function, the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the right in figure 128 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions. The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. ZMMPDIS function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferable be switched off. The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in the Phase selection with load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X Zm Zm
ZL
ARGLd
ARGLd R
ARGLd RLdRv RLdFw
ARGLd
en05000495.vsd
IEC05000495 V1 EN
Figure 128:
In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see table "Short line application".
Table 62:
Line category

Un 110 kV Un 500 kV 5-25 km 25-50 km
Very short line Short line
1.1-5.5 km 5.5-11 km
The possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-tophase and phase-to-earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 128. For very short line applications the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to that the voltage drop distribution through out the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching. Load encroachment is normally no problems for short line applications so the load encroachment function could be switched off (OperationLdCmp = Off). This will increase the possibility to detect resistive close-in faults.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

For long transmission lines the margin to the load impedance that is, to avoid load encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-earth fault at remote end of a long lines when the line is heavy loaded. The definition of long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection is noted in table 63.
Table 63:

As mentioned in the previous chapter, the possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated).

General Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary area for new lines. Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the parallel lines. The lines need not to be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The reason to the introduced error in measuring due to mutual coupling is the zero sequence voltage inversion that occurs. It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is practice to neglect them. From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. Those are: 1. 2. 3. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero-sequence network Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is not treated any further in this manual. For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line can be in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends. The reach of the distance protection zone1 will be different depending on the operation condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting groups to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both ends. The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zerosequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by using: The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters. Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected multi circuit line.
Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide mentioned below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic principles also apply to other multi circuit lines. Parallel line applications This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common operation modes: 1. 2. 3. parallel line in service. parallel line out of service and earthed. parallel line out of service and not earthed.
Parallel line in service This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and transmission networks. A simplified single line diagram is shown in figure 129.
Z =
Vph Iph + 3I 0 Z 0 - Z1 3 Z1
Vph Iph + 3I 0 KN
(Equation 206)
EQUATION1275 V2 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Where: Vph Iph 3I0 Z1 Z0 is phase-to-earth voltage at the IED point is phase current in the faulty phase is earth to fault current is positive sequence impedance is zero sequence impedance
A Z0m
Z<
IEC05000221 V1 EN
Z<
en05000221.vsd
Figure 129:
Z0 - Z0m Z0m C Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
IEC99000038 V1 EN
Figure 130:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the IED point A will be changed. If the current on the parallel line have negative sign compare to the current on the protected line that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compare to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach. Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with X1L=0.303 /km, X0L=0.88 /km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%. The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
the reach is most pronounced with no infeed in the line IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreach scheme. Parallel line out of service and earthed
A Z0m
Z<
Z<
en05000222.vsd
Figure 131:
The parallel line is out of service and earthed.
A
I0
Z 0 Zm0 Zm0
I0
Z 0 Zm0
99000039.vsd
Figure 132:
Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends.
Z0 E =
Z 0 - Z0 m Z0
(Equation 207)
EQUATION2002 V1 EN
The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be considered when calculating the settings. It is a recommendation to use a separate setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerable when the line is in operation. All expressions below are proposed for
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero-sequence, mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero-sequence parameters according to equation 208 and equation 209 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.
X 2 R0 E = R0 1 + 2 0 m 2 R0 + X 0
(Equation 208)
X 2 X 0 E = X 0 1 - 2 0 m 2 R0 + X 0
(Equation 209)
A Z0m
Z<
IEC05000223 V1 EN
Z<
en05000223.vsd
Figure 133:
When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 133 The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and earthed at both ends.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
I0
Z0 Z0m Z0m Z0 Z0m

99000040.vsd
I0
B
IEC99000040 V1 EN
Figure 134:
Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one circuit disconnected and not earthed.
( (
) )
)
(Equation 210)
EQUATION1284 V1 EN
Re( A ) = R 0 (2 R1 + R 0 + 3 Rf ) - X 0 ( X 0 + 2 X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN
(Equation 211)
Im( A ) = X 0 (2 R1 + R0 + 3 R1 ) + R0 (2 X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN
(Equation 212)
Re K U = 1 +
EQUATION1287 V1 EN
( )
( ) Re ( A ) + Im ( A )
Re A X m 0 2
2
(Equation 213)

Im ( KU ) = Im ( A ) Xm02 Re ( A )
EQUATION1288 V1 EN
+ Im ( A )
(Equation 214)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

A IA T Z< Z< -IB IB B
IC
Z< C
en05000224.vsd
Figure 135:
This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed from remote end" that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For example for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will be
ZA =ZAT +
IA + IC ZTF IA
(Equation 215)
ZC = ZTrf + ( ZCT +
(Equation 216)
Where: ZAT and ZCT IA and IC U2/U1 is the line impedance from the B respective C station to the T point. is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B. Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio. Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 135), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure wrong direction. In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end. Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone1 that both gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone1 settings that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication. Fault resistance The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:
Rarc = 28707 L I1.4
(Equation 217)
EQUATION1456 V1 EN
where: L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1. Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately 50 km/h is the actual fault current in A.
In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth (RFPE) and phaseto-phase (RFPP) should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance in order to obtain reliable fault detection.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

The settings for the Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults (ZMMPDIS) function are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analogue input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in ZMMPDIS function. The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting calculations: Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under transient conditions. Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated value of the earth-return compensation factor. The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources. The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance. The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is considerable, the effect must be recognized. Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.
3.6.5.2
Setting of zone1
The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line. In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according tosection "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in your application. We recommend to compensate setting for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. The setting of earthed fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).
The first overreaching zone (normally zone2) must detect faults on the whole protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for zone1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location. The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest adjacent line. The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected line.
If the requirements in the dotted paragraphs above gives a zone2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions. The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at remote end is highlighted wit a simple example below. If a fault occurs at point F (see figure 11, also for the explanation of all abbreviations used), the IED at point A senses the impedance:
ZAF = ZAC +
EQUATION302 V2 EN
ZCF
(Equation 218)
Z AC
Z CD
IA
Z CF
I A+ IB Z< IB
en05000457.vsd
IEC05000457 V1 EN
Figure 136:
The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the backup protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes. Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines. Equation 219 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed and so on.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Zrev 1.2 ZL Z2rem

EQUATION1525 V3 EN
(Equation 219)
Where: ZL Z2rem is the protected line impedance is zone2 setting at remote end of protected line
In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.

Parallel line in service Setting of zone1 With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85% of protected line. Parallel line in service setting of zone2 Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 130 in section "Parallel line applications". The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to at least:
R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN
(Equation 220)
X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
EQUATION554 V1 EN
(Equation 221)
K 0 = 1EQUATION1426 V1 EN
Z 0m 2 Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
(Equation 222)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X 0m Im( B ) Re( B ) 2 + Im( B ) 2

(Equation 223)
X 0 m Re( B ) Re( B ) 2 + Im( B ) 2

(Equation 224)
Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single phase-to-earth faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zerosequence resistance and reactance) equal to:
Xm0 R 0E = R 0 1 + ------------------------- 2 2 R0 + X0
EQUATION561 V1 EN
(Equation 225)
X m0 X 0E = X 0 1 ------------------------- 2 2 R0 + X0
EQUATION562 V1 EN
(Equation 226)
Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, for phase-to-earth loop (RIPE) measurement. Set separately the expected fault resistance for the phase-to-earth faults (RFPE) for each zone. Set all remaining reach setting parameters independently of each other for each distance zone. The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 227.
1 R = -- ( 2 R1PE + R0PE ) + RFPE 3
EQUATION567 V1 EN
(Equation 227)
+ X0 j loop = arctan 2X1PE + R0 2 R1PE

(Equation 228)
EQUATION1457 V1 EN
Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone1 should follow the condition:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RFPE 4.5 X 1
EQUATION569 V2 EN
(Equation 229)
The following instructions is valid when the load encroachment function is not activated (OperationLdCmp is set to Off). If the load encroachment function is to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the IED boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance (/phase) is calculated as:
EQUATION571 V1 EN
(Equation 230)
Umin Z load = --------------------3 Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN
(Equation 231)
Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions. Because a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation under combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics. To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.
RFPE 0.8 Z load
EQUATION792 V1 EN
(Equation 232)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected loadimpedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation below:
2 R1 + R 0 2 X1+ X 0
sin

(Equation 233)
Where: is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimum load impedance conditions.
All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element is in the protection scheme. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the description of the power swing detection (ZMRPSB) function.

The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the description of the phase selection with load encroachment function, section "Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic". If the characteristic for the impedance measurement shall be shaped with the load encroachment algorithm, the parameter OperationLdCmp in the phase selection has to be switched On.
The operation of the distance function will be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPE. The default setting of IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen base current for the analog input channels. The value have been proven in practice to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of the IED base current. This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines. If the load current compensation is activated, there is an additional criteria IMinOpIN that will block the phase-earth loop if the 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of IMinOpIN is 5% of the IED base current IBase. The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.
The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of each other. Distance protection zone1 can also have a time delay, if so required for
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
selectivity reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the ph-E (tPE) measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.
3.6.5.3
Table 64:
Setting parameters
ZMMPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.50 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30 5 - 30 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1 R1 X0 R0 RFPE Timer tPE tPE IMinOpPE IMinOpIN
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l s %IB %IB
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 1 1
30.00 5.00 100.00 15.00 100.00 On 0.000 20 5
Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay of trip, Ph-E Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Earth loops
Table 65:
ZMMAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.50 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1 R1
ohm/p ohm/p
0.01 0.01
40.00 5.00
Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle

Name X0 R0 RFPE Timer tPE tPE IMinOpPE Values (Range) 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30 Unit ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l s %IB Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 1 Default 120.00 15.00 100.00 On 0.000 20 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay of trip, Ph-E Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
3.6.6
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDARDIR

Function description Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults IEC 61850 identification ZDARDIR IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
S00346 V1 EN
3.6.6.1
Application
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase unselective directional function based on symmetrical components.
3.6.6.2
Setting guidelines
AngleRCA and AngleOp: these settings define the operation characteristic. Setting AngleRCA is used to turn the directional characteristic, if the expected fault current angle does not coincide with the polarizing quantity to produce the maximum torque. The angle is positive, if operating quantity lags the polarizing quantity and negative if it leads the polarizing quantity. The setting AngleOp (max. 180 degrees) defines the wideness of the operating sector. The sector is mirrorsymmetric along the MTA (Maximum Torque Axis). Directional elements for earth-faults must operate at fault current values below the magnitude of load currents. As phase quantities are adversely affected by load, the use of sequence quantities are preferred as polarizing quantities for earth directional elements. Optionally six possibilities are available: Zero-sequence voltage polarized (-U0) Negative-sequence voltage polarized (-U2) Zero-sequence current (I0)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Dual polarization (-U0/I0) Zero-sequence voltage with zero-sequence current compensation (-U0Comp) Negative-sequence voltage with negative-sequence current compensation (U2Comp)
The zero-sequence voltage polarized earth directional unit compares the phase angles of zero sequence current I0 with zero sequence voltage -U0 at the location of the protection. The negative-sequence voltage polarized earth directional unit compares correspondingly I2 with -U2. In general zero sequence voltage is higher than the negative sequence voltage at the fault, but decreases more rapidly the further away from the fault it is measured. This makes the -U0 polarization preferable in short line applications, where no mutual coupling problems exist. Negative sequence polarization has the following advantages compared to zero sequence polarization: on solidly earthed systems U2 may be larger than U0. If the bus behind the IED location is a strong zero-sequence source, the negative sequence voltage available at the IED location is higher than the zero-sequence voltage. negative sequence polarization is not affected by zero sequence mutual coupling (zero sequence polarized directional elements may misoperate in parallel lines with high zero-sequence mutual coupling and isolated zero sequence sources). negative sequence polarization is less affected by the effects of VT neutral shift (possible caused by unearthed or multiple earths on the supplying VT neutral) no open-delta winding is needed in VTs as only 2 VTs are required (U2 = (UL12 - a UL23)/3)
The zero sequence current polarized earth directional unit compares zero sequence current I0 of the line with some reference zero-sequence current, for example the current in the neutral of a power transformer. The relay characteristic AngleRCA is fixed and equals 0 degrees. Care must be taken to ensure that neutral current direction remains unchanged during all network configurations and faults, and therefore all transformer configurations/constructions are not suitable for polarization. In dual polarization, zero sequence voltage polarization and zero sequence current polarization elements function in an OR-mode. Typically when zero sequence current is high, then zero sequence voltage is low and vice versa. Thus combining a zero sequence voltage polarized and a zero sequence current polarized (neutral current polarized) directional element into one element, the IED can benefit from both elements as the two polarization measurements function in an OR mode complementing each other. Flexibility is also increased as zero sequence voltage
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
polarization can be used, if the zero sequence current polarizing source is switched out of service. When the zero sequence polarizing current exceeds the set value for startPolCurrLevel, zero sequence current polarizing is used. For values of zero sequence polarizing current less than the set value for startPolCurrLevel, zero sequence voltage polarizing is used. Zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current compensation (U0Comp) compares the phase angles of zero sequence current I0 with zerosequence voltage added by a phase-shifted portion of zero-sequence current (see equation 234) at the location of the protection. The factor k = setting Kmag. This type of polarization in intended for use in applications where the zero sequence voltage can be too small to be used as the polarizing quantity, and there is no zero sequence polarizing current (transformer neutral current) available. The zero sequence voltage is boosted by a portion of the measured line zero sequence current to form the polarizing quantity. This method requires that a significant difference must exist in the magnitudes of the zero sequence currents for close-up forward and reverse faults, that is, it is a requirement that |U0| >> |k I0| for reverse faults, otherwise there is a risk that reverse faults can be seen as forward.
- U 0 + k I0 e
EQUATION1638 V2 EN
AngleRCA
(Equation 234)
The negative-sequence voltage polarization with negative-sequence current compensation (-U2Comp) compares correspondingly I2 with (see equation 235), and similarly it must be ensured that |U2| >> |k I2| for reverse faults.
-U2 + k I2 e
EQUATION1639 V2 EN
AngleRCA
(Equation 235)
3.6.6.3
Table 66:
Name IBase UBase PolMode
Setting parameters
ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -3U0 -U2 IPol Dual -3U0Comp -U2comp -90 - 90 1 - 200 1 - 100 5 - 100 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 -3U0 Description Base setting for current values Base setting for voltage level in kV Polarization quantity for opt dir function for P-E faults
AngleRCA I> UPol> IPol> 282
Deg %IB %UB %IB
1 1 1 1
75 5 1 10
Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or base angle) Minimum operation current in % of IBase Minimum polarizing voltage in % of UBase Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 67:
Name AngleOp Kmag
ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 90 - 180 0.50 - 3000.00 Unit Deg ohm Step 1 0.01 Default 160 40.00 Description Operation sector angle Boost-factor in -U0comp and -U2comp polarization
3.6.7
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC

Function description Mho Impedance supervision logic IEC 61850 identification ZSMGAPC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.6.7.1
Application
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme. One part of ZSMGAPC function identifies a loss of phase potential that is the result of a long term (steady state) condition such as a blown fuse or an open voltage transformer winding or connection. This will block all trips by the distance protection since they are based on voltage measurement. In the pilot channel blocking scheme a fault inception detected by a fast acting change detector is used to send a block signal to the remote end in order to block an overreaching zone. If the fault is later detected as a forward fault the earlier sent blocking signal is stopped. The blocking scheme is very dependable because it will operate for faults anywhere on the protected line if the communication channel is out of service. Conversely, it is less secure than permissive schemes because it will trip for external faults within the reach of the tripping function if the communication channel is out of service. Inadequate speed or dependability can cause spurious tripping for external faults. Inadequate security can cause delayed tripping for internal faults. ZSMGAPC function also includes functionality for blocking the sample based distance protection due to high SIR. SIR directly influences the fault voltage level for a given voltage level, and this is the major factor that affects the severity of CVT transients. Therefore, in cases where the SIR value is too high, further filtering of the measured signals will be needed.
3.6.7.2
Setting guidelines
IBase: IBase is normally set to the current value of the primary winding of the CT, but can also be set to the rated current of the bay. IBase shall be adapted to the actual application.
283
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
UBase: UBase is set to the voltage value of the primary winding of the VT. It is by default set to 400 kV and shall be adapted to the actual application. PilotMode: Set PilotMode to On when pilot scheme is to be used. In this mode fault inception function will send a block signal to remote end to block the overreaching zones, when operated. DeltaI: The setting of DeltaI for fault inception detection is by default set to 10% of IBase, which is suitable in most cases. Delta3I0: The setting of the parameter Delta3I0 for fault inception detection is by default set to 10% of UBase, which is suitable in most cases. DeltaU: The setting of DeltaU for fault inception detection is by default set to 5% of IBase, which is suitable in most cases. Delta3U0: The setting of Delta3U0 for fault inception detection is by default set to 5% of UBase, which is suitable in most cases. Zreach: The setting of Zreach must be adopted to the specific application. The setting is used in the SIR calculation for detection of high SIR. SIRLevel: The setting of the parameter SIRLevel is by default set to 10. This is a suitable setting for applications with CVT to avoid transient overreach due to the CVT dynamics. SIRLevel = 10 is a suitable setting for applications with CVT to avoid transient overreach due to the CVT dynamics. If magnetic voltage transformers are used, set SIRLevel to 15 the highest level IMinOp: The minimum operate current for the SIR measurement is by default set to 20% of IBase.
3.6.7.3
Table 68:
Name IBase UBase PilotMode Zreach IMinOp
Setting parameters
ZSMGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 0.1 - 3000.0 10 - 30 Unit A kV ohm %IB Step 1 0.05 0.1 1 Default 3000 400.00 Off 38.0 20 Description Base value for current measurement Base value for voltage measurement Pilot mode Off/On Line impedance Minimum operating current for SIR measurement
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 69:
Name DeltaI Delta3I0 DeltaU Delta3U0 SIRLevel
ZSMGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0 - 200 0 - 200 0 - 100 0 - 100 5 - 15 Unit %IB %IB %UB %UB Step 1 1 1 1 1 Default 10 10 5 5 10 Description Current change level in %IB for fault inception detection Zero seq current change level in % of IB Voltage change level in %UB for fault inception detection Zero seq voltage change level in % of UB Settable level for source impedance ratio
3.6.8
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS

Function description Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho IEC 61850 identification FMPSPDIS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21
S00346 V1 EN
3.6.8.1
Application
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced for example, difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in this matter. Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the Distance protection function dependent on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, FMPSPDIS has an built-in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the measuring zones without interfering with the load. The load encroachment algorithm and the blinder functions are always activated in the phase selector. The influence from these functions on the zone measurement characteristic has to be activated by switching the setting parameter LoadEnchMode for the respective measuring zone(s) to On.

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IBase: IBase is normally set to the current value of the primary winding of the CT, but can also be set to the rated current of the bay. It is by default set to 3000 A and shall be adapted to the actual application. UBase: UBase is set to the voltage value of the primary winding of the VT. It is by default set to 400 kV and shall be adapted to the actual application. INRelPE: The setting of INRelPE for release of the phase-to-earth loop is by default set to 20% of IBase. The default setting is suitable in most applications. The setting must normally be set to at least 10% lower than the setting of IINBlockPPto give priority to open phase-to-earth loop. INRelPE must be above the normal un-balance current (3I0) that might exist due to un-transposed lines. The setting must also be set higher than the 3I0 that occurs when one pole opens in single pole trip applications. IINBlockPP: The setting of IINBlockPP is by default set to 40% of UBase, which is suitable in most applications. I1LowLevel: The setting of the positive current threshold I1LowLevel used in the sequence based part of the phase selector for identifying three-phase fault, is by default set to 10% of IBase. The default setting is suitable in most cases, but must be checked against the minimum three-phase current that occurs at remote end of the line with reasonable fault resistance. IMaxLoad: The setting IMaxLoad must be set higher than the maximum load current transfer during emergency conditions including a safety margin of at least 20%. The setting is proposed to be according to equation 236:
IMaxLoad =1.2 ILoad
EQUATION1614 V2 EN
(Equation 236)
where: 1.2 ILoad is the security margin against the load current and is the maximal load current during emergency conditions.
The current ILoad can be defined according to equation 237.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ILoad =
EQUATION1615 V1 EN
S max 3 ULmn
(Equation 237)
where: Smax ULmn is the maximal apparent power transfer during emergency conditions and is the phase-to-phase voltage during the emergency conditions at the IED location.
The load encroachment function has two setting parameters, RLd for the load resistance and ArgLd for the inclination of the load sector (see figure 137).
X
Load encroachment
RLdFw ARGLd ARGLd R
ARGLd
RLdRv
ARGLd
en05000226.vsd
IEC05000226 V1 EN
Figure 137:
Load encroachment characteristic
The calculation of the apparent load impedance Zload and minimum load impedance Zloadmin can be done according to equations:
Umin Z load = --------------------3 Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN
(Equation 238)
EQUATION571 V1 EN
(Equation 239)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The load angle ArgLd can be derived according to equation 240:

ArgLd = a cos
EQUATION1623 V1 EN
P max S max
(Equation 240)
where: Pmax Smax is the maximal active power transfer during emergency conditions and is the maximal apparent power transfer during emergency conditions.
The RLd can be calculated according to equation 241:

RLd = ZLoad cos( ArgLd )
EQUATION1624 V1 EN
(Equation 241)
The setting of RLd and ArgLd is by default set to 80 ohm/phase and 20 degrees. Those values must be adapted to the specific application.
3.6.8.3
Table 70:
Name IBase UBase IMaxLoad RLd ArgLd
Setting parameters
FMPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 5000 1.00 - 3000.00 5 - 70 Unit A kV %IB ohm/p Deg Step 1 0.05 1 0.01 1 Default 3000 400.00 200 80.00 20 Description Base current Base voltage Maximum load for identification of three phase fault in % of IBase Load encroachment resistive reach in ohm/phase Load encroachment inclination of load angular sector
Table 71:
Name DeltaIMinOp DeltaUMinOp U1Level I1LowLevel U1MinOp
FMPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 5 - 100 5 - 100 5 - 100 5 - 200 5 - 100 Unit %IB %UB %UB %IB %UB Step 1 1 1 1 1 Default 10 20 80 10 20 Description Delta current level in % of IBase Delta voltage level in % of UBase Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3ph fault Pos seq current level for identification of 3-ph fault in % of IBase Minimum operate positive sequence voltage for ph sel
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 1 - 100 10 - 100 10 - 100 Unit %UB %IB %IB Step 1 1 1 Default 5 20 40 Description Minimum operate negative sequence voltage for ph sel 3I0 limit for release ph-e measuring loops in % of max phase current 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops in % of max phase current
Name U2MinOp INRelPE INBlockPP
3.6.9
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR
Function description Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings (zone 1) IEC 61850 identification ZMRPDIS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21
S00346 V1 EN
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings (zone 2-5)
ZMRAPDIS
21
S00346 V1 EN
Function description Directional impedance quadrilateral
IEC 61850 identification ZDRDIR
IEC 60617 identification Z<->
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21D
3.6.9.1
Application
Sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the power system. The distance protection function in the IED is designed to meet basic requirements for application on transmission and sub-transmission lines although it also can be used on distribution levels.
System earthing
The type of system earthing plays an important role when designing the protection system. Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Solid earthed networks In solidly earthed systems, the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.
xx05000215.vsd
IEC05000215 V1 EN
Figure 138:
Solidly earthed network.
The earth-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very limited influence on the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some marginal influence on the earth-fault current in networks with long transmission lines. The earth-fault current at single phase-toearth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 51:
3I 0 =
3 U L1 Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f
U L1 Z1 + Z N + Z f
(Equation 242)
EQUATION1267 V3 EN
Where: UL1 Z1 Z2 Z0 Zf ZN is the phase-toearth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault is the positive sequence impedance (/phase) is the negative sequence impedance (/phase) is the zero sequence impedance (/phase) is the fault impedance (), often resistive is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3
The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phaseto-earth voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage. The high zero sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance measuring technique to detect earth-fault. However, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Effectively earthed networks A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-fault factor is defined according to equation 52.
fe = U max U pn
(Equation 243)
EQUATION1268 V3 EN
Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between the symmetrical components of the network source impedances are valid, see equation 53 and equation 54.
X 0 < 3 X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN
(Equation 244)
R0 R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN
(Equation 245)
Where R0 X0 R1 X1 is the resistive zero sequence source impedance is the reactive zero sequence source impedance is the resistive positive sequence source impedance is the reactive positive sequence source impedance
The magnitude of the earth-fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for impedance measuring element to detect earth-fault. However, in the same way as for solid earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case. High impedance earthed networks In high impedance networks, the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the earth through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor. This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating meshed networks.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth fault current is very low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a magnitude of 3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence voltage (3U0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop distribution. The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation 55.
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN
I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
(Equation 246)
wL =
1 3 w C
(Equation 247)
EQUATION1272 V1 EN
Ic
Ic
Ic
IR
IL
en05000216.vsd
IEC05000216 V1 EN
Figure 139:
High impedance earthing network.
The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compared to solid earthed networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-toearth faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross-country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth-faults. To handle this type phenomena, a separate function called Phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common to be used in transmission applications.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and clearance of earth-faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of the zero sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-toearth fault.
All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault occurs on the protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection system and making the settings. With reference to figure 48, the equation for the bus voltage UA at A side is:
EQUATION1273 V1 EN
(Equation 248)
If we divide UA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side.
ZA =
Va IA
= p ZL +
IA + IB IA
Rf
(Equation 249)
EQUATION1274 V2 EN
ESA
ZSA
UA A
IA
p*ZL ZL
(1-p)*ZL
IB
UB B ZSB
ESB
Z<
Rf
Z<
IEC09000247 V1 EN
Figure 140:
Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end
The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection. When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
built in algorithm which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1, at the exporting end. No settings are required for this function.
Load encroachment
In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 49. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not allowed and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults. The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure of figure 49. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd for Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function (FRPSPDIS), the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the figure 49 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions. The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferably be switched off. See section "Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function". The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in , FRPSPDIS function.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X Z1
X Z1
ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv RLdFw
ArgLd R ArgLd
IEC09000248 V1 EN
Figure 141:
Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment characteristic defined in Phase selection and load encroachment function (FRPSPDIS)
In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see table 47.
Table 72:
Typical length of short and very short line

Un 110 kV 1.1-5.5 km 5.5-11 km Un 500 kV 5-25 km 25-50 km
The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 49. For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to the voltage drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching. Load encroachment is normally no problems for short line applications.
For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
to achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-earth fault at remote line end of a long line when the line is heavy loaded. What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection can generally be described as in table 48, long lines have Source impedance ratio (SIRs) less than 0.5.
Table 73:
Typical length of long and very long lines

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated), see figure 49.

General Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary area for new lines. Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The mutual coupling does influence the zero sequence impedance to the fault point but it does not normally cause voltage inversion. It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is a practice to neglect them. From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. The different network configuration classes are: 1. 2. 3. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400kV line and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is not treated any further in this manual. For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can be in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends. The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the operation condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different setting groups for handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both ends. The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by using: The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters. Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected multi circuit line.
Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. Parallel line applications This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines terminate at common nodes at both ends. The three most common operation modes are: 1. 2. 3. parallel line in service. parallel line out of service and earthed. parallel line out of service and not earthed.
Parallel line in service This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and transmission networks. Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 50. From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 59.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Z =
ph
U I + 3I
0
ph
=
0 1 ph
ph
Z -Z 3 Z
1
I + 3I K
0
EQUATION2311 V1 EN
(Equation 250)
Z =
Vph Iph + 3I 0 Z 0 - Z1 3 Z1
Vph Iph + 3I 0 KN
(Equation 250)
EQUATION1275 V2 EN
Where: Uph Iph 3I0 Z1 Z0 is phase to earth voltage at the relay point is phase current in the faulty phase is earth fault current is positive sequence impedance is zero sequence impedance
A Z0m Z<
IEC09000250 V1 EN
Z<
Figure 142:
The equivalent zero sequence circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 51.
Z0 -Z0m A Z0m C Z0 -Z0m B
IEC09000253 V1 EN
Figure 143:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar.
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed according to equation 60.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
U ph = Z1 I + 3I
L ph 0
Z0 - Z1
L
+ 3I
Z0
0p
3 Z1
3 Z1

(Equation 251)
EQUATION2312 V1 EN
By dividing equation 60 by equation 59 and after some simplification we can write the impedance present to the relay at A side as:
3I 0 KNm Z = ZL 1 + Iph + 3I 0 KN
EQUATION1277 V1 EN
(Equation 252)
Where: KNm = Z0m/(3 Z1L)
The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line impedance. If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach. Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is weak. If considering a single phase-to-earth fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end is zero, the voltage UA in the faulty phase at A side as in equation 62.
U A = p Z1
EQUATION2313 V1 EN
L
(I
ph
+ K 3I + K 3I
N 0 Nm
0p
)
(Equation 253)
One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:
3 I 0 Z 0 L = 3 I 0 p Z 0 L (2 - p )
EQUATION1279 V1 EN
(Equation 254)
3I 0 p VA = p Z 1L Iph + KN 3I 0 + KNm 2- p
EQUATION1280 V1 EN
(Equation 255)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

EQUATION1379 V1 EN
(Equation 256)
Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with X1L=0.303 /km, X0L=0.88 /km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%. The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme. Parallel line out of service and earthed
A Z0m Z<
IEC09000251 V1 EN
Z<
Figure 144:
The parallel line is out of service and earthed.
When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both line ends on the bus bar side of the line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 53.
A
I0
Z0 - Z0m Z0m
I0
C
Z0 -Z0m
IEC09000252 V1 EN
Figure 145:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Z0 E =
Z 0 - Z0 m Z0
(Equation 257)
EQUATION2002 V1 EN
The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerably when the line is in operation. All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence, mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters according to equation 67 and equation 68 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.
X 2 R0 E = R0 1 + 2 0 m 2 R0 + X 0
(Equation 258)
X 0E
X 0m2 = X 0 1 - 2 2 R0 + X 0
(Equation 259)

A Z0m Z<
IEC09000254 V1 EN
Z<
Figure 146:
When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 54
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty circuit.
A I0
Z0 - Z0m Z0m Z0 - Z0m

I0 C
B
IEC09000255 V1 EN
Figure 147:
Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one circuit disconnected and not earthed.

A IA T Z< F IB B
IC
Z< -IB
Z< C
IEC09000160 V2 EN
Figure 148:
Example of tapped line with Auto transformer.
This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed from remote end" , that is increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will be
ZA =ZAT +
IA + IC ZTF IA
(Equation 260)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ZC = ZTrf + ( ZCT +
(Equation 261)
Where: ZAT and ZCT IA and IC U2/U1 is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point. is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B. Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer). is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F). Transformer impedance
ZTF ZTrf
For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio. Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 56), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure wrong direction. In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone 2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end. Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone 1 settings, that is without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication. Fault resistance The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance.The resistance is also depending on the presence of earth shield conductor at the top of the tower, connecting tower-footing resistance in parallel. The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Rarc =
28707 L I1.4
(Equation 262)
EQUATION1456 V1 EN
where: L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1. Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately 50 km/h is the actual fault current in A.
In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth RFPE and phase-tophase RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance in order to obtain reliable fault detection.
3.6.9.2

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ((ZMRPDIS) are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analogue input module is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in (ZMRPDIS). The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting calculations: Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under transient conditions. Inaccuracies in the line zero sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated value of the earth-return compensation factor. The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources. The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance. The effect from load transfer together with fault resistance may be considerable in some extreme cases. Zero sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.
Setting of zone 1
The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line. In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in the particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
and out of service and earthed in both ends. The setting of earth-fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).
The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even longer if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location. The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances: The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest adjacent line. The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected line.
Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current infeed from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations. If any of the above indicates a zone 2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone 2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone 2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions. The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at remote end is highlighted in the example below. If a fault occurs at point F see figure 57, the IED at point A senses the impedance:
ZAF = ZAC +
EQUATION302 V2 EN
ZCF
(Equation 263)
Z AC
Z CB F
IA
Z CF
I A+ I B Z< IB
IEC09000256 V1 EN
Figure 149:

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the backup protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes. Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines. Equation 78 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed etc.
Z rev 1.2 Z2 rem - ZL
EQUATION2314 V1 EN
(Equation 264)
In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.

Parallel line in service Setting of zone 1 With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85% of protected line. However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account. Parallel line in service setting of zone 2 Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 51 in section "Parallel line applications". The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to at least:
R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN
(Equation 265)
X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
EQUATION554 V1 EN
(Equation 266)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
K 0 = 1Z 0m 2 Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
(Equation 267)
EQUATION1426 V1 EN
X 0m Im( B ) Re( B ) 2 + Im( B ) 2

(Equation 268)
X 0 m Re( B ) Re( B ) 2 + Im( B ) 2

(Equation 269)
Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single phase-to-earth faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:
Xm0 R 0E = R 0 1 + ------------------------- 2 2 R0 + X0
EQUATION561 V1 EN
(Equation 270)
X m0 X 0E = X 0 1 ------------------------- 2 2 R0 + X0
EQUATION562 V1 EN
(Equation 271)
Set the resistive independently for each zone. Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the phase-to-earth faults RFPE for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining reach setting parameters independently of each other.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 86.
R= 1 3
( 2 R1 + R0 ) + RFPE
(Equation 272)
j loop = arctan
EQUATION2304 V1 EN
2 X1 + X0 2 R1 + R0
(Equation 273)
Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition to minimize the risk for overreaching:
RFPE 4.5 X1
(Equation 274)
The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault resistance for phase-to-earth faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit the setting of the zone1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement to:
RFPP 3 X1
(Equation 275)
The following instructions are valid when Phase selection with load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FRPSPDIS is not activated. To deactivate the function, the setting of the load resistance RLdFw and RLdRv in FRPSPDIS must be set to max value (3000). If FRPSPDIS is to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance (/phase) is calculated as:
EQUATION571 V1 EN
(Equation 276)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Umin Z load = --------------------3 Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN
(Equation 277)
Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions. As a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation under combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics. To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.
RFPE 0.8 Z load
EQUATION792 V1 EN
(Equation 278)
This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected loadimpedance angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three times the load-impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 93.
2 R1 + R 0 2 X1+ X 0
sin

(Equation 279)
Where: is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RFPP 1.6 Zload
EQUATION579 V2 EN
(Equation 280)
RFPP 1.6 Z load min
All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no Power swing detection function ZMRPSB is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a ZMRPSB function is activated in the IED, refer to the description of Power swing detection function ZMRPSB.
Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function activated
The parameters for shaping of the load encroachment characteristic are found in the description of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function (FRPSPDIS).
RFP
R1 cos J - sin J X1
(Equation 281) Application manual
The operation of Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS) can be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE. The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen current for the analogue input channels. The value has been proven in practice to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of IBase. This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines. Setting IMinOpIN blocks the phase-to-earth loop if 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of IMinOpIN is 5% of IBase. The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.
310
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

The required time delays for different distance protection zones are independent of each other. Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity reasons. Time delays for all zones can be set in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the phase-to-earthtPE and for the phase-to-phase tPP measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.
3.6.9.3
Table 74:
Setting parameters
ZMRPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 - 3000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1PP R1PP RFPP X1PE R1PE X0PE R0PE RFPE OperationPP Timer tPP tPP OperationPE Timer tPE tPE
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l s s
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001
30.00 5.00 30.00 30.00 5.00 100.00 15.00 100.00 On On 0.000 On On 0.000
Positive sequence reactance reach PhPh Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay of trip, Ph-E

Name IMinOpPP IMinOpPE IMinOpIN Values (Range) 10 - 1000 10 - 1000 5 - 1000 Unit %IB %IB %IB Step 1 1 1 Default 20 20 5 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Earth loops
Table 75:
ZMRAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 - 1000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 - 3000.00 0.10 - 9000.00 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 1000 10 - 1000 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1PP R1PP RFPP X1PE R1PE X0PE R0PE RFPE OperationPP Timer tPP tPP OperationPE Timer tPE tPE IMinOpPP IMinOpPE
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l s s %IB %IB
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 1 1
30.00 5.00 30.00 30.00 5.00 100.00 15.00 100.00 On On 0.000 On On 0.000 20 20
Positive sequence reactance reach PhPh Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of PhasePhase loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay of trip, Ph-E Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS
Function description Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle IEC 61850 identification FRPSPDIS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 21
3.6.10
Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
3.6.10.1
Application
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance measuring function depending on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the measuring zones without interfering with the load. A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set values. The extensive output signals from FRPSPDIS give also important information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting. The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 150. As illustrated, the resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RLdFw ARGLd ARGLd R
ARGLd
RLdRv
ARGLd
en05000196.vsd
IEC05000196 V1 EN
Figure 150:
Characteristic of load encroachment function
The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of the FRPSPDIS function. When output signal STCNDZis selected, the characteristic for the FRPSPDIS (and also zone measurement depending on settings) can be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic (as shown in figure 151).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
STCNDZ
STCNDLE
IEC10000099-1en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN
Figure 151:
Operating characteristic when load encroachment is activated
When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 152. The figure shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of the zone together with the load encroachment area is highlighted in black.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X "Phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone Distance measuring zone
Load encroachment characteristic R Directional line
en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN
Figure 152:
Operation characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment is enabled
Figure 152 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the "quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 153. Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100 degrees instead of the original 70 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X (ohm/phase) Phase selection Quadrilateral zone
Distance measuring zone
R (ohm/phase)
en05000674.vsd
IEC05000674 V1 EN
Figure 153:
Operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS in forward direction for threephase fault, ohm/phase domain
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is presented in fig 154. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time, the characteristic "shrinks" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw/RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN
Figure 154:
Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases
This rotation may seem a bit awkward, but there is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-tophase loops will be fully affected by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant 1. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant 4 should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.
3.6.10.2
Load encroachment characteristics

The phase selector must at least cover the overreaching zone 2 in order to achieve correct phase selection for utilizing single-phase autoreclosing for faults on the entire line. It is not necessary to cover all distance protection zones. A safety margin of at least 10% is recommended. In order to get operation from distance zones, the phase selection output STCNDZ or STCNDLE must be connected to input STCND on distance zones. For normal overhead lines, the angle for the loop impedance for phase-to-earth fault defined according to equation 170.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
arctan j =
EQUATION2115 V1 EN
X1L + XN R1L + RN
(Equation 282)
But in some applications, for instance cable lines, the angle of the loop might be less than the set angle. In these applications, the settings of fault resistance coverage in forward and reverse direction, RFFwPE and RFRvPE for phase-toearth faults and RFFwPP and RFRvPP for phase-to-phase faults have to be increased to avoid that the phase selection characteristic must cut off some part of the zone characteristic. The necessary increased setting of the fault resistance coverage can be derived from trigonometric evaluation of the basic characteristic for respectively fault type. The following setting guideline considers normal overhead lines applications and provides two different setting alternatives:
A) B) A recommended characteristic angle of 60 degrees for the phase selection A characteristic angle of 90 and 70 degrees for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase respectively, like implemented in the REL500 series
The following figures illustrate alternative B). With reference to figure 155, the following equations for the setting calculations can be obtained. Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection with load encroachment function (FRPSPDIS) and index Zm reference settings for Distance protection function (ZMRPDIS).
Phase-to-earth fault in forward direction
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
R1PEPHS + RNPHS
X PHS Zm
RFRvPEPHS
(Minimum setting) RFFwPEPHS
RNPHS =
R0 PEPHS - R1PEPHS 3
R1Zm+RN RFPEZm RFPEZm
X1PHS+XNPHS
X1Zm+XNZm
90
loop
loop
(Ohm/loop)
X1Zm+XNZm
X1PHS+XNPHS
RFPEZm R1Zm+RN
RFPEZm
IEC08000435.vsd
IEC08000435 V1 EN
Figure 155:
Relation between measuring zone and FRPSPDIS characteristic
Reactive reach The reactive reach in forward direction must as minimum be set to cover the measuring zone used in the Teleprotection schemes, mostly zone 2. Equation 171 and equation 172 gives the minimum recommended reactive reach. These recommendations are valid for both 60 and 90 deg. characteristic angle.
X1PHS 1.44 X1Zm

EQUATION1309 V1 EN
(Equation 283)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
X0 PHS 1.44 X0 Zm
EQUATION1310 V1 EN
(Equation 284)
where: X1Zm 1.44 X0Zm is the reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS, and the constant is a safety margin is the zero-sequence reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS
The reactive reach in reverse direction is automatically set to the same reach as for forward direction. No additional setting is required. Fault resistance reach The resistive reach must cover RFPE for the overreaching zone to be covered, mostly zone 2. Consider the longest overreaching zone if correct fault selection is important in the application. Equation 285 and 286 gives the minimum recommended resistive reach. A) 60 degrees
RFFwPE 1.1 RFPE Zm
EQUATION2223 V2 EN
(Equation 285)
B) 90 degrees
RFFwPE >
EQUATION2224 V2 EN
1 3
( 2 R1PEZm + R 0 PEZm ) + RFPEZm

(Equation 286)
The security margin has to be increased in the case where loop<60 to avoid that FRPSPDIS characteristic cuts off some part of the zone measurement characteristic. RFFwPP and RFFRvPP must be set in a way that the loop characteristic angle can be 60 degrees (or alternatively the same or lower compared to the measuring zone that must be covered). If the characteristic angle for IEDs in the 500 series of 90 degrees is desired, RFFwPP and RFFRvPP must be set to minimum setting values.
Phase-to-earth fault in reverse direction

Reactive reach The reactive reach in reverse direction is the same as for forward so no additional setting is required. Resistive reach The resistive reach in reverse direction must be set longer than the longest reverse zones. In blocking schemes it must be set longer than the overreaching zone at remote end that is used in the communication scheme. In equation 174 the index ZmRv references the specific zone to be coordinated to.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RFRvPE min 1.2 RFPE ZmRv

EQUATION1316 V1 EN
(Equation 287)
Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction

Reactive reach The reach in reactive direction is determined by phase-to-earth reach setting X1. No extra setting is required. Resistive reach R1PE and R0PE must be set in a way that the loop characteristic angle can be 60 deg (this gives a characteristic angle of 90 deg. at three-phase faults). If the 500series characteristic angle of 70 deg. is desired, R1PE and R0PE must be set accordingly. Fault resistance reach The fault resistance reaches in forward direction RFFwPP, must cover RFPPZm with at least 25% margin. RFPPZm is the setting of fault resistance for phase-tophase fault for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS, as shown in figure 109. The minimum recommended reach can be calculated according to equation 288 and 289. Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDISand index Zm reference settings for Distance protection function ZMRPDIS. A) 60
RFFwPP 1.25 RFPP zm
EQUATION1318 V3 EN
(Equation 288)
B) 70 RFFwPP > 1.82 R1PPZm + 0.32 X 1PPZm + 0.91 RFPPZm

EQUATION2226 V1 EN
(Equation 289)
where:
RFPPZm is the setting of the longest reach of the overreaching zones that must be covered by FRPSPDIS.
Equation 288 and 289 are is also valid for three-phase fault. The proposed margin of 25% will cater for the risk of cut off of the zone measuring characteristic that might occur at three-phase fault when FRPSPDIScharacteristic angle is changed from 60 degrees to 90 degrees or from 70 degrees to 100 degrees (rotated 30 anticlock wise).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
( W / phase )
X 1PHS R1PP= tan 70
0.5 RFRvPP PHS Zm
0.5 RFFwPP
0.5*RFPPPm
0.5*RFPPZm
R1Zm
X1 X1Zm
j j
70
70
( W / phase )
0.5*RFPPZm 0.5*RFPPZm X1Zm
0.5*RFPPZM
R1Zm 0.5*RFPPZm
0.5 RFRvPP
X 1PHS R1PP= tan 70
IEC08000249 V1 EN
en08000249.vsd
Figure 156:
Relation between measuring zone and FRPSPDIS characteristic for phase-to-phase fault for line>70 (setting parameters in italic)
3.6.10.3
Table 76:
Name IBase UBase INBlockPP
Setting parameters
FRPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 100 Unit A kV %IPh Step 1 0.01 1 Default 3000 400.00 40 Description Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops

Name INReleasePE RLdFw RLdRv ArgLd X1 R1PP R1PE X0 R0PE RFFwPP RFRvPP RFFwPE RFRvPE IMinOpPP IMinOpPE Values (Range) 10 - 100 1.00 - 3000.00 1.00 - 3000.00 5 - 70 0.50 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 5 - 500 5 - 500 Unit %IPh ohm/p ohm/p Deg ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/l ohm/l ohm/l %IB %IB Step 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 Default 20 80.00 80.00 30 40.00 15.00 1.50 120.00 5.00 30.00 30.00 100.00 100.00 10 5 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops Forward resistive reach within the load impedance area Reverse resistive reach within the load impedance area Load angle determining the load impedance area Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-E Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-E Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops
Table 77:
Name TimerPP tPP TimerPE tPE
FRPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s Step 0.001 0.001 Default Off 3.000 Off 3.000 Description Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-E Time delay to trip, Ph-E
3.6.11
Power swing detection ZMRPSB

Function description Power swing detection IEC 61850 identification ZMRPSB IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 68
Zpsb
SYMBOL-EE V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Application General
Various changes in power system may cause oscillations of rotating units. The most typical reasons for these oscillations are big changes in load or changes in power system configuration caused by different faults and their clearance. As the rotating masses strive to find a stable operate condition, they oscillate with damped oscillations until they reach the final stability. The extent of the oscillations depends on the extent of the disturbances and on the natural stability of the system. The oscillation rate depends also on the inertia of the system and on the total system impedance between different generating units. These oscillations cause changes in phase and amplitude of the voltage difference between the oscillating generating units in the power system, which reflects further on in oscillating power flow between two parts of the system - the power swings from one part to another and vice versa. Distance IEDs located in interconnected networks see these power swings as the swinging of the measured impedance in relay points. The measured impedance varies with time along a locus in an impedance plane, see figure 157. This locus can enter the operating characteristic of a distance protection and cause, if no preventive measures have been considered, its unwanted operation.
jX
3.6.11.1
Operating characteristic
Impedance locus at power swing
R
IEC09000224 V1 EN
Figure 157:
Impedance plane with Power swing detection operating characteristic and impedance locus at power swing
Basic characteristics
Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB) detects reliably power swings with periodic time of swinging as low as 200 ms (which means slip frequency as high as 10% of the rated frequency on the 50 Hz basis). It detects the swings under normal system operate conditions as well as during dead time of a single-pole automatic reclosing cycle. ZMRPSB function is able to secure selective operation for internal faults during power. The operation of the distance protection function remains stable for external
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
faults during the power swing condition, even with the swing (electrical) centre located on the protected power line. The operating characteristic of the ZMRPSB function is easily adjustable to the selected impedance operating characteristics of the corresponding controlled distance protection zones as well as to the maximum possible load conditions of the protected power lines. See the corresponding description in Technical reference manual for the IEDs.
3.6.11.2
Setting guidelines
Setting guidelines are prepared in the form of a setting example for the protected power line as part of a two-machine system presented in figure 158.
EA
dA= const
EB
dB= f(t)
B ZL ZSB
~
IEC99001019 V1 EN
ZSA R
~
99001019.vsd
Figure 158:
Protected power line as part of a two-machine system
Reduce the power system with protected power line into equivalent two-machine system with positive sequence source impedances ZSA behind the IED and ZSB behind the remote end bus B. Observe a fact that these impedances can not be directly calculated from the maximum three-phase short circuit currents for faults on the corresponding busbar. It is necessary to consider separate contributions of different connected circuits. The required data is as follows:
U r = 400 kV
EQUATION1321 V1 EN
Rated system voltage
U min = 380 kV
EQUATION1322 V1 EN
Minimum expected system voltage under critical system conditions Rated system frequency
f r = 50 Hz
EQUATION1323 V1 EN
Up =
400 3
Rated primary voltage of voltage protection transformers used
kV
EQUATION1324 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Us =
0.11 3
Rated secondary voltage of voltage instrument transformers used
kV
Rated primary current of current protection transformers used
EQUATION1325 V1 EN
I p = 1200 A
EQUATION1326 V1 EN
I s = 1A
EQUATION1327 V1 EN
Rated secondary current of current protection transformers used
Z L1 = (10.71 + j 75.6 ) W
EQUATION1328 V1 EN
Line positive sequence impedance
Z SA1 = (1.15 + j 43.5) W

EQUATION1329 V1 EN
Positive sequence source impedance behind A bus
Z SB1 = ( 5.3 + j 35.7 ) W

EQUATION1330 V1 EN
Positive sequence source impedance behind B bus
S max = 1000 MVA

EQUATION1331 V1 EN
Maximum expected load in direction from A to B (with minimum system operating voltage Umin) Power factor at maximum line loading
cos (j max ) = 0.95

EQUATION1332 V1 EN
j max = 25
EQUATION1333 V1 EN
Maximum expected load angle
f si = 2.5 Hz
EQUATION1334 V1 EN
Maximum possible initial frequency of power oscillation
f sc = 7.0 Hz
EQUATION1335 V1 EN
Maximum possible consecutive frequency of power oscillation
The impedance transformation factor, which transforms the primary impedances to the corresponding secondary values is calculated according to equation 291. Consider a fact that all settings are performed in primary values. The impedance transformation factor is presented for orientation and testing purposes only.
KIMP =
EQUATION1336 V1 EN
I p U s 1200 0.11 = = 0.33 Is U p 1 400

(Equation 291)
The minimum load impedance at minimum expected system voltage is equal to equation 292.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Z L min =
EQUATION1337 V1 EN
2 U min 3802 = = 144.4W S max 1000
(Equation 292)
The minimum load resistance RLmin at maximum load and minimum system voltage is equal to equation 293.
RL min = Z L min cos (j max ) = 144.4 0.95 = 137.2W

EQUATION1338 V1 EN
(Equation 293)
The system impedance ZS is determined as a sum of all impedance in an equivalent two-machine system, see figure 158. Its value is calculated according to equation 294.
Z S = Z SA1 + Z L1 + Z SB1 = (17.16 + j154.8 ) W

EQUATION1339 V1 EN
(Equation 294)
The calculated value of the system impedance is of informative nature and helps determining the position of oscillation center, see figure 159, which is for general case calculated according to equation 295.
Z CO =
ZS - Z SA1 EB 1+ EA
(Equation 295)
EQUATION1340 V1 EN
In particular cases, when
E A = EB
EQUATION1342 V1 EN
(Equation 296)
resides the center of oscillation on impedance point, see equation 297.
Z CO =
ZS - Z SA1 = ( 7.43 + j 33.9 ) W 2

(Equation 297)
EQUATION1341 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
jX
ZS
Im pe da nc el oc us for |E
ZC
ZL
ZS B 1
A|
=| EB
R
|
jX
ZS
A1
ArgLd (FDPSPDIS)
ArgLd (ZMRPSB)
IEC09000225 V1 EN
Figure 159:
Impedance diagrams with corresponding impedances under consideration
The outer boundary of oscillation detection characteristic in forward direction RLdOutFw should be set with certain safety margin KL compared to the minimum expected load resistance RLmin. When the exact value of the minimum load resistance is not known, the following approximations may be considered for lines with rated voltage 400 kV:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
KL = 0.9 for lines longer than 150 km KL = 0.85 for lines between 80 and 150 km KL = 0.8 for lines shorter than 80 km
Multiply the required resistance for the same safety factor KL with the ratio between actual voltage and 400kV when the rated voltage of the line under consideration is higher than 400kV. The outer boundary RLdOutFw obtains in this particular case its value according to equation 298.
RLdOutFw = K L RL min = 0.9 137.2 = 123.5W

EQUATION1343 V1 EN
(Equation 298)
It is a general recommendation to set the inner boundary RLdInFw of the oscillation detection characteristic to 80% or less of its outer boundary. Exceptions are always possible, but must be considered with special care especially when it comes to settings of timers tP1 and tP2 included in oscillation detection logic. This requires the maximum permitted setting values of factor kLdRFw = 0.8. Equation 299 presents the corresponding maximum possible value of RLdInFw.
RLdInFw = kLdRFwRLdOutFw = 98.8W

EQUATION1344 V2 EN
(Equation 299)
The load angles, which correspond to external Out and internal In boundary of proposed oscillation detection characteristic in forward direction, are calculated with sufficient accuracy according to equation 300 and 301 respectively.
ZS 155.75 d Out = 2 arc tan = 2 arc tan = 64.5 2 RLdOutFw 2 123.5

EQUATION1345 V1 EN
(Equation 300)
ZS 155.75 d In = 2 arc tan = 2 arc tan = 76.5 2 RLdInFwmax 2 98.8

EQUATION1346 V1 EN
(Equation 301)
The required setting tP1 of the initial oscillation detection timer depends on the load angle difference according to equation 302.
tP1 =
d In - d Out 76.5 - 64.5 = = 13.3ms f si 360 2.5 360

(Equation 302)
EQUATION1347 V1 EN
The general tendency should be to set the tP1 time to at least 30 ms, if possible. Since it is not possible to further increase the external load angle Out, it is
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
necessary to reduce the inner boundary of the oscillation detection characteristic. The minimum required value is calculated according to the procedure listed in equation 303, 304, 305 and 306.
tP1min = 30 ms
EQUATION1348 V1 EN
(Equation 303)
d In - min = 360 f si tP1min + d Out = 360 2.5 0.030 + 64.5 = 91.5

EQUATION1349 V1 EN
(Equation 304)
RLdInFwmax1 =
ZS d 2 tan in - min 2
155.75 = 75.8W 91.5 2 tan 2

(Equation 305)
EQUATION1350 V1 EN
kLdRFw =
EQUATION1351 V1 EN
RLdInFwmax1 75.8 = = 0.61 RLdOutFw 123.5

(Equation 306)
Also check if this minimum setting satisfies the required speed for detection of consecutive oscillations. This requirement will be satisfied if the proposed setting of tP2 time remains higher than 10 ms, see equation 307.
tP 2 max =
EQUATION1352 V1 EN
d In - d Out 91.5 - 64.5 = = 10.7 ms 7 360 f sc 360

(Equation 307)
The final proposed settings are as follows: RLdOutFw = 123.5 kLdRFw = 0.61 tP1 = 30 ms tP2 = 10 ms Consider RLdInFw = 75.0. Do not forget to adjust the setting of load encroachment resistance RLdFw in Phase selection with load encroachment (FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS) to the value equal to or less than the calculated value RLdInFw. It is at the same time necessary to adjust the load angle in FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS to follow the condition presented in equation 308.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Index PHS designates correspondence to FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS function and index PSD the correspondence to ZMRPSB function.
ArgLdPHS arc tan

EQUATION1353 V2 EN
tan( ArgLdPSD) kLdRFw

(Equation 308)
Consider equation 309,
ArgLd PSD = j max = 25

EQUATION1354 V1 EN
(Equation 309)
then it is necessary to set the load argument in FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS function to not less than equation 310.
tan ( ArgLd PSD ) tan ( 25 ) ArgLd PHS arc tan = arc tan = 37.5 kLdRFw 0.61
EQUATION1355 V1 EN
(Equation 310)
It is recommended to set the corresponding resistive reach parameters in reverse direction (RLdOutRv and kLdRRv) to the same values as in forward direction, unless the system operating conditions, which dictate motoring and generating types of oscillations, requires different values. This decision must be made on basis of possible system contingency studies especially in cases, when the direction of transmitted power may change fast in short periods of time. It is recommended to use different setting groups for operating conditions, which are changing only between different periods of year (summer, winter). System studies should determine the settings for the hold timer tH. The purpose of this timer is, to secure continuous output signal from Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB) during the power swing, even after the transient impedance leaves ZMRPSB operating characteristic and is expected to return within a certain time due to continuous swinging. Consider the minimum possible speed of power swinging in a particular system. The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual current on the inhibit criteria for ZMRPSB. It prevents operation of the function for short transients in the residual current measured by the IED. The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output START signal from ZMRPSB function, if the measured impedance remains within ZMRPSB operating area for a time longer than the set tR2 value. This time delay was usually set to approximately two seconds in older power-swing devices.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The setting of the tEF timer must cover, with sufficient margin, the opening time of a circuit breaker and the dead-time of a single-phase autoreclosing together with the breaker closing time.
3.6.11.3
Table 78:
Name Operation X1InFw R1LIn R1FInFw X1InRv R1FInRv OperationLdCh RLdOutFw ArgLd RLdOutRv kLdRFw kLdRRv tEF IMinOpPE IBase
Setting parameters
ZMRPSB Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 5 - 70 0.10 - 3000.00 0.50 - 0.90 0.50 - 0.90 0.000 - 60.000 5 - 30 1 - 99999 Unit ohm ohm ohm ohm ohm ohm Deg ohm Mult Mult s %IB A Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 1 1 Default Off 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 On 30.00 25 30.00 0.75 0.75 3.000 10 3000 Description Operation Mode On / Off Inner reactive boundary, forward Line resistance for inner characteristic angle Fault resistance coverage to inner resistive line, forward Inner reactive boundary, reverse Fault resistance line to inner resistive boundary, reverse Operation of load discrimination characteristic Outer resistive load boundary, forward Load angle determining load impedance area Outer resistive load boundary, reverse Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, forward Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, reverse Timer for overcoming single-pole reclosing dead time Minimum operate current in % of IBase Base setting for current level settings
Table 79:
Name tP1 tP2 tW tH tR1 tR2
ZMRPSB Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s s s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.045 0.015 0.250 0.500 0.300 2.000 Description Timer for detection of initial power swing Timer for detection of subsequent power swings Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer Timer for holding power swing START output Timer giving delay to inhibit by the residual current Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow swing
Section 3 IED application 3.6.12 Power swing logic ZMRPSL

Function description Power swing logic IEC 61850 identification ZMRPSL IEC 60617 identification -
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.6.12.1
Application
Power Swing Logic (ZMRPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB) function. It enables a reliable fault clearing for different faults on protected lines during power swings in power systems. It is a general goal, to secure fast and selective operation of the distance protection scheme for the faults, which occur on power lines during power swings. It is possible to distinguish between the following main cases: A fault occurs on a so far healthy power line, over which the power swing has been detected and the fast distance protection zone has been blocked by ZMRPSB element. The power swing occurs over two phases of a protected line during the dead time of a singlepole auto-reclosing after the Ph-E fault has been correctly cleared by the distance protection. The second fault can, but does not need to, occur within this time interval. Fault on an adjacent line (behind the B substation, see figure 160) causes the measured impedance to enter the operate area of ZMRPSB function and, for example, the zone 2 operating characteristic (see figure 161). Correct fault clearance initiates an evolving power swing so that the locus of the measured impedance continues through zone 1 operating characteristic and causes its unwanted operation, if no preventive measures have been taken, see figure 161.
C A EA
ZSA
RA
ZSC
B F
ZSD
EC
ED D
xx06000238.vsd
IEC06000238 V1 EN
Figure 160:
Fault on adjacent line and its clearance causes power swinging between sources A and C
ZMRPSL function and the basic operating principle of ZMRPSB function operate reliably for different faults on parallel power lines with detected power swings. It is, however, preferred to keep the distance protection function blocked in cases of single phase-to-earth faults on so far healthy lines with detected power swings. In
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
these cases, it is recommended to use an optionally available directional overcurrent earth-fault protection with scheme communication logic.
jX Measured impedance at initital fault position
Zone 2
B
Zone 1 Impedance locus at initial power swing after the fault clearance
ZMRPSB operating characteristic

IEC99000181 V2 EN
Figure 161:
Impedance trajectory within the distance protection zones 1 and 2 during and after the fault on line B D
3.6.12.2
Setting guidelines Scheme communication and tripping for faults occurring during power swinging over the protected line
The IED includes generally up to five distance protection zones. It is possible to use one or two of them intentionally for selective fault clearing during power swings only. Following are the basic conditions for the operation of the so called (underreaching and overreaching) power-swing zones: They must generally be blocked during normal operation and released during power swings. Their operation must be time delayed but shorter (with sufficient margin) than the set time delay of normal distance protection zone 2, which is generally blocked by the power swing. Their resistive reach setting must secure, together with the set time delay for their operation, that the slowest expected swings pass the impedance operate area without initiating their operation.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection zones is schematically presented in figure 162. The operation of the power swing zones is conditioned by the operation of Power swing detection (ZMRPSB) function. They operate in PUTT or POTT communication scheme with corresponding distance protection zones at the remote line end. It is preferred to use the communication channels over the optionally available Line Data Communication Module - LDCM and the Binary signal transfer to remote end function. It is also possible to include, in an easy way (by means of configuration possibilities), the complete functionality into regular scheme communication logic for the distance protection function. The communication scheme for the regular distance protection does not operate during the power-swing conditions, because the distance protection zones included in the scheme are normally blocked. The powerswing zones can for this reason use the same communication facilities during the power-swing conditions. Only one power swing zone is necessary in distance protection at each line terminal, if the POTT communication scheme is applied. One underreaching power swing zone, which sends the time delayed carrier signal, and one overreaching power swing zone, which performs the local tripping condition, are necessary with PUTT schemes. The operation of the distance protection zones with long time delay (for example, zone 3) is in many cases not blocked by the power swing detection elements. This allows in such cases the distance protection zone 3 (together with the full-scheme design of the distance protection function) to be used at the same time as the overreaching power-swing zone.
STDEF AR1P1 STPSD BLOCK CSUR tBlkTr t
&
tCS
&
&
CS
&
BLKZMPS
tTrip t CACC CR
&
>1
TRIP
en06000236.vsd
IEC06000236 V1 EN
Figure 162:
Simplified logic diagram - power swing communication and tripping logic
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Configuration Configure the BLOCK input to any combination of conditions, which are supposed to block the operation of logic. Connection to detected fuse failure conditions is required as a minimum. The STDEF functional input should be configured to the START signal of any line earth fault overcurrent protection function within the IED. When the directional earth fault O/C function is used an OR combination of forward and reverse operation should be used. Connect the AR1P1 to the output signal of the autoreclosing function, which signals the activation of the single pole autoreclosing dead time. The STPSD input should be connected to the starting signal of the power swing detection (ZMRPSB) function, which becomes active in cases of detected system oscillations. The CSUR functional input should be connected to the starting output of the power swing distance protection zone, which is used as a local tripping criteria during power swings in PUTT schemes. When the POTT scheme is used (also on series compensated networks) the local criteria and the carrier sending zone are one and the same. It is preferred to use separate communication facilities for distance protection and for power swing communication logic, but combination of functionality within the same communication channel is possible as well. Connect the CACC functional input to start output signal of the local overreaching power swing distance protection zone, which serves as a local criteria at receiving of carrier signal during the power swing cycle. The CR signal should be configured to the functional input which provides the logic with information on received carrier signal sent by the remote end power swing distance protection zone. The CS functional output signal should be configured to either output relay or to corresponding input of the Binary signal transfer to remote end function. The BLKZMPS output signal should be configured to BLOCK input of the power swing distance protection zones. The TRIP signal should be connected correspondingly towards the tripping functionality of the complete distance protection within the IED. Setting calculations Time delay of power swing carrier send distance protection zones Time delay for the underreaching or overreaching carrier send power swing zone should be set shorter (with sufficient margin) than the time delay of normal distance protection zone 2 to obtain selective time grading also in cases of faults during power swings. The necessary time difference depends mostly on the speed of the communication channel used, speed of the circuit breaker used, etc. Time difference between 100 ms and 150 ms is generally sufficient. Reactive reach setting of power swing distance protection zones
337
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Set the reactive reach for the power swing zones according to the system selectivity planning. The reach of the underreaching zone should not exceed 85% of the protected line length. The reach of the overreaching zone should be at least 120% of the protected line length. Resistive reach setting of carrier send power swing distance protection zone Determine the minimum possible speed of impedance Z / t in primary / s of the expected power swings. When better information is not available from system studies, the following equation may be used:
vz = 2 Z L min f s min
EQUATION1537 V1 EN
(Equation 311)
Where: vz ZLmin fsmin is a minimum expected speed of swing impedance in / s is a minimum expected primary load impedance in is a minimum expected oscillation (swing) frequency in Hz
Calculate the maximum permissible resistive reach for each power swing zone separately according to the following equations.
RFPPn = v z tnPP 0.8

EQUATION1538 V1 EN
(Equation 312)
RFPEn =
EQUATION1539 V1 EN
vz tnPE 0.8 2
(Equation 313)
Here is factor 0.8 considered for safety reasons and:
RFPEn RFPPn tnPE tnPP
phase-to-earth resistive reach setting for a power swing distance protection zone n in phase-to-phase resistive reach setting for a power swing distance protection zone n in time delay for phase-to-earth fault measurement of power swing distance protection zone n in s time delay for phase-to-phase fault measurement of power swing distance protection zone n in s
Time-delay for the overreaching power swing zone Time delay for the overreaching power swing zone is not an important parameter, if the zone is used only for the protection purposes at power-swings.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Consider the normal time grading, if the overreaching zone serves as a time delayed back-up zone, which is not blocked by the operation of Power swing detection (ZMRPSB) function. Timers within the power swing logic Settings of the timers within Power swing logic (ZMRPSL) depend to a great extent on the settings of other time delayed elements within the complete protection system. These settings differ within different power systems. The recommended settings consider only the general system conditions and the most used practice at different utilities. It is always necessary to check the local system conditions. The carrier send timer tCS is used for safety reasons within the logic. It requires continuous presence of the input signal STPSD, before it can issue a carrier send signal. A time delay between 50 and 100 ms is generally sufficient. The trip timer tTrip is used for safety reasons within the logic. It requires continuous presence of the input signal STPSD, before it can issue a tripping command during the power swings. A time delay between 50 and 100 ms is generally sufficient. The blocking timer tBlkTr prolongs the presence of the BLKZMOR output signals, which can be used to block the operation of the power swing zones after the detected single-phase-to-earth faults during the power swings. It is necessary to permit the O/C EF protection to eliminate the initial fault and still make possible for the power swing zones to operate for possible consecutive faults. A time delay between 150 and 300 ms is generally sufficient.
Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings
The second part of a complete Power swing logic (ZMRPSL) functionality is a blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings, see figure 160 and figure 161. The simplified logic is presented in figure 163. The logic controls the operation of the underreaching distance protection zone (Zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance on the adjacent power lines. The logic should generally be configured between distance protection zones 1 and 2. Configuration The fault impedance should be detected within the external boundary of Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB) function without power swing detected during the entire fault duration. Configure for this reason the STZMPSD to the functional output signal of ZMRPSB function, which indicates the measured impedance within its external boundaries.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
& &
STZML BLOCK STMZH STZMPSD STPSD BLKZMH STZMLL
& &
tZL t tDZ t
& >1
>1
&
-loop
en06000237.vsd
IEC06000237 V1 EN
Figure 163:
Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings
No system oscillation should be detected in power system. Configure for this reason the STPSD functional input to the START functional output of ZMRPSB function or to any binary input signal indicating the detected oscillations within the power system. Configure the functional input STZMUR to the start output of the instantaneous underreaching distance protection zone (usually START of distance protection zone 1). The function will determine whether the start signal of this zone is permitted to be used in further logic or not, dependent on time difference on appearance of overreaching distance protection zone (usually zone 2). Configure for this reason the functional output signal STZMURPS to the start output of the overreaching distance protection zone (usually START of distance protection zone 2). Functional output PUZMLL replaces the start (and trip) signals of the distance protection zone 1 in all following logic. Configure it accordingly within the logic. Functional output signal BLKZMOR should be configured to block the overreach distance protection zone (generally zone 2) in order to prevent its maloperation during the first swinging of the system. Configure it accordingly to BLOCK functional input of distance protection zone 2. Setting calculations Setting of the differentiating timer tDZ influences to a great extent the performance of the protection during the power swings, which develops by occurrence and clearance of the faults on adjacent power lines. It is necessary to consider the possibility for the faults to occur close to the set reach of the underreaching distance protection zone, which might result in prolonged operate times of zone 1 (underreaching zone) compared to zone 2 starting time (overreaching zone). A setting between 80 and 150 ms is generally sufficient.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The release timer tZL permits unconditional operation of the underreaching zone, if the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic longer than the set time tZL. Its setting depends on the expected speed of the initial swings and on the setting of the time delay for the overreaching zone 2. The release timer must still permit selective tripping of the distance protection within the complete network. A setting between 200 and 300 ms is generally sufficient.
3.6.12.3
Table 80:
Name Operation tDZ tDZMUR tCS tTrip tBlkTr
Setting parameters
ZMRPSL Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default Off 0.050 0.200 0.100 0.100 0.300 Description Operation Off / On Permitted max oper time diff between higher and lower zone Delay for oper of underreach zone with detected diff in oper time Conditional timer for sending the CS at power swings Conditional timer for tripping at power swings Timer for blocking the overreaching zones trip
3.6.13
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM

Function description Pole slip protection IEC 61850 identification PSPPPAM IEC 60617 identification Ucos ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 78
3.6.13.1
Application
Normally, the generator operates synchronously with the power system, that is, all the generators in the system have the same angular velocity and approximately the same phase angle difference. If the phase angle between the generators gets too large the stable operation of the system cannot be maintained. In such a case the generator loses the synchronism (pole slip) to the external power system. The situation with pole slip of a generator can be caused by different reasons. A short circuit occurs in the external power grid, close to the generator. If the fault clearance time is too long, the generator will accelerate so much, so the synchronism cannot be maintained. The relative generator phase angle at a fault and pole slip, relative to the external power system, is shown in figure 164.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
en06000313.vsd
IEC06000313 V1 EN
Figure 164:
Relative generator phase angle at a fault and pole slip relative to the external power system
The relative angle of the generator is shown for different fault duration at a threephase short circuit close to the generator. As the fault duration increases the angle swing amplitude increases. When the critical fault clearance time is reached the stability cannot be maintained. Un-damped oscillations occur in the power system, where generator groups at different locations, oscillate against each other. If the connection between the generators is too weak the amplitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost. At the moment of pole slip there will be a centre of this pole slip, which is equivalent with distance protection impedance measurement of a three-phase. If this point is situated in the generator itself, the generator should be tripped as fast as possible. If the locus of the out of step centre is located in the power system outside the generators the power system should, if possible, be split into two parts, and the generators should be kept in service. This split can be made at predefined locations (trip of predefined lines) after function from pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) in the line protection IED.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
en06000314.vsd
IEC06000314 V1 EN
Figure 165:
Undamped oscillations causing pole slip
The relative angle of the generator is shown a contingency in the power system, causing un-damped oscillations. After a few periods of the oscillation the swing amplitude gets to large and the stability cannot be maintained. If the excitation of the generator gets too low there is a risk that the generator cannot maintain synchronous operation. The generator will slip out of phase and operate as an induction machine. Normally the under-excitation protection will detect this state and trip the generator before the pole slip. For this fault the underexcitation protection and PSPPPAM function will give mutual redundancy. The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the generator block. At each pole slip there will be significant torque impact on the generatorturbine shaft. In asynchronous operation there will be induction of currents in parts of the generator normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The consequence can be damages on insulation and stator/rotor iron. At asynchronous operation the generator will absorb a significant amount of reactive power, thus risking overload of the windings.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
PSPPPAM function shall detect out of step conditions and trip the generator as fast as possible if the locus of the pole slip is inside the generator. If the centre of pole slip is outside the generator, situated out in the power grid, the first action should be to split the network into two parts, after line protection action. If this fails there should be operation of the generator pole slip protection, to prevent further damages to the generator block.
3.6.13.2
Setting guidelines
Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On or Off. IBase: The parameter IBase is set to the generator rated current in A, according to equation 314.
IBase =
EQUATION1884 V1 EN
SN 3 U N
(Equation 314)
UBase: The parameter UBase is set to the generator rated Voltage (phase-to-phase) in kV MeasureMode: The voltage and current used for the impedance measurement is set by the parameter MeasureMode. The setting possibilities are: PosSeq, L1-L2, L2L3, or L3-L1. If all phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the IED the PosSeq alternative is recommended (default). Further settings can be illustrated in figure 166.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Zone 1 EB Xd XT
Zone 2 EA
ZS
IED jX
ZA
Pole slip impedance movement ZC TripAngle
Zone 2 Zone 1 WarnAngle f R
ZB
IEC06000548 V2 EN
Figure 166:
Settings for the Pole slip detection function
The ImpedanceZA is the forward impedance as show in figure 166. ZA should be the sum of the transformer impedance XT and the equivalent impedance of the external system ZS. The impedance is given in % of the base impedance, according to equation 315.
UBase Z Base =
EQUATION1883 V1 EN
3
(Equation 315)
IBase
The ImpedanceZB is the reverse impedance as show in figure 166. ZB should be equal to the generator transient reactance X'd. The impedance is given in % of the base impedance, see equation 315.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The ImpedanceZC is the forward impedance giving the borderline between zone 1 and zone 2. ZC should be equal to the transformer reactance ZT. The impedance is given in % of the base impedance, see equation 315. The angle of the impedance line ZB ZA is given as AnglePhi in degrees. This angle is normally close to 90. StartAngle: An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds the angle set for StartAngle. The default value 110 is recommended. It should be checked so that the points in the impedance plane, corresponding to the chosen StartAngle does not interfere with apparent impedance at maximum generator load. TripAngle: If a pole slip has been detected: change of rotor angle corresponding to slip frequency 0.2 8 Hz, the slip line ZA ZB is crossed and the direction of rotation is the same as at start, a trip is given when the rotor angle gets below the set TripAngle. The default value 90 is recommended. N1Limit: The setting N1Limit gives the number of pole slips that should occur before trip, if the crossing of the slip line ZA ZB is within zone 1, that is, the node of the pole slip is within the generator transformer block. The default value 1 is recommended to minimize the stress on the generator and turbine at out of step conditions. N2Limit: The setting N2Limit gives the number of pole slips that should occur before trip, if the crossing of the slip line ZA ZB is within zone 2, that is, the node of the pole slip is in the external network. The default value 3 is recommended give external protections possibility to split the network and thus limit the system consequencies. ResetTime: The setting ResetTime gives the time for (PSPPPAM) function to reset after start when no pole slip been detected. The default value 5s is recommended.
Setting example for line application
In case of out of step conditions this shall be detected and the line between substation 1 and 2 shall be tripped.
ZA = forward source impedance
ZB
Line impedance = ZC
IED
IEC07000014 V2 EN
Figure 167:
Line application of pole slip protection
If the apparent impedance crosses the impedance line ZB ZA this is the detection criterion of out of step conditions, see figure 168.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ZA
ZC anglePhi R Apparent impedance at normal load
ZB
IEC07000015 V2 EN
Figure 168:
Impedances to be set for pole slip protection
The setting parameters of the protection is: ZA: ZB: ZC: Line + source impedance in the forward direction The source impedance in the reverse direction The line impedance in the forward direction The impedance phase angle
AnglePhi:
Use the following data:
UBase: 400 kV
SBase set to 1000 MVA Short circuit power at station 1 without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a pure reactance) Short circuit power at station 2 without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a pure reactance Line impedance: 2 + j20 ohm
With all phase voltages and phase currents available and fed to the protection IED, it is recommended to set the MeasureMode to positive sequence. The impedance settings are set in pu with ZBase as reference:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ZBase =
EQUATION1960 V1 EN
UBase 2 SBase
400 2 1000
= 160ohm
(Equation 316)
ZA = Z (line ) + Zsc ( station 2) = 2 + j 20 + j

EQUATION1961 V1 EN
400
5000
= 2 + j 52ohm
(Equation 317)
This corresponds to:
ZA =
2 + j 52 160
= 0.0125 + j 0.325 pu = 0.32588 pu

(Equation 318)
EQUATION1962 V1 EN
Set ZA to 0.32.
ZB = Zsc ( station1) = j
EQUATION1963 V1 EN
400 2 5000
= j 32ohm
(Equation 319)
ZB =
j 32 160
= j 0.20 pu = 0.2090 pu
(Equation 320)
EQUATION1964 V1 EN
Set ZB to 0.2 This corresponds to:
ZC =
2 + j 20 160
= 0.0125 + j 0.125 pu = 0.12684 pu

(Equation 321)
EQUATION1966 V1 EN
Set ZC to 0.13 and AnglePhi to 88 The warning angle (StartAngle) should be chosen not to cross into normal operating area. The maximum line power is assumed to be 2000 MVA. This corresponds to apparent impedance:
Z=
U S
400
2000
= 80ohm
(Equation 322)
EQUATION1967 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Simplified, the example can be shown as a triangle, see figure 169.

X
ZA Zload R ZB
en07000016.vsd
IEC07000016 V1 EN
Figure 169:
angleStart arctan
EQUATION1968 V2 EN
Simplified figure to derive StartAngle

ZB ZA 32 52 + arctan = arctan + arctan = 21.80 + 33.0 550 Zload Zload 80 80
(Equation 323)
In case of minor damped oscillations at normal operation we do not want the protection to start. Therefore we set the start angle with large margin. Set StartAngle to 110 For the TripAngle it is recommended to set this parameter to 90 to assure limited stress for the circuit breaker. In a power system it is desirable to split the system into predefined parts in case of pole slip. The protection is therefore situated at lines where this predefined split shall take place. Normally the N1Limit is set to 1 so that the line will be tripped at the first pole slip. If the line shall be tripped at all pole slip situations also the parameter N2Limit is set to 1. In other cases a larger number is recommended.

Setting example for generator application
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In case of out of step conditions this shall be checked if the pole slip centre is inside the generator (zone 1) or if it is situated in the network (zone 2).
ZA ZB ZC
en07000017.vsd
IEC07000017 V1 EN
Figure 170:
Generator application of pole slip protection
If the apparent impedance crosses the impedance line ZB ZA this is the detected criterion of out of step conditions, see figure 171.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ZA
ZC anglePhi R Apparent impedance at normal load
ZB
IEC07000015 V2 EN
Figure 171:
Impedances to be set for pole slip protection PSPPPAM
The setting parameters of the protection are: ZA ZB ZC Block transformer + source impedance in the forward direction The generator transient reactance The block transformer reactance The impedance phase angle
AnglePhi
Use the following generator data:
UBase: 20 kV
SBase set to 200 MVA Xd": 25%
Use the following block transformer data:
UBase: 20 kV (low voltage side)

SBase set to 200 MVA ek: 15%
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Short circuit power from the external network without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a pure reactance). We have all phase voltages and phase currents available and fed to the protection IED. Therefore it is recommended to set the MeasureMode to positive sequence. The impedance settings are set in pu with ZBase as reference:
ZBase =
EQUATION1969 V1 EN
UBase
SBase
20
200
= 2.0ohm
(Equation 324)
ZA = Z (transf ) + Zsc (network ) = j

EQUATION1970 V1 EN
202 202 0.15 + j = j 0.38ohm 200 5000

(Equation 325)
ZA =
j 0.38 2.0
= j 0.19 pu = 0.1990 pu
(Equation 326)
EQUATION1971 V1 EN
Set ZA to 0.19
ZB = jX d = j
EQUATION1972 V1 EN
20 2 200
0.25 = j 0.5ohm
(Equation 327)
ZB =
j 0.5 2.0
= j 0.25 pu = 0.2590 pu
(Equation 328)
EQUATION1973 V1 EN
Set ZB to 0.25
ZC = jX T = j
EQUATION1974 V1 EN
202 0.15 = j 0.3ohm 200

(Equation 329)
ZC =
2 + j 20 160
= 0.0125 + j 0.125 pu = 0.12684 pu

(Equation 330)
EQUATION1975 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Set ZC to 0.15 and AnglePhi to 90. The warning angle (StartAngle) should be chosen not to cross into normal operating area. The maximum line power is assumed to be 200 MVA. This corresponds to apparent impedance:
Z=
U S
20
200
= 2ohm
(Equation 331)
EQUATION1976 V1 EN
Simplified, the example can be shown as a triangle, see figure 172.

X
ZA Zload R ZB
en07000016.vsd
IEC07000016 V1 EN
Figure 172:
angleStart arctan
EQUATION1977 V2 EN
Simplified figure to derive StartAngle

ZB ZA 0.25 0.19 + arctan = arctan + arctan = 7.10 + 5.4 130 Zload Zload 2 2
(Equation 332)
In case of minor damped oscillations at normal operation we do not want the protection to start. Therefore we set the start angle with large margin. Set StartAngle to 110.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
For the TripAngle it is recommended to set this parameter to 90 to assure limited stress for the circuit breaker. If the centre of pole slip is within the generator block set N1Limit to 1 to get trip at first pole slip. If the centre of pole slip is within the network set N2Limit to 3 to get enable split of the system before generator trip.
3.6.13.3
Table 81:
Name Operation OperationZ1 OperationZ2 ImpedanceZA ImpedanceZB ImpedanceZC AnglePhi StartAngle TripAngle N1Limit N2Limit
Setting parameters
PSPPPAM Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off On Off On 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 72.00 - 90.00 0.0 - 180.0 0.0 - 180.0 1 - 20 1 - 20 Unit % % % Deg Deg Deg Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 1 1 Default Off On On 10.00 10.00 10.00 85.00 110.0 90.0 1 3 Description Operation On / Off Operation Zone1 On / Off Operation Zone2 On / Off Forward impedance in % of Zbase Reverse impedance in % of Zbase Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase Angle of the slip impedance line Rotor angle for the start signal Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals Count limit for the trip1 signal Count limit for the trip2 signal
Table 82:
Name ResetTime
PSPPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Description Time without slip to reset all signals
Table 83:
Name IBase UBase MeasureMode
PSPPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.1 - 99999.9 0.1 - 9999.9 PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 No Yes Unit A kV Step 0.1 0.1 Default 3000.0 20.0 PosSeq Description Base Current (primary phase current in Amperes) Base Voltage (primary phase-to-phase voltage in kV) Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1)
InvertCTcurr
No
Invert current direction
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

Function description Phase preference logic IEC 61850 identification PPLPHIZ IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.6.14
3.6.14.1
Application
Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is an auxiliary function to Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS and Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS. The purpose is to create the logic in resonance or high resistive earthed systems (normally subtransmission) to achieve the correct phase selective tripping during two simultaneous single-phase earth-faults in different phases on different line sections. Due to the resonance/high resistive earthing principle, the earth faults in the system gives very low fault currents, typically below 25 A. At the same time, the occurring system voltages on the healthy phases will increase to line voltage level as the neutral displacement is equal to the phase voltage level at a fully developed earth fault. This increase of the healthy phase voltage, together with slow tripping, gives a considerable increase of the risk of a second fault in a healthy phase and the second fault can occur at any location. When it occurs on another feeder, the fault is commonly called cross-country fault. Different practices for tripping is used by different utilities. The main use of this logic is in systems where single phase-to-earth faults are not automatically cleared, only alarm is given and the fault is left on until a suitable time to send people to track down and repair the fault. When cross-country faults occur, the practice is to trip only one of the faulty lines. In other cases, a sensitive, directional earth-fault protection is provided to trip, but due to the low fault currents long tripping times are utilized. Figure 173 shows an occurring cross-country fault. Figure 174 shows the achievement of line voltage on healthy phases and an occurring cross-country fault.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Load
L3N
Load L1N en06000550.vsd

IEC06000550 V1 EN
Figure 173:
An occurring cross-country fault on different feeders in a subtransmission network, high impedance (resistance, reactance) earthed
UL1
2F UL
UL 3
3 UL
UL 2
en06000551.vsd
IEC06000551 V1 EN
Figure 174:
The voltage increase on healthy phases and occurring neutral point voltage (3U0) at a single phase-to-earth fault and an occurring cross-country fault on different feeders in a subtransmission network, high impedance (resistance, reactance) earthed
PPLPHIZ is connected between Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic function ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS and Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS as shown in figure 175. The integer from the phase selection function, which gives the type of fault undergoes a check and will release the distance protection zones as decided by the logic. The logic includes a check of the fault loops given by the phase
UL 3
3U0
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
selection and if the fault type indicates a two or three phase fault the integer releasing the zone is not changed. If the fault indicates and earth-fault checks are done which mode of tripping to be used, for example 1231c, which means that fault in the phases are tripped in the cyclic order L1 before L2 before L3 before L1. Local conditions to check the phaseto-earth voltage levels and occurring zero sequence current and voltages completes the logic.
FDPSPDIS I3P* U3P* BLOCK DIRCND TRIP START STFWL1 STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STNDL1 STNDL2 STNDL3 STNDPE STFW1PH STFW2PH STFW3PH STPE STPP STCNDZ STCNDLE ZMQAPDIS W2_CT_B_I3P W2_VT_B_U3P FALSE PHS_L1 PHS_L2 PHS_L3 W2_FSD1-BLKZ FALSE I3P* U3P* BLOCK VTSZ BLKTR STCND DIRCND TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 START STL1 STL2 STL3 STND
ZMQPDIS W2_CT_B_I3P W2_VT_B_U3P FALSE W2_FSD1-BLKZ FALSE I3P* U3P* BLOCK VTSZ BLKTR STCND DIRCND TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 START STL1 STL2 STL3 STND
PPLPHIZ W2_CT_B_I3P W2_VT_B_U3P FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE I3P* U3P* BLOCK RELL1N RELL2N RELL3N STCND START ZREL
IEC06000552 V3 EN
Figure 175:
The connection of Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ between Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS and Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS
As the fault is a double earth-faults at different locations of the network, the fault current in the faulty phase on each of the lines will be seen as a phase current and at the same time as a neutral current as the remaining phases on each feeder virtually carries no (load) current. Any current through the earthing impedance does not exist. It is limited by the impedance to below the typical, say 25 to 40 A. Occurring neutral current is thus a sign of a cross-country fault (a double earth- fault)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IL3=IN
IL1=IN
en06000553.vsd
IEC06000553 V1 EN
Figure 176:
The currents in the phases at a double earth fault
The function has a block input (BLOCK) to block start from the function if required in certain conditions.
3.6.14.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ are set via the local HMI or PCM600. Phase preference logic function is an intermediate logic between Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic function ZMQPDIS and Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS. Phase selection and zones are set according to normal praxis, including earth-fault loops, although earth-fault loops will only be active during a crosscountry fault. OperMode: The operating mode is selected. Choices includes cyclic or acyclic phase selection in the preferred mode. This setting must be identical for all IEDs in the same galvanic connected network part. UBase: Base voltage level in kV. The base voltage is used as reference for the voltage setting factors. Normally it is set to the system voltage level (phase to phase). IBase: Base current level in A. The base current is used as reference for the neutral current setting factor. Normally it is set to the current transformer rated current. UPN<: The setting of the phase-toearth voltage level (phase voltage) which is used by the evaluation logic to verify that a fault exists in the phase. Normally in a
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
high impedance earthed system, the voltage drop is big and the setting can typically be set to 70% of base voltage (UBase) UPP<: The setting of the phase-to-phase voltage level (line voltage) which is used by the evaluation logic to verify that a fault exists in two or more phases. The voltage must be set to avoid that a partly healthy phase-to-phase voltage, for example, L2-L3 for a L1-L2 fault, picks-up and gives an incorrect release of all loops. The setting can typically be 40 to 50% of rated voltage (UBase) divided by 3, that is 40%. 3U0>: The setting of the residual voltage level (neutral voltage) which is used by the evaluation logic to verify that an earth-fault exists. The setting can typically be 20% of base voltage (UBase). IN>: The setting of the residual current level (neutral current) which is used by the evaluation logic to verify that a cross-country fault exists. The setting can typically be 20% of base current (IBase) but the setting shall be above the maximum current generated by the system earthing. Note that the systems are high impedance earthed which means that the earth-fault currents at earth-faults are limited and the occurring IN above this level shows that there exists a two-phase fault on this line and a parallel line where the IN is the fault current level in the faulty phase. A high sensitivity need not to be achieved as the two-phase fault level normally is well above base current. tIN: The time delay for detecting that the fault is cross-country. Normal time setting is 0.1 - 0.15 s. tUN: The time delay for a secure UN detecting that the fault is an earth-fault or double earth-fault with residual voltage. Normal time setting is 0.1 - 0.15 s. tOffUN: The UN voltage has a reset drop-off to ensure correct function without timing problems. Normal time setting is 0.1 s
3.6.14.3
Table 84:
Name IBase UBase OperMode
Setting parameters
PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 No Filter NoPref 1231c 1321c 123a 132a 213a 231a 312a 321a 10 - 100 Unit A kV Step 1 0.01 Default 3000 400.00 No Filter Description Base current Base voltage Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
UPN<
%UB
70
Operate value of phase undervoltage in % of UBase/sqrt(3)

Name UPP< 3U0> IN> tUN tOffUN tIN Values (Range) 10 - 100 5 - 300 10 - 200 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit %UB %UB %IB s s s Step 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 50 20 20 0.100 0.100 0.150 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operate value of line to line undervoltage (% of UBase) Operate value of residual voltage in % of UBase/sqrt(3) Operate value of residual current (% of IBase) Pickup-delay for residual voltage Dropoff-delay for residual voltage Pickup-delay for residual current
3.7
3.7.1
Current protection
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC
Function description Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification PHPIOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 50
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
3.7.1.1
Application
Long transmission lines often transfer great quantities of electric power from production to consumption areas. The unbalance of the produced and consumed electric power at each end of the transmission line is very large. This means that a fault on the line can easily endanger the stability of a complete system. The transient stability of a power system depends mostly on three parameters (at constant amount of transmitted electric power): The type of the fault. Three-phase faults are the most dangerous, because no power can be transmitted through the fault point during fault conditions. The magnitude of the fault current. A high fault current indicates that the decrease of transmitted power is high. The total fault clearing time. The phase angles between the EMFs of the generators on both sides of the transmission line increase over the permitted stability limits if the total fault clearing time, which consists of the protection operating time and the breaker opening time, is too long.
The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and decreases with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
protection must operate very quickly for faults very close to the generation (and relay) point, for which very high fault currents are characteristic. The instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC can operate in 10 ms for faults characterized by very high currents.
3.7.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC are set via the local HMI or PCM600. This protection function must operate only in a selective way. So check all system and transient conditions that could cause its unwanted operation. Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears during three-phase fault conditions. But also examine single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth conditions. Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also cause the operation of the built-in, instantaneous, overcurrent protection. IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. If possible to find a suitable value the rated current of the protected object is chosen. OpMode: This parameter can be set to 2 out of 3 or 1 out of 3. The setting controls the minimum number of phase currents that must be larger than the set operate current IP>> for operation. Normally this parameter is set to 1 out of 3and will thus detect all fault types. If the protection is to be used mainly for multi phase faults, 2 out of 3 should be chosen. IP>>: Set operate current in % of IBase. StValMult: The operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input ENMULT to the set factor StValMult.
Meshed network without parallel line
The following fault calculations have to be done for three-phase, single-phase-toearth and two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 177, apply a fault in B and then calculate the current through-fault phase current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to get the maximum through fault current from A to B.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ZA
I fB ZL
ZB
IED Fault
IEC09000022 V1 EN
Figure 177:
Through fault current from A to B: IfB
Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault current IfA has to be calculated, figure 178. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be considered.
ZA
I fA ZL
ZB
~
IED Fault
IEC09000023 V1 EN
Figure 178:
Through fault current from B to A: IfA
The IED must not trip for any of the two through-fault currents. Hence the minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfB )
EQUATION78 V1 EN
(Equation 333)
A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data. The minimum primary setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Is 1, 3 I min
EQUATION79 V1 EN
(Equation 334)
The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal to or less than the maximum fault current that the IED has to clear, IF in figure 179.
IF
ZA
ZL
ZB
~
IED Fault
IEC09000024 V1 EN
Figure 179:
Fault current: IF
IP >>=
Is IBase
100
(Equation 335)
EQUATION1147 V3 EN
In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the protected line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 180 where the two lines are connected to the same busbars. In this case the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two through fault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for the IED in figure 180 will be with a fault at the C point with the C breaker open. A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the IED (IM ) on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-toearth faults) is calculated.
Meshed network with parallel line
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Line 1 A C ZL1 B ZB Fault ZL2 IM IED

IEC09000025 V1 EN
ZA M
Line 2
Figure 180:
Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM
The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protection function (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfB , IM )
EQUATION82 V1 EN
(Equation 336)
Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:
Is 1.3Imin
EQUATION83 V2 EN
(Equation 337)
The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal or less than the maximum phase fault current that the IED has to clear. The IED setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the primary base current value, IBase. The value for IP>> is given from this formula:
IP >>= Is IBase 100
(Equation 338)
EQUATION1147 V3 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
3.7.1.3
Table 85:
Name Operation IBase OpMode IP>>
PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 2 out of 3 1 out of 3 1 - 2500 Unit A %IB Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 1 out of 3 200 Description Operation Off / On Base current Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out of 3 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
Table 86:
Name StValMult
PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.5 - 5.0 Unit Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Description Multiplier for operate current level
3.7.2
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC

Function description Four step phase overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification OC4PTOC
4 4
IEC 60617 identification

3I> alt
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 51/67
TOC-REVA V1 EN
3.7.2.1
Application
The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC is used in several applications in the power system. Some applications are: Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure. Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines. Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers. Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power system such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others. Back-up short circuit protection of power generators. If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter DirModex (x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4) shall be left to default value Nondirectional. In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time delays are needed. OC4PTOC can have up to four different, individual settable,
365
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
steps. The flexibility of each step of OC4PTOC is great. The following options are possible: Non-directional / Directional function: In most applications the non-directional functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the directional function can be necessary. Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of delay time characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different protections. To enable optimal co-ordination between all overcurrent protections, they should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic. Normally it is required that the phase overcurrent protection shall reset as fast as possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can be used. For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to a large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly larger than the rated current of the motor. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is activated from a binary input signal to the function. Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current of the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large 2nd harmonic content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore, OC4PTOC have a possibility of 2nd harmonic restrain if the level of this harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current. The phase overcurrent protection is often used as protection for two and three phase short circuits. In some cases it is not wanted to detect single-phase earth faults by the phase overcurrent protection. This fault type is detected and cleared after operation of earth fault protection. Therefore it is possible to make a choice how many phases, at minimum, that have to have current above the pick-up level, to enable operation. If set 1 of 3 it is sufficient to have high current in one phase only. If set 2 of 3 or 3 of 3 single-phase earth faults are not detected.
3.7.2.2
Setting guidelines
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero. The parameters for Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following settings can be done for OC4PTOC. MeasType: Selection of discrete Fourier filtered (DFT) or true RMS filtered (RMS) signals. RMS is used when the harmonic contents are to be considered, for example in applications with shunt capacitors. Operation: The protection can be set to Off or On IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current of the protected object. UBase: Base voltage level in kV. This voltage is give as a phase-to-phase voltage and this is the reference for voltage related settings of the function. Normally the setting should be chosen to the rated phase-to-phase voltage of the voltage transformer feeding the protection IED. AngleRCA: Protection characteristic angle set in degrees. If the angle of the fault loop current has the angle RCA the direction to fault is forward. AngleROA: Angle value, given in degrees, to define the angle sector of the directional function, see figure 181. IminOpPhSel: Minimum current for phase selection set in % of IBase. This setting should be less than the lowest step setting. Default setting is 7%. StartPhSel: Number of phases, with high current, required for operation. The setting possibilities are: Not used,1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3. Default setting is 1 out of 3. 2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the fundamental current. The setting range is 5 - 100% in steps of 1%. Default setting is 20%.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Uref
1 2 2 4
Idir
IEC09000636_1_vsd
IEC09000636 V1 EN
Figure 181:
Directional function characteristic
1. 2. 3. 4.
RCA = Relay characteristic angle ROA = Relay operating angle Reverse Forward
Settings for each step

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.
DirModex: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Off/Nondirectional/Forward/Reverse. Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics are available according to table 87.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 87:
Curve name
Inverse time characteristics
ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE Definite time ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse ANSI Long Time Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse IEC Definite Time User Programmable ASEA RI RXIDG (logarithmic)
The different characteristics are described in Technical reference manual. Ix>: Operation phase current level for step x given in % of IBase. tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen. kx: Time multiplier for inverse time delay for step x. IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Ix> for every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set above Ix> for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx. IxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal (enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increase by this setting constant. Setting range: 1.0-10.0 txMin: Minimum operation time for all inverse time characteristics. At high currents the inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting range: 0.000 - 60.000s in steps of 0.001s.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operate time
IMinx
txMin
Current
IEC10000058 V1 EN
Figure 182:
Minimum operate current and operation time for inverse time characteristics
In order to fully comply with curves definition setting parameter txMin shall be set to the value, which is equal to the operating time of the selected inverse curve for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier kx. ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By choosing setting the possibilities are according to table 88.
Table 88:
Curve name Instantaneous IEC Reset (constant time) ANSI Reset (inverse time)
Reset possibilities
Curve index no. 1 2 3
The delay characteristics are described in the technical reference manual. There are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay. For the definite time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
For ANSI inverse time characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). For IEC inverse time characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given. HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk if power transformer inrush currents might cause unwanted trip. Can be set Off/On. tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). See equation 339 for the time characteristic equation.
A + B IxMult t [s] = p i -C in >

EQUATION1261 V2 EN
(Equation 339)
For more information, refer to the technical reference manual. tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time characteristic curve (Reset Curve type = 3). Further description can be found in the technical reference manual. If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the transformer core will saturate during part of the period, resulting in an inrush transformer current. This will give a declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating between the phases. There is a risk that the phase overcurrent function will give an unwanted trip. The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic component. This component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this unwanted function. The settings for the 2nd harmonic restrain are described below. 2ndHarmStab: The rate of 2nd harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd harmonic restrain signal, to block chosen steps. The setting is given in % of the fundamental frequency residual current. The setting range is 5 - 100% in steps of 1%. The default setting is 20%.
2nd harmonic restrain
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
HarmRestrainx: This parameter can be set Off/On, to disable or enable the 2nd harmonic restrain. The four step phase overcurrent protection can be used in different ways, depending on the application where the protection is used. A general description is given below. The operating current setting inverse time protection or the lowest current step constant inverse time protection must be given a current setting so that the highest possible load current does not cause protection operation. Here consideration also has to be taken to the protection reset current, so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause operation of the protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon is described in figure 183.
Current I
Line phase current Operating current
Reset current
The IED does not reset
Time t
IEC05000203-en-2.vsd
IEC05000203 V2 EN
Figure 183:
Operating and reset current for an overcurrent protection
The lowest setting value can be written according to equation 340.

Ipu 1.2
EQUATION1262 V2 EN
Im ax k
(Equation 340)
where: 1.2 k Imax 372 Application manual is a safety factor, is the resetting ratio of the protection, and is the maximum load current.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
From operation statistics the load current up to the present situation can be found. The current setting must be valid also for some years ahead. It is, in most cases, realistic that the setting values are updated not more often than once every five years. In many cases this time interval is still longer. Investigate the maximum load current that different equipment on the line can withstand. Study components such as line conductors, current transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer of the equipment normally gives the maximum thermal load current of the equipment. The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover, must be detected by the phase overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current Iscmin, to be detected by the protection, must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pick up current setting can be written according to equation 341.
Ipu 0.7 Isc min
EQUATION1263 V2 EN
(Equation 341)
where: 0.7 Iscmin is a safety factor and is the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.
As a summary the operating current shall be chosen within the interval stated in equation 342.
1.2 Im ax Ipu 0.7 Isc min k
(Equation 342)
EQUATION1264 V2 EN
The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short delay of the operation, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to other protection in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults within as large portion as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by the protection (primary protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone. Considerations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possible DC component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the most rapid stage, of the phase overcurrent protection, can be written according to
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
I high 1.2 kt I sc max

EQUATION1265 V1 EN
(Equation 343)
where: 1.2 kt is a safety factor, is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current and can be considered to be less than 1.1
Iscmax is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.
The operate times of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the fault time is so short that protected equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal overload, at the same time as selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection, in a radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the case of inverse time overcurrent protection. Figure 184 shows how the time-versus-current curves are plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get the shortest fault time with maintained selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time difference between the curves is larger than a critical time difference.
en05000204.wmf
IEC05000204 V1 EN
Figure 184:
Fault time with maintained selectivity
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection. To assure selectivity between different protections, in the radial network, there have to be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. The minimum time difference can be determined for different cases. To determine the shortest possible time difference, the operation time of protections, breaker opening time and protection resetting time must be known. These time delays can vary significantly between different protective equipment. The following time delays can be estimated:
Protection operation time: Protection resetting time: Breaker opening time: 15-60 ms 15-60 ms 20-120 ms
Example
Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as shown in the figure 185. Consider a fault located at another line from the station B. The fault current to the overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that the protection will have instantaneous function. The overcurrent protection of IED A1 must have a delayed function. The sequence of events during the fault can be described using a time axis, see figure 185.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
A1
B1
Feeder
I>
I>
Time axis
t=0 The fault occurs

IEC05000205 V1 EN
t=t1 Protection B1 trips
t=t2 Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3 Protection A1 resets

en05000205.vsd
Figure 185:
where: t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3
Sequence of events during fault
is when the fault occurs, is when the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent to the circuit breaker. The operation time of this protection is t1, is when the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t2 - t1 and is when the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t3 - t2.
To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1, is selective to the overcurrent protection at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger than the time t3. There are uncertainties in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening time and protection resetting time. Therefore a safety margin has to be included. With normal values the needed time difference can be calculated according to equation 344.
Dt 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
EQUATION1266 V1 EN
(Equation 344)
where it is considered that: the operation time of overcurrent protection B1 is 40 ms the breaker open time the resetting time of protection A1 the additional margin is 100 ms is 40 ms and is 40 ms
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
3.7.2.3
Table 89:
Name Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA AngleROA StartPhSel
OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 40 - 65 40 - 89 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse Unit A kV Deg Deg Step 1 0.05 1 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 55 80 1 out of 3 Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Relay operation angle (ROA) Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
DirMode1
Non-directional
Characterist1
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
I1> t1 k1 IMin1 t1Min I1Mult DirMode2
%IB s %IB s -
1 0.001 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 -
1000 0.000 0.05 100 0.000 2.0 Non-directional
Phase current operate level for step1 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

Name Characterist2 Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Step Default ANSI Def. Time Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
I2> t2 k2 IMin2 t2Min I2Mult DirMode3
%IB s %IB s -
1 0.001 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 -
500 0.400 0.05 50 0.000 2.0 Non-directional
Phase current operate level for step2 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Characterist3
ANSI Def. Time
I3> t3
%IB s
1 0.001
250 0.800
Phase current operate level for step3 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 3
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Unit %IB s Step 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 Default 0.05 33 0.000 2.0 Non-directional Description Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 3 Minimum operate current for step3 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for current operate level for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Name k3 IMin3 t3Min I3Mult DirMode4
Characterist4
ANSI Def. Time
I4> t4 k4 IMin4 t4Min I4Mult
%IB s %IB s -
1 0.001 0.01 1 0.001 0.1
175 2.000 0.05 17 0.000 2.0
Phase current operate level for step4 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 4 Minimum operate current for step4 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4
Table 90:
Name IMinOpPhSel 2ndHarmStab ResetTypeCrv1
OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 1 - 100 5 - 100 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Unit %IB %IB Step 1 1 Default 7 20 Instantaneous Description Minimum current for phase selection in % of IBase Operate level of 2nd harm restrain op in % of Fundamental Selection of reset curve type for step 1

Name tReset1 tPCrv1 tACrv1 tBCrv1 tCCrv1 tPRCrv1 tTRCrv1 tCRCrv1 HarmRestrain1 ResetTypeCrv2 Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 Unit s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Off Instantaneous Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 2
tReset2 tPCrv2 tACrv2 tBCrv2 tCCrv2 tPRCrv2 tTRCrv2 tCRCrv2 HarmRestrain2 ResetTypeCrv3
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -
0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Off Instantaneous
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 3
tReset3 tPCrv3 tACrv3 tBCrv3
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01
0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off On Unit Step 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Off Instantaneous Description Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 4
Name tCCrv3 tPRCrv3 tTRCrv3 tCRCrv3 HarmRestrain3 ResetTypeCrv4
tReset4 tPCrv4 tACrv4 tBCrv4 tCCrv4 tPRCrv4 tTRCrv4 tCRCrv4 HarmRestrain4
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -
0.020 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Off
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
Table 91:
Name MeasType
OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) DFT RMS Unit Step Default DFT Description Selection between DFT and RMS measurement
3.7.3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

Function description Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification EFPIOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 50N
IN>>
IEF V1 EN

3.7.3.1 Application
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In many applications, when fault current is limited to a defined value by the object impedance, an instantaneous earth-fault protection can provide fast and selective tripping. The Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC, which can operate in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal system frequency) for faults characterized by very high currents, is included in the IED.
3.7.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC are set via the local HMI or PCM600. Some guidelines for the choice of setting parameter for EFPIOC is given. The setting of the function is limited to the operation residual current to the protection (IN>>). The basic requirement is to assure selectivity, that is EFPIOC shall not be allowed to operate for faults at other objects than the protected object (line). For a normal line in a meshed system single phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phaseto-earth faults shall be calculated as shown in figure 186 and figure 187. The residual currents (3I0) to the protection are calculated. For a fault at the remote line end this fault current is IfB. In this calculation the operational state with high source impedance ZA and low source impedance ZB should be used. For the fault at the home busbar this fault current is IfA. In this calculation the operational state with low source impedance ZA and high source impedance ZB should be used.
ZA
I fB ZL
ZB
IED Fault
IEC09000022 V1 EN
Figure 186:
Through fault current from A to B: IfB
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ZA
I fA ZL
ZB
~
IED Fault
IEC09000023 V1 EN
Figure 187:
Through fault current from B to A: IfA
The function shall not operate for any of the calculated currents to the protection. The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfA )
EQUATION284 V1 EN
(Equation 345)
A safety margin of 5% for the maximum static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is suggested due to inaccuracy of instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data. The minimum primary current setting (Is) is:
Is 1, 3 Imin
EQUATION285 V1 EN
(Equation 346)
In case of parallel lines with zero sequence mutual coupling a fault on the parallel line, as shown in figure 188, should be calculated.
Line 1 A C ZL1 B ZB Fault ZL2 IM IED

IEC09000025 V1 EN
ZA M
Line 2
Figure 188:
Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM
383
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will in this case be:
I m in M A X ( IfA, I fB, I M )
EQUATION287 V1 EN
(Equation 347)
Where: IfA and IfB have been described for the single line case.
Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) is:
Is 1, 3 Imin
EQUATION288 V1 EN
(Equation 348)
Transformer inrush current shall be considered. The setting of the protection is set as a percentage of the base current (IBase). Operation: set the protection to On or Off. IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. If possible to find a suitable value the rated current of the protected object is chosen. IN>>: Set operate current in % of IBase. StValMult: The operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input ENMULT to the set factor StValMult.
3.7.3.3
Table 92:
Name Operation IBase IN>>
Setting parameters
EFPIOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 2500 Unit A %IB Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 200 Description Operation Off / On Base current Operate residual current level in % of IBase
Table 93:
Name StValMult
EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.5 - 5.0 Unit Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Description Multiplier for operate current level
3.7.4
Four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Function description Four step residual overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification EF4PTOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 51N/67N
IN 4 4 alt
TEF-REVA V1 EN
3.7.4.1
Application
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC is used in several applications in the power system. Some applications are: Earth-fault protection of feeders in effectively earthed distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure. Back-up earth-fault protection of transmission lines. Sensitive earth-fault protection of transmission lines. EF4PTOC can have better sensitivity to detect resistive phase-to-earth-faults compared to distance protection. Back-up earth-fault protection of power transformers. Earth-fault protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and others.
In many applications several steps with different current operating levels and time delays are needed. EF4PTOC can have up to four, individual settable steps. The flexibility of each step of EF4PTOC is great. The following options are possible: Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the directional function can be necessary. This can be the case for earthfault protection in meshed and effectively earthed transmission systems. The directional residual overcurrent protection is also well suited to operate in teleprotection communication schemes, which enables fast clearance of earth faults on transmission lines. The directional function uses the polarizing quantity as decided by setting. Voltage polarizing (-3U0) is most commonly used but alternatively current polarizing where currents in transformer neutrals providing the neutral (zero sequence) source (ZN) is used to polarize (IN ZN) the function. Dual polarizing where the sum of both voltage and current components is allowed to polarize can also be selected. Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-ordination between the operating time of the different protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent protections, to be coordinated against each other, should have the same time characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 94:
Curve name
Time characteristics
ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE Definite time ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse ANSI Long Time Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse IEC Definite Time User Programmable ASEA RI RXIDG (logarithmic)
It is also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic. Normally it is required that EF4PTOC shall reset as fast as possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can be used. For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current operating level for some time. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication factor INxMult to the residual current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is activated from a binary input signal ENMULTx to the function. Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This inrush current can have residual current components. The phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the cycle. There is a risk that inrush current will give a residual current that reaches level above the operating current of the residual overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore, EF4PTOC has a possibility of second harmonic restrain 2ndHarmStab if the level of this harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting guidelines
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero. The parameters for the four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following settings can be done for the four step residual overcurrent protection. Operation: Sets the protection to On or Off. IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current transformer where the current measurement is made. UBase: Base voltage level in kV. This voltage is given as a phase-to-phase voltage and this is the reference for voltage related settings of the function. The residual voltage is used as reference voltage for the directional function. Normally the setting should be chosen to the rated phase-to-phase voltage of the voltage transformer feeding the protection IED. DirModex: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Off/Nondirectional/Forward/Reverse. Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics are available. Inverse time characteristic enables fast fault clearance of high current faults at the same time as selectivity to other inverse time phase overcurrent protections can be assured. This is mainly used in radial fed networks but can also be used in meshed networks. In meshed networks the settings must be based on network fault calculations. To assure selectivity between different protections, in the radial network, there have to be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. The minimum time difference can be determined for different cases. To determine the shortest possible time difference, the operation time of protections, breaker opening time and protection resetting time must be known. These time delays can vary significantly between different protective equipment. The following time delays can be estimated:
Protection operation time: Protection resetting time: Breaker opening time: 15-60 ms 15-60 ms 20-120 ms 387
3.7.4.2
Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4)
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The different characteristics are described in the technical reference manual. INx>: Operation residual current level for step x given in % of IBase. kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic for step x. IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Ix> for every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set above Ix> for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx. INxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal (ENMULTx) is activated the current operation level is increased by this setting constant. txMin: Minimum operating time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents the inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.
Operate time
IMinx
txMin
Current
IEC10000058 V1 EN
Figure 189:
Minimum operate current and operation time for inverse time characteristics
In order to fully comply with curves definition the setting parameter txMin shall be set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier kx. ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. The possibilities are described in the technical reference manual. tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse time characteristic curve. The time characteristic equation is according to equation 349:
A t[ s ] = + Bk i p -C in >
EQUATION1189 V1 EN
(Equation 349)
Further description can be found in the technical reference manual. tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse reset time characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the technical reference manual.
Common settings for all steps
tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen. AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degree. This angle is defined as shown in figure 190. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference voltage (Upol = -3U0)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RCA
Upol = -3U0
Operation IN>Dir
en05000135-2.vsd
IEC05000135 V3 EN
Figure 190:
Relay characteristic angle given in degree
In a normal transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 65. The setting range is -180 to +180. polMethod: Defines if the directional polarization is from Voltage (-3U0) Current (3I0 ZNpol where ZNpol is RNpol + jXNpol), or both currents and voltage, Dual (dual polarizing, -3U0 + 3I0 ZNpol).
Normally voltage polarizing from the residual sum or an external open delta is used. Current polarizing is useful when the local source is strong and a high sensitivity is required. In such cases the polarizing voltage (-3U0) can be below 1% and it is then necessary to use current polarizing or dual polarizing. Multiply the required set current (primary) with the minimum impedance (ZNpol) and check that the percentage of the phase-to-earth voltage is definitely higher than 1% (minimum 3U0>UPolMin setting) as a verification. RNPol, XNPol: The zero-sequence source is set in primary ohms as base for the current polarizing. The polarizing voltage is then achieved as 3I0 ZNpol. The ZNpol can be defined as (ZS1-ZS0)/3, that is the earth return impedance of the source behind the protection. The maximum earth-fault current at the local source can be used to calculate the value of ZN as U/(3 3I0) Typically, the minimum ZNPol (3 zero sequence source) is set. Setting is in primary ohms.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
When the dual polarizing method is used it is important that the setting INx> or the product 3I0 ZNpol is not greater than 3U0. If so, there is a risk for incorrect operation for faults in the reverse direction. IPolMin: is the minimum earth-fault current accepted for directional evaluation. For smaller currents than this value the operation will be blocked. Typical setting is 5-10% of IBase. UPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) residual voltage for the directional function, given in % of UBase/3. IN>Dir: Operating residual current release level in % of IBase for directional comparison scheme. The setting is given in % of IBase. The output signals, STFW and STRV can be used in a teleprotection scheme. The appropriate signal should be configured to the communication scheme block.
2nd harmonic restrain
If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the current transformer core will saturate during part of the period, resulting in an inrush transformer current. This will give a declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating between the phases. There is a risk that the residual overcurrent function will give an unwanted trip. The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic component. This component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this unwanted function. At current transformer saturation a false residual current can be measured by the protection. Also here the 2nd harmonic restrain can prevent unwanted operation. 2ndHarmStab: The rate of 2nd harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd harmonic restrain signal. The setting is given in % of the fundamental frequency residual current. HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function.
Parallel transformer inrush current logic
In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic current initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IN> Power System
IN>
en05000136.vsd
IEC05000136 V1 EN
Figure 191:
Application for parallel transformer inrush current logic
If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will latch as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level. Assume that step 4 is chosen to be the most sensitive step of the four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC. The harmonic restrain blocking is enabled for this step. Also the same current setting as this step is chosen for the blocking at parallel transformer energizing. Below the settings for the parallel transformer logic are described. UseStartValue: Gives which current level that should be used for activation of the blocking signal. This is given as one of the settings of the steps: Step 1/2/3/4. Normally the step having the lowest operation current level should be set. BlkParTransf: This parameter can be set Off/On, the parallel transformer logic.
Switch onto fault logic
In case of energizing a faulty object there is a risk of having a long fault clearance time, if the fault current is too small to give fast operation of the protection. The switch on to fault function can be activated from auxiliary signals from the circuit breaker, either the close command or the open/close position (change of position). This logic can be used to issue fast trip if one breaker pole does not close properly at a manual or automatic closing. SOTF and Under Time are similar functions to achieve fast clearance at asymmetrical closing based on requirements from different utilities. The function is divided into two parts. The SOTF function will give operation from step 2 or 3 during a set time after change in the position of the circuit breaker. The SOTF function has a set time delay. The Under Time function, which has 2nd harmonic restrain blocking, will give operation from step 4. The 2nd harmonic restrain will prevent unwanted function in case of transformer inrush current. The Under Time function has a set time delay. Below the settings for switch on to fault logics are described.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SOTF operation mode: This parameter can be set: Off/SOTF/Under Time/SOTF +Under Time. ActivationSOTF: This setting will select the signal to activate SOTF function; CB position open/CB position closed/CB close command. tSOTF: Time delay for operation of the SOTF function. The setting range is 0.000 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.100 s StepForSOTF: If this parameter is set on the step 3 start signal will be used as current set level. If set off step 2 start signal will be used as current set level. t4U: Time interval when the SOTF function is active after breaker closing. The setting range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 1.000 s. ActUnderTime: Describes the mode to activate the sensitive undertime function. The function can be activated by Circuit breaker position (change) or Circuit breaker command. tUnderTime: Time delay for operation of the sensitive undertime function. The setting range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.300 s
Transformer application example
Two main cases are of interest when residual overcurrent protection is used for a power transformer, namely if residual current can be fed from the protected transformer winding or not. The protected winding will feed earth-fault (residual) current to earth faults in the connected power system. The residual current fed from the transformer at external phase-to-earth faults, is highly dependent of the total positive and zero-sequence source impedances as well as the residual current distribution between the network zero-sequence impedance and the transformer zero-sequence impedance. An example of this application is shown in figure 192.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
YN/D or YN/Y transformer Three phase CT summated
alt
IN>
Single CT
en05000490.vsd
IEC05000490 V1 EN
Figure 192:
Residual overcurrent protection application on a directly earthed transformer winding
In this case the protection has two different tasks: Detection of earth faults on the transformer winding, to which the protection is connected. Detection of earth faults in the power system, to which the protected winding is connected.
It can be suitable to use a residual overcurrent protection with at least two steps. Step 1 shall have a short definite time delay and a relatively high current setting, in order to detect and clear high current earth faults in the transformer winding or in the power system close to the transformer. Step 2 shall have a longer time delay (definite or inverse time delay) and a lower current operation level. Step 2 shall detect and clear transformer winding earth faults with small earth-fault current, that is, faults close to the transformer winding neutral point. If the current setting gap between step 1 and step 2 is large another step can be introduced with a current and time delay setting between the two described steps. The transformer inrush current will have a large residual current component. To prevent unwanted function of the earth-fault overcurrent protection, the 2nd harmonic restrain blocking should be used, at least for the sensitive step 2. If the protected winding will not feed earth-fault (residual) current to earth faults in the connected power system the application is as shown in figure 193.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Y/Y, Y/D or D/Y transformer Three phase CT summated
IN>
en05000491.vsd
IEC05000491 V1 EN
Figure 193:
Residual overcurrent protection application on an isolated transformer winding
In the calculation of the fault current fed to the protection, at different earth faults, are highly dependent on the positive and zero sequence source impedances, as well as the division of residual current in the network. Earth-fault current calculations are necessary for the setting. Setting of step 1 One requirement is that earth faults at the busbar, where the transformer winding is connected, shall be detected. Therefore a fault calculation as shown in figure 194 is made.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Three phase CT summated
YN/D or YN/Y transformer
3I0 alt Single CT
IN> Single phase-toearth fault
IEC05000492 V2 EN
Figure 194:
Step 1 fault calculation 1
This calculation gives the current fed to the protection: 3I0fault1. To assure that step 1, selectivity to other earth-fault protections in the network a short delay is selected. Normally, a delay in the range 0.3 0.4 s is appropriate. To assure selectivity to line faults, tripped after a delay (typically distance protection zone 2) of about 0.5 s the current setting must be set so high so that such faults does not cause unwanted step 1 trip. Therefore, a fault calculation as shown in figure 195 is made.
YN/D or YN/Y transformer Three phase CT summated 3I0 alt Single CT
IN>
Single phase-toearth fault

IEC05000493 V2 EN
Figure 195:
396
Step 1 fault calculation 1
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The fault is located at the borderline between instantaneous and delayed operation of the line protection, such as Distance protection or line residual overcurrent protection. This calculation gives the current fed to the protection: 3I0fault2 The setting of step 1 can be chosen within the interval shown in equation 350.
3I 0fault 2 lowmar < I step1 < 3I 0fault1 highmar

EQUATION1455 V2 EN
(Equation 350)
Where: lowmar is a margin to assure selectivity (typical 1.2) and highmar is a margin to assure fast fault clearance of busbar fault (typical 1.2).
Setting of step 2 The setting of the sensitive step 2 is dependent of the chosen time delay. Often a relatively long definite time delay or inverse time delay is chosen. The current setting can be chosen very low. As it is required to detect earth faults in the transformer winding, close to the neutral point, values down to the minimum setting possibilities can be chosen. However, one must consider zero-sequence currents that can occur during normal operation of the power system. Such currents can be due to un-transposed lines. In case to protection of transformer windings not feeding residual current at external earth faults a fast lowcurrent step can be acceptable.
3.7.4.3
Table 95:
Name Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA polMethod
Setting parameters
EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -180 - 180 Voltage Current Dual 1 - 100 2 - 100 0.50 - 1000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 Unit A kV Deg Step 1 0.05 1 Default Off 3000 400 65 Voltage Description Operation Off / On Base value for current settings Base value for voltage settings Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Type of polarization
UPolMin IPolMin RNPol XNPol
%UB %IB ohm ohm
1 1 0.01 0.01
1 5 5.00 40.00
Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of UBase Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase Real part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Imaginary part of source Z to be used for current polarisation

Name IN>Dir 2ndHarmStab BlkParTransf UseStartValue Values (Range) 1 - 100 5 - 100 Off On IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4> Off SOTF UnderTime SOTF&UnderTime Open Closed CloseCommand Step 2 Step 3 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 CB position CB command 0.000 - 60.000 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 Unit %IB % Step 1 1 Default 10 20 Off IN4> Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Residual current level for Direction release in % of IBase Second harmonic restrain operation in % of IN amplitude Enable blocking at parallel transformers Current level blk at parallel transf (step1, 2, 3 or 4)
SOTF
Off
SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/ Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
ActivationSOTF
Open
Select signal that shall activate SOTF
StepForSOTF HarmResSOTF tSOTF t4U ActUnderTime tUnderTime DirMode1
s s s -
0.001 0.001 0.001 -
Step 2 Off 0.200 1.000 CB position 0.300 Non-directional
Selection of step used for SOTF Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF Time delay for SOTF Switch-onto-fault active time Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/CBCommand) Time delay for under time Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Characterist1
ANSI Def. Time
Time delay curve type for step 1
IN1> t1
%IB s
1 0.001
100 0.000
Operate residual current level for step 1 in % of IBase Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Unit %IB s Step 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 Default 0.05 100.00 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous Description Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Minimum current for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Reset curve type for step 1
Name k1 IMin1 t1Min IN1Mult ResetTypeCrv1
tReset1 HarmRestrain1 tPCrv1 tACrv1 tBCrv1 tCCrv1 tPRCrv1 tTRCrv1 tCRCrv1 DirMode2
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -
0.020 On 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional
Reset time delay for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Characterist2
ANSI Def. Time
IN2>
%IB
50
Operate residual current level for step 2 in % of IBase

Name t2 k2 IMin2 t2Min IN2Mult ResetTypeCrv2 Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Unit s %IB s Step 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 Default 0.400 0.05 50 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Minimum current for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Reset curve type for step 2
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -
Reset time delay for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Characterist3
ANSI Def. Time
IN3>
%IB
33
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Unit s %IB s Step 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 Default 0.800 0.05 33 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous Description Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Minimum current for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Reset curve type for step 3
Name t3 k3 IMin3 t3Min IN3Mult ResetTypeCrv3
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 -
Reset time delay for step 3 Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Characterist4
ANSI Def. Time
IN4>
%IB
17

Name t4 k4 IMin4 t4Min IN4Mult ResetTypeCrv4 Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Unit s %IB s Step 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 Default 1.200 0.05 17 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Minimum current for step 4 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Reset curve type for step 4
tReset4 HarmRestrain4 tPCrv4 tACrv4 tBCrv4 tCCrv4 tPRCrv4 tTRCrv4 tCRCrv4
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1
0.020 On 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0
Reset time delay for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4
3.7.5
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC

Function description Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification NS4PTOC
4 4 alt
IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
I2
46I2
IEC10000053 V1 EN
3.7.5.1
Application
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC is used in several applications in the power system. Some applications are:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Earth-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of feeders in effectively earthed distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure. Back-up earth-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of transmission lines. Sensitive earth-fault protection of transmission lines. NS4PTOC can have better sensitivity to detect resistive phase-to-earth-faults compared to distance protection. Back-up earth-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of power transformers. Earth-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and others.
In many applications several steps with different current operating levels and time delays are needed. NS4PTOC can have up to four, individual settable steps. The flexibility of each step of NS4PTOC function is great. The following options are possible: Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the directional function can be necessary. This can be the case for unsymmetrical fault protection in meshed and effectively earthed transmission systems. The directional negative sequence overcurrent protection is also well suited to operate in teleprotection communication schemes, which enables fast clearance of unsymmetrical faults on transmission lines. The directional function uses the polarizing quantity as decided by setting. Voltage polarizing is most commonly used but alternatively dual polarizing, where the sum of both voltage and current components is allowed to polarize, can also be selected. Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-ordination between the operating time of the different protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be coordinated against each other, should have the same time characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI.
Table 96:
Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE Definite time Table continues on next page

Curve name ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse ANSI Long Time Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse IEC Definite Time User Programmable ASEA RI RXIDG (logarithmic)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
There is also a user programmable inverse time characteristic. Normally it is required that the negative sequence overcurrent function shall reset as fast as possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can be used. For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current operating level for some time. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication factor IxMult to the negative sequence current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is activated from a binary input signal ENMULTx to the function.
3.7.5.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600). The following settings can be done for the four step negative sequence overcurrent protection: Operation: Sets the protection to On or Off. IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the protected object where the current measurement is made. UBase: Base voltage level in kV. This voltage is given as a phase-to-phase voltage and this is the reference for voltage related settings of the function. This voltage is internally divided by 3.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.
Settings for each step

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are off/nondirectional/ forward/reverse. Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics are available.
Table 97:
Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE Definite time ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse ANSI Long Time Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse IEC Definite Time User Programmable ASEA RI RXIDG (logarithmic)
The different characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual (TRM). Ix>: Operation negative sequence current level for step x given in % of IBase.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen. kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic. IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Ix> for every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set above Ix> for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx. IxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal (ENMULTx) is activated the current operation level is multiplied by this setting constant. txMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents the inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By choosing setting there are the following possibilities:
Curve name Instantaneous IEC Reset (constant time) ANSI Reset (inverse time)
The different reset characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual (TRM). There are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay. For the independent time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given. tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for programmable inverse time characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). The time characteristic equation is according to equation 349:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
A t[ s ] = + Bk i p -C in >
EQUATION1189 V1 EN
(Equation 351)
Further description can be found in the Technical reference manual (TRM). tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for programmable inverse reset time characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the Technical reference manual (TRM).
Common settings for all steps

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degrees. This angle is defined as shown in figure 190. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference voltage (Upol = -U2)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Reverse Area
AngleRCA
Upol=-U2
Forward Area Iop = I2
IEC10000031 V1 EN
Figure 196:
Relay characteristic angle given in degree
In a transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 80. UPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) voltage % of UBase. I>Dir: Operate residual current level for directional comparison scheme. The setting is given in % of IBase. The start forward or start reverse signals can be used in a communication scheme. The appropriate signal must be configured to the communication scheme block.
3.7.5.3
Table 98:
Name Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA
Setting parameters
NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -180 - 180 Unit A kV Deg Step 1 0.05 1 Default Off 3000 400 65 Description Operation Off / On Base value for current settings Base value for voltage settings Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Voltage Dual 1 - 100 2 - 100 0.50 - 1000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1 - 100 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 Unit %UB %IB ohm ohm %IB Step 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 Default Voltage 5 5 5.00 40.00 10 Non-directional Description Type of polarization Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of UBase Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase Real part of neg. seq. source imp. to be used for current polarisation Imaginary part of neg. seq. source imp. to be used for current polarisation Neg. seq. curr. I2 level for Direction release in % of IBase Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Name polMethod UPolMin IPolMin RPol XPol I>Dir DirMode1
Characterist1
ANSI Def. Time
I1> t1 k1 IMin1 t1Min I1Mult ResetTypeCrv1
%IB s %IB s -
1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -
100 0.000 0.05 100.00 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous
Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 1 in % of IBase Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Minimum current for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Reset curve type for step 1
tReset1 tPCrv1
s -
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
Reset time delay for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1

Name tACrv1 tBCrv1 tCCrv1 tPRCrv1 tTRCrv1 tCRCrv1 DirMode2 Values (Range) 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 Unit Step 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Characterist2
ANSI Def. Time
%IB s %IB s -
1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -
50 0.400 0.05 50 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous
Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Minimum current for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Reset curve type for step 2
tReset2 tPCrv2
s -
0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000
Reset time delay for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 Unit Step 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 13.500 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional Description Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Name tACrv2 tBCrv2 tCCrv2 tPRCrv2 tTRCrv2 tCRCrv2 DirMode3
Characterist3
ANSI Def. Time
%IB s %IB s -
1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -
33 0.800 0.05 33 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous
Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Minimum current for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Reset curve type for step 3
tReset3 tPCrv3 tACrv3
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000 13.500
Reset time delay for step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3

Name tBCrv3 tCCrv3 tPRCrv3 tTRCrv3 tCRCrv3 DirMode4 Values (Range) 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 1.00 - 10000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 Unit Step 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Non-directional Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)
Characterist4
ANSI Def. Time
%IB s %IB s -
1 0.001 0.01 1.00 0.001 0.1 -
17 1.200 0.05 17 0.000 2.0 Instantaneous
Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Minimum current for step 4 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Reset curve type for step 4
tReset4 tPCrv4 tACrv4
s -
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.020 1.000 13.500
Reset time delay for step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Unit Step 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 0.00 1.0 0.500 13.500 1.0 Description Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4
Name tBCrv4 tCCrv4 tPRCrv4 tTRCrv4 tCRCrv4
3.7.6
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE

Function description Sensitive directional residual over current and power protection IEC 61850 identification SDEPSDE IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 67N
3.7.6.1
Application
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earthfault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network. Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toearth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0 and cos . Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phaseto-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or inverse time delay. A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional sensitive back-up protection.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network. In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth-fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0. As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth-fault protection is achieved by time selectivity. When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the following facts: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large capacitive earth-fault current In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used, for example, in low impedance earthed system. Such a resistor will give a resistive earth-fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase-toearth fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.
3.7.6.2
Setting guidelines
The sensitive earth-fault protection is intended to be used in high impedance earthed systems, or in systems with resistive earthing where the neutral point resistor gives an earth-fault current larger than what normal high impedance gives but smaller than the phase-to-phase short circuit current. In a high impedance system the fault current is assumed to be limited by the system zero sequence shunt impedance to earth and the fault resistance only. All the series impedances in the system are assumed to be zero. In the setting of earth-fault protection, in a high impedance earthed system, the neutral point voltage (zero sequence voltage) and the earth-fault current will be calculated at the desired sensitivity (fault resistance). The complex neutral point voltage (zero sequence) can be calculated as:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
U0 =
U phase 1+ 3 Rf Z0
(Equation 352)
EQUATION1943 V1 EN
Where Uphase Rf Z0 is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault, is the resistance to earth in the fault point and is the system zero sequence impedance to earth
The fault current, in the fault point, can be calculated as:

I j = 3I 0 =
EQUATION1944 V1 EN
3 U phase Z0 + 3 R f
(Equation 353)
The impedance Z0 is dependent on the system earthing. In an isolated system (without neutral point apparatus) the impedance is equal to the capacitive coupling between the phase conductors and earth:
Z 0 = - jX c = - j
EQUATION1945 V1 EN
3 U phase Ij
(Equation 354)
Where Ij Xc is the capacitive earth-fault current at a non-resistive phase to earth-fault is the capacitive reactance to earth
In a system with a neutral point resistor (resistance earthed system) the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:
Z0 = - jX c 3R n - jX c + 3R n
(Equation 355)
EQUATION1946 V1 EN
Where Rn is the resistance of the neutral point resistor
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In many systems there is also a neutral point reactor (Petersen coil) connected to one or more transformer neutral points. In such a system the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:
Z 0 = - jX c // 3R n // j3X n =
EQUATION1947 V1 EN
3X n X c + j3R n ( 3X n - X c )
(Equation 356)
9R n X n X c
Where Xn is the reactance of the Petersen coil. If the Petersen coil is well tuned we have 3Xn = Xc In this case the impedance Z0 will be: Z0 = 3Rn
Now consider a system with an earthing via a resistor giving higher earth-fault current than the high impedance earthing. The series impedances in the system can no longer be neglected. The system with a single phase to earth-fault can be described as in figure 197.
Source impedance Zsc (pos. seq)
ZT,1 (pos. seq) ZT,0 (zero seq)
RN
U0A 3I0
Substation A
ZlineAB,1 (pos. seq) ZlineAB,0 (zero seq)
U0B
Substation B
ZlineBC,1 (pos. seq) ZlineBC,0 (zero seq)
Phase to earth fault

en06000654.vsd
IEC06000654 V1 EN
Figure 197:
Equivalent of power system for calculation of setting
The residual fault current can be written:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3I 0 =
3U phase 2 Z1 + Z 0 + 3 R f
(Equation 357)
EQUATION1948 V1 EN
Where Uphase Z1 Z0 Rf is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault is the total positive sequence impedance to the fault point. Z1 = Zsc+ZT,1+ZlineAB,1+ZlineBC,1 is the total zero sequence impedance to the fault point. Z0 = ZT,0+3RN+ZlineAB,0+ZlineBC,0 is the fault resistance.
The residual voltages in stations A and B can be written:

U 0 A = 3I 0 ( Z T ,0 + 3R N )
EQUATION1949 V1 EN
(Equation 358)
U OB = 3I 0 (Z T ,0 + 3R N + Z lineAB,0 )
EQUATION1950 V1 EN
(Equation 359)
The residual power, measured by the sensitive earth-fault protections in A and B will be:
S0 A = 3U 0 A 3I 0
EQUATION1951 V1 EN
(Equation 360)
S0 B = 3U 0 B 3I 0
EQUATION1952 V1 EN
(Equation 361)
The residual power is a complex quantity. The protection will have a maximum sensitivity in the characteristic angle RCA. The apparent residual power component in the characteristic angle, measured by the protection, can be written:
S0 A ,prot = 3U 0 A 3I 0 cos j A
EQUATION1953 V1 EN
(Equation 362)
S0 B,prot = 3U 0 B 3I 0 cos j B
EQUATION1954 V1 EN
(Equation 363)
The angles A and B are the phase angles between the residual current and the residual voltage in the station compensated with the characteristic angle RCA.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The protection will use the power components in the characteristic angle direction for measurement, and as base for the inverse time delay. The inverse time delay is defined as:
t inv = kSN (3I0 3U 0 cos j(reference)) 3I0 3U 0 cos j(measured)
(Equation 364)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN
The function can be set On/Off with the setting of Operation. The setting IBase gives the base current in A. Normally the primary rated current of the CT feeding the protection should be chosen. The setting UBase gives the base voltage in kV. Normally the system phase to earth voltage is chosen. The setting SBase gives the base voltage in kVA. Normally IBase UBase is chosen. With the setting OpMode the principle of directional function is chosen. With OpMode set to 3I0cosfi the current component in the direction equal to the characteristic angleRCADir is measured. The characteristic for RCADir is equal to 0 is shown in figure 198.
RCADir = 0 , ROADir = 0
3I0
= ang(3I0 ) ang(3Uref )
3I0 cos
3U0 = Uref
IEC06000648 V3 EN
Figure 198:
Characteristic for RCADir equal to 0
The characteristic is for RCADir equal to -90 is shown in figure 199.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Uref
RCADir = 90 , ROADir = 90
3I0
3I0 cos
= ang (3I0 ) ang (Uref )
3U0
IEC06000649 V3 EN
Figure 199:
Characteristic for RCADir equal to -90
When OpMode is set to 3U03I0cosfi the apparent residual power component in the direction is measured. When OpMode is set to 3I0 and fi the function will operate if the residual current is larger than the setting INDir> and the residual current angle is within the sector RCADir ROADir. The characteristic for RCADir = 0 and ROADir = 80 is shown in figure 200.
RCADir = 0 ROADir = 80
Operate area 3I0 80 -3U0
en06000652.vsd
IEC06000652 V2 EN
Figure 200:
Characteristic for RCADir = 0 and ROADir = 80
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
DirMode is set Forward or Reverse to set the direction of the trip function from the directional residual current function. All the directional protection modes have a residual current release level setting INRel> which is set in % of IBase. This setting should be chosen smaller than or equal to the lowest fault current to be detected. All the directional protection modes have a residual voltage release level setting UNRel> which is set in % of UBase. This setting should be chosen smaller than or equal to the lowest fault residual voltage to be detected. tDef is the definite time delay, given in s, for the directional residual current protection if definite time delay is chosen. tReset is the reset time for definite time delay, given in s. With a tReset time of several periods there is increased possibilities to clear intermittent earth-faults correctly. The setting shall be much shorter than the set trip delay. The characteristic angle of the directional functions RCADir is set in degrees. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The relay open angle ROADir is set in degrees. For angles differing more than ROADir fromRCADir the function from the protection is blocked. The setting can be used to prevent unwanted function for non-faulted feeders, with large capacitive earth-fault current contributions, due to CT phase angle error. INCosPhi> is the operate current level for the directional function when OpMode is set 3I0Cosfi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the active or capacitive earth-fault current at required sensitivity of the protection. SN> is the operate power level for the directional function when OpMode is set 3I03U0Cosfi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the active or capacitive earth-fault residual power at required sensitivity of the protection. The input transformer for the Sensitive directional residual over current and power protection function has the same short circuit capacity as the phase current transformers. If the time delay for residual power is chosen the delay time is dependent on two setting parameters. SRef is the reference residual power, given in % of SBase. kSN is the time multiplier. The time delay will follow the following expression:
t inv = kSN Sref 3I 0 3U 0 cos j (measured)
(Equation 365)
EQUATION1957 V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
INDir> is the operate current level for the directional function when OpMode is set 3I0 and fi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the earth-fault current at required sensitivity of the protection. OpINNonDir> is set On to activate the non-directional residual current protection. INNonDir> is the operate current level for the non-directional function. The setting is given in % of IBase. This function can be used for detection and clearance of crosscountry faults in a shorter time than for the directional function. The current setting should be larger than the maximum single-phase residual current out on the protected line. TimeChar is the selection of time delay characteristic for the non-directional residual current protection. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics are available:
Table 99:
Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI/IEEE Definite time ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse ANSI Long Time Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse IEC Definite Time User Programmable ASEA RI RXIDG (logarithmic)
The different characteristics are described in Technical Manual. tPCrv, tACrv, tBCrv, tCCrv: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). The time characteristic equation is:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
A t[ s ] = + B InMult i p -C in >
EQUATION1958 V1 EN
(Equation 366)
tINNonDir is the definite time delay for the non directional earth-fault current protection, given in s. OpUN> is set On to activate the trip function of the residual voltage protection. tUN is the definite time delay for the trip function of the residual voltage protection, given in s.
3.7.6.3
Table 100:
Name Operation OpMode
Setting parameters
SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 3I0Cosfi 3I03U0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90 0.25 - 200.00 0.25 - 200.00 0.25 - 200.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.03 - 200.00 0.00 - 2.00 Off On 1.00 - 400.00 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Step Default Off 3I0Cosfi Description Operation Off / On Selection of operation mode for protection
DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir INCosPhi> SN> INDir> tDef SRef kSN OpINNonDir> INNonDir> tINNonDir
Deg Deg Deg %IB %SB %IB s %SB %IB s
1 0.1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001
Forward -90 0.0 90 1.00 10.00 5.00 0.100 10.00 0.10 Off 10.00 1.000
Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time count, in %Sb Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of non-directional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib Time delay for non-directional residual over current, in sec
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 2.00 Off On 1.00 - 200.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 - 200.00 Unit Step Default IEC Norm. inv. Description Operation curve selection for IDMT operation
Name TimeChar
tMin kIN OpUN> UN> tUN INRel> UNRel>
s %UB s %IB %UB
0.001 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01
0.040 1.00 Off 20.00 0.100 1.00 3.00
Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of non-directional residual overvoltage protection Set level for non-directional residual over voltage, in %Ub Time delay for non-directional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Ub
Table 101:
Name tReset tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv ResetTypeCrv
SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset Unit s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 Default 0.040 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 IEC Reset Description Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off.

Name tPRCrv tTRCrv tCRCrv Values (Range) 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0 Unit Step 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 0.500 13.500 1.0 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve
Table 102:
Name IBase UBase SBase
SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00 Unit A kV kVA Step 1 0.05 0.05 Default 100 63.50 6350.00 Description Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Ubase
Table 103:
Name RotResU
SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0 deg 180 deg Unit Step Default 180 deg Description Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary
3.7.7
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR

Function description Thermal overload protection, two time constants IEC 61850 identification TRPTTR IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 49
SYMBOL-A V1 EN
3.7.7.1
Application
Transformers in the power system are designed for a certain maximum load current (power) level. If the current exceeds this level the losses will be higher than expected. As a consequence the temperature of the transformer will increase. If the temperature of the transformer reaches too high values the equipment might be damaged: The insulation within the transformer will have forced ageing. As a consequence of this, the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will increase. There might be hot spots within the transformer, which will degrade the paper insulation. It might also cause bubbling in the transformer oil.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In stressed situations in the power system it can be required to overload transformers for a limited time. This should be done without the above mentioned risks. The thermal overload protection provides information and makes temporary overloading of transformers possible. The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the cooling system of the transformer. There are two main principles: ONAN: The air is naturally circulated to the coolers without fans and the oil is naturally circulated without pumps. OFAF: The coolers have fans to force air for cooling and pumps to force the circulation of the transformer oil.
The protection can have two sets of parameters, one for non-forced cooling and one for forced cooling. Both the permissive steady state loading level as well as the thermal time constant is influenced by the cooling system of the transformer. The two parameters sets can be activated by the binary input signal COOLING. This can be used for transformers where forced cooling can be taken out of operation, for example at fan or pump faults. The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the transformer, which is based on current measurement. If the heat content of the protected transformer reaches a set alarm level a signal can be given to the operator. Two alarm levels are available. This enables preventive actions in the power system to be taken before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer. After tripping from the thermal overload protection, the transformer will cool down. There will be a time gap before the heat content (temperature) reaches such a level so that the transformer can be taken into service again. Therefore, the function will continue to estimate the heat content using a set cooling time constant. Energizing of the transformer can be blocked until the heat content has reached to a set level.
3.7.7.2
Setting guideline
The parameters for the thermal overload protection, two time constants (TRPTTR) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600). The following settings can be done for the thermal overload protection. Operation: Off/On IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the transformer winding where the current measurement is made.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IRef: Reference level of the current given in % of IBase. When the current is equal to IRef the final (steady state) heat content is equal to 1. It is suggested to give a setting corresponding to the rated current of the transformer winding. IRefMult: If a binary input ENMULT is activated the reference current value can be multiplied by the factor IRefMult. The activation could be used in case of deviating ambient temperature from the reference value. In the standard for loading of a transformer an ambient temperature of 20C is used. For lower ambient temperatures the load ability is increased and vice versa. IRefMult can be set within a range: 0.01 - 10.00. IBase1: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be related to the status no COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting corresponding to the rated current of the transformer with natural cooling (ONAN). IBase2: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be related to the status with activated COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting corresponding to the rated current of the transformer with forced cooling (OFAF). If the transformer has no forced cooling IBase2 can be set equal to IBase1. Tau1: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase1 (no cooling) given in minutes. Tau2: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase2 (with cooling) given in minutes. The thermal time constant should be obtained from the transformer manufacturers manuals. The thermal time constant is dependent on the cooling and the amount of oil. Normal time constants for medium and large transformers (according to IEC 60076-7) are about 2.5 hours for naturally cooled transformers and 1.5 hours for forced cooled transformers. The time constant can be estimated from measurements of the oil temperature during a cooling sequence (described in IEC 60076-7). It is assumed that the transformer is operated at a certain load level with a constant oil temperature (steady state operation). The oil temperature above the ambient temperature is DQo0. Then the transformer is disconnected from the grid (no load). After a time t of at least 30 minutes the temperature of the oil is measured again. Now the oil temperature above the ambient temperature is DQot. The thermal time constant can now be estimated as:
t=
t ln DQo 0 - ln DQ ot
(Equation 367)
EQUATION1180 V1 EN
If the transformer has forced cooling (OFAF) the measurement should be made both with and without the forced cooling in operation, giving Tau2 and Tau1.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The time constants can be changed if the current is higher than a set value or lower than a set value. If the current is high it is assumed that the forced cooling is activated while it is deactivated at low current. The setting of the parameters below enables automatic adjustment of the time constant. Tau1High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is higher than the set value IHighTau1. IHighTau1 is set in % of IBase1. Tau1Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is lower than the set value ILowTau1. ILowTau1 is set in % of IBase1. Tau2High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is higher than the set value IHighTau2. IHighTau2 is set in % of IBase2. Tau2Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is lower than the set value ILowTau2. ILowTau2 is set in % of IBase2. The possibility to change time constant with the current value as the base can be useful in different applications. Below some examples are given: In case a total interruption (low current) of the protected transformer all cooling possibilities will be inactive. This can result in a changed value of the time constant. If other components (motors) are included in the thermal protection, there is a risk of overheating of that equipment in case of very high current. The thermal time constant is often smaller for a motor than for the transformer.
ITrip: The steady state current that the transformer can withstand. The setting is given in % of IBase1 or IBase2. Alarm1: Heat content level for activation of the signal ALARM1. ALARM1 is set in % of the trip heat content level. Alarm2: Heat content level for activation of the output signal ALARM2. ALARM2 is set in % of the trip heat content level. ResLo: Lockout release level of heat content to release the lockout signal. When the thermal overload protection trips a lock-out signal is activated. This signal is intended to block switch in of the protected circuit transformer as long as the transformer temperature is high. The signal is released when the estimated heat content is below the set value. This temperature value should be chosen below the alarm temperature. ResLo is set in % of the trip heat content level. ThetaInit: Heat content before activation of the function. This setting can be set a little below the alarm level. If the transformer is loaded before the activation of the protection function, its temperature can be higher than the ambient temperature. The start point given in the setting will prevent risk of no trip at overtemperature during the first moments after activation. ThetaInit: is set in % of the trip heat content level.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Warning: If the calculated time to trip factor is below the setting Warning a warning signal is activated. The setting is given in minutes.
3.7.7.3
Table 104:
Name Operation IBase IRef IRefMult IBase1 IBase2 Tau1 Tau2 IHighTau1 Tau1High ILowTau1 Tau1Low IHighTau2 Tau2High ILowTau2 Tau2Low ITrip Alarm1 Alarm2 ResLo ThetaInit Warning tPulse
Setting parameters
TRPTTR Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 10.0 - 1000.0 0.01 - 10.00 30.0 - 250.0 30.0 - 250.0 1.0 - 500.0 1.0 - 500.0 30.0 - 250.0 5 - 2000 30.0 - 250.0 5 - 2000 30.0 - 250.0 5 - 2000 30.0 - 250.0 5 - 2000 50.0 - 250.0 50.0 - 99.0 50.0 - 99.0 10.0 - 95.0 0.0 - 95.0 1.0 - 500.0 0.01 - 0.30 Unit A %IB %IB %IB Min Min %IB1 %tC1 %IB1 %tC1 %IB2 %tC2 %IB2 %tC2 %IBx %Itr %Itr %Itr % Min s Step 1 1.0 0.01 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1 1.0 1 1.0 1 1.0 1 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 Default Off 3000 100.0 1.00 100.0 100.0 60.0 60.0 100.0 100 100.0 100 100.0 100 100.0 100 110.0 80.0 90.0 60.0 50.0 30.0 0.10 Description Operation Off / On Base current in A Reference current in % of IBASE Multiplication Factor for reference current Base current,IBase1 without Cooling inpout in % of IBASE Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input ON in % of IBASE Time constant without cooling input in min, with IBase1 Time constant with cooling input in min, with IBase2 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1 by TC1-IHIGH Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is > IHIGH-TC1 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1 by TC1-ILOW Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is < ILOW-TC1 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2 by TC2-IHIGH Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is >IHIGH-TC2 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2 by TC2-ILOW Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is < ILOW-TC2 Steady state operate current level in % of IBasex First alarm level in % of heat content trip value Second alarm level in % of heat content trip value Lockout reset level in % of heat content trip value Initial Heat content, in % of heat content trip value Time setting, below which warning would be set (in min) Length of the pulse for trip signal (in msec).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Breaker failure protection CCRBRF

Function description Breaker failure protection IEC 61850 identification CCRBRF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 50BF
3.7.8
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
3.7.8.1
Application
In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means that a fault needs to be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker. It is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for the protected component. Instead a breaker failure protection is used. Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) will issue a back-up trip command to adjacent circuit breakers in case of failure to trip of the normal circuit breaker for the protected component. The detection of failure to break the current through the breaker is made by means of current measurement or as detection of remaining trip signal (unconditional). CCRBRF can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to increase the probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid back-up trip of many breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and test.
3.7.8.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for Breaker failure protection CCRBRF are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection. Operation: Off/On IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current transformer where the current measurement is made. FunctionMode This parameter can be set Current or Contact. This states the way the detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of breaker position signal is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current&Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is
429
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
small. This can be the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse power protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed. RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off means that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level to allow re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Contact means re-trip is done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CBPos Check means re-trip is done without check of breaker position.
Table 105: RetripMode Retrip Off CB Pos Check Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode FunctionMode
N/A Description the re-trip function is not activated a phase current must be larger than the operate level to allow re-trip re-trip is done when breaker position indicates that breaker is still closed after re-trip time has elapsed both methods are used re-trip is done without check of breaker position re-trip is done without check of breaker position both methods are used
Current
Contact
Current&Contact No CBPos Check Current Contact Current&Contact
BuTripMode: Back-up trip mode is given to state sufficient current criteria to detect failure to break. For Current operation 2 out of 4 means that at least two currents, of the three-phase currents and the residual current, shall be high to indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 3 means that at least one current of the three-phase currents shall be high to indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 4 means that at least one current of the three-phase currents or the residual current shall be high to indicate breaker failure. In most applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient. For Contact operation means back-up trip is done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). IP>: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This parameter should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The setting can be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase. I>BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used this function can be blocked if any phase current is larger than this setting level. If the FunctionMode is set Current&Contact breaker failure for high current faults are safely detected by the current measurement function. To increase security the contact based function should be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within the range 5 200% of IBase.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IN>: Residual current level for detection of breaker failure set in % of IBase. In high impedance earthed systems the residual current at phase- to-earth faults are normally much smaller than the short circuit currents. In order to detect breaker failure at single-phase-earth faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual current separately. Also in effectively earthed systems the setting of the earth-fault current protection can be chosen to relatively low current level. The BuTripMode is set 1 out of 4. The current setting should be chosen in accordance to the setting of the sensitive earth-fault protection. The setting can be given within the range 2 200 % of IBase. t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 60s in steps of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 50ms. t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is 90 200ms (also dependent of re-trip timer). The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:
t 2 t1 + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + t margin

EQUATION1430 V1 EN
(Equation 368)
where: tcbopen tBFP_reset tmargin is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the current criteria reset) is a safety margin
It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case of a fault close to a power plant.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Protection operate time Normal tcbopen The fault occurs Retrip delay t1 tcbopen after re-trip tBFPreset Margin Minimum back-up trip delay t2 Critical fault clearance time for stability
Time Trip and Start CCRBRF

IEC05000479 V2 EN
Figure 201:
Time sequence
t2MPh: Time delay of the back-up trip at multi-phase start. The critical fault clearance time is often shorter in case of multi-phase faults, compared to single phaseto-earth faults. Therefore there is a possibility to reduce the back-up trip delay for multi-phase faults. Typical setting is 90 150 ms. t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping different back-up circuit breakers. tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There is a binary input CBFLT from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when internal supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to clear fault. This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker, of others. After the set time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair the circuit breaker. The time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the CBFLT is active. Typical setting is 2.0 seconds. tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time of circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 200 ms.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
3.7.8.3
Table 106:
Name Operation IBase FunctionMode
CCRBRF Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 Current Contact Current&Contact 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check 5 - 200 2 - 200 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit A Step 1 Default Off 3000 Current Description Operation Off / On Base current Detection principle for back-up trip
BuTripMode
1 out of 3
Back-up trip mode
RetripMode
Retrip Off
Operation mode of re-trip logic
IP> IN> t1 t2 t2MPh tPulse
%IB %IB s s s s
1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
10 10 0.000 0.150 0.150 0.200
Operate phase current level in % of IBase Operate residual current level in % of IBase Time delay of re-trip Time delay of back-up trip Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase start Trip pulse duration
Table 107:
Name I>BlkCont t3 tCBAlarm
CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 5 - 200 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit %IB s s Step 1 0.001 0.001 Default 20 0.030 5.000 Description Current for blocking of CB contact operation in % of IBase Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip Time delay for CB faulty signal
3.7.9
Pole discordance protection CCRPLD

Function description Pole discordance protection IEC 61850 identification CCRPLD IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 52PD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN

3.7.9.1 Application
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
There is a risk that a circuit breaker will get discordance between the poles at circuit breaker operation: closing or opening. One pole can be open and the other two closed, or two poles can be open and one closed. Pole discordance of a circuit breaker will cause unsymmetrical currents in the power system. The consequence of this can be: Negative sequence currents that will give stress on rotating machines Zero sequence currents that might give unwanted operation of sensitive earthfault protections in the power system.
It is therefore important to detect situations with pole discordance of circuit breakers. When this is detected the breaker should be tripped directly. Pole discordance protection CCRPLD will detect situation with deviating positions of the poles of the protected circuit breaker. The protection has two different options to make this detection: By connecting the auxiliary contacts in the circuit breaker so that logic is created, a signal can be sent to the protection, indicating pole discordance. This logic can also be realized within the protection itself, by using opened and close signals for each circuit breaker pole, connected to the protection. Each phase current through the circuit breaker is measured. If the difference between the phase currents is larger than a CurrUnsymLevel this is an indication of pole discordance, and the protection will operate.
3.7.9.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the Pole discordance protection CCRPLD are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following settings can be done for the pole discordance protection. Operation: Off or On IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the protected object where the current measurement is made. tTrip: Time delay of the operation. ContSel: Operation of the contact based pole discordance protection. Can be set: Off/PD signal from CB. If PD signal from CB is chosen the logic to detect pole discordance is made in the vicinity to the breaker auxiliary contacts and only one signal is connected to the pole discordance function. If the Pole pos aux cont. alternative is chosen each open close signal is connected to the IED and the logic to detect pole discordance is realized within the function itself.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
CurrSel: Operation of the current based pole discordance protection. Can be set: Off/CB oper monitor/Continuous monitor. In the alternative CB oper monitor the function is activated only directly in connection to breaker open or close command (during 200 ms). In the alternative Continuous monitor function is continuously activated. CurrUnsymLevel: Unsymmetrical magnitude of lowest phase current compared to the highest, set in % of the highest phase current. Natural difference between phase currents in 1 1/2 breaker installations must be considered. For circuit breakers in 1 1/2 breaker configured switch yards there might be natural unbalance currents through the breaker. This is due to the existence of low impedance current paths in the switch yard. This phenomenon must be considered in the setting of the parameter. CurrRelLevel: Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase.
3.7.9.3
Table 108:
Name Operation IBase tTrip ContSel
Setting parameters
CCRPLD Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 - 60.000 Off PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont. Off CB oper monitor Continuous monitor 0 - 100 0 - 100 Unit s Step 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 0.300 Off Description Operation Off / On Base current Time delay between trip condition and trip signal Contact function selection
CurrSel
Off
Current function selection
CurrUnsymLevel CurrRelLevel
% %IB
1 1
80 10
Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest. Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase
3.7.10
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

Function description Directional underpower protection IEC 61850 identification GUPPDUP IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 37
P<
SYMBOL-LL V1 EN

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise undamaged plant. During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high centrifugal stresses. When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses. Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the turbine loses the vacuum. The critical time to overheating of a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the turbine manufacturer in each case. Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer connected to the primary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
design the reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of power to the power plant auxiliaries. Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always strong enough to withstand the associated stresses. Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero. Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake may cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse power protection in unattended plants. A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%. Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about 15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps 25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is well run in might need no more than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to measure the reverse power during commissioning. Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection. Figure 202 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower protection and with overpower protection. The underpower protection gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower protection to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower protection to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
Underpower protection Q Overpower protection Q
Operate Line Margin
Operate Line Margin
Operating point without turbine torque
IEC09000019 V2 EN
Figure 202:
Reverse power protection with underpower or overpower protection

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On/Off. IBase: The parameter IBase is set to the generator rated current in A, see equation 369.
IBase =
EQUATION1707 V1 EN
SN 3 U N
(Equation 369)
UBase: The parameter UBase is set to the generator rated voltage (phase-phase) in kV. Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting possibilities are shown in table 109.
Table 109:
Set value Mode L1, L2, L3
Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN
(Equation 370)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN
(Equation 371)
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN
(Equation 372)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN
(Equation 373)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN
(Equation 374)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN
(Equation 375)
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN
(Equation 376)
L2
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN
(Equation 377)
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN
(Equation 378)
The function has two stages with the same setting parameters.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
OpMode1(2) is set to define the function of the stage. Possible settings are: On: the stage is activated. Off: the stage is disabled The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting Angle1(2) is smaller than the set pick up power value Power1(2)
Q
Power1(2) Angle1(2) Operate P
en06000441.vsd
IEC06000441 V1 EN
Figure 203:
Underpower mode
The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2) direction. The setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 379. Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the IED are used.
S N = 3 UBase IBase
EQUATION1708 V1 EN
(Equation 379)
The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set angle should be 0 or 180. 0 should be used for generator low forward active power protection.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operate Angle1(2) = 0 P Power1(2)
en06000556.vsd
IEC06000556 V1 EN
Figure 204:
For low forward power the set angle should be 0 in the underpower function
TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up. Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 380.
S N = 3 UBase IBase
EQUATION1708 V1 EN
(Equation 380)
The drop out power will be Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2). The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown in the formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1893 V1 EN
(Equation 381)
Where S Sold is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
is settable parameter
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The value of k=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is normally quite long. The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated current/voltage: IAmpComp5, IAmpComp30, IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5, UAmpComp30, UAmpComp100 IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100 The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle errors. The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.
3.7.10.3
Table 110:
Name Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2
Setting parameters
GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2
Table 111:
Name k Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5
GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 0.999 0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000 Unit pu pu % Step 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 Default 0.000 0.5 0.5 0.000 Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % Sbase Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % Sbase Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir

Name IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5 UAmpComp30 UAmpComp100 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100 Values (Range) -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Unit % % % % % Deg Deg Deg Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
Table 112:
Name IBase UBase Mode
GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Description Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Selection of measured current and voltage
3.7.11
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

Function description Directional overpower protection IEC 61850 identification GOPPDOP IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 32
P>
3.7.11.1
Application
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise undamaged plant. During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high centrifugal stresses. When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses. Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the turbine loses the vacuum. The critical time to overheating of a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the turbine manufacturer in each case. Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer connected to the primary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of power to the power plant auxiliaries. Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always strong enough to withstand the associated stresses.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero. Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake may cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse power protection in unattended plants. A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%. Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about 15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps 25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is well run in might need no more than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to measure the reverse power during commissioning. Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection. Figure 205 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower IED and with overpower IED. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
Underpower IED Q Overpower IED Q
Operate Line Margin
Operate Line Margin
IEC06000315 V2 EN
Figure 205:
Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
3.7.11.2
Setting guidelines
Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On/Off. IBase: The parameter IBase is set to the generator rated current in A, see equation 382.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IBase =
EQUATION1707 V1 EN
SN 3 U N
(Equation 382)
UBase: The parameter UBase is set to the generator rated voltage (phase-phase) in kV. Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting possibilities are shown in table 113.
Table 113:
Set value Mode L1, L2, L3
Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN
(Equation 383)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN
(Equation 384)
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN
(Equation 385)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN
(Equation 386)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN
(Equation 387)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN
(Equation 388)
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN
(Equation 389)
L2
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN
(Equation 390)
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN
(Equation 391)
The function has two stages with the same setting parameters. OpMode1(2) is set to define the function of the stage. Possible settings are: On: the stage is activated Off: the stage is disabled The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting Angle1(2) is larger than the set pick up power value Power1(2)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operate
Power1(2) Angle1(2) P
en06000440.vsd
IEC06000440 V1 EN
Figure 206:
Overpower mode
The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2) direction. The setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 392. Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the IED are used.
S N = 3 UBase IBase
EQUATION1708 V1 EN
(Equation 392)
The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set angle should be 0 or 180. 180 should be used for generator reverse power protection.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operate Power 1(2)
Angle1(2 ) = 180 o P
IEC06000557 V2 EN
Figure 207:
For reverse power the set angle should be 180 in the overpower function
TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up. Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 393.
S N = 3 UBase IBase
EQUATION1708 V1 EN
(Equation 393)
The drop out power will be Power1(2) - Hysteresis1(2). The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown in the formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1893 V1 EN
(Equation 394)
Where S Sold SCalculated k is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle is settable parameter
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The value of k=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is normally quite long. The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated current/voltage: IAmpComp5, IAmpComp30, IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5, UAmpComp30, UAmpComp100 IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100 The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle errors. The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.
3.7.11.3
Table 114:
Name Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2
Setting parameters
GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2
Table 115:
Name k Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5
GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 0.999 0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000 Unit pu pu % Step 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 Default 0.000 0.5 0.5 0.000 Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of Sbase Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of Sbase Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Unit % % % % % Deg Deg Deg Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Description Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
Name IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5 UAmpComp30 UAmpComp100 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100
Table 116:
Name IBase UBase Mode
GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Description Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Selection of measured current and voltage
3.7.12
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

Function description Broken conductor check IEC 61850 identification BRCPTOC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 46
3.7.12.1
Application
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) function, consisting of continuous current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED connected will give alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.
3.7.12.2
Setting guidelines
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC must be set to detect open phase/s (series faults) with different loads on the line. BRCPTOC must at the same time be set to
449
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
not operate for maximum asymmetry which can exist due to, for example, not transposed power lines. All settings are in primary values or percentage. Set IBase to power line rated current or CT rated current. Set minimum operating level per phase IP> to typically 10-20% of rated current. Set the unsymmetrical current, which is relation between the difference of the minimum and maximum phase currents to the maximum phase current to typical Iub> = 50%. Note that it must be set to avoid problem with asymmetry under minimum operating conditions. Set the time delay tOper = 5 - 60 seconds and reset time tReset = 0.010 - 60.000 seconds.
3.7.12.3
Table 117:
Name Operation IBase Iub> IP> tOper
Setting parameters
BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0 - 99999 50 - 90 5 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Unit A %IM %IB s Step 1 1 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 50 20 5.000 Description Operation Off / On IBase Unbalance current operation value in percent of max current Minimum phase current for operation of Iub> in % of Ibase Operate time delay
Table 118:
Name tReset
BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.010 - 60.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Description Time delay in reset
3.7.13
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC

Function description Capacitor bank protection IEC 61850 identification CBPGAPC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Application
Shunt capacitor banks (SCBs) are somewhat specific and different from other power system elements. These specific features of SCB are briefly summarized in this section. A capacitor unit is the building block used for SCB construction. The capacitor unit is made up of individual capacitor elements, arranged in parallel or series connections. Capacitor elements normally consist of aluminum foil, paper, or filminsulated cells immersed in a biodegradable insulating fluid and are sealed in a metallic container. The internal discharge resistor is also integrated within the capacitor unit in order to reduce trapped residual voltage after disconnection of the SCB from the power system. Units are available in a variety of voltage ratings (240V to 25kV) and sizes (2.5kVAr to about 1000kVAr). Capacitor unit can be designed with one or two bushings. The high-voltage SCB is normally constructed using individual capacitor units connected in series and/or parallel to obtain the required voltage and MVAr rating. Typically the neighboring capacitor units are mounted in racks. Each rack must be insulated from the other by insulators because the can casing within each rack are at a certain potential. Refer figure 208 for an example:
3.7.13.1
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Rack
Capacitor Unit (Can)
IEC09000753 V1 EN
Figure 208:
Replacement of a faulty capacitor unit within SCB
There are four types of the capacitor unit fusing designs which are used for construction of SCBs:
Externally fused Internally fused Fuseless Unfused where an individual fuse, externally mounted, protects each capacitor unit. where each capacitor element is fused inside the capacitor unit where SCB is built from series connections of the individual capacitor units (that is, strings) and without any fuses where, in contrary to the fuseless configuration, a series or parallel connection of the capacitor units is used to form SCB, still without any fuses
Which type of fusing is used may depend on can manufacturer or utility preference and previous experience.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Because the SCBs are built from the individual capacitor units the overall connections may vary. Typically used SCB configurations are: 1. 2. 3. 4. Delta-connected banks (generally used only at distribution voltages) Single wye-connected banks Double wye-connected banks H-configuration, where each phase is connected in a bridge
Additionally, the SCB star point, when available, can be either directly earthed , earthed via impedance or isolated from earth. Which type of SCB earthing is used depends on voltage level, used circuit breaker, utility preference and previous experience. Many utilities have standard system earthing principle to earth neutrals of SCB above 100 kV. Switching of SCB will produce transients in power system. The transient inrush current during SCB energizing typically has high frequency components and can reach peak current values, which are multiples of SCB rating. Opening of capacitor bank circuit breaker may produce step recovery voltages across open CB contact, which can consequently cause restrikes upon the first interruption of capacitive current. In modern power system the synchronized CB closing/opening may be utilized in such a manner that transients caused by SCB switching are avoided.
SCB protection
IED protection of shunt capacitor banks requires an understanding of the capabilities and limitations of the individual capacitor units and associated electrical equipment. Different types of shunt capacitor bank fusing, configuration or earthing may affect the IED selection for the protection scheme. Availability and placement of CTs and VTs can be additional limiting factor during protection scheme design. SCB protection schemes are provided in order to detect and clear faults within the capacitor bank itself or in the connected leads to the substation busbar. Bank protection may include items such as a means to disconnect a faulted capacitor unit or capacitor element(s), a means to initiate a shutdown of the bank in case of faults that may lead to a catastrophic failure and alarms to indicate unbalance within the bank. Capacitor bank outages and failures are often caused by accidental contact by animals. Vermin, monkeys, birds, may use the SCB as a resting place or a landing site. When the animal touches the HV live parts this can result in a flash-over, can rapture or a cascading failures that might cause extensive damages, fire or even total destruction of the whole SCB, unless the bank is sufficiently fitted with protection IEDs. In addition, to fault conditions SCB can be exposed to different types of abnormal operating conditions. In accordance with IEC and ANSI standards capacitors shall be capable of continuous operation under contingency system and bank conditions, provided the following limitations are not exceeded:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
1.
2. 3. 4.
Capacitor units should be capable of continuous operation including harmonics, but excluding transients, to 110% of rated IED root-mean-square (RMS) voltage and a crest voltage not exceeding of rated RMS voltage. The capacitor should also be able to carry 135% of nominal current. The voltage capability of any series element of a capacitor unit shall be considered to be its share of the total capacitor unit voltage capability. Capacitor units should not give less than 100% nor more than 110% of rated reactive power at rated sinusoidal voltage and frequency, measured at a uniform case and internal temperature of 25C. Capacitor units mounted in multiple rows and tiers should be designed for continuous operation for a 24h average temperature of 40 C during the hottest day, or 40 C during the coldest day expected at the location. Capacitor units should be suitable for continuous operation at up to 135% of rated reactive power caused by the combined effects of: Voltage in excess of the nameplate rating at fundamental frequency, but not over 110% of rated RMS voltage Harmonic voltages superimposed on the fundamental frequency Reactive power manufacturing tolerance of up to 115% of rated reactive power
5.
Capacitor units rated above 600 V shall have an internal discharge device to reduce the residual voltage to 50 V or less in 5 or 10 minutes (depending on national standard).
Note that capacitor units designed for special applications can exceed these ratings. Thus, as a general rule, the minimum number of capacitor units connected in parallel within a SCB is such that isolation of one capacitor unit in a group should not cause a voltage unbalance sufficient to place more than 110% of rated voltage on the remaining capacitors of that parallel group. Equally, the minimum number of series connected groups within a SCB is such that complete bypass of one group should not pause voltage higher than 110% of the rated voltage on the remaining capacitors of that serial group. The value of 110% is the maximum continuous overvoltage capability of capacitor units as per IEEE Std 18-1992. The SCB typically requires the following types of IED protection: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Short circuit protection for SCB and connecting leads (can be provided by using PHPIOC, OC4PTOC, CVGAPC, T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF or HZPDIF functions) Earth-fault protection for SCB and connecting leads (can be provided by using EFPIOC, EF4PTOC, CVGAPC, T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF or HZPDIF functions) Current or Voltage based unbalance protection for SCB (can be provided by using EF4PTOC, OC4PTOC, CVGAPC or VDCPTOV functions) Overload protection for SCB Undercurrent protection for SCB Reconnection inhibit protection for SCB Restrike condition detection
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
CBPGAPC function can be used to provide the last four types of protection mentioned in the above list.
3.7.13.2
Setting guidelines
This setting example will be done for application as shown in figure 209:
400kV Preprocessing Function Block
SMAI
Capacitor bank protection function

CBPGAPC
500/1
200MVAr 400kV
IED
IEC09000754 V1 EN
Figure 209:
Single line diagram for the application example
From figure 209 it is possible to calculate the following rated fundamental frequency current for this SCB:
Ir =
1000 200[ MVAr ] = 289 A 3 400[ kV ]

(Equation 395)
IEC09000755 V1 EN
or on the secondary CT side:
I r _ S ec =
IEC09000756 V1 EN
289 A = 0.578 A 500 1

(Equation 396)
Note that the SCB rated current on the secondary CT side is important for secondary injection of the function. The parameters for the Capacitor bank protection function CBPGAPC are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following settings are done for this function:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
General Settings: Operation =On; to enable the function IBase =289A; Fundamental frequency SCB rated current in primary amperes. This value is used as a base value for pickup settings of all other features integrated in this function. Reconnection inhibit feature: OperationRecIn =On; to enable this feature IRecnInhibit< =10% (of IBase); Current level under which function will detect that SCB is disconnected from the power system tReconnInhibit =300s; Time period under which SCB shall discharge remaining residual voltage to less than 5%. Overcurrent feature: OperationOC =On; to enable this feature IOC> =135% (of IBase); Current level for overcurrent pickup. Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards. tOC =30s; Time delay for overcurrent trip Undercurrent feature: OperationUC =On; to enable this feature IUC< =70% (of IBase); Current level for undercurrent pickup tUC =5s; Time delay for undercurrent trip Undercurrent feature is blocked by operation of Reconnection inhibit feature.
Reactive power overload feature: OperationQOL =On; to enable this feature QOL> =130% (of SCB MVAr rating); Reactive power level required for pickup. Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards. tQOL =60s; Time delay for reactive power overload trip Harmonic voltage overload feature: OperationHOL =On; to enable this feature Settings for definite time delay step
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
HOLDTU> =200% (of SCB voltage rating); Voltage level required for pickup tHOLDT =10s; Definite time delay for harmonic overload trip Settings for IDMT delay step HOLIDMTU> =110% (of SCB voltage rating); Voltage level required for pickup of IDMT stage. Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards. kHOLIDMT =1.0; Time multiplier for IDMT stage. Selected value gives operate time in accordance with international standards tMaxHOLIDMT =2000s; Maximum time delay for IDMT stage for very low level of harmonic overload tMinHOLIDMT =0.1s; Minimum time delay for IDMT stage. Selected value gives operate time in accordance with international standards
Restrike detection
Opening of SCBs can be quite problematic for certain types of circuit breakers (CBs). Typically such problems are manifested as CB restrikes. In simple words this means that the CB is not breaking the current at the first zero crossing after separation of the CB contacts. Instead current is re-ignited and only braked at consecutive current zero crossings. This condition is manifested as high current pulses at the moment of current re-ignition. To detect this CB condition, the built in overcurrent feature can be used. Simply, any start of the overcurrent feature during breaker normal opening means a restrike. Therefore simple logic can be created in the Application Configuration tool to detect such CB behavior. Such CB condition can be just alarmed, and if required, the built in disturbance recorder can also be triggered. To create this logic, a binary signal that the CB is going to be opened (but not trip command) shall be made available to the IED.
3.7.13.3
Table 119:
Name Operation IBase OperationRecIn IRecnInhibit< tReconnInhibit OperationOC
Setting parameters
CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 Off On 4 - 1000 1.00 - 6000.00 Off On Unit A %IB s Step 1 1 0.01 Default Off 3000 On 10 300.00 On Description Operation Off/On Rated capacitor bank current Operation reconnection inhibit Off/On Cap bank cut off current level for inhibit in % of IBase Time delay for reconnected inhibit signal Operation over current Off/On

Name IOC> tOC OperationUC IUC< tUC OperationQOL QOL> tQOL OperationHOL HOLDTU> tHOLDT HOLIDMTU> kHOLIDMT tMaxHOLIDMT tMinHOLIDMT Values (Range) 0 - 900 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 5 - 100 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 5 - 900 1.00 - 6000.00 Off On 5 - 500 0.00 - 6000.00 80 - 200 0.50 - 1.50 0.05 - 6000.00 0.05 - 60.00 Unit %IB s %IB s % s % s % s s Step 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default 135 30.00 Off 70 5.00 On 130 60.00 On 200 10.00 110 1.00 2000.00 0.10 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Start level for over current operation, % of IBase Time delay for over current operation Operation under current Off/On Start level for under current operation, % of IBase Time delay for under current operation Operation reactive power over load Off/ On Start level for reactive power over load in % Time delay for reactive power overload operation Operation harmonic over load Off/On Start value of voltage for harmOvLoad for DT stage in % Time delay for minimum operation for harmonic overload Start value of voltage for harmOvLoad in IDMT stage in % Time multiplier for harmonic overload IDMT curve Maximum trip delay for harmonic overload Minimum trip delay for harmonic overload
3.7.14
Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC

Function description Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines IEC 61850 identification NS2PTOC IEC 60617 identification 2I2> ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 46I2
3.7.14.1
Application
Negative sequence overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC is intended primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of the rotor caused by negative sequence component in the stator current. The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Unbalanced loads Line to line faults Line to ground faults Broken conductors Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector
NS2PTOC can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the generator in the event line protections or circuit breakers fail to perform for unbalanced system faults. To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced conditions, NS2PTOC is able to directly measure the negative sequence current. NS2PTOC also have a time delay characteristic which matches the heating characteristic of the generator I22t = K as defined in standard.
where: I2 t K is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current is operating time in seconds is a constant which depends of the generators size and design
A wide range of I22t settings is available, which provide the sensitivity and capability necessary to detect and trip for negative sequence currents down to the continuous capability of a generator. A separate output is available as an alarm feature to warn the operator of a potentially dangerous situation.
Features
Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection NS2PTOC is designed to provide a reliable protection for generators of all types and sizes against the effect of unbalanced system conditions. The following features are available: Two steps, independently adjustable, with separate tripping outputs. Sensitive protection, capable of detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to 3% of rated generator current with high accuracy. Two time delay characteristics for step 1: Definite time delay Inverse time delay
2
The inverse time overcurrent characteristic matches I 2 t = K capability curve of the generators. Wide range of settings for generator capability constant K is provided, from 1 to 99 seconds, as this constant may vary greatly with the type of generator.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Minimum operate time delay for inverse time characteristic, freely settable. This setting assures appropriate coordination with, for example, line protections. Maximum operate time delay for inverse time characteristic, freely settable. Inverse reset characteristic which approximates generator rotor cooling rates and provides reduced operate time if an unbalance reoccurs before the protection resets. Service value that is, measured negative sequence current value, in primary Amperes, is available through the local HMI.
Generator continuous unbalance current capability
During unbalanced loading, negative sequence current flows in the stator winding. Negative sequence current in the stator winding will induce double frequency current in the rotor surface and cause heating in almost all parts of the generator rotor. When the negative sequence current increases beyond the generators continuous unbalance current capability, the rotor temperature will increase. If the generator is not tripped, a rotor failure may occur. Therefore, industry standards has been established that determine generator continuous and short-time unbalanced current
2 capabilities in terms of negative sequence current I2 and rotor heating criteria I 2 t .
Typical short-time capability (referred to as unbalanced fault capability) expressed

2 in terms of rotor heating criterion I 2 t = K is shown below in Table 120.
Table 120:
ANSI requirements for unbalanced faults on synchronous machines

Permissible
Types of Synchronous Machine Salient pole generator Synchronous condenser Cylindrical rotor generators: Indirectly cooled Directly cooled (0 800 MVA) Directly cooled (801 1600 MVA) 40 30 30 10
I 22t = K [ s ]
See Figure 210
Fig 210 shows a graphical representation of the relationship between generator

I 22t capability and generator MVA rating for directly cooled (conductor cooled)
generators. For example, a 500 MVA generator would have K = 10 seconds and a 1600 MVA generator would have K = 5 seconds. Unbalanced short-time negative sequence current I2 is expressed in per unit of rated generator current and time t in seconds.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
en08000358.vsd
IEC08000358 V1 EN
Figure 210:
Short-time unbalanced current capability of direct cooled generators
Continuous I2 - capability of generators is also covered by the standard. Table 121 below (from ANSI standard C50.13) contains the suggested capability:
Table 121:
Type of generator Salient Pole with damper winding without damper winding Cylindrical Rotor Indirectly cooled Directly cooled to 960 MVA 961 to 1200 MVA 1201 to 1500 MVA 8 6 5 10 10 5
Continous I2 capability
Permissible I2 (in percent of rated generator current)
As it is described in the table above that the continuous negative sequence current capability of the generator is in range of 5% to 10% of the rated generator current. During an open conductor or open generator breaker pole condition, the negative sequence current can be in the range of 10% to 30% of the rated generator current. Other generator or system protections will not usually detect this condition and the only protection is the negative sequence overcurrent protection. Inducing of negative sequence current in a generator can result from any system unbalance and these, in turn, may be caused by: Unbalanced loads such as Single phase railroad load Unbalanced system faults such as
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Line to earth faults Double line to earth faults Line to line faults Broken line conductors Malfunction of one pole of a circuit breaker
Open conductors, includes
3.7.14.2
Setting guidelines
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.
Operate time characteristic
Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC provides two operating time delay characteristics for step 1: Definite time delay characteristic Inverse time delay characteristic
The desired operate time delay characteristic is selected by setting CurveType1 as follows: CurveType1 = Definite CurveType1 = Inverse
Step 2 always has a definite time delay characteristic. Definite time delay is independent of the magnitude of the negative sequence current once the start value is exceeded, while inverse time delay characteristic do depend on the magnitude of the negative sequence current. This means that inverse time delay is long for a small overcurrent and becomes progressively shorter as the magnitude of the negative sequence current increases. Inverse time delay characteristic of the NS2PTOC function is represented in the equation I 2 t = K , where the K1 setting is adjustable over the range of 1 99 seconds. A typical inverse time overcurrent curve is shown in Figure 211.
2
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Negative sequence inverse time characteristic

10000
tMax 1000
Time delay
100
10
tMin
1 0.01
0.1
1 I2
10
100
Negative sequence current

IEC08000355 V2 EN
Figure 211:
Inverse Time Delay characteristic
The example in figure 211 indicates that the protection function has a set minimum operating time t1Min of 5 sec. The setting t1Min is freely settable and is used as a security measure. This minimum setting assures appropriate coordination with for example line protections. It is also possible to set the upper time limit, t1Max.
The trip start levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC are freely settable over a range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of start setting is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and sizes. After start, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting NS2PTOC. For both steps the reset ratio is 0.97.
Start sensitivity
Alarm function
The alarm function is operated by START signal and used to warn the operator for an abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence current capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken before removing the generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is provided for the alarm function to avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced conditions.

3.7.14.3
Table 122:
Name Operation IBase tAlarm OpStep1 I2-1> CurveType1 t1 tResetDef1 K1 t1Min t1Max ResetMultip1 OpStep2 I2-2> CurveType2 t2 tResetDef2 K2 t2Min t2Max ResetMultip2
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameters
NS2PTOC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 3 - 500 Definite Inverse 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 99.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 - 20.00 Off On 3 - 500 Definite Inverse 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 99.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 - 20.00 Unit A s %IB s s s s s %IB s s s s s Step 1 0.01 1 0.01 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.01 0.01 Default Off 3000 3.00 On 10 Definite 10.00 0.000 10.0 5.000 1000.00 1.00 On 10 Definite 10.00 0.000 10.0 5.000 1000.00 1.00 Description Operation Off / On Rated generator current in primary Amperes Time delay for Alarm (operated by START signal), in sec Enable execution of step 1 Step 1 Neg. Seq. Current pickup level, in % of IBase Selection of definite or inverse timecharacteri. for step 1 Definite time delay for trip of step 1, in sec Time delay for reset of definite timer of step 1, in sec Neg. seq. capability value of generator for step 1, in sec Minimum trip time for inverse delay of step 1, in sec Maximum trip delay for step 1, in sec Reset multiplier for K1, defines reset time of inverse curve Enable execution of step 2 Step 2 Neg. Seq. Current pickup level, in % of IBase Selection of definite or inverse timecharacteri. for step 2 Definite time delay for trip of step 2, in sec Time delay for reset of definite timer of step 2, in sec Neg. seq. capability value of generator for step 2, in sec Minimum trip time for inverse delay of step 2, in sec Maximum trip delay for step 2, in sec Reset multiplier for K2, defines reset time of inverse curve
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3.8
3.8.1
Voltage protection
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
Function description Two step undervoltage protection IEC 61850 identification UV2PTUV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 27
2U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER THAN V1 EN
3.8.1.1
Application
Two-step undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV) is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of low phase voltages is necessary. It is used also as a supervision and fault detection function for other protection functions, to increase the security of a complete protection system. UV2PTUV is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect low voltage conditions. Low voltage conditions are caused by abnormal operation or fault in the power system. UV2PTUV is used in combination with overcurrent protections, either as restraint or in logic "and gates" of the trip signals issued by the two functions. Other applications are the detection of "no voltage" condition, for example, before the energization of a HV line or for automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout. UV2PTUV is also used to initiate voltage correction measures, like insertion of shunt capacitor banks to compensate for reactive load and thereby increasing the voltage. The function has a high measuring accuracy and setting hysteresis to allow applications to control reactive load. UV2PTUV is used to disconnect from the network apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be damaged when subject to service under low voltage conditions. UV2PTUV deals with low voltage conditions at power system frequency, which can be caused by the following reasons: 1. 2. 3. Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control (symmetrical voltage decrease). Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease). Short circuits, often as phase-to-earth faults (unsymmetrical voltage decrease).
UV2PTUV prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause their overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system.

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The parameters for Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV are set via the local HMI or PCM600. All the voltage conditions in the system where UV2PTUV performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time characteristic. There is a very wide application area where general undervoltage functions are used. All voltage related settings are made as a percentage of the settings base voltage UBase and base current IBase, which normally is set to the primary nominal voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The setting for UV2PTUV is normally not critical, since there must be enough time available for the main protection to clear short circuits and earth faults. Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are described in the following sections.
Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators
The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest acceptable voltage for the equipment.
Disconnected equipment detection
The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest occurring voltage, caused by inductive or capacitive coupling, when the equipment is disconnected.
Power supply quality
The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.
Voltage instability mitigation
This setting is very much dependent on the power system characteristics, and thorough studies have to be made to find the suitable levels.
Backup protection for power system faults
The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest occurring voltage during the fault conditions under consideration.
Settings for Two step undervoltage protection
The following settings can be done for Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV: ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-tophase RMS value. Operation: Off or On.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
UBase: Base voltage phase to phase in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. UV2PTUV measures selectively phase-to-earth voltages, or phase-to-phase voltage chosen by the setting ConnType. The function will operate if the voltage gets lower than the set percentage of UBase. When ConnType is set to PhN DFT or PhN RMS then the IED automatically divides set value for UBase by 3. When ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh RMS then set value for UBase is used. Therefore, always set UBase as rated primary ph-ph voltage of the protected object. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:
U < (%) UBase( kV ) 3

EQUATION1447 V1 EN
(Equation 397)
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV)
EQUATION1990 V1 EN
(Equation 398)
The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2). Therefore, the setting parameters are described only once. Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application. OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that should be below the set level to give operation for step n. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3. In most applications, it is sufficient that one phase voltage is low to give operation. If UV2PTUV is insensitive for single phase-toearth faults, 2 out of 3 can be chosen. Un<: Set operate undervoltage operation value for step n, given as % of the parameter UBase. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. It is essential to consider the minimum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this voltage is larger than 90% of nominal voltage. tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. In many applications the protection function shall not directly trip in case of short circuits or earth faults in the system. The time delay must be coordinated to the short circuit protections. tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. For very low voltages the undervoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
trip. By setting t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be avoided. ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set: Instantaneous, Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting isInstantaneous. tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections. ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical reference manual. CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> (1.0 - CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:U> (1.0 - CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 399)
EQUATION1448 V1 EN
IntBlkSeln: This parameter can be set: Off, Block of trip, Block all. In case of a low voltage the undervoltage function can be blocked. This function can be used to prevent function when the protected object is switched off. If the parameter is set Block of trip or Block all this unwanted trip is prevented. IntBlkStValn: Voltage level under which the blocking is activated set in % of UBase. This setting must be lower than the setting Un<. As switch of shall be detected the setting can be very low, that is, about 10%. tBlkUVn: Time delay the undervoltage step n when the voltage level is below IntBlkStValn, given in s. It is important that this delay is shorter than the operate time delay of the undervoltage protection step.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
3.8.1.3
Table 123:
Name Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1
UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 Off Block of trip Block all Unit kV Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
U1< t1 t1Min k1 IntBlkSel1
%UB s s -
1 0.01 0.001 0.01 -
70 5.00 5.000 0.05 Off
IntBlkStVal1 tBlkUV1 HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2
%UB s %UB -
1 0.001 0.1 -
20 0.000 0.5 On Definite time
Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 1 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
OpMode2
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
U2< t2 t2Min k2 IntBlkSel2
%UB s s -
1 0.001 0.001 0.01 -
50 5.000 5.000 0.05 Off

Name IntBlkStVal2 tBlkUV2 HystAbs2 Values (Range) 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 Unit %UB s %UB Step 1 0.001 0.1 Default 20 0.000 0.5 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 2 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
Table 124:
Name tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1
UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Instantaneous Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 2
tIReset1 ACrv1 BCrv1 CCrv1 DCrv1 PCrv1 CrvSat1 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2
s % s -
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 -
0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0 0.025 Instantaneous
tIReset2 ACrv2 BCrv2 CCrv2 DCrv2 PCrv2 CrvSat2
s %
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1
0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 125:
Name ConnType
UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) PhN DFT PhPh RMS PhN RMS PhPh DFT Unit Step Default PhN DFT Description Group selector for connection type
3.8.2
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

Function description Two step overvoltage protection IEC 61850 identification OV2PTOV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 59
2U>
SYMBOL-C-2U SMALLER THAN V1 EN
3.8.2.1
Application
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of high voltage is necessary. OV2PTOV is used for supervision and detection of abnormal conditions, which, in combination with other protection functions, increase the security of a complete protection system. High voltage conditions are caused by abnormal situations in the power system. OV2PTOV is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect high voltage conditions. OV2PTOV is used in combination with low current signals, to identify a transmission line, open in the remote end. In addition to that, OV2PTOV is also used to initiate voltage correction measures, like insertion of shunt reactors, to compensate for low load, and thereby decreasing the voltage. The function has a high measuring accuracy and setting hysteresis to allow applications to control reactive load. OV2PTOV is used to disconnect, from the network, apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be damaged when subject to service under high voltage conditions. It deals with high voltage conditions at power system frequency, which can be caused by: 1. Different kinds of faults, where a too high voltage appears in a certain power system, like metallic connection to a higher voltage level (broken conductor
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
2. 3. 4.
falling down to a crossing overhead line, transformer flash over fault from the high voltage winding to the low voltage winding and so on). Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control (symmetrical voltage decrease). Low load compared to the reactive power generation (symmetrical voltage decrease). Earth-faults in high impedance earthed systems causes, beside the high voltage in the neutral, high voltages in the two non-faulted phases, (unsymmetrical voltage increase).
OV2PTOV prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause their overheating or stress of insulation material, and, thus, shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system.
3.8.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) are set via the local HMI or PCM600. All the voltage conditions in the system where OV2PTOV performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time characteristic. There is a very wide application area where general overvoltage functions are used. All voltage related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base primary voltage, which normally is set to the nominal voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The time delay for the OV2PTOV can sometimes be critical and related to the size of the overvoltage - a power system or a high voltage component can withstand smaller overvoltages for some time, but in case of large overvoltages the related equipment should be disconnected more rapidly. Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are given below:
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and transformers
High voltage will cause overexcitation of the core and deteriorate the winding insulation. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest acceptable voltage for the equipment.
Equipment protection, capacitors
High voltage will deteriorate the dielectricum and the insulation. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest acceptable voltage for the capacitor.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the highest acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.
High impedance earthed systems
In high impedance earthed systems, earth-faults cause a voltage increase in the nonfaulty phases. Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is used to detect such faults. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the lowest occurring voltage during faults. A metallic single-phase earth-fault causes the non-faulted phase voltages to increase a factor of 3.
The following settings can be done for the two step overvoltage protection
ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-tophase RMS value. Operation: Off/On. UBase: Base voltage phase to phase in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. OV2PTOV measures selectively phase-to-earth voltages, or phase-to-phase voltage chosen by the setting ConnType. The function will operate if the voltage gets lower than the set percentage of UBase. When ConnType is set to PhN DFT or PhN RMS then the IED automatically divides set value for UBase by 3. When ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh RMS then set value for UBase is used. Therefore, always set UBase as rated primary phase-toearth voltage of the protected object. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:
U > (%) UBase(kV ) / 3

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:
U > (%) UBase(kV)
EQUATION1993 V1 EN
(Equation 401)
The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2). Therefore the setting parameters are described only once. Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Inverse Curve C or I/Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application. OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that should be above the set level to give operation. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, 3 out of 3. In most applications it is sufficient that one phase voltage is high to give operation. If the function shall be insensitive for single phase-to-earth faults 1 out of 3 can be chosen, because the voltage will normally rise in the non-faulted phases at single phase-to-earth faults.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Un>: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of UBase. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. Here it is essential to consider the maximum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this voltage is less than 110% of nominal voltage. tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. In many applications the protection function has the task to prevent damages to the protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of protection of transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be coordinated with other automated actions in the system. tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be avoided. ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set: Instantaneous, Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous. tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections. ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical reference manual. CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 402)
EQUATION1448 V1 EN
HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of UBase. The setting of this parameter is highly dependent of the application. If the function is used as control for automatic switching of reactive compensation devices the hysteresis must be set smaller than the voltage change after switching of the compensation device.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
3.8.2.3
Table 126:
OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.0 - 100.0 Unit kV Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
OpMode1
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
U1> t1 t1Min k1 HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2
%UB s s %UB -
1 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.1 -
120 5.00 5.000 0.05 0.5 On Definite time
OpMode2
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
U2> t2 t2Min k2 HystAbs2
%UB s s %UB
1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1
150 5.000 5.000 0.05 0.5
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 127:
OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Instantaneous Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2
s % s -
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 -
0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0 0.025 Instantaneous
s %
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1
0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0
Table 128:
Name ConnType
OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) PhN DFT PhPh DFT PhN RMS PhPh RMS Unit Step Default PhN DFT Description Group selector for connection type
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

Function description Two step residual overvoltage protection IEC 61850 identification ROV2PTOV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 59N
3.8.3
3U0
TRV V1 EN
3.8.3.1
Application
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is primarily used in high impedance earthed distribution networks, mainly as a backup for the primary earthfault protection of the feeders and the transformer. To increase the security for different earth-fault related functions, the residual overvoltage signal can be used as a release signal. The residual voltage can be measured either at the transformer neutral or from a voltage transformer open delta connection. The residual voltage can also be calculated internally, based on measurement of the three-phase voltages. In high impedance earthed systems the system neutral voltage, that is, the residual voltage, will increase in case of any fault connected to earth. Depending on the type of fault and fault resistance the residual voltage will reach different values. The highest residual voltage, equal to three times the phase-to-earth voltage, is achieved for a single phase-to-earth fault. The residual voltage increases approximately the same amount in the whole system and does not provide any guidance in finding the faulted component. Therefore, ROV2PTOV is often used as a backup protection or as a release signal for the feeder earth-fault protection.
3.8.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV are set via the local HMI or PCM600. All the voltage conditions in the system where ROV2PTOV performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time characteristic. There is a very wide application area where general single input or residual overvoltage functions are used. All voltage related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which can be set to the primary nominal voltage (phase-phase) level of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. The time delay for ROV2PTOV are seldom critical, since residual voltage is related to earth-faults in a high impedance earthed system, and enough time must normally be given for the primary protection to clear the fault. In some more specific situations, where the single overvoltage protection is used to protect some specific equipment, the time delay is shorter.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Some applications and related setting guidelines for the residual voltage level are given below.
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and transformers
High residual voltage indicates earth-fault in the system, perhaps in the component to which Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) is connected. After a period of time delay, to give the primary protection for the faulted device a chance to trip, ROV2PTOV must trip the component. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage for the equipment
Equipment protection, capacitors
High voltage will deteriorate the dielectric and the insulation. Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) has to be connected to a neutral or open delta winding. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage for the capacitor.
The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.
High impedance earthed systems
In high impedance earthed systems, earth faults cause a neutral voltage in the feeding transformer neutral. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to trip the transformer, as a backup protection for the feeder earth-fault protection, and as a backup for the transformer primary earth-fault protection. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage, and below the lowest occurring residual voltage during the faults under consideration. A metallic single-phase earth fault causes a transformer neutral to reach a voltage equal to the normal phase-to-earth voltage. The voltage transformers measuring the phase-to-earth voltages measure zero voltage in the faulty phase. The two healthy phases will measure full phase-tophase voltage, as the earth is available on the faulty phase and the neutral has a full phase-to-earth voltage. The residual overvoltage will be three times the phase-toearth voltage. See figure 212.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC07000190 V1 EN
Figure 212:
Non-effectivelyearthedsystems
Direct earthed system
In direct earthed systems, an earth-fault on one phase indicates a voltage collapse in that phase. The two healthy phases will have normal phase-to-earth voltages. The residual sum will have the same value as phase-to-earth voltage. See figure 213.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC07000189 V1 EN
Figure 213:
Direct earthed system
Settings for Two step residual overvoltage protection

Operation: Off or On UBase is used as voltage reference for the voltage. The voltage can be fed to the IED in different ways: 1. 2. The IED is fed from a normal voltage transformer group where the residual voltage is created from the phase-to-earth voltages within the protection software. The setting of the analog input is given as UBase=Uph-ph The IED is fed from a broken delta connection normal voltage transformer group. In a open delta connection the protection is fed by the voltage 3U0 (single input). The setting chapter in the application manual explains how the analog input needs to be set. The IED is fed from a single voltage transformer connected to the neutral point of a power transformer in the power system. In this connection the protection is fed by the voltage UN=U0 (single input). The setting chapter in the application manual explains how the analog input needs to be set. ROV2PTOV will measure the residual voltage corresponding nominal phase-toearth voltage for high impedance earthed system. The measurement will be based on the neutral voltage displacement .
3.
The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n=step 1 and 2). Therefore the setting parameters are described only once.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be, Definite time or Inverse curve A or Inverse curve B or Inverse curve C or Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application. Un>: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of residual voltage corresponding to UBase:
U > ( % ) UBase ( kV )
The setting is dependent of the required sensitivity of the protection and the system earthing. In non-effectively earthed systems the residual voltage can be maximum the rated phase-to-earth voltage, which should correspond to 100%. In effectively earthed systems this value is dependent of the ratio Z0/Z1. The required setting to detect high resistive earth-faults must be based on network calculations. tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. In many applications, the protection function has the task to prevent damages to the protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of protection of transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be coordinated with other automated actions in the system. tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be avoided. ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter can be set: Instantaneous,Frozen time,Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous. tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25 ms. kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections. ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical reference manual. CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
voltage will be: U> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 403)
EQUATION1448 V1 EN
HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of UBase. The setting of this parameter is highly dependent of the application.
3.8.3.3
Table 129:
Setting parameters
ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 200 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.0 - 100.0 Unit kV Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
U1> t1 t1Min k1 HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2
%UB s s %UB -
1 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.1 -
30 5.00 5.000 0.05 0.5 On Definite time
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 1 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
U2> t2 t2Min k2 HystAbs2
%UB s s %UB
1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1
45 5.000 5.000 0.05 0.5
Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 2 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 130:
ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.50 - 100.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 3.000 0 - 100 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Instantaneous Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2
s % s -
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 -
0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0 0.025 Instantaneous
s %
0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 1
0.025 1.000 1.00 0.0 0.000 1.000 0
3.8.4
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

Function description Overexcitation protection IEC 61850 identification OEXPVPH IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 24
U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN

3.8.4.1 Application
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
When the laminated core of a power transformer is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. Overvoltage, or underfrequency, or a combination of both, will result in an excessive flux density level, which is denominated overfluxing or over-excitation. The greatest risk for overexcitation exists in a thermal power station when the generator-transformer block is disconnected from the rest of the network, or in network islands occuring at disturbance where high voltages and/or low frequencies can occur. Overexcitation can occur during start-up and shut-down of the generator if the field current is not properly adjusted. Loss-of load or loadshedding can also result in overexcitation if the voltage control and frequency governor is not functioning properly. Loss of load or load-shedding at a transformer substation can result in overexcitation if the voltage control function is insufficient or out of order. Low frequency in a system isolated from the main network can result in overexcitation if the voltage regulating system maintains normal voltage. According to the IEC standards, the power transformers shall be capable of delivering rated load current continuously at an applied voltage of 105% of rated value (at rated frequency). For special cases, the purchaser may specify that the transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at an applied voltage 110% of rated value at no load, reduced to 105% at rated secondary load current. According to ANSI/IEEE standards, the transformers shall be capable of delivering rated load current continuously at an output voltage of 105% of rated value (at rated frequency) and operate continuously with output voltage equal to 110% of rated value at no load. The capability of a transformer (or generator) to withstand overexcitation can be illustrated in the form of a thermal capability curve, that is, a diagram which shows the permissible time as a function of the level of over-excitation. When the transformer is loaded, the induced voltage and hence the flux density in the core can not be read off directly from the transformer terminal voltage. Normally, the leakage reactance of each separate winding is not known and the flux density in the transformer core can then not be calculated. In two-winding transformers, the low voltage winding is normally located close to the core and the voltage across this winding reflects the flux density in the core. However, depending on the design, the flux flowing in the yoke may be critical for the ability of the transformer to handle excess flux. Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH) has current inputs to allow calculation of the load influence on the induced voltage. This gives a more exact measurement of the magnetizing flow. For power transformers with unidirectional load flow, the voltage to OEXPVPH should therefore be taken from the feeder side.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Heat accumulated in critical parts during a period of overexcitation will be reduced gradually when the excitation returns to the normal value. If a new period of overexcitation occurs after a short time interval, the heating will start from a higher level, therefore, OEXPVPH must have thermal memory. The cooling time constant is settable within a wide range. The general experience is that the overexcitation characteristics for a number of power transformers are not in accordance with standard inverse time curves. In order to make optimal settings possible, a transformer adapted characteristic is available in the IED. The operate characteristic of the protection function can be set to correspond quite well with any characteristic by setting the operate time for six different figures of overexcitation in the range from 100% to 180% of rated V/Hz. When configured to a single phase-to-phase voltage input, a corresponding phase-tophase current is calculated which has the same phase angle relative the phase-tophase voltage as the phase currents have relative the phase voltages in a symmetrical system. The function should preferably be configured to use a threephase voltage input if available. It then uses the positive sequence quantities of voltages and currents. Analog measurements shall not be taken from any winding where load tap changer is located. Some different connection alternatives are shown in figure 214.
24 U/f>
24 U/f>
24 U/f>
en05000208.vsd
IEC05000208 V1 EN
Figure 214:
Alternative connections of an Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH(Volt/Hertz)

3.8.4.2 Setting guidelines Recommendations for input and output signals
Recommendations for Input signals Please see the default factory configuration.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
BLOCK: The input will block the operation of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH, for example, the block input can be used to block the operation for a limited time during special service conditions. RESET: OEXPVPH has a thermal memory, which can take very long time to reset. Activation of the RESET input will reset the function. Recommendations for Output signals Please see the default factory configuration for examples of configuration. ERROR: The output indicates a measuring error. The reason, for example, can be configuration problems where analogue signals are missing. START: The START output indicates that the level V/Hz>> has been reached. It can be used to initiate time measurement. TRIP: The TRIP output is activated after the operate time for the U/f level has expired. TRIP signal is used to trip the circuit breaker(s). ALARM: The output is activated when alarm level has been reached and the alarm timer has elapsed. When the system voltage is high this output sends an alarm to the operator.
Settings
The parameters for Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH are set via the local HMI or PCM600. Operation: The operation of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH can be set to On/Off. UBase: The UBase setting is the setting of the base (per unit) voltage on which all percentage settings are based. The setting is normally the system voltage level. IBase: The IBase setting is the setting of the base (per unit) current on which all percentage settings are based. Normally the power transformer rated current is used but alternatively the current transformer rated current can be set. MeasuredU: The phases involved in the measurement are set here. Normally the three phase measurement measuring the positive sequence voltage should be used but when only individual VT's are used a single phase-to-phase can be used. MeasuredI: The phases involved in the measurement are set here. MeasuredI: must be in accordance with MeasuredU.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
V/Hz>: Operating level for the inverse characteristic, IEEE or tailor made. The operation is based on the relation between rated voltage and rated frequency and set as a percentage factor. Normal setting is around 108-110% depending of the capability curve for the transformer/generator. V/Hz>>: Operating level for the tMin definite time delay used at high overvoltages. The operation is based on the relation between rated voltage and rated frequency and set as a percentage factor. Normal setting is around 110-180% depending of the capability curve for the transformer/generator. Setting should be above the knee-point when the characteristic starts to be straight on the high side. XLeak: The transformer leakage reactance on which the compensation of voltage measurement with load current is based. The setting shall be the transformer leak reactance in primary ohms. If no current compensation is used (mostly the case) the setting is not used. TrPulse: The length of the trip pulse. Normally the final trip pulse is decided by the trip function block. A typical pulse length can be 50 ms. CurveType: Selection of the curve type for the inverse delay. The IEEE curves or tailor made curve can be selected depending of which one matches the capability curve best. kForIEEE: The time constant for the inverse characteristic. Select the one giving the best match to the transformer capability. tCooling: The cooling time constant giving the reset time when voltages drops below the set value. Shall be set above the cooling time constant of the transformer. The default value is recommended to be used if the constant is not known. tMin: The operating times at voltages higher than the set V/Hz>>. The setting shall match capabilities on these high voltages. Typical setting can be 1-10 second. tMax: For overvoltages close to the set value times can be extremely long if a high K time constant is used. A maximum time can then be set to cut the longest times. Typical settings are 1800-3600 seconds (30-60 minutes) AlarmLevel: Setting of the alarm level in percentage of the set trip level. The alarm level is normally set at around 98% of the trip level. tAlarm: Setting of the time to alarm is given from when the alarm level has been reached. Typical setting is 5 seconds.
Service value report
A number of internal parameters are available as service values for use at commissioning and during service. Remaining time to trip (in seconds) TMTOTRIP, flux density VPERHZ, internal thermal content in percentage of trip value THERMSTA. The values are available at local HMI, Substation SAsystem and PCM600.

Setting example
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Sufficient information about the overexcitation capability of the protected object(s) must be available when making the settings. The most complete information is given in an overexcitation capability diagram as shown in figure 215. The settings V/Hz>> and V/Hz> are made in per unit of the rated voltage of the transformer winding at rated frequency. Set the transformer adapted curve for a transformer with overexcitation characteristics in according to figure 215. V/Hz> for the protection is set equal to the permissible continuous overexcitation according to figure 215 = 105%. When the overexcitation is equal to V/Hz>, tripping is obtained after a time equal to the setting of t1. This is the case when UBase is equal to the transformer rated voltages. For other values, the percentage settings need to be adjusted accordingly. When the overexcitation is equal to the set value of V/Hz>>, tripping is obtained after a time equal to the setting of t6. A suitable setting would be V/Hz>> = 140% and t6 = 4 s. The interval between V/Hz>> and V/Hz> is automatically divided up in five equal steps, and the time delays t2 to t5 will be allocated to these values of overexcitation. In this example, each step will be (140-105) /5 = 7%. The setting of time delays t1 to t6 are listed in table 131.
Table 131:
U/f op (%) 105 112 119 126 133 140
Settings
Timer t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 Time set (s) 7200 (max) 600 60 20 8 4
Information on the cooling time constant Tcool should be retrieved from the power transformer manufacturer.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
V/Hz % 150 transformer capability curve relay operate characteristic 140
130
120
110 Continous 100 0.05 t6
0.1 t5
0.2 t4
0.5
1 t3
10 t2
20
50
100 t1
200
Time (minutes)
en01000377.vsd
IEC01000377 V1 EN
Figure 215:
Example on overexcitation capability curve and V/Hz protection settings for power transformer
3.8.4.3
Table 132:
Name Operation IBase UBase V/Hz> V/Hz>> XLeak TrPulse tMin tMax
Setting parameters
OEXPVPH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 100.0 - 180.0 100.0 - 200.0 0.000 - 200.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 9000.00 Unit A kV %UB/f %UB/f ohm s s s Step 1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 Default Off 3000 400.00 110.0 140.0 0.000 0.100 7.000 1800.00 Description Operation Off / On Base current (rated phase current) in A Base voltage (main voltage) in kV Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated freq in % of (Ubase/frated) High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used, in % of (Ubase/frated) Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec) Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec

Name tCooling CurveType kForIEEE AlarmLevel tAlarm Values (Range) 0.10 - 9000.00 IEEE Tailor made 1 - 60 50.0 - 120.0 0.00 - 9000.00 Unit s % s Step 0.01 1 0.1 0.01 Default 1200.00 IEEE 1 100.0 5.00 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Transformer magnetic core cooling time constant, in sec Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve Alarm operate level as % of operate level Alarm time delay, in sec
Table 133:
Name t1Tailor t2Tailor t3Tailor t4Tailor t5Tailor t6Tailor
OEXPVPH Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 Unit s s s s s s Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default 7200.00 3600.00 1800.00 900.00 450.00 225.00 Description Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve, in sec
Table 134:
Name MeasuredU
OEXPVPH Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 PosSeq Unit Step Default L1L2 Description Selection of measured voltage
MeasuredI
L1L2
Selection of measured current
3.8.5
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV

Function description Voltage differential protection IEC 61850 identification VDCPTOV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 60
3.8.5.1
Application
The Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV functions can be used in some different applications. Voltage unbalance protection for capacitor banks. The voltage on the bus is supervised with the voltage in the capacitor bank, phase- by phase. Difference indicates a fault, either short-circuited or open element in the capacitor bank. It
Application manual
490
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
is mainly used on elements with external fuses but can also be used on elements with internal fuses instead of a current unbalance protection measuring the current between the neutrals of two halfs of the capacitor bank. The function requires voltage transformers in all phases of the capacitor bank. Figure 216 shows some different alternative connections of this function.
U1
Ud>L1
Single earthed wye
U2
Ph L3
Ph L2
Ud>L1 U1 U2
Double wye
Ph L3
Ph L2
Ph L3
Ph L2
IEC06000390 V3 EN
Figure 216:
Connection of voltage differential protection VDCPTOV function to detect unbalance in capacitor banks (one phase only is shown)
VDCPTOV function has a block input (BLOCK) where a fuse failure supervision (or MCB tripped) can be connected to prevent problems if one fuse in the capacitor bank voltage transformer set has opened and not the other (capacitor voltage is connected to input U2). It will also ensure that a fuse failure alarm is given instead of a Undervoltage or Differential voltage alarm and/or tripping. Fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) function for voltage transformers. In many application the voltages of two fuse groups of the same voltage transformer or fuse groups of two separate voltage transformers measuring the same voltage can be supervised with this function. It will be an alternative for example, generator units where often two voltage transformers are supplied for measurement and excitation equipment.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The application to supervise the voltage on two voltage transformers in the generator circuit is shown in figure 217.
To Protection U1 Ud> U2 To Excitation
Gen
IEC06000389 V1 EN
en06000389.vsd
Figure 217:
Supervision of fuses on generator circuit voltage transformers
3.8.5.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the voltage differential function are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following settings are done for the voltage differential function. Operation: Off/On UBase: Base voltage level in kV. The base voltage is used as reference for the voltage setting factors. Normally, it is set to the system voltage level. BlkDiffAtULow: The setting is to block the function when the voltages in the phases are low. RFLx: Is the setting of the voltage ratio compensation factor where possible differences between the voltages is compensated for. The differences can be due to different voltage transformer ratios, different voltage levels e.g. the voltage measurement inside the capacitor bank can have a different voltage level but the difference can also e.g. be used by voltage drop in the secondary circuits. The setting is normally done at site by evaluating the differential voltage achieved as a
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
service value for each phase. The factor is defined as U2 RFLx and shall be equal to the U1 voltage. Each phase has its own ratio factor. UDTrip: The voltage differential level required for tripping is set with this parameter. For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Capacitor banks must be tripped before excessive voltage occurs on the healthy capacitor elements. The setting values required are normally given by the capacitor bank supplier. For other applications it has to be decided case by case. For fuse supervision normally only the alarm level is used. tTrip: The time delay for tripping is set by this parameter. Normally, the delay does not need to be so short in capacitor bank applications as there is no fault requiring urgent tripping. tReset: The time delay for reset of tripping level element is set by this parameter. Normally, it can be set to a short delay as faults are permanent when they occur. For the advanced users following parameters are also available for setting. Default values are here expected to be acceptable. U1Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the first voltage input is decided by this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%. U2Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the second voltage input is decided by this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%. tBlock: The time delay for blocking of the function at detected undervoltages is set by this parameter. UDAlarm: The voltage differential level required for alarm is set with this parameter. For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Normally values required are given by capacitor bank supplier. For fuse supervision normally only this alarm level is used and a suitable voltage level is 3-5% if the ratio correction factor has been properly evaluated during commissioning. For other applications it has to be decided case by case. tAlarm: The time delay for alarm is set by this parameter. Normally, few seconds delay can be used on capacitor banks alarm. For fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) the alarm delay can be set to zero.

3.8.5.3
Table 135:
Name Operation UBase BlkDiffAtULow UDTrip tTrip tReset U1Low U2Low tBlock UDAlarm tAlarm
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameters
VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.50 - 2000.00 No Yes 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV %UB s s %UB %UB s %UB s Step 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 Yes 5.0 1.000 0.000 70.0 70.0 0.000 2.0 2.000 Description Operation Off/On Base Voltage Block operation at low voltage Operate level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential operate, in milliseconds Time delay for voltage differential reset, in seconds Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase Reset time for undervoltage block Alarm level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in seconds
Table 136:
Name RFL1 RFL2 RFL3
VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 3.000 0.000 - 3.000 0.000 - 3.000 Unit Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 1.000 1.000 1.000 Description Ratio compensation factor phase L1 U2L1*RFL1=U1L1 Ratio compensation factor phase L2 U2L2*RFL2=U1L2 Ratio compensation factor phase L3 U2L3*RFL3=U1L3
3.8.6
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

Function description Loss of voltage check IEC 61850 identification LOVPTUV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 27
3.8.6.1
Application
The trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the three phases is normally used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate the system restoration after a major blackout. Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV) generates a TRIP signal only if the voltage in all the three phases is low for more than the set time. If the trip to the circuit breaker is not required, LOVPTUV is used for signallization only through an output contact or through the event recording function.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting guidelines
Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV) is in principle independent of the protection functions. It requires to be set to open the circuit breaker in order to allow a simple system restoration following a main voltage loss of a big part of the network and only when the voltage is lost with breakers still closed. All settings are in primary values or per unit. Set UBase to rated voltage of the system or the voltage transformer primary rated voltage. Set operating level per phase UPE to typically 70% of rated UBase level. Set the time delay tTrip=5-20 seconds. For advanced users the following parameters need also to be set. Set the length of the trip pulse to typical tPulse=0.15 sec. Set the blocking time tBlock to block Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV), if some but not all voltage are low, to typical 5.0 seconds and set the time delay for enabling the function after restoration tRestore to 3 - 40 seconds.
3.8.6.2
Advanced users settings
3.8.6.3
Table 137:
Name Operation UBase UPE tTrip
Setting parameters
LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.1 - 9999.9 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV %UB s Step 0.1 1 0.001 Default Off 400.0 70 7.000 Description Operation Off/On Base voltage Operate voltagein% of base voltage Ubase Operate time delay
Table 138:
Name tPulse tBlock tRestore
LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.050 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.150 5.000 3.000 Description Duration of TRIP pulse Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages are not low Time delay for enable the function after restoration
3.9
3.9.1
Frequency protection
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

Function description Underfrequency protection IEC 61850 identification SAPTUF IEC 60617 identification
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 81
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
3.9.1.1
Application
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of low fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. The power system frequency, and rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between the actual generation and the load demand. Low fundamental frequency in a power system indicates that the available generation is too low to fully supply the power demanded by the load connected to the power grid. SAPTUF detects such situations and provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up and so on. Sometimes shunt reactors are automatically switched in due to low frequency, in order to reduce the power system voltage and hence also reduce the voltage dependent part of the load. SAPTUF is very sensitive and accurate and is used to alert operators that frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that manual actions might be enough. The underfrequency signal is also used for overexcitation detection. This is especially important for generator step-up transformers, which might be connected to the generator but disconnected from the grid, during a roll-out sequence. If the generator is still energized, the system will experience overexcitation, due to the low frequency.
3.9.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for underfrequency protection SAPTUF are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600). All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTUF performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its frequency and time characteristic. There are especially two application areas for SAPTUF: 1. 2. to protect equipment against damage due to low frequency, such as generators, transformers, and motors. Overexcitation is also related to low frequency to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by shedding load, in generation deficit situations.
The underfrequency START value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the nominal primary voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SAPTUF is not instantaneous, since the frequency is related to movements of the system inertia, but the time and frequency steps between different actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is required, for example, down to 70 ms. Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given below:

The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency for the equipment.
Power system protection, by load shedding

The setting has to be below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/ or in frequency) depends very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the "largest loss of production" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the load shedding can be set at a fairly high frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency START level has to be set at a lower value, and the time delay must be rather short. The voltage related time delay is used for load shedding. The settings of SAPTUF could be the same all over the power system. The load shedding is then performed firstly in areas with low voltage magnitude, which normally are the most problematic areas, where the load shedding also is most efficient.
The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency for the equipment.
Power system protection, by load shedding
The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/ or in frequency) depends very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the "largest loss of production" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the load shedding can be set at a fairly high frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency start level has to be set at a lower value, and the time delay must be rather short. The voltage related time delay is used for load shedding. The settings of the underfrequency function could be the same all over the power system. The load shedding is then performed firstly in areas with low voltage magnitude, which normally are the most problematic areas, where the load shedding also is most efficient.

3.9.1.3
Table 139:
Name Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset TimeDlyRestore RestoreFreq TimerOperation UNom UMin Exponent tMax tMin
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameters
SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00 Definite timer Volt based timer 50 - 150 50 - 150 0.0 - 5.0 0.010 - 60.000 0.010 - 60.000 Unit kV Hz %UB s s s Hz %UB %UB s s Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 1 1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off 400.00 48.80 50 0.200 0.000 0.000 50.10 Definite timer 100 90 1.0 1.000 1.000 Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in over/underfrequency mode. Time delay for reset. Restore time delay. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value. Setting for choosing timer mode. Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer. Lower operation limit in % of UBase for voltage based timer. For calculation of the curve form for voltage based timer. Maximum time operation limit for voltage based timer. Minimum time operation limit for voltage based timer.
3.9.2
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

Function description Overfrequency protection IEC 61850 identification SAPTOF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 81
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
3.9.2.1
Application
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of high fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. The power system frequency, and rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between the actual generation and the load demand. High fundamental frequency in a power system indicates that the available generation is too large compared to the power demanded by the load connected to the power grid.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SAPTOF detects such situations and provides an output signal, suitable for generator shedding, HVDC-set-point change and so on. SAPTOF is very sensitive and accurate and can also be used to alert operators that frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that manual actions might be enough.
3.9.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF) are set via local HMI or PCM600. All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTOF performs its functions must be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its frequency and time characteristic. There are especially two application areas for SAPTOF: 1. 2. to protect equipment against damage due to high frequency, such as generators, and motors to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by shedding generation, in generation surplus situations.
The overfrequency START value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the nominal voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. SAPTOF is not instantaneous, since the frequency is related to movements of the system inertia, but the time and frequency steps between different actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is required, for example, down to 70 ms. Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given below:

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well below the highest acceptable frequency for the equipment.
Power system protection, by generator shedding

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and below the highest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in frequency) depend very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the "largest loss of load" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the generator shedding can be set at a fairly low frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency START level has to be set at a higher value, and the time delay must be rather short.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well below the highest acceptable frequency for the equipment.
Power system protection, by generator shedding
The setting level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in frequency) depend very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the "largest loss of load" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the generator shedding can be set at a fairly low frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency start level has to be set at a higher value, and the time delay must be rather short.
3.9.2.3
Table 140:
Name Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset
Setting parameters
SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV Hz %UB s s Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 0.001 Default Off 400.00 51.20 50 0.000 0.000 Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in over/underfrequency mode. Time delay for reset.
3.9.3
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

Function description Rate-of-change frequency protection IEC 61850 identification SAPFRC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 81
df/dt > <

SYMBOL-N V1 EN
3.9.3.1
Application
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC), is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of change of the fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. SAPFRC can be used both for increasing frequency and for decreasing frequency. SAPFRC provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding or generator shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up. Very often SAPFRC is used in combination with a low frequency signal, especially in smaller power systems, where loss of a fairly large generator
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
will require quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In such situations load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level, but in combination with a large negative rate-of-change of frequency the underfrequency protection can be used at a rather high setting.
3.9.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC are set via the local HMI or PCM600. All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPFRC performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its frequency and time characteristic. There are especially two application areas for SAPFRC: 1. 2. to protect equipment against damage due to high or to low frequency, such as generators, transformers, and motors to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by shedding load or generation, in situations where load and generation are not in balance.
SAPFRC is normally used together with an overfrequency or underfrequency function, in small power systems, where a single event can cause a large imbalance between load and generation. In such situations load or generation shedding has to take place very quickly, and there might not be enough time to wait until the frequency signal has reached an abnormal value. Actions are therefore taken at a frequency level closer to the primary nominal level, if the rate-of-change frequency is large (with respect to sign). SAPFRCSTART value is set in Hz/s. All voltage magnitude related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the primary nominal voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration. SAPFRC is not instantaneous, since the function needs some time to supply a stable value. It is recommended to have a time delay long enough to take care of signal noise. However, the time, rate-of-change frequency and frequency steps between different actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is required, for example, down to 70 ms. Smaller industrial systems might experience rate-of-change frequency as large as 5 Hz/s, due to a single event. Even large power systems may form small islands with a large imbalance between load and generation, when severe faults (or combinations of faults) are cleared - up to 3 Hz/s has been experienced when a small island was isolated from a large system. For more "normal" severe disturbances in large power systems, rate-of-change of frequency is much less, most often just a fraction of 1.0 Hz/s.

3.9.3.3
Table 141:
Name Operation UBase StartFreqGrad IntBlockLevel tTrip RestoreFreq tRestore tReset
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameters
SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 -10.00 - 10.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit kV Hz/s %UB s Hz s s Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 0.01 0.001 0.001 Default Off 400.00 0.50 50 0.200 49.90 0.000 0.000 Description Operation Off / On Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines direction. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency gradient mode. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value (Hz) Restore time delay. Time delay for reset.
3.10
3.10.1
Multipurpose protection
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
Function description General current and voltage protection IEC 61850 identification CVGAPC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.10.1.1
Application
A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and earth results in a short circuit or an earth fault. Such faults can result in large fault currents and may cause severe damage to the power system primary equipment. Depending on the magnitude and type of the fault different overcurrent protections, based on measurement of phase, earth or sequence current components can be used to clear these faults. Additionally it is sometimes required that these overcurrent protections shall be directional and/or voltage controlled/restrained. The over/under voltage protection is applied on power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect abnormal voltage conditions. Depending on the type of voltage deviation and type of power system abnormal condition different over/under voltage protections based on measurement of phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase, residual- or sequence- voltage components can be used to detect and operate for such incident. The IED can be provided with multiple General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) protection modules. The function is always connected to three-phase
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool. Each CVGAPC function module has got four independent protection elements built into it. 1. Two overcurrent steps with the following built-in features: Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both steps Second harmonic supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the overcurrent stage(s) if the content of the second harmonic in the measured current is lower than pre-set level Directional supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the overcurrent stage(s) if the fault location is in the pre-set direction (Forward or Reverse). Its behavior during low-level polarizing voltage is settable (Non-Directional,Block,Memory) Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the pick-up level of the overcurrent stage(s) in proportion to the magnitude of the measured voltage Current restrained feature is available in order to only allow operation of the overcurrent stage(s) if the measured current quantity is bigger than the set percentage of the current restrain quantity. Definite time delay for both steps Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both steps Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both steps
2. 3.
Two undercurrent steps with the following built-in features: Two overvoltage steps with the following built-in features
4.
Two undervoltage steps with the following built-in features
All these four protection elements within one general protection function works independently from each other and they can be individually enabled or disabled. However it shall be once more noted that all these four protection elements measure one selected current quantity and one selected voltage quantity (see table 142 and table 143). It is possible to simultaneously use all four-protection elements and their individual stages. Sometimes in order to obtain desired application functionality it is necessary to provide interaction between two or more protection elements/stages within one CVGAPC function by appropriate IED configuration (for example, dead machine protection for generators).
Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function
CVGAPC function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only the single
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
current and the single voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool (selected current quantity and selected voltage quantity). The user can select, by a setting parameter CurrentInput, to measure one of the following current quantities shown in table 142.
Table 142: Available selection for current quantity within CVGAPC function
Comment CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2) CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3) CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1) CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
Set value for parameter "CurrentInput 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3 ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh
10
phase1-phase2
11
phase2-phase3
12
phase3-phase1
13 14 15
MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph
The user can select, by a setting parameter VoltageInput, to measure one of the following voltage quantities shown in table 143.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 143:
Available selection for voltage quantity within CVGAPC function

Comment CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2) CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3) CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor (UL3-UL1) CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
Set value for parameter "VoltageInput" 1 2 3 4 5
phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
7 8 9
MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh
10
phase1-phase2
11
phase2-phase3
12
phase3-phase1
13 14 15
MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 143 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-earth voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1VAB, VBC and VCA. This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatically care about it.

Base quantities for CVGAPC function
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every CVGAPC function. Base current shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 142. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 (1.732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 142.
Base voltage shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 143. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 143.
Application possibilities
Due to its flexibility the general current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be used, with appropriate settings and configuration in many different applications. Some of possible examples are given below: 1. Transformer and line applications: 2.
Underimpedance protection (circular, non-directional characteristic) Underimpedance protection (circular mho characteristic) Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection Phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence (Non-Directional or Directional) Overcurrent protection Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under voltage protection Special thermal overload protection Open Phase protection Unbalance protection 80-95% Stator earth fault protection (measured or calculated 3Uo) Rotor earth fault protection (with external COMBIFLEX RXTTE4 injection unit) Underimpedance protection Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection Turn-to-Turn & Differential Backup protection (directional Negative Sequence. Overcurrent protection connected to generator HV terminal CTs looking into generator) Stator Overload protection Rotor Overload protection Loss of Excitation protection (directional pos. seq. OC protection)
Generator protection
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Reverse power/Low forward power protection (directional pos. seq. OC protection, 2% sensitivity) Dead-Machine/Inadvertent-Energizing protection Breaker head flashover protection Improper synchronizing detection Sensitive negative sequence generator over current protection and alarm Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under voltage protection Generator out-of-step detection (based on directional pos. seq. OC) Inadvertent generator energizing
Inadvertent generator energization
When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the generator circuit breaker is closed by mistake. Three-phase energizing of a generator, which is at standstill or on turning gear, causes it to behave and accelerate similarly to an induction motor. The machine, at this point, essentially represents the subtransient reactance to the system and it can be expected to draw from one to four per unit current, depending on the equivalent system impedance. Machine terminal voltage can range from 20% to 70% of rated voltage, again, depending on the system equivalent impedance (including the block transformer). Higher quantities of machine current and voltage (3 to 4 per unit current and 50% to 70% rated voltage) can be expected if the generator is connected to a strong system. Lower current and voltage values (1 to 2 per unit current and 20% to 40% rated voltage) are representative of weaker systems. Since a generator behaves similarly to an induction motor, high currents will develop in the rotor during the period it is accelerating. Although the rotor may be thermally damaged from excessive high currents, the time to damage will be on the order of a few seconds. Of more critical concern, however, is the bearing, which can be damaged in a fraction of a second due to low oil pressure. Therefore, it is essential that high speed tripping is provided. This tripping should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms). There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be limited so that the normal overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. The reverse power protection might detect the situation but the operation time of this protection is normally too long. For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should, therefore, be included in the protective scheme. The protection against inadvertent energization can be made by a combination of undervoltage, overvoltage and overcurrent protection functions. The undervoltage function will, with a delay for example 10 s, detect the situation when the generator is not connected to the grid (standstill) and activate the overcurrent function. The overvoltage function will detect the situation when the generator is taken into operation and will disable the overcurrent function. The overcurrent function will
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
have a pick-up value about 50% of the rated current of the generator. The trip delay will be about 50 ms.
3.10.1.2
Setting guidelines
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero. The parameters for the general current and voltage protection function (CVGAPC) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600). The overcurrent steps has a IMinx (x=1 or 2 depending on step) setting to set the minimum operate current. Set IMinx below StartCurr_OCx for every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set above StartCurr_OCx for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx.
Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection
Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection is typically used as sensitive earth-fault protection of power lines were incorrect zero sequence polarization may result from mutual induction between two or more parallel lines. Additionally, it can be used in applications on underground cables where zero-sequence impedance depends on the fault current return paths, but the cable negative-sequence impedance is practically constant. It shall be noted that directional negative sequence OC element offers protection against all unbalance faults (phase-to-phase faults as well). Care shall be taken that the minimum pickup of such protection function shall be set above natural system unbalance level. An example will be given, how sensitive-earth-fault protection for power lines can be achieved by using negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection elements within a CVGAPC function. This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following shall be done to ensure proper operation of the function: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Connect three-phase power line currents and three-phase power line voltages to one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF04) Set CurrentInput to NegSeq (please note that CVGAPC function measures I2 current and NOT 3I2 current; this is essential for proper OC pickup level setting) Set VoltageInput to -NegSeq (please note that the negative sequence voltage phasor is intentionally inverted in order to simplify directionality Set base current IBase value equal to the rated primary current of power line CTs
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Set base voltage UBase value equal to the rated power line phase-to-phase voltage in kV Set RCADir to value +65 degrees (NegSeq current typically lags the inverted NegSeq voltage for this angle during the fault) Set ROADir to value 90 degree Set LowVolt_VM to value 2% (NegSeq voltage level above which the directional element will be enabled) Enable one overcurrent stage (for example, OC1) By parameter CurveType_OC1 select appropriate TOC/IDMT or definite time delayed curve in accordance with your network protection philosophy Set StartCurr_OC1 to value between 3-10% (typical values) Set tDef_OC1 or parameter k when TOC/IDMT curves are used to insure proper time coordination with other earth-fault protections installed in the vicinity of this power line Set DirMode_OC1 to Forward Set DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&U Set ActLowVolt1_VM to Block In order to insure proper restraining of this element for CT saturations during three-phase faults it is possible to use current restraint feature and enable this element to operate only when NegSeq current is bigger than a certain percentage (10% is typical value) of measured PosSeq current in the power line. To do this the following settings within the same function shall be done:
16. Set EnRestrainCurr to On 17. Set RestrCurrInput to PosSeq 18. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.10 If required, this CVGAPC function can be used in directional comparison protection scheme for the power line protection if communication channels to the remote end of this power line are available. In that case typically two NegSeq overcurrent steps are required. One for forward and one for reverse direction. As explained before the OC1 stage can be used to detect faults in forward direction. The built-in OC2 stage can be used to detect faults in reverse direction. However the following shall be noted for such application: the set values for RCADir and ROADir settings will be as well applicable for OC2 stage setting DirMode_OC2 shall be set to Reverse setting parameter StartCurr_OC2 shall be made more sensitive than pickup value of forward OC1 element (that is, typically 60% of OC1 set pickup level) in order to insure proper operation of the directional comparison scheme during current reversal situations start signals from OC1 and OC2 elements shall be used to send forward and reverse signals to the remote end of the power line the available scheme communications function block within IED shall be used between multipurpose protection function and the communication equipment in order to insure proper conditioning of the above two start signals
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Furthermore the other built-in UC, OV and UV protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes.
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide negative sequence inverse time overcurrent protection for a generator with capability constant of 20s, and maximum continuous negative sequence rating of 7% of the generator rated current. The capability curve for a generator negative sequence overcurrent protection, often used world-wide, is defined by the ANSI standard in accordance with the following formula:
top =
k I NS Ir
2
EQUATION1372 V1 EN
(Equation 404)
where: top k INS Ir is the operating time in seconds of the negative sequence overcurrent IED is the generator capability constant in seconds is the measured negative sequence current is the generator rated current
By defining parameter x equal to maximum continuous negative sequence rating of the generator in accordance with the following formula
x = 7% = 0, 07 pu
EQUATION1373 V1 EN
(Equation 405)
Equation 404 can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the operate time of the negative sequence inverse overcurrent IED:
1 x2 top = 2 I NS x Ir k
EQUATION1374 V1 EN
(Equation 406)
In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the following must be done:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF01) Set parameter CurrentInput to value NegSeq Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1) Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable
A + B top = k P M -C
EQUATION1375 V1 EN
(Equation 407)
where: top k M is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm is time multiplier (parameter setting) is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT calculation
When the equation 404 is compared with the equation 406 for the inverse time characteristic of the OC1 it is obvious that if the following rules are followed: 1. 2. 3. 4. set k equal to the generator negative sequence capability value set A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2 set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1=0.0 and P_OC1=2.0 set StartCurr_OC1 equal to the value x
then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative sequence inverse overcurrent protection. For this particular example the following settings shall be entered to insure proper function operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. select negative sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function make sure that the base current value for the CVGAPC function is equal to the generator rated current set k_OC1 = 20 set A_OC1= 1/0.072 = 204.0816 set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0 set StartCurr_OC1 = 7%
Proper timing of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to ensure proper function operation in case of repetitive unbalance conditions.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes (for example, use OC2 for negative sequence overcurrent alarm and OV1 for negative sequence overvoltage alarm).
Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standards

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standard if minimumoperating current shall be set to 116% of generator rating. The generator stator overload protection is defined by IEC or ANSI standard for turbo generators in accordance with the following formula:
top =
k Im -1 Ir
(Equation 408)
2
EQUATION1376 V1 EN
where: top k Im Ir is the operating time of the generator stator overload IED is the generator capability constant in accordance with the relevant standard (k = 37.5 for the IEC standard or k = 41.4 for the ANSI standard) is the magnitude of the measured current is the generator rated current
This formula is applicable only when measured current (for example, positive sequence current) exceeds a pre-set value (typically in the range from 105 to 125% of the generator rated current). By defining parameter x equal to the per unit value for the desired pickup for the overload IED in accordance with the following formula:
x = 116% = 1.16 pu
EQUATION1377 V2 EN
(Equation 409)
formula 3.5can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the operate time of the generator stator overload IED:
1 x2 top = 2 Im 1 - 2 x Ir x k
EQUATION1378 V1 EN
(Equation 410)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the following must be done: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF01) Set parameter CurrentInput to value PosSeq Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes Enable one overcurrent step (for example OC1) Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable
A + B top = k P M -C
EQUATION1375 V1 EN
(Equation 411)
where: top k M is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm is time multiplier (parameter setting) is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT calculation
When the equation 410 is compared with the equation 411 for the inverse time characteristic of the OC1 step in it is obvious that if the following rules are followed: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. set k equal to the IEC or ANSI standard generator capability value set parameter A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2 set parameter C_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2 set parameters B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1=2.0 set StartCurr_OC1 equal to the value x
then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative sequence inverse overcurrent protection. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. select positive sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function make sure that the base current value for CVGAPC function is equal to the generator rated current set k = 37.5 for the IEC standard or k = 41.4 for the ANSI standard set A_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432 set C_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432 set B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0 set StartCurr_OC1 = 116%
Proper timing of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to insure proper function operation in case of repetitive overload conditions. Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes. In the similar way rotor overload protection in accordance with ANSI standard can be achieved.
Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators and circuit breaker head flashover protection for generators
Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide open phase protection. This can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function by comparing the unbalance current with a pre-set level. In order to make such a function more secure it is possible to restrain it by requiring that at the same time the measured unbalance current must be bigger than 97% of the maximum phase current. By doing this it will be insured that function can only pickup if one of the phases is open circuited. Such an arrangement is easy to obtain in CVGAPC function by enabling the current restraint feature. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function: Connect three-phase currents from the protected object to one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF03) 2. Set CurrentInput to value UnbalancePh 3. Set EnRestrainCurr to On 4. Set RestrCurrInput to MaxPh 5. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.97 6. Set base current value to the rated current of the protected object in primary amperes 7. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1) 8. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time 9. Set parameter StartCurr_OC1 to value 5% 10. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to desired time delay (for example, 2.0s) Proper operation of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall be noted that set values for restrain current and its coefficient will as well be applicable for OC2 step as soon as it is enabled. Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes. For example, in case of generator application by enabling OC2 step with set pickup to 200% and time delay to 0.1s simple but effective protection against circuit breaker head flashover protection is achieved. 1.
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up transformer

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide voltage restrained overcurrent protection for a generator. Let us assume that the time coordination study gives the following required settings:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Inverse Time Over Current TOC/IDMT curve: ANSI very inverse Pickup current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage Pickup current 25% of the original pickup current value for generator voltages below 25% of rated voltage
This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF05) Set CurrentInput to value MaxPh Set VoltageInput to value MinPh-Ph (it is assumed that minimum phase-tophase voltage shall be used for restraining. Alternatively, positive sequence voltage can be used for restraining by selecting PosSeq for this setting parameter) Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1) Select CurveType_OC1 to value ANSI Very inv If required set minimum operating time for this curve by using parameter tMin_OC1 (default value 0.05s) Set StartCurr_OC1 to value 185% Set VCntrlMode_OC1 to On Set VDepMode_OC1 to Slope Set VDepFact_OC1 to value 0.25 Set UHighLimit_OC1 to value 100% Set ULowLimit_OC1 to value 25%
Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes.
Loss of excitation protection for a generator
Example will be given how by using positive sequence directional overcurrent protection element within a CVGAPC function, loss of excitation protection for a generator can be achieved. Let us assume that from rated generator data the following values are calculated: Maximum generator capability to contentiously absorb reactive power at zero active loading 38% of the generator MVA rating Generator pull-out angle 84 degrees
This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function: 1. 2. 3.
Application manual
Connect three-phase generator currents and three-phase generator voltages to one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF02) Set parameter CurrentInput to PosSeq Set parameter VoltageInput to PosSeq
515
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV Set parameter RCADir to value -84 degree (that is, current lead voltage for this angle) Set parameter ROADir to value 90 degree Set parameter LowVolt_VM to value 5% Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1) Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time Set parameter StartCurr_OC1 to value 38% Set parameter tDef_OC1 to value 2.0s (typical setting) Set parameter DirMode_OC1 to Forward Set parameter DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&U Set parameter ActLowVolt1_VM to Block
Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall be noted that set values for RCA & ROA angles will be applicable for OC2 step if directional feature is enabled for this step as well. Figure 218 shows overall protection characteristic Furthermore the other build-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes.
Q [pu]
A 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0.2 -rca 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 C -0.4 -0.6 -0.8
IEC05000535 V2 EN
Operating region
ILowSet B
IPS
rca
1.2
1.4
P [pu]
-0.2
UPS
ILowSet
Operating Region
en05000535.vsd
Figure 218:
Loss of excitation
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
3.10.1.3
Table 144:
Name Operation CurrentInput
CVGAPC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 1 - 99999 phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq -3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 10.0 - 50.0 Off On PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max 0.00 - 5.00 -180 - 180 1 - 90 0.0 - 5.0 Off On Unit Step Default Off MaxPh Description Operation Off / On Select current signal which will be measured inside function
IBase VoltageInput
A -
1 -
3000 MaxPh
Base Current Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function
UBase OperHarmRestr l_2nd/l_fund EnRestrainCurr RestrCurrInput
kV % -
0.05 1.0 -
400.00 Off 20.0 Off PosSeq
Base Voltage Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off / On Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in % Enable current restrain function On / Off Select current signal which will be used for curr restrain
RestrCurrCoeff RCADir ROADir LowVolt_VM Operation_OC1
Deg Deg %UB -
0.01 1 1 0.1 -
0.00 -75 75 0.5 Off
Restraining current coefficient Relay Characteristic Angle Relay Operate Angle Below this level in % of Ubase setting ActLowVolt takes over Operation OC1 Off / On

Name StartCurr_OC1 CurveType_OC1 Values (Range) 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.00 - 6000.00 Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 0.02 - 5.00 1.0 - 200.0 1.0 - 200.0 Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory Off On 2.0 - 5000.0 Unit %IB Step 1.0 Default 120.0 ANSI Def. Time Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operate current level for OC1 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
tDef_OC1 k_OC1 IMin1 tMin_OC1 VCntrlMode_OC1
s %IB s -
0.01 0.01 1 0.01 -
0.50 0.30 100 0.05 Off
Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 Minimum operate current for step1 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function
VDepMode_OC1 VDepFact_OC1 ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1 HarmRestr_OC1 DirMode_OC1
%UB %UB -
0.01 0.1 0.1 -
Step 1.00 50.0 100.0 Off Non-directional
Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC1 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation OC2 Off / On Operate current level for OC2 in % of Ibase
DirPrinc_OC1 ActLowVolt1_VM
I&U Non-directional
Operation_OC2 StartCurr_OC2
%IB
1.0
Off 120.0
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 1 - 10000 0.00 - 6000.00 Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 0.02 - 5.00 1.0 - 200.0 1.0 - 200.0 Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory Off On Off On 0 - 150 Unit Step Default ANSI Def. Time Description Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
Name CurveType_OC2
tDef_OC2 k_OC2 IMin2 tMin_OC2 VCntrlMode_OC2
s %IB s -
0.01 0.01 1 0.01 -
0.50 0.30 50 0.05 Off
Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of IBase Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2 Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function
VDepMode_OC2 VDepFact_OC2 ULowLimit_OC2 UHighLimit_OC2 HarmRestr_OC2 DirMode_OC2
%UB %UB -
0.01 0.1 0.1 -
Step 1.00 50.0 100.0 Off Non-directional
Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC2 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation UC1 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC1 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in % of Ibase
DirPrinc_OC2 ActLowVolt2_VM
I&U Non-directional
Operation_UC1 EnBlkLowI_UC1 BlkLowCurr_UC1
%IB
Off Off 20

Name StartCurr_UC1 tDef_UC1 tResetDef_UC1 HarmRestr_UC1 Operation_UC2 EnBlkLowI_UC2 BlkLowCurr_UC2 StartCurr_UC2 tDef_UC2 HarmRestr_UC2 Operation_OV1 StartVolt_OV1 CurveType_OV1 Values (Range) 2.0 - 150.0 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On Off On Off On 0 - 150 2.0 - 150.0 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Off On Unit %IB s s %IB %IB s %UB Step 1.0 0.01 0.01 1 1.0 0.01 0.1 Default 70.0 0.50 0.00 Off Off Off 20 70.0 0.50 Off Off 150.0 Definite time Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC1 Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation UC2 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC2 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2 Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation OV1 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
tDef_OV1 tMin_OV1 k_OV1 Operation_OV2 StartVolt_OV2 CurveType_OV2
s s %UB -
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 -
1.00 0.05 0.30 Off 150.0 Definite time
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV1 Operation OV2 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
tDef_OV2 tMin_OV2 k_OV2 Operation_UV1
s s -
0.01 0.01 0.01 -
1.00 0.05 0.30 Off
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV2 Operation UV1 Off / On
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 2.0 - 150.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Off On 0.0 - 5.0 Off On 2.0 - 150.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00 Off On 0.0 - 5.0 Unit %UB Step 0.1 Default 50.0 Definite time Description Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
Name StartVolt_UV1 CurveType_UV1
tDef_UV1 tMin_UV1 k_UV1 EnBlkLowV_UV1 BlkLowVolt_UV1 Operation_UV2 StartVolt_UV2 CurveType_UV2
s s %UB %UB -
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 -
1.00 0.05 0.30 On 0.5 Off 50.0 Definite time
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Ubase Operation UV2 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
tDef_UV2 tMin_UV2 k_UV2 EnBlkLowV_UV2 BlkLowVolt_UV2
s s %UB
0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1
1.00 0.05 0.30 On 0.5
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV2 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV2 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in % of Ubase
Table 145:
Name CurrMult_OC1
CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00 0.001 - 10.000 0.000 - 999.000 Unit Step 0.1 Default 2.0 Instantaneous Description Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC1 Selection of reset curve type for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1
tResetDef_OC1 P_OC1 A_OC1
s -
0.01 0.001 0.001
0.00 0.020 0.140
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC1

Name B_OC1 C_OC1 PR_OC1 TR_OC1 CR_OC1 CurrMult_OC2 ResCrvType_OC2 Values (Range) 0.000 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 600.000 0.1 - 10.0 1.0 - 10.0 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00 0.001 - 10.000 0.000 - 999.000 0.000 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 600.000 0.1 - 10.0 0.00 - 6000.00 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.005 - 999.000 0.500 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 - 10.000 Unit Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 Default 0.000 1.000 0.500 13.500 1.0 2.0 Instantaneous Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 Selection of reset curve type for OC2
tResetDef_OC2 P_OC2 A_OC2 B_OC2 C_OC2 PR_OC2 TR_OC2 CR_OC2 tResetDef_UC2 ResCrvType_OV1
s s -
0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.01 -
0.00 0.020 0.140 0.000 1.000 0.500 13.500 1.0 0.00 Instantaneous
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC2 Selection of reset curve type for OV1
tResetDef_OV1 tResetIDMT_OV1 A_OV1 B_OV1 C_OV1 D_OV1 P_OV1
s s -
0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
0.00 0.00 0.140 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.020
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV1
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.005 - 999.000 0.500 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 - 10.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.005 - 999.000 0.500 - 99.000 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 - 10.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.005 - 999.000 0.500 - 99.000 Unit Step Default Instantaneous Description Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Name ResCrvType_OV2
tResetDef_OV2 tResetIDMT_OV2 A_OV2 B_OV2 C_OV2 D_OV2 P_OV2 ResCrvType_UV1
s s -
0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 -
0.00 0.00 0.140 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.020 Instantaneous
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2 Selection of reset curve type for UV1
tResetDef_UV1 tResetIDMT_UV1 A_UV1 B_UV1 C_UV1 D_UV1 P_UV1 ResCrvType_UV2
s s -
0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 -
0.00 0.00 0.140 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.020 Instantaneous
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1 Selection of reset curve type for UV2
tResetDef_UV2 tResetIDMT_UV2 A_UV2 B_UV2
s s -
0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001
0.00 0.00 0.140 1.000
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2

Name C_UV2 D_UV2 P_UV2 Values (Range) 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 - 10.000 Unit Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 1.000 0.000 0.020 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2
3.11
3.11.1
Secondary system supervision

Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF
Function description Current circuit supervision IEC 61850 identification CCSRDIF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 87
3.11.1.1
Application
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negativesequence current functions. When currents from two independent three-phase sets of CTs, or CT cores, measuring the same primary currents are available, reliable current circuit supervision can be arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an error in any CT circuit is detected, the protection functions concerned can be blocked and an alarm given. In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with different remanence or different saturation factor may result in differences in the secondary currents from the two CT sets. Unwanted blocking of protection functions during the transient stage must then be avoided. Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF must be sensitive and have short operate time in order to prevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protections in case of faulty CT secondary circuits. Open CT circuits creates extremely high voltages in the circuits, which may damage the insulation and cause new problems. The application shall, thus, be done with this in consideration, especially if protection functions are blocked.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting guidelines
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF compares the residual current from a threephase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the same current transformer. The minimum operate current, IMinOp, must be set as a minimum to twice the residual current in the supervised CT circuits under normal service conditions and rated primary current. The parameter Ip>Block is normally set at 150% to block the function during transient conditions. The FAIL output is connected to the blocking input of the protection function to be blocked at faulty CT secondary circuits.
3.11.1.2
3.11.1.3
Table 146:
Name Operation IBase IMinOp
Setting parameters
CCSRDIF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 5 - 200 Unit A %IB Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 20 Description Operation Off / On IBase value for current level detectors Minimum operate current differential level in % of IBase
Table 147:
Name Ip>Block
CCSRDIF Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 5 - 500 Unit %IB Step 1 Default 150 Description Block of the function at high phase current, in % of IBase
3.11.2
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF

Function description Fuse failure supervision IEC 61850 identification SDDRFUF IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.11.2.1
Application
Different protection functions within the protection IED, operates on the basis of the measured voltage in the relay point. Examples are: distance protection function under/over-voltage function synchrocheck function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.
525
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
These functions can operate unintensionally if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits between the voltage instrument transformers and the IED. It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted operations. Miniature circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits, located as close as possible to the voltage instrument transformers, are one of them. Separate fusefailure monitoring IEDs or elements within the protection and monitoring devices are another possibilities. These solutions are combined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervision function (SDDRFUF). SDDRFUF function built into the IED products can operate on the basis of external binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second one does not affect the impedance measuring functions. The negative sequence detection algorithm, based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2, is recommended for use in isolated or highimpedance earthed networks. The zero sequence detection algorithm, based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0, is recommended for use in directly or low impedance earthed networks. In cases where the line can have a weak-infeed of zero sequence current this function shall be avoided. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
3.11.2.2

The negative and zero sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different non-symmetries in the primary system and differences in the current and voltage instrument transformers. The minimum value for the operation of the current and voltage measuring elements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 20%, depending on the system operating conditions. Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function is used on longer untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines and so on. The settings of negative sequence, zero sequence and delta algorithm are in percent of the base voltage and base current for the function, UBase and IBase respectively. Set UBase to the primary rated phase-phase voltage of the potential voltage transformer and IBase to the primary rated current of the current transformer.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting of common parameters
Set the operation mode selector Operation to On to release the fuse failure function. The voltage threshold USealIn< is used to identify low voltage condition in the system. Set USealIn< below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency conditions. We propose a setting of approximately 70% of UBase. The drop off time of 200 ms for dead phase detection makes it recommended to always set SealIn to On since this will secure a fuse failure indication at persistent fuse fail when closing the local breaker when the line is already energized from the other end. When the remote breaker closes the voltage will return except in the phase that has a persistent fuse fail. Since the local breaker is open there is no current and the dead phase indication will persist in the phase with the blown fuse. When the local breaker closes the current will start to flow and the function detects the fuse failure situation. But due to the 200 ms drop off timer the output BLKZ will not be activated until after 200 ms. This means that distance functions are not blocked and due to the no voltage but current situation might issue a trip. The operation mode selector OpMode has been introduced for better adaptation to system requirements. The mode selector makes it possible to select interactions between the negative sequence and zero sequence algorithm. In normal applications the OpMode is set to either UNsINs for selecting negative sequence algorithm or UZsIZs for zero sequence based algorithm. If system studies or field experiences shows that there is a risk that the fuse failure function will not be activated due to the system conditions, the dependability of the fuse failure function can be increased if the OpMode is set to UZsIZs OR UNsINs or OptimZsNs. In modeUZsIZs OR UNsINs both the negative and zero sequence based algorithm is activated and working in an OR-condition. Also in mode OptimZsNs both the negative and zero sequence algorithm are activated and the one that has the highest magnitude of measured negative sequence current will operate. If there is a requirement to increase the security of the fuse failure function OpMode can be selected to UZsIZs AND UNsINs which gives that both negative and zero sequence algorithm is activated working in an AND-condition, that is, both algorithm must give condition for block in order to activate the output signals BLKU or BLKZ. The relay setting value 3U2> is given in percentage of the base voltage UBase and should not be set lower than according to equation 412.
3U 2 >= 3U 2 UBase 100
(Equation 412)
Negative sequence based
EQUATION1519 V2 EN
where: 3U2 is maximal negative sequence voltage during normal operation condition
UBase is setting of base voltage for the function
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The setting of the current limit 3I2< is in percentage of parameter IBase. The setting of 3I2< must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the system and can be calculated according to equation 413.
3I 2 <= 3I 2 100 IBase
(Equation 413)
EQUATION1520 V3 EN
where: 3I2 is maximal negative sequence current during normal operating condition is setting of base current for the function
IBase
The IED setting value 3U0> is given in percentage of the base voltage UBase, where UBase is the primary base voltage, normally the rated voltage of the primary potential voltage transformer winding. The setting of 3U0> should not be set lower than according to equation 414.
3U 0 >= 3U 0 UBase 100
(Equation 414)
Zero sequence based
EQUATION1521 V2 EN
where: 3U0 is maximal zero sequence voltage during normal operation condition UBase is setting of base voltage for the function
The setting of the current limit 3I0> is done in percentage of IBase. The setting of 3I0> must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the system. The setting can be calculated according to equation 415.
3 I 0 <= 3I 0 100 IBase
(Equation 415)
EQUATION2293 V2 EN
where:
3I0< IBase
is maximal zero sequence current during normal operating condition is setting of base current for the function
Delta U and delta I
Set the operation mode selector OpDUDI to On if the delta function shall be in operation.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The setting of DU> should be set high (approximately 60% of UBase) and the current threshold DI< low (approximately 10% of IBase) to avoid unwanted operation due to normal switching conditions in the network. The delta current and delta voltage function shall always be used together with either the negative or zero sequence algorithm. If USetprim is the primary voltage for operation of dU/dt and ISetprim the primary current for operation of dI/dt, the setting of DU> and DI< will be given according to equation 416and equation 417.
DU > = USetprim 100 UBase
(Equation 416)
EQUATION1523 V1 EN
DI <=
ISetprim 100 IBase

(Equation 417)
EQUATION1524 V2 EN
The voltage thresholds UPh> is used to identify low voltage condition in the system. Set UPh> below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency conditions. We propose a setting of approximately 70% of UB. The current threshold IPh> shall be set lower than the IMinOp for the distance protection function. A 5-10% lower value is recommended.
Dead line detection
The condition for operation of the dead line detection is set by the parameters IDLD< for the current threshold and UDLD< for the voltage threshold. Set the IDLD< with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected load current. A safety margin of at least 15-20% is recommended. The operate value must however exceed the maximum charging current of an overhead line, when only one phase is disconnected (mutual coupling to the other phases). Set the UDLD< with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected operating voltage. A safety margin of at least 15% is recommended.
3.11.2.3
Table 148:
Name Operation IBase UBase
Setting parameters
SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Unit A kV Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage

Name OpMode Values (Range) Off UNsINs UZsIZs UZsIZs OR UNsINs UZsIZs AND UNsINs OptimZsNs 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 Off On 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 Off On 1 - 100 1 - 100 1 - 100 Unit Step Default UZsIZs Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operating mode selection
3U0> 3I0< 3U2> 3I2< OpDUDI DU> DI< UPh> IPh> SealIn USealln< IDLD< UDLD<
%UB %IB %UB %IB %UB %IB %UB %IB %UB %IB %UB
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
30 10 30 10 Off 60 15 70 10 On 70 5 60
Operate level of residual overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase Operate level of neg seq overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of neg seq undercurrent element in % of IBase Operation of change based function Off/ On Operate level of change in phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of change in phase current in % of IBase Operate level of phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of phase current in % of IBase Seal in functionality Off/On Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level for open phase current detection in % of IBase Operate level for open phase voltage detection in % of UBase
3.12
3.12.1
Control
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN
Function description Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing IEC 61850 identification SESRSYN IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 25
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Application Synchronizing
To allow closing of breakers between asynchronous networks a synchronizing function is provided. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time when conditions across the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components. The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency difference between bus and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is less than this threshold value the system is defined to have a parallel circuit and the synchrocheck function is used. The synchronizing function measures the difference between the U-line and the Ubus. It operates and enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angle and the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch of the base voltages UBaseBus and UBaseLine. The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiffSynch. The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiffMax and larger than the set value of FreqDiffMin. If the frequency is less than FreqDiffMin the synchrocheck is used and the value of FreqDiffMin must thus be identical to the value FreqDiffM resp FreqDiffA for synchrocheck function. The bus and line frequencies must also be within a range of +/- 5 Hz from the rated frequency. When the synchronizing option is included also for autoreclose there is no reason to have different frequency setting for the manual and automatic reclosing and the frequency difference values for synchronism check should be kept low. The frequency rate of change is less than set value for both U-bus and U-line. The closing angle is decided by the calculation of slip frequency and required pre-closing time.
3.12.1.1
The synchronizing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well as the circuit breaker closing delay. The phase advance is calculated continuously. Closing angle is the change in angle during the set breaker closing operate time tBreaker. The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2L3, L3-L1 or positive sequence. The bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as are chosen for the line or a compensation angle set to compensate for the difference.
Synchrocheck
The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the closing of circuit breakers in power networks in order to prevent closing if conditions for synchronism are not detected. It is also used to prevent the re531 Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
connection of two systems, which are divided after islanding and after a three pole reclosing. Single pole auto-reclosing does not require any synchrocheck since the system is tied together by two phases. SESRSYN function block includes both the synchronism check function and the energizing function to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead. SESRSYN function also includes a built in voltage selection scheme which allows simple application in busbar arrangements.
~
IEC04000179 V1 EN
~
en04000179.vsd
Figure 219:
Two interconnected power systems
Figure 219 shows two interconnected power systems. The cloud means that the interconnection can be further away, that is, a weak connection through other stations. The need for a check of synchronization increases as the meshed system decreases since the risk of the two networks being out of synchronization at manual or automatic closing is greater. The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. Output is generated only when all measured conditions are within their set limits simultaneously. The check consists of: Live line and live bus. Voltage level difference. Frequency difference (slip). The bus and line frequency must also be within a range of 5 Hz from rated frequency. Phase angle difference.
A time delay is available to ensure that the conditions are fulfilled for a minimum period of time. In very stable power systems the frequency difference is insignificant or zero for manually initiated closing or closing by automatic restoration. In steady conditions a bigger phase angle difference can be allowed as this is sometimes the case in a long and loaded parallel power line. For this application we accept a synchrocheck with a long operation time and high sensitivity regarding the frequency difference. The phase angle difference setting can be set for steady state conditions. Another example, is when the operation of the power net is disturbed and highspeed auto-reclosing after fault clearance takes place. This can cause a power
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
swing in the net and the phase angle difference may begin to oscillate. Generally, the frequency difference is the time derivative of the phase angle difference and will, typically oscillate between positive and negative values. When the circuit breaker needs to be closed by auto-reclosing after fault-clearance some frequency difference should be tolerated, to a greater extent than in the steady condition mentioned in the case above. But if a big phase angle difference is allowed at the same time, there is some risk that auto-reclosing will take place when the phase angle difference is big and increasing. In this case it should be safer to close when the phase angle difference is smaller. To fulfill the above requirements the synchrocheck function is provided with duplicate settings, one for steady (Manual) conditions and one for operation under disturbed conditions (Auto).
SynchroCheck UHighBusSC > 50 - 120 % of UBaseBus UHighLineSC > 50 - 120 % of UBaseLine UDiffSC < 0.02 0.50 p.u. PhaseDiffM < 5 - 90 degrees PhaseDiffA < 5 - 90 degrees FreqDiffM < 3 - 1000 mHz FreqDiffA < 3 - 1000 mHz
Bus voltage Fuse fail Line voltage Fuse fail Line reference voltage
IEC10000079 V1 EN
Figure 220:
Principle for the synchrocheck function
Energizing check
The main purpose of the energizing check function is to facilitate the controlled reconnection of disconnected lines and buses to energized lines and buses. The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold values. The output is given only when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions. Figure 221 shows two power systems, where one (1) is energized and the other (2) is not energized. Power system 2 is energized (DLLB) from system 1 via the circuit breaker A.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
2 A B
Bus voltage
Line voltage
EnergizingCheck
UHighBusEnerg > 50 - 120 % of UBaseBus UHighLineEnerg > 50 - 120 % of UBaseLine ULowBusEnerg < 10 - 80 % of UBaseBus ULowLineEnerg < 10 - 80 % of UBaseLine UMaxEnerg < 80 - 140 % of UBaseBus and/or UBaseLine
IEC10000078 V1 EN
Figure 221:
Principle for the energizing check function
The energizing operation can operate in the dead line live bus (DLLB) direction, dead bus live line (DBLL) direction, or in both directions over the circuit breaker. Energizing from different directions can be different for automatic reclosing and manual closing of the circuit breaker. For manual closing it is also possible to allow closing when both sides of the breaker are dead, Dead Bus Dead Line (DBDL). The equipment is considered energized if the voltage is above a set value, for example, 80% of the base voltage, and non-energized if it is below a set value, for example, 30% of the base voltage. A disconnected line can have a considerable potential because of factors such as induction from a line running in parallel, or feeding via extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as 50% or more of the base voltage of the line. Normally, for breakers with single breaking elements (<330kV) the level is well below 30%. When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to remain constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted. The purpose of the delayed operate time is to ensure that the dead side remains deenergized and that the condition is not due to temporary interference.
Voltage selection
The voltage selection function is used for the connection of appropriate voltages to the synchrocheck and energizing check functions. For example, when the IED is used in a double bus arrangement, the voltage that should be selected depends on the status of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the status of the disconnectors auxiliary contacts, the right voltages for the synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check functions can be selected. Available voltage selection types are for single circuit breaker with double busbars and the 1 circuit breaker arrangement. A double circuit breaker arrangement and single circuit breaker with a single busbar do not need any voltage selection function. Neither does a single circuit breaker with double busbars using external voltage selection need any internal voltage selection.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The voltages from busbars and lines must be physically connected to the voltage inputs in the IED and connected, using the control software, to each of the maximum two SESRSYN functions available in the IED.
External fuse failure
External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to inputs of SESRSYN function in the IED. The internal fuse failure supervision function can also be used, for at least the line voltage supply. The signal VTSU is then used and connected to the blocking input of the energizing check function block. In case of a fuse failure, SESRSYN and energizing check functions are blocked. The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. External selection of energizing direction The energizing can be selected by use of the available logic function blocks. Below is an example where the choice of mode is done from a symbol on the local HMI through selector switch function block, but alternatively there can for example, be a physical selector switch on the front of the panel which is connected to a binary to integer function block (B16I). If the PSTO input is used, connected to the Local-Remote switch on the local HMI, the choice can also be from the station HMI system, typically ABB Microscada through IEC 61850 communication. The connection example for selection of the manual energizing mode is shown in figure 222. Selected names are just examples but note that the symbol on the local HMI can only show three signs.
SLGGIO INTONE OFF DL DB DLB PSTO NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 SWPOSN MENMODE SESRSYN
IEC07000118 V2 EN
Figure 222:
Selection of the energizing direction from a local HMI symbol through a selector switch function block.
3.12.1.2
Application examples
The synchronizing function block can also be used in some switchyard arrangements, but with different parameter settings. Below are some examples of
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
how different arrangements are connected to the IED analogue inputs and to the function block (SESRSYN). One function block is used per circuit breaker. The IED can be provided with one,two or three function blocks. The input used below in example are typical and can be changed by use of configuration and signal matrix tools.
The SESRSYN and connected SMAI function block instances must have the same cycle time in the application configuration.
Single circuit breaker with single busbar

Bus 1
SESRSYN U3PBB1* SYNOK U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK U3PLN1* AUTOENOK U3PLN2* MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG INADVCLS AENMODE UDIFFME MENMODE FRDIFFME PHDIFFME UBUS ULINE MODEAEN MODEMEN IEC10000093-1-en.vsd
IEC10000093 V1 EN
QB1
Fuse VT
UREF1
bus1Voltage
QA1
UL1/UL2/UL3
lineVoltage/1/2/3
Fuse VT
Line
Figure 223:
Connection of SESRSYN function block in a single busbar arrangement
Figure 223 illustrates connection principles. For the SESRSYN function there is one voltage transformer on each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward; no special voltage selection is necessary. For the synchronizing and energizing check, the voltage from the busbar VT is connected to the single phase analog input UREF1 (CH10) on the analog input module AIM1 (also referred to as TRM). The line voltage is connected as a threephase voltage to the analog inputs UL1 (CH07), UL2 (CH08), UL3 (CH09) on the module AIM1. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage selection.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection
Bus 1 Bus 2
SESRSYN U3PBB1* SYNOK U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK U3PLN1* AUTOENOK U3PLN2* MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG INADVCLS AENMODE UDIFFME MENMODE FRDIFFME PHDIFFME UBUS ULINE MODEAEN MODEMEN
Fuse VT
Fuse VT
UREF1
bus Voltage
QB1 QB2
QA1
UL1/UL2/UL3
lineVoltage/1/2/3
Fuse VT
Line
IEC10000094 V1 EN
Figure 224:
Connection of SESRSYN function block in a single breaker, double busbar arrangement with external voltage selection.
In this type of arrangement no internal voltage selection is required. The voltage selection is made by external relays typically connected according to figure 224. Suitable voltage and VT fuse failure supervision from the two busbars are selected based on the position of the busbar disconnectors. That means that the connections to the function block will be the same as for the single busbar arrangement. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage selection.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection

Bus 1 Bus 2
Fuse VT
Fuse VT
UREF1 UREF2
bus1Voltage bus2Voltage
QB1 QB2
QA1
UL1/UL2/UL3
lineVoltage/1/2/3
Fuse VT
Line
IEC10000095 V1 EN
Figure 225:
Connection of the Synchrocheck function block in a single breaker, double busbar arrangement with internal voltage selection.
When internal voltage selection is needed, two analog input modules AIM1 (TRM +ADM) and AIM2 (TRM+ADM) are required. The voltage transformer circuit connections are made according to figure 225. The voltages from the busbar VTs are connected to the single phase analog input UREF1 (CH10) on the analog input module AIM1 and to the single phase analog input UREF2 (CH11) on the analog input module AIM2. The line voltage is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1 (CH07), UL2 (CH08), UL3 (CH09) on the module AIM1. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to single CB, double bus.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Double circuit breaker
QA1
Bus 1 Bus 2
Fuse VT
Fuse VT
UREF1 UREF2
bus1Voltage bus2Voltage QA1 QA2
lineVoltage/1/2/3 UL1/UL2/UL3
Fuse VT
Line
QA2
IEC10000096 V1 EN
Figure 226:
Voltage connections in a double breaker arrangement
A double breaker arrangement requires two function blocks SESRSYN1 and SESRSYN2. No voltage selection is necessary, because the two busbar reference
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
voltages UREF1 (CH10) and UREF2 (CH11) are references for two circuit breakers according to figure 226. The line voltage is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1,UL2, UL3 on the analog input module AIM1. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel. for both SESRSYN1 and SESRSYN2.
1 1/2 circuit breaker
The line one IED in a 1 breaker arrangement handles voltage selection for two circuit breakers, one bus CB and the tie CB. The IED requires one or two analog input modules AIM1 (TRM+ADM) and AIM2 (TRM+ADM) and two function blocks SPN1 and SPN2. All voltages for the whole diameter should be connected to both IEDs in the diameter respectively.
Bus 1 Bus 2
QB1 QA1 Fuse VT QB2 QB1 QA1 QB2 SESRSYN U3PBB1* SYNOK U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK U3PLN1* AUTOENOK U3PLN2* MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG INADVCLS AENMODE UDIFFME MENMODE FRDIFFME PHDIFFME UBUS ULINE MODEAEN MODEMEN
Bus 1 CB
UREF1
bus1Voltage
UREF2
bus2Voltage
Fuse VT
QA1 QB61 QB9 line1Voltage Fuse VT 1/2/3 Fuse line2Voltage VT QB62 QB9
UL1/UL2/UL3 UREF3
Line 1
Line 2
Tie CB
IEC10000097 V1 EN
Figure 227:
Voltage connections in a1 breaker arrangement for the line 1 IED
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Bus 1 Bus 2
QB1 QA1 Fuse VT QB2 QB1 QA1 QB2
Bus 2 CB
SESRSYN U3PBB1* SYNOK U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK U3PLN1* AUTOENOK U3PLN2* MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG INADVCLS AENMODE UDIFFME MENMODE FRDIFFME PHDIFFME UBUS ULINE MODEAEN MODEMEN SESRSYN U3PBB1* SYNOK U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK U3PLN1* AUTOENOK U3PLN2* MANSYOK BLOCK MANENOK BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK BLKSC TSTAUTSY BLKENERG TSTMANSY B1QOPEN TSTENOK B1QCLD USELFAIL B2QOPEN B1SEL B2QCLD B2SEL LN1QOPEN LN1SEL LN1QCLD LN2SEL LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR LN2QCLD SYNFAIL UB1OK UOKSYN UB1FF UDIFFSYN UB2OK FRDIFSYN UB2FF FRDIFFOK ULN1OK FRDERIVA ULN1FF UOKSC ULN2OK UDIFFSC ULN2FF FRDIFFA STARTSYN PHDIFFA TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM TSTSC PHDIFFM TSTENERG INADVCLS AENMODE UDIFFME MENMODE FRDIFFME PHDIFFME UBUS ULINE MODEAEN MODEMEN
UREF2
bus1Voltage
UREF1
bus2Voltage
Fuse VT
QA1 QB61 QB9 QB62 QB9
UREF3
line1Voltage
Fuse VT
UL1/UL2/UL3
line2Voltage Fuse VT 1/2/3
Line 1
Line 2
Tie CB
IEC10000098 V1 EN
Figure 228:
Voltage connections in a 1 breaker arrangement for the line 2 IED
The example shows the use of the Synchrocheck function for the Tie Circuit breaker in both Line IEDs. This depends on the arrangement of Auto-reclose and manual closing and might often not be required. Connecting and configuring is done according to figure 227 and figure 228. The connections are similar in both IEDs, apart from the line voltages and the bus voltages, which are crossed. This means that the three-phase line voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3 for line 1and F3 for line 2 in the line 1 IED are crossed in the line 2 IED. Also, the bus voltage connections to both the IEDs are crossed. The physical analog connections of voltages and the connection to the SESRSYN and SESRSYN function blocks must be carefully checked in PCM600. In both IEDs
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
the connections and configurations must abide by the following rules: Normally apparatus position is connected with contacts showing both open (b-type) and closed positions (a-type). Bus CB: B1QOPEN/CLD = Position of the tie CB and disconnectors B2QOEN/CLD = Position of opposite bus CB and disconnectors LN1QOPEN/CLD = Position of own line disconnector LN2QOPEN/CLD = Position of opposite line disconnector UB1OK/FF = Supervision of bus VT fuse connected to own bus CB UB2OK/FF = Supervision of bus VT fuse connected to opposite bus CB ULN1OK/FF = Supervision of line VT fuse connected to own line ULN2OK/FF = Supervision of line VT fuse connected to opposite line Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 Bus CB
Tie CB: B1QOPEN/CLD = Position of own bus CB and disconnectors B2QOPEN/CLD = Position of opposite bus CB and disconnectors LN1QOPEN/CLD = Position of own line disconnector LN2QOPEN/CLD = Position of opposite line disconnector UB1OK/FF = Supervision of bus VT fuse connected to own bus CB UB2OK/FF = Supervision of bus VT fuse connected to opposite bus CB ULN1OK/FF = Supervision of line VT fuse connected to own line ULN2OK/FF = Supervision of line VT fuse connected to opposite line CBConfig = Tie CB
If three SESRSYN functions are provided in the same IED, or if preferred for other reason, the system can be set-up without mirroring and second bus CB set to 1 Bus alternatively CB. Above standard is so because normally two SESRSYN functions with the same configuration and settings are provided in a station for each bay.
3.12.1.3
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check function SESRSYN are set via the local HMI or PCM600. Operation The operation mode can be set to On/Off. The setting Off disables the whole function. SelPhaseBus1 and SelPhaseBus2 Configuration parameters for selection of measuring phase of the voltage for busbar 1 and 2 respectively, which can be single-phase (phase-neutral) or twophase (phase-phase) voltage or positive sequence.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2 Configuration parameters for selection of measuring phase of the voltage for line 1 and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phasephase) voltage or positive sequence. CBConfig This configuration setting is used to define type of voltage selection. Type of voltage selection can be selected as: no voltage selection single circuit breaker with double bus 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 1 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 2 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to line 1 and 2 (tie breaker)
UBaseBus and UBaseLine These are the configuration settings for the base voltages. PhaseShift This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line transformer between the two measurement points for bus voltage and line voltage. The set value is added to the measured line phase angle. The bus voltage is reference voltage. URatio The URatio is defined as URatio = bus voltage/line voltage. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus voltage. OperationSynch The setting Off disables the Synchronizing function. With the setting On, the function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions. UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage. The threshold voltages UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch have to be set smaller than the value where the network is expected to be synchronized. A typical value is 80 % of the rated voltage. UDiffSynch Setting of the voltage difference between the line voltage and the bus voltage. The difference is set depending on the network configuration and expected voltages in the two networks running asynchronous. A normal setting is 0.10-0.15 p.u. FreqDiffMax
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The setting FreqDiffMax is the maximum slip frequency at which synchronizing is accepted. 1/FreqDiffMax shows the time for the vector to move 360 degrees, one turn on the synchronoscope and is called the Beat time A typical value for the FreqDiffMax is 200-250 mHz which gives beat times on 4-5 seconds. Higher values should be avoided as the two networks normally are regulated to nominal frequency independent of each other so the frequency difference shall be small. FreqDiffMin The setting FreqDiffMin is the minimum frequency difference where the system are defined to be asynchronous. For frequency difference lower than this value the systems are considered to be in parallel. A typical value for the FreqDiffMin is 10 mHz. Generally, the value should be low if both, synchronizing and synchrocheck function is provided as it is better to let synchronizing function close as it will close at the exact right instance if the networks run with a frequency difference. Note! The FreqDiffMin shall be set to the same value as FreqDiffM respective FreqDiffA for SESRSYN dependent of whether the functions are used for manual operation, autoreclosing or both. FreqRateChange The maximum allowed rate of change for the frequency. tBreaker The tBreaker shall be set to match the closing time for the circuit breaker and should also include the possible auxiliary relays in the closing circuit. It is important to check that no slow logic components are used in the configuration of the IED as there then can be big variations in closing time due to those components. Typical setting is 80-150 ms depending on the breaker closing time. tClosePulse Setting for the duration of the breaker close pulse. tMinSynch The tMinSynch is set to limit the minimum time at which synchronizing closing attempt is given. The setting will not give a closing should a condition fulfilled occur within this time from the synchronizing function is started. Typical setting is 200 ms. tMaxSynch The tMaxSynch is set to reset the operation of the synchronizing function if the operation does not take place within this time. The setting must allow for the setting of FreqDiffMin, which will decide how long it will take maximum to reach phase equality. At a setting of 10ms the beat time is 100 seconds and the setting would thus need to be at least tMinSynch plus 100 seconds. If the network
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
frequencies are expected to be outside the limits from start a margin needs to be added. Typical setting 600 seconds. OperationSC The OperationSC setting Off disables the synchrocheck function and sets the outputs AUTOSYOK, MANSYOK, TSTAUTSY and TSTMANSY to low. With the setting On, the function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions. UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage. The threshold voltages UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC have to be set lower than the value at which the breaker is expected to be closed with synchronism check. A typical value may be 80% of the base voltages. UDiffSC Setting for voltage difference between line and bus. FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA The frequency difference level settings, FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA, shall be chosen depending on the condition in the network. At steady conditions a low frequency difference setting is needed, where the FreqDiffM setting is used. Four autoreclosing a bigger frequency difference setting is preferable, where the FreqDiffA setting is used. A typical value for the FreqDiffM can 10 mHz and a typical value for the FreqDiffA can be 100-200 mHz. PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA The phase angle difference level settings, PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA, shall also be chosen depending on conditions in the network. The phase angle setting must be chosen to allow closing under maximum load condition. A typical maximum value in heavy loaded networks can be 45 degrees whereas in most networks the maximum occurring angle is below 25 degrees. tSCM and tSCA The purpose of the timer delay settings, tSCM and tSCA, is to ensure that the synchrocheck conditions remains constant and that the situation is not due to a temporary interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit breaker closing is thus not permitted until the synchrocheck situation has remained constant throughout the set delay setting time. Under stable conditions a longer operation time delay setting is needed, where the tSCM setting is used. During auto-reclosing a shorter operation time delay setting is preferable, where the tSCA setting is used. A typical value for the tSCM may be 1 second and a typical value for the tSCA may be 0.1 second.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker. The settings for each of them are: Off, the energizing function is disabled. DLLB, Dead Line Live Bus, the line voltage is below set value of ULowLineEnerg and the bus voltage is above set value of UHighBusEnerg. DBLL, Dead Bus Live Line, the bus voltage is below set value of ULowBusEnerg and the line voltage is above set value of UHighLineEnerg. Both, energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.
UHighBusEnerg and UHighLineEnerg The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage. The threshold voltages UHighBusEnerg and UHighLineEnerg, have to be set lower than the value at which the network is considered to be energized. A typical value may be 80% of the base voltages. ULowBusEnerg and ULowLineEnerg In the same way, the threshold voltages ULowBusEnerg and ULowLineEnerg, have to be set greater than the value where the network is considered not to be energized. A typical value may be 80% of the base voltages. Note that a disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instance, induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via the extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as 30% or more of the base line voltage. Because the setting ranges of the threshold voltages UHighBusEnerg/ UHighLineEnerg and ULowBusEnerg/ULowLineEnerg partly overlap each other, the setting conditions may be such that the setting of the non-energized threshold value is higher than that of the energized threshold value. The parameters should therefore be set carefully by the user to avoid the setting conditions mentioned above. tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg The purpose of the timer delay settings, tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg, is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized and that the condition is not due to a temporary interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit breaker closing is thus not permitted until the energizing condition has remained constant throughout the set delay setting time. ManEnergDBDL If the parameter is set to On, manual closing is enabled when both line voltage and bus voltage are below ULowLineEnerg and ULowBusEnerg respectively and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both. UMaxEnerg
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
This setting is used to block the closing when the voltage on the live side is above the set value of UMaxEnerg.
3.12.1.4
Table 149:
Name Operation CBConfig
Setting parameters
SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On No voltage sel. Double bus 1 1/2 bus CB 1 1/2 bus alt. CB Tie CB 0.001 - 9999.999 0.001 - 9999.999 -180 - 180 0.040 - 25.000 Off On 50.0 - 120.0 50.0 - 120.0 0.02 - 0.50 0.003 - 0.250 0.050 - 0.250 0.000 - 0.500 0.000 - 60.000 0.050 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 50.0 - 120.0 50.0 - 120.0 0.02 - 0.50 0.003 - 1.000 Unit Step Default Off No voltage sel. Description Operation Off / On Select CB configuration
UBaseBus UBaseLine PhaseShift URatio OperationSynch UHighBusSynch UHighLineSynch UDiffSynch FreqDiffMin FreqDiffMax FreqRateChange tBreaker tClosePulse tMaxSynch tMinSynch OperationSC UHighBusSC UHighLineSC UDiffSC FreqDiffA
kV kV Deg %UBB %UBL pu Hz Hz Hz/s s s s s %UBB %UBL pu Hz
0.001 0.001 5 0.001 1.0 1.0 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.001 1.0 1.0 0.01 0.001
400.000 400.000 0 1.000 Off 80.0 80.0 0.10 0.010 0.200 0.300 0.080 0.200 600.00 2.000 On 80.0 80.0 0.15 0.010
Base value for busbar voltage settings Base value for line voltage settings Phase shift Voltage ratio Operation for synchronizing function Off/ On Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of UBaseBus Voltage high limit line for synchronizing in % of UBaseLine Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in p.u Minimum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum allowed frequency rate of change Closing time of the breaker Breaker closing pulse duration Resets synch if no close has been made before set time Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions Operation for synchronism check function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of UBaseBus Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of UBaseLine Voltage difference limit in p.u Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto

Name FreqDiffM PhaseDiffA PhaseDiffM tSCA tSCM AutoEnerg Values (Range) 0.003 - 1.000 5.0 - 90.0 5.0 - 90.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off DLLB DBLL Both Off DLLB DBLL Both Off On 50.0 - 120.0 50.0 - 120.0 10.0 - 80.0 10.0 - 80.0 50.0 - 180.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Hz Deg Deg s s Step 0.001 1.0 1.0 0.001 0.001 Default 0.010 25.0 25.0 0.100 0.100 DBLL Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto Time delay output for synchrocheck Manual Automatic energizing check mode
ManEnerg
Both
Manual energizing check mode
ManEnergDBDL UHighBusEnerg UHighLineEnerg ULowBusEnerg ULowLineEnerg UMaxEnerg tAutoEnerg tManEnerg
%UBB %UBL %UBB %UBL %UB s s
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.001 0.001
Off 80.0 80.0 40.0 40.0 115.0 0.100 0.100
Manual dead bus, dead line energizing Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in % of UBaseBus Voltage high limit line for energizing check in % of UBaseLine Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in % of UBaseBus Voltage low limit line for energizing check in % of UBaseLine Maximum voltage for energizing in % of UBase, Line and/or Bus Time delay for automatic energizing check Time delay for manual energizing check
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 150:
Name SelPhaseBus1
SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Phase L1 for busbar1 Phase L2 for busbar1 Phase L3 for busbar1 Phase L1L2 for busbar1 Phase L2L3 for busbar1 Phase L3L1 for busbar1 Pos. sequence for busbar1 Phase L1 for busbar2 Phase L2 for busbar2 Phase L3 for busbar2 Phase L1L2 for busbar2 Phase L2L3 for busbar2 Phase L3L1 for busbar2 Pos. sequence for busbar2 Phase L1 for line1 Phase L2 for line1 Phase L3 for line1 Phase L1L2 for line1 Phase L2L3 for line1 Phase L3L1 for line1 Pos. sequence for line1 Phase L1 for line2 Phase L2 for line2 Phase L3 for line2 Phase L1L2 for line2 Phase L2L3 for line2 Phase L3L1 for line2 Pos. sequence for line2 Unit Step Default Phase L1 for busbar1 Description Select phase for busbar1
SelPhaseBus2
Phase L1 for busbar2
Select phase for busbar2
SelPhaseLine1
Phase L1 for line1
Select phase for line1
SelPhaseLine2
Phase L1 for line2
Select phase for line2
3.12.2
Apparatus control APC

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervising of circuit breakers, disconnectors, and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings. Figure 229 gives an overview from what places the apparatus control function receive commands. Commands to an apparatus can be initiated from the Control Centre (CC), the station HMI or the local HMI on the IED front.
cc
Station HMI
GW
Station bus Local HMI IED Apparatus Control I/O IED Apparatus Control I/O Local HMI IED Apparatus Control I/O Local HMI
breakers disconnectors earthing switches

IEC08000227.vsd
IEC08000227 V1 EN
Figure 229:
Overview of the apparatus control functions
Features in the apparatus control function: Operation of primary apparatuses Select-Execute principle to give high security Selection and reservation function to prevent simultaneous operation Selection and supervision of operator place Command supervision Block/deblock of operation Block/deblock of updating of position indications Substitution of position indications Overriding of interlocking functions Overriding of synchrocheck
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Pole discordance supervision Operation counter Suppression of Mid position
The apparatus control function is realized by means of a number of function blocks designated: Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR Circuit switch SXSWI Bay control QCBAY Position evaluation POS_EVAL Bay reserve QCRSV Reservation input RESIN Local remote LOCREM Local remote control LOCREMCTRL
The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The signal flow between these function blocks appears in figure 230. To realize the reservation function, the function blocks Reservation input (RESIN) and Bay reserve (QCRSV) also are included in the apparatus control function. The application description for all these functions can be found below. The function SCILO in the figure below is the logical node for interlocking. Control operation can be performed from the local HMI. If the administrator has defined users with the UM tool, then the local/remote switch is under authority control. If not, the default (factory) user is the SuperUser that can perform control operations from the local HMI without LogOn. The default position of the local/ remote switch is on remote.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC 61850
QCBAY
SCSWI
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
-QB1 -QA1
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
-QB9
SCILO
en05000116.vsd
IEC05000116 V1 EN
Figure 230:
Signal flow between apparatus control function blocks
Bay control (QCBAY)
The Bay control (QCBAY) is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The function gives permission to operate from two types of locations either from Remote (for example, control centre or station HMI) or from Local (local HMI on the IED) or from all (Local and Remote). The Local/Remote switch position can also be set to Off, which means no operator place selected that is, operation is not possible neither from local nor from remote. QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay. There are two different blocking alternatives: Blocking of update of positions Blocking of commands
The function does not have a corresponding functionality defined in the IEC 61850 standard, which means that this function is included as a vendor specific logical node.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Switch controller (SCSWI)
SCSWI may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices. After the selection of an apparatus and before the execution, the switch controller performs the following checks and actions: A request initiates to reserve other bays to prevent simultaneous operation. Actual position inputs for interlocking information are read and evaluated if the operation is permitted. The synchrocheck/synchronizing conditions are read and checked, and performs operation upon positive response. The blocking conditions are evaluated The position indications are evaluated according to given command and its requested direction (open or closed).
The command sequence is supervised regarding the time between: Select and execute. Select and until the reservation is granted. Execute and the final end position of the apparatus. Execute and valid close conditions from the synchrocheck.
At error the command sequence is cancelled. In the case when there are three one-phase switches (SXCBR) connected to the switch controller function, the switch controller will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting three-phase position. In case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than a settable time; an error signal will be given. The switch controller is not dependent on the type of switching device SXCBR or SXSWI. The switch controller represents the content of the SCSWI logical node (according to IEC 61850) with mandatory functionality.
Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI)
The Switch is a function used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal conditions, or to interrupt the circuit under fault, or emergency conditions. The intention with this function is to represent the lowest level of a powerswitching device with or without short circuit breaking capability, for example, circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches etc. The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to the primary apparatus via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position. The Switch has this functionality:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Local/Remote switch intended for the switchyard Block/deblock for open/close command respectively Update block/deblock of position indication Substitution of position indication Supervision timer that the primary device starts moving after a command Supervision of allowed time for intermediate position Definition of pulse duration for open/close command respectively
The realization of this function is performed with SXCBR representing a circuit breaker and with SXSWI representing a circuit switch that is, a disconnector or an earthing switch. The Circuit breaker (SXCBR) can be realized either as three one-phase switches or as one three-phase switch. The content of this function is represented by the IEC 61850 definitions for the logical nodes Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) with mandatory functionality.
Reservation function (QCRSV/RESIN)
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete substation. For interlocking evaluation in a substation, the position information from switching devices, such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches can be required from the same bay or from several other bays. When information is needed from other bays, it is exchanged over the serial station bus between the distributed IEDs. The problem that arises, even at a high speed of communication, is a space of time during which the information about the position of the switching devices are uncertain. The interlocking function uses this information for evaluation, which means that also the interlocking conditions will be uncertain. To ensure that the interlocking information is correct at the time of operation, a unique reservation method is available in the IEDs. With this reservation method the operation will temporarily be blocked for all switching devices in other bays, which switching states are used for evaluation of permission to operate. Actual position indications from these bays are then transferred over the serial bus for evaluation in the IED. After the evaluation the operation can be executed with high security. This functionality is realized over the station bus by means of the function blocks QCRSV and RESIN. The application principle appears from figure 231. The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. It sends out either the reservation request to other bays or the acknowledgement if the bay has received a request from another bay. The other function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
60 instances are available). The received signals are either the request for reservation from another bay or the acknowledgment from each bay respectively, which have received a request from this bay. Also the information of valid transmission over the station bus must be received.
IED IED
SCSWI RES_GRT RES_RQ
RESIN EXCH_IN EXCH_OUT ... From other SCSWI in the bay
QCRSV RES_RQ1 . . RES_RQ8 RES_GRT1 . . RES_GRT8 RES_DATA 2 To other SCSWI in the bay
...
RESIN EXCH_IN 3 ... Station bus EXCH_OUT
en05000117.vsd
IEC05000117 V2 EN
Figure 231:
Application principles for reservation over the station bus
The reservation can also be realized with external wiring according to the application example in figure 232. This solution is realized with external auxiliary relays and extra binary inputs and outputs in each IED, but without use of function blocks QCRSV and RESIN.
IED IED
SCSWI RES_EXT SELECTED
Other SCSWI in the bay BI BO BI
OR
BO
+
en05000118.vsd
IEC05000118 V2 EN
Figure 232:
Application principles for reservation with external wiring
The solution in figure 232 can also be realized over the station bus according to the application example in figure 233. The solutions in figure 232 and figure 233 do
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
not have the same high security compared to the solution in figure 231, but have instead a higher availability. This because no acknowledgment is required.
IED IED
IntlReceive
RESGRANT
SCSWI
RES_EXT SELECTED
. . .
. . .
IntlReceive
RESGRANT
Other SCWI in the bay
OR
SPGGIO
IN
... Station bus
en05000178.vsd
IEC05000178 V2 EN
Figure 233:
Application principle for an alternative reservation solution
3.12.2.2
Interaction between modules

A typical bay with apparatus control function consists of a combination of logical nodes or functions that are described here: The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes all operations for one apparatus and performs the actual switching and is more or less the interface to the drive of one apparatus. It includes the position handling as well as the control of the position. The Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is the process interface to the circuit breaker for the apparatus control function. The Circuit switch (SXSWI) is the process interface to the disconnector or the earthing switch for the apparatus control function. The Bay control (QCBAY) fulfils the bay-level functions for the apparatuses, such as operator place selection and blockings for the complete bay. The Reservation (QCRSV) deals with the reservation function. The Four step residual overcurrent protection (EF4PTOC) trips the breaker in case of Distance protection zones (ZMQPDIS). The Protection trip logic (SMPPTRC) connects the "trip" outputs of one or more protection functions to a common "trip" to be transmitted to SXCBR. The Autorecloser (SMBRREC) consists of the facilities to automatically close a tripped breaker with respect to a number of configurable conditions. The logical node Interlocking (SCILO) provides the information to SCSWI whether it is permitted to operate due to the switchyard topology. The interlocking conditions are evaluated with separate logic and connected to SCILO . The Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN) calculates and compares the voltage phasor difference from both sides of an
Application manual
556
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
open breaker with predefined switching conditions (synchrocheck). Also the case that one side is dead (energizing-check) is included. The logical node Generic Automatic Process Control, GAPC, is an automatic function that reduces the interaction between the operator and the system. With one command, the operator can start a sequence that will end with a connection of a process object (for example a line) to one of the possible busbars.
The overview of the interaction between these functions is shown in figure 234 below.
ZMQPDIS (Distance) SMPPTRC (Trip logic) SECRSYN (Synchrocheck) Trip Synchrocheck OK QCBAY (Bay control) Operator place selection Res. req. QCRSV (Reservation) Res. granted Res. req. Close CB SCSWI (Switching control)
Start AR
Open cmd Close cmd SXCBR (Circuit breaker)
Enable open
(Autoreclosure)
Enable close
SMBRREC
Position I/O
SCILO (Interlocking)
Pos. from other bays
Interlocking function block (Not a LN)
Open rel. Close rel. Open rel. Close rel. Position
SCILO (Interlocking) Enable open Enable close
GAPC (Generic Automatic Process Control)
Res. granted Open/Close Open/Close SCSWI (Switching control)
Open cmd Close cmd SXSWI (Disconnector)
Position
I/O
en05000120.vsd
IEC05000120 V1 EN
Figure 234:
Example overview of the interactions between functions in a typical bay

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The setting parameters for the apparatus control function are set via the local HMI or PCM600. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set to No priority, all originators from local and remote are accepted without any priority.
Bay control (QCBAY)
Switch controller (SCSWI)
The parameter CtlModel specifies the type of control model according to IEC 61850. For normal control of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches the control model is set to SBO Enh (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security. When the operation shall be performed in one step, the model direct control with normal security is used. At control with enhanced security there is an additional supervision of the status value by the control object, which means that each command sequence must be terminated by a termination command. The parameter PosDependent gives permission to operate depending on the position indication, that is, at Always permitted it is always permitted to operate independent of the value of the position. At Not perm at 00/11 it is not permitted to operate if the position is in bad or intermediate state. tSelect is the maximum time between the select and the execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate. When the time has expired, the selected output signal is set to false and a cause-code is given over IEC 61850. The time parameter tResResponse is the allowed time from reservation request to the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function. When the time has expired, the control function is reset. tSynchrocheck is the allowed time for the synchrocheck function to fulfill the close conditions. When the time has expired, the control function is reset. The timer tSynchronizing supervises that the signal synchronizing in progress is obtained in SCSWI after start of the synchronizing function. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled. When the time has expired, the control function is reset. If no synchronizing function is included, the time is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. tExecutionFB is the maximum time between the execute command signal and the command termination. When the time has expired, the control function is reset. tPoleDiscord is the allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles at control of three one-phase breakers. At discrepancy an output signal is activated to be used for trip or alarm.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI)
tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command execution. When the time has expired, the switch function is reset. During the tIntermediate time the position indication is allowed to be in an intermediate (00) state. When the time has expired, the switch function is reset. The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed during this time period when the position changes from open to close or vice-versa. If the parameter AdaptivePulse is set to Adaptive the command output pulse resets when a new correct end position is reached. If the parameter is set to Not adaptive the command output pulse remains active until the timer tOpenPulsetClosePulse has elapsed. tOpenPulse is the output pulse length for an open command. The default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a disconnector (SXSWI). tClosePulse is the output pulse length for a close command. The default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a disconnector (SXSWI). SuppressMidPos when On will suppress the mid-position during the time tIntermediate. The timer tCancelRes defines the supervision time for canceling the reservation, when this cannot be done by requesting bay due to for example communication failure. When the parameter ParamRequestx (x=1-8) is set to Only own bay res. individually for each apparatus (x) in the bay, only the own bay is reserved, that is, the output for reservation request of other bays (RES_BAYS) will not be activated at selection of apparatus x. With the FutureUse parameter set to Bay future use the function can handle bays not yet installed in the SA system.
Bay Reserve (QCRSV)
Reservation input (RESIN)
3.12.2.4
Table 151:
Name AllPSTOValid
Setting parameters
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Priority No priority Unit Step Default Priority Description Priority of originators
Table 152:
Name ControlMode
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Internal LR-switch External LR-switch Unit Step Default Internal LR-switch Description Control mode for internal/external LRswitch
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 153:
Name CtlModel PosDependent tSelect tResResponse tSynchrocheck tSynchronizing tExecutionFB tPoleDiscord
SCSWI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Dir Norm SBO Enh Always permitted Not perm at 00/11 0.00 - 600.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 600.00 0.00 - 600.00 0.00 - 600.00 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s s s s s Step 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 Default SBO Enh Always permitted 30.00 5.000 10.00 0.00 30.00 2.000 Description Specifies control model type Permission to operate depending on the position Maximum time between select and execute signals Allowed time from reservation request to reservation granted Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil close conditions Supervision time to get the signal synchronizing in progress Maximum time from command execution to termination Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles
Table 154:
Name tStartMove tIntermediate AdaptivePulse tOpenPulse tClosePulse SuppressMidPos
SXCBR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Unit s s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.100 0.150 Not adaptive 0.200 0.200 On Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position Output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command Mid-position is suppressed during the time tIntermediate
Table 155:
Name tStartMove tIntermediate AdaptivePulse tOpenPulse tClosePulse SwitchType
SXSWI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Load Break Disconnector Earthing Switch HS Earthing Switch Off On Unit s s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 3.000 15.000 Not adaptive 0.200 0.200 Disconnector Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position Output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector, 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
SuppressMidPos
On
Mid-position is suppressed during the time tIntermediate
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 156:
Name tCancelRes ParamRequest1 ParamRequest2 ParamRequest3 ParamRequest4 ParamRequest5 ParamRequest6 ParamRequest7 ParamRequest8
QCRSV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Unit s Step 0.001 Default 10.000 Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Only own bay res. Description Supervision time for canceling the reservation Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 1 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 2 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 3 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 4 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 5 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 6 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 7 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 8
Table 157:
Name FutureUse
RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Bay in use Bay future use Unit Step Default Bay in use Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
Table 158:
Name FutureUse
RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Bay in use Bay future use Unit Step Default Bay in use Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
3.12.3
Interlocking
The main purpose of switchgear interlocking is: To avoid the dangerous or damaging operation of switchgear To enforce restrictions on the operation of the substation for other reasons for example, load configuration. Examples of the latter are to limit the number of parallel transformers to a maximum of two or to ensure that energizing is always from one side, for example, the high voltage side of a transformer.
This section only deals with the first point, and only with restrictions caused by switching devices other than the one to be controlled. This means that switch interlock, because of device alarms, is not included in this section.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Disconnectors and earthing switches have a limited switching capacity. Disconnectors may therefore only operate: With basically zero current. The circuit is open on one side and has a small extension. The capacitive current is small (for example, < 5A) and power transformers with inrush current are not allowed. To connect or disconnect a parallel circuit carrying load current. The switching voltage across the open contacts is thus virtually zero, thanks to the parallel circuit (for example, < 1% of rated voltage). Paralleling of power transformers is not allowed.
Earthing switches are allowed to connect and disconnect earthing of isolated points. Due to capacitive or inductive coupling there may be some voltage (for example < 40% of rated voltage) before earthing and some current (for example < 100A) after earthing of a line. Circuit breakers are usually not interlocked. Closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in the same bay, and the bus-coupler opening is interlocked during a busbar transfer. The positions of all switching devices in a bay and from some other bays determine the conditions for operational interlocking. Conditions from other stations are usually not available. Therefore, a line earthing switch is usually not fully interlocked. The operator must be convinced that the line is not energized from the other side before closing the earthing switch. As an option, a voltage indication can be used for interlocking. Take care to avoid a dangerous enable condition at the loss of a VT secondary voltage, for example, because of a blown fuse. The switch positions used by the operational interlocking logic are obtained from auxiliary contacts or position sensors. For each end position (open or closed) a true indication is needed - thus forming a double indication. The apparatus control function continuously checks its consistency. If neither condition is high (1 or TRUE), the switch may be in an intermediate position, for example, moving. This dynamic state may continue for some time, which in the case of disconnectors may be up to 10 seconds. Should both indications stay low for a longer period, the position indication will be interpreted as unknown. If both indications stay high, something is wrong, and the state is again treated as unknown. In both cases an alarm is sent to the operator. Indications from position sensors shall be self-checked and system faults indicated by a fault signal. In the interlocking logic, the signals are used to avoid dangerous enable or release conditions. When the switching state of a switching device cannot be determined operation is not permitted. For switches with an individual operation gear per phase, the evaluation must consider possible phase discrepancies. This is done with the aid of an ANDfunction for all three phases in each apparatus for both open and close indications. Phase discrepancies will result in an unknown double indication state.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Configuration guidelines
The following sections describe how the interlocking for a certain switchgear configuration can be realized in the IED by using standard interlocking modules and their interconnections. They also describe the configuration settings. The inputs for delivery specific conditions (Qx_EXy) are set to 1=TRUE if they are not used, except in the following cases: QB9_EX2 and QB9_EX4 in modules BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B QA1_EX3 in module AB_TRAFO
3.12.3.1
when they are set to 0=FALSE.
3.12.3.2
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE Application
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 235. The function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB9 QC9 QB7
en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN
Figure 235:
Switchyard layout ABC_LINE
The signals from other bays connected to the module ABC_LINE are described below.
Signals from bypass busbar

To derive the signals:

Signal BB7_D_OP VP_BB7_D EXDU_BPB
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
All line disconnectors on bypass WA7 except in the own bay are open. The switch status of disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7 are valid. No transmission error from any bay containing disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE) except that of the own bay are needed:
Signal QB7OPTR VPQB7TR EXDU_BPB Q7 is open The switch status for QB7 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For bay n, these conditions are valid:

QB7OPTR (bay 1) QB7OPTR (bay 2) . . . . . . QB7OPTR (bay n-1) VPQB7TR (bay 1) VPQB7TR (bay 2) . . . . . . VPQB7TR (bay n-1) EXDU_BPB (bay 1) EXDU_BPB (bay 2) . . . . . . EXDU_BPB (bay n-1)
IEC04000477 V1 EN
&
BB7_D_OP
&
VP_BB7_D
&
EXDU_BPB
en04000477.vsd
Figure 236:
Signals from bypass busbar in line bay n
Signals from bus-coupler
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, the busbarbusbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within the other bus section.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1 (WA7)C
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2 C
ABC_LINE
IEC04000479 V1 EN
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC ABC_LINE
ABC_BC
en04000479.vsd
Figure 237:
Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

Signal BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_BC A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA1 and WA7. A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1and WA7. No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA2 and WA7. A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. The switch status of BC_17 is valid. The switch status of BC_27 is valid. No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).
These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR EXDU_BC A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and WA7. A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1 and WA7. No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA2 and WA7. A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA2 and WA7. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. The switch status of BC_17 is valid. The switch status of BC_27 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR EXDU_DC The bus-section disconnector is open. The bus-section disconnector is closed. The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bussection coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR EXDU_BS No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2. A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus-sections 1 and 2. The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For a line bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
BC12CLTR (sect.1) DCCLTR (A1A2) DCCLTR (B1B2) BC12CLTR (sect.2) VPBC12TR (sect.1) VPDCTR (A1A2) VPDCTR (B1B2) VPBC12TR (sect.2) BC17OPTR (sect.1) DCOPTR (A1A2) BC17OPTR (sect.2) BC17CLTR (sect.1) DCCLTR (A1A2) BC17CLTR (sect.2) VPBC17TR (sect.1) VPDCTR (A1A2) VPBC17TR (sect.2) & >1 >1 & & >1
BC_12_CL
&
VP_BC_12
BC_17_OP
BC_17_CL
&
VP_BC_17
BC27OPTR (sect.1) DCOPTR (B1B2) BC27OPTR (sect.2) BC27CLTR (sect.1) DCCLTR (B1B2) BC27CLTR (sect.2) VPBC27TR (sect.1) VPDCTR (B1B2) VPBC27TR (sect.2) EXDU_BC (sect.1) EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_DC (B1B2) EXDU_BC (sect.2) & >1 >1 &
BC_27_OP
BC_27_CL
&
VP_BC_27
&
EXDU_BC
en04000480.vsd
IEC04000480 V1 EN
Figure 238:
Signals to a line bay in section 1 from the bus-coupler bays in each section
For a line bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.
Configuration setting
If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no QB7 disconnector, then the interlocking for QB7 is not used. The states for QB7, QC71, BB7_D, BC_17, BC_27 are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
QB7_OP = 1 QB7_CL = 0 QC71_OP = 1 QC71_CL = 0 BB7_D_OP = 1 BC_17_OP = 1 BC_17_CL = 0 BC_27_OP = 1 BC_27_CL = 0 EXDU_BPB = 1 VP_BB7_D = 1 VP_BC_17 = 1 VP_BC_27 = 1
If there is no second busbar WA2 and therefore no QB2 disconnector, then the interlocking for QB2 is not used. The state for QB2, QC21, BC_12, BC_27 are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB2_OP = 1 QB2_CL = 0 QC21_OP = 1 QC21_CL = 0 BC_12_CL = 0 BC_27_OP = 1 BC_27_CL = 0 VP_BC_12 = 1
3.12.3.3
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC Application
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 239. The function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QB20 QB7
QC2
en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN
Figure 239:
Switchyard layout ABC_BC
Configuration
The signals from the other bays connected to the bus-coupler module ABC_BC are described below.
Signals from all feeders

Signal BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-coupler. The switch status is valid for all apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer. No transmission error from any bay connected to the WA1/WA2 busbars.
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bus-coupler bay are needed:
Signal QQB12OPTR VPQB12TR EXDU_12 QB1 or QB2 or both are open. The switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For bus-coupler bay n, these conditions are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
QB12OPTR (bay 1) QB12OPTR (bay 2) . . . . . . QB12OPTR (bay n-1) VPQB12TR (bay 1) VPQB12TR (bay 2) . . . . . . VPQB12TR (bay n-1) EXDU_12 (bay 1) EXDU_12 (bay 2) . . . . . . EXDU_12 (bay n-1)
IEC04000481 V1 EN
&
BBTR_OP
&
VP_BBTR
&
EXDU_12
en04000481.vsd
Figure 240:
Signals from any bays in bus-coupler bay n
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals BBTR are connected in parallel - if both bus-section disconnectors are closed. So for the basic project-specific logic for BBTR above, add this logic:
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1 (WA7)C Section 1 Section 2 A2 B2 C
ABC_LINE
IEC04000482 V1 EN
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC ABC_LINE
ABC_BC AB_TRAFO
en04000482.vsd
Figure 241:
The following signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bussection disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal DCOPTR VPDCTR EXDU_DC The bus-section disconnector is open. The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bussection coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC), have to be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal S1S2OPTR VPS1S2TR EXDU_BS No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2. The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

BBTR_OP (sect.1) DCOPTR (A1A2) DCOPTR (B1B2) BBTR_OP (sect.2) VP_BBTR (sect.1) VPDCTR (A1A2) VPDCTR (B1B2) VP_BBTR (sect.2) EXDU_12 (sect.1) EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_DC (B1B2) EXDU_12 (sect.2)
IEC04000483 V1 EN
BBTR_OP >1 &
&
VP_BBTR
&
EXDU_12
en04000483.vsd
Figure 242:
Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from any bays in each section
For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals BC_12 from the busbar coupler of the other busbar section must be transmitted to the own busbar coupler if both disconnectors are closed.
ABC_BC
IEC04000484 V1 EN
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_BC
en04000484.vsd
Figure 243:

Signal BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_BC
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Another bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).
These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bay, are needed:
Signal BC12CLTR VPBC12TR EXDU_BC A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal DCCLTR VPDCTR EXDU_DC The bus-section disconnector is closed. The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bussection coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC), must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR EXDU_BS A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus sections 1 and 2. The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid. No transmission error from the bay containing the above information.
For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
DCCLTR (A1A2) DCCLTR (B1B2) BC12CLTR (sect.2) VPDCTR (A1A2) VPDCTR (B1B2) VPBC12TR (sect.2) EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_DC (B1B2) EXDU_BC (sect.2)
IEC04000485 V1 EN
&
BC_12_CL
&
VP_BC_12
&
EXDU_BC
en04000485.vsd
Figure 244:
Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from a bus-coupler bay in another section
For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.
If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no QB2 and QB7 disconnectors, then the interlocking for QB2 and QB7 is not used. The states for QB2, QB7, QC71 are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB2_OP = 1 QB2_CL = 0 QB7_OP = 1 QB7_CL = 0 QC71_OP = 1 QC71_CL = 0
If there is no second busbar B and therefore no QB2 and QB20 disconnectors, then the interlocking for QB2 and QB20 are not used. The states for QB2, QB20, QC21, BC_12, BBTR are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB2_OP = 1 QB2_CL = 0 QB20_OP = 1 QB20_CL = 0 QC21_OP = 1 QC21_CL = 0
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
BC_12_CL = 0 VP_BC_12 = 1 BBTR_OP = 1 VP_BBTR = 1
3.12.3.4
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO Application
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 245. The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 AB_TRAFO QC2
T QC3 QA2 QC4 QB3 QB4

QA2 and QC4 are not used in this interlocking
en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN
Figure 245:
Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO
The signals from other bays connected to the module AB_TRAFO are described below.
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the busbarbusbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within the other bus-section.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2 C
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) AB_TRAFO ABC_BC AB_TRAFO ABC_BC

en04000487.vsd
IEC04000487 V1 EN
Figure 246:
The project-specific logic for input signals concerning bus-coupler are the same as the specific logic for the line bay (ABC_LINE):
Signal BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_BC A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. No transmission error from bus-coupler bay (BC).
The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration Signals from bus-coupler.
If there are no second busbar B and therefore no QB2 disconnector, then the interlocking for QB2 is not used. The state for QB2, QC21, BC_12 are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB2_OP = 1 QB2QB2_CL = 0 QC21_OP = 1 QC21_CL = 0 BC_12_CL = 0 VP_BC_12 = 1
If there is no second busbar B at the other side of the transformer and therefore no QB4 disconnector, then the state for QB4 is set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows: QB4_OP = 1 QB4_CL = 0
3.12.3.5
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS

Signals from all feeders
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers into bus-sections and both circuit breakers are closed, the opening of the circuit breaker must be blocked if a bus-coupler connection exists between busbars on one bus-section side and if on the other bus-section side a busbar transfer is in progress:
ABC_LINE
IEC04000489 V1 EN
A1A2_BS ABC_BC B1B2_BS AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE
ABC_BC AB_TRAFO
en04000489.vsd
Figure 247:
Busbars divided by bus-section circuit breakers

Signal BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-section. The switch status of BBTR is valid. No transmission error from any bay connected to busbar 1(A) and 2(B).
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal QB12OPTR VPQB12TR EXDU_12 QB1 or QB2 or both are open. The switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal BC12OPTR VPBC12TR EXDU_BC No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and WA2. The switch status of BC_12 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from the bus-section circuit breaker bay (A1A2_BS, B1B2_BS) are needed.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Signal S1S2OPTR VPS1S2TR EXDU_BS No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2. The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
For a bus-section circuit breaker between A1 and A2 section busbars, these conditions are valid:
S1S2OPTR (B1B2) BC12OPTR (sect.1) QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... QB12OPTR (bay n/sect.2) S1S2OPTR (B1B2) BC12OPTR (sect.2) QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... QB12OPTR (bay n /sect.1) VPS1S2TR (B1B2) VPBC12TR (sect.1) VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1) VPBC12TR (sect.2) VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1) EXDU_BS (B1B2) EXDU_BC (sect.1) EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2) EXDU_BC (sect.2) EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.1) ... ... EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)
en04000490.vsd
IEC04000490 V1 EN
>1 & & BBTR_OP
>1 &
&
VP_BBTR
&
EXDU_12
Figure 248:
Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between sections A1 and A2
For a bus-section circuit breaker between B1 and B2 section busbars, these conditions are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
S1S2OPTR (A1A2) BC12OPTR (sect.1) QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... QB12OPTR (bay n/sect.2) S1S2OPTR (A1A2) BC12OPTR (sect.2) QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... QB12OPTR (bay n /sect.1) VPS1S2TR (A1A2) VPBC12TR (sect.1) VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.2) ... ... VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1) VPBC12TR (sect.2) VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1) EXDU_BS (A1A2) EXDU_BC (sect.1) EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.2) ... ... EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2) EXDU_BC (sect.2) EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.1) ... ... EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)
en04000491.vsd
IEC04000491 V1 EN
>1 & & BBTR_OP
>1 &
&
VP_BBTR
&
EXDU_12
Figure 249:
Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between sections B1 and B2
If there is no other busbar via the busbar loops that are possible, then either the interlocking for the QA1 open circuit breaker is not used or the state for BBTR is set to open. That is, no busbar transfer is in progress in this bus-section: BBTR_OP = 1 VP_BBTR = 1
3.12.3.6
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Application
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 250. A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1
QC2
A1A2_DC
IEC04000492 V1 EN
en04000492.vsd
Figure 250:
Switchyard layout A1A2_DC
The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_DC are described below.
Signals in single breaker arrangement
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1 (WA7)C Section 1 Section 2 A2 B2 A3 B3 C
ABC_LINE
IEC04000493 V1 EN
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE
ABC_BC AB_TRAFO
en04000493.vsd
Figure 251:

Signal S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open. All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open. The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid. The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid. No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR QB220OTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VQB220TR EXDU_BB QB1 is open. QB2 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE). QB2 and QB20 are open (ABC_BC). The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. The switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
If there is an additional bus-section disconnector, the signal from the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
If there is an additional bus-section circuit breaker rather than an additional bussection disconnector the signals from the bus-section, circuit-breaker bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR EXDU_BS QB1 is open. QB2 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the above information.
For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A1) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A1) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)
IEC04000494 V1 EN
&
S1DC_OP
&
VPS1_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000494.vsd
Figure 252:
Signals from any bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A2) DCOPTR (A2/A3) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A2) VPDCTR (A2/A3) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2) EXDU_DC (A2/A3)
IEC04000495 V1 EN
&
S2DC_OP
&
VPS2_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000495.vsd
Figure 253:
Signals from any bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector
For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B1) VPQB2TR (VQB220TR)(bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... VPQB2TR (VQB220TR)(bay n/sect.B1) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)
IEC04000496 V1 EN
&
S1DC_OP
&
VPS1_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000496.vsd
Figure 254:
Signals from any bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector
QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B2) DCOPTR (B2/B3) VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B2) VPDCTR (B2/B3) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2) EXDU_DC (B2/B3)
IEC04000497 V1 EN
&
S2DC_OP
&
VPS2_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000497.vsd
Figure 255:
Signals from any bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.
Signals in double-breaker arrangement
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS

en04000498.vsd
IEC04000498 V1 EN
Figure 256:

Signal S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open. All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open. The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid. The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid. No transmission error from double-breaker bay (DB) that contains the above information.
These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR EXDU_DB QB1 is open. QB2 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration Signals in single breaker arrangement. For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A1) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A1) EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A1) ... ... ... EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A1)
IEC04000499 V1 EN
&
S1DC_OP
&
VPS1_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000499.vsd
Figure 257:
Signals from double-breaker bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector
QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A2) VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A2) EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A2) ... ... ... EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A2)
IEC04000500 V1 EN
&
S2DC_OP
&
VPS2_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000500.vsd
Figure 258:
Signals from double-breaker bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
QB2OPTR (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (bay n/sect.B1) VPQB2TR (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... VPQB2TR (bay n/sect.B1) EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B1)
IEC04000501 V1 EN
&
S1DC_OP
&
VPS1_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000501.vsd
Figure 259:
Signals from double-breaker bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector
QB2OPTR (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (bay n/sect.B2) VPQB2TR (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... VPQB2TR (bay n/sect.B2) EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B2)
IEC04000502 V1 EN
&
S2DC_OP
&
VPS2_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000502.vsd
Figure 260:
Signals from double-breaker bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector
If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used.
Signals in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) BH_LINE BH_LINE

IEC04000503 V1 EN
BH_LINE BH_LINE
en04000503.vsd
Figure 261:
The project-specific logic is the same as for the logic for the double-breaker configuration.
Signal S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open. All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open. The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid. The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid. No transmission error from breaker and a half (BH) that contains the above information.
3.12.3.7
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES Application
The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 262.
QC
en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN
Figure 262:
Switchyard layout BB_ES
The signals from other bays connected to the module BB_ES are described below.
Signals in single breaker arrangement
The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bussection are open.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 1
Section 2
BB_ES ABC_LINE
IEC04000505 V1 EN
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC BB_ES AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE
A2 B2 C
en04000505.vsd
Figure 263:

Signal BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open. The switch status of all disconnector on this part of the busbar is valid. No transmission error from any bay containing the above information.
These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR QB220OTR QB7OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR EXDU_BB QB1 is open. QB2 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE) QB2 and QB20 are open (ABC_BC) QB7 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. The switch status of QB2and QB20 is valid. The switch status of QB7 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
If no bus-section disconnector exists, the signal DCOPTR, VPDCTR and EXDU_DC are set to 1 (TRUE).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bussection coupler bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR EXDU_BS QB1 is open. QB2 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the above information.
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:
IEC04000506 V1 EN
&
BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000506.vsd
Figure 264:
Signals from any bays in section A1 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC04000507 V1 EN
&
BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000507.vsd
Figure 265:
Signals from any bays in section A2 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:
QB2OPTR(QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B1) DCOPTR (B1/B2) VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) .(bay 1/sect.B1) .. ... ... VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B1) VPDCTR (B1/B2) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1) EXDU_DC (B1/B2)
IEC04000508 V1 EN
&
BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000508.vsd
Figure 266:
Signals from any bays in section B1 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
QB2OPTR(QB220OTR) (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... QB2OPTR(QB220OTR) (bay n/sect.B2) DCOPTR (B1/B2) VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B2) VPDCTR (B1/B2) EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2) EXDU_DC (B1/B2)
IEC04000509 V1 EN
&
BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000509.vsd
Figure 267:
Signals from any bays in section B2 to a busbar earthing switch in the same section
For a busbar earthing switch on bypass busbar C, these conditions are valid:
QB7OPTR (bay 1) ... ... ... QB7OPTR (bay n) VPQB7TR (bay 1) ... ... ... VPQB7TR (bay n) EXDU_BB (bay 1) ... ... ... EXDU_BB (bay n)
IEC04000510 V1 EN
&
BB_DC_OP
&
VP_BB_DC
&
EXDU_BB
en04000510.vsd
Figure 268:
Signals from bypass busbar to busbar earthing switch
Signals in double-breaker arrangement
The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus section are open.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2
BB_ES DB_BUS
IEC04000511 V1 EN
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) DB_BUS
BB_ES
en04000511.vsd
Figure 269:

Signal BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors of this part of the busbar are open. The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar are valid. No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal QB1OPTR QB2OPTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR EXDU_DB QB1 is open. QB2 is open. The switch status of QB1 is valid. The switch status of QB2 is valid. No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.
These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration described in section Signals in single breaker arrangement.
Signals in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement
The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bussection are open.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
(WA1)A1 (WA2)B1
Section 1
Section 2
A2 B2
BB_ES
IEC04000512 V1 EN
A1A2_DC(BS) B1B2_DC(BS) BH_LINE BH_LINE
BB_ES
en04000512.vsd
Figure 270:
The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double busbar configuration described in section Signals in single breaker arrangement.
Signal BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open. The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar is valid. No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.
3.12.3.8
Interlocking for double CB bay DB Application
The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter including DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B, DB_LINEfunctions are used for a line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 271.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 DB_BUS_A QC2 QB61 QB62 QC3 QB9 QC9 QC5 QA2 DB_BUS_B QB2 QC4
DB_LINE
en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN
Figure 271:
Switchyard layout double circuit breaker
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the busbars. For a double circuit-breaker bay, the modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B must be used.
For application without QB9 and QC9, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB9_OP = 1 QB9_CL = 0 QC9_OP = 1 QC9_CL = 0
If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting QB9 to open state, specify the state of the voltage supervision: QB9_OP = VOLT_OFF QB9_CL = VOLT_ON
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows: VOLT_OFF = 1 VOLT_ON = 0
3.12.3.9
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH Application
The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A, BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter according to figure 272.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB6 BH_LINE_A QC3 QB6 QC3 BH_LINE_B QA1 QC2 QB2 QC1
QB61
QA1
QB62
QB9 QC1 QC9 QC2
QB9 QC9
BH_CONN en04000513.vsd
IEC04000513 V1 EN
Figure 272:
Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard layout. For a 1 1/2 breaker arrangement, the modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B must be used.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

For application without QB9 and QC9, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE: QB9_OP = 1 QB9_CL = 0 QC9_OP = 1 QC9_CL = 0
If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting QB9 to open state, specify the state of the voltage supervision: QB9_OP = VOLT_OFF QB9_CL = VOLT_ON
If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows: VOLT_OFF = 1 VOLT_ON = 0
3.12.3.10
Table 159:
Name Operation
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV

GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation Off/On
3.12.4
Voltage control
Function description Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control IEC 61850 identification TR1ATCC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 90
U
IEC10000165 V1 EN
Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control
TR8ATCC
90
U
IEC10000166 V1 EN
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs
TCMYLTC TCLYLTC
84 84

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
When the load in a power network is increased the voltage will decrease and vice versa. To maintain the network voltage at a constant level, power transformers are usually equipped with an load tap changer. This alters the power transformer ratio in a number of predefined steps and in that way changes the voltage. Each step usually represents a change in voltage of approximately 0.5-1.7%. The voltage control function is intended for control of power transformers with a motor driven load tap changer. The function is designed to regulate the voltage at the secondary side of the power transformer. The control method is based on a stepby-step principle which means that a control pulse, one at a time, will be issued to the tap changer mechanism to move it one position up or down. The length of the control pulse can be set within a wide range to accommodate different types of tap changer mechanisms. The pulse is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given time, deviates from the set reference value by more than the preset deadband (degree of insensitivity). The voltage can be controlled at the point of voltage measurement, as well as a load point located out in the network. In the latter case, the load point voltage is calculated based on the measured load current and the known impedance from the voltage measuring point to the load point. The automatic voltage control can be either for a single transformer, or for parallel transformers. Parallel control of power transformers with an IED can be made in three alternative ways: With the master-follower method With the reverse reactance method With the circulating current method
Of these alternatives, the first and the last require communication between the function control blocks of the different transformers, whereas the middle alternative does not require any communication. The voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility to avoid simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a transformer within a parallel group, with a LV CB open, compensation for a possible capacitor bank on the LV side bay of a transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including contact wear and hunting detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so that for example, the voltage control can be blocked if the power reverses and so on. The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks which both are logical nodes in IEC 61850-8-1: Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control. Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs, TCMYLTC and 32 binary inputs, TCLYLTC
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC is a function designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the LV-side side of a power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage. A raise or lower command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given period of time, deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband value (degree of insensitivity). A time delay (inverse or definite time) is set to avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target value, and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the system. TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC are an interface between the Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and the transformer load tap changer itself. More specifically this means that it gives command-pulses to a power transformer motor driven load tap changer and that it receives information from the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given commands, and so on. TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap position to the transformer differential protection. Control location local/remote The tap changer can be operated from the front of the IED or from a remote place alternatively. On the IED front there is a local remote switch that can be used to select the operator place. For this functionality the Apparatus control function blocks Bay control (QCBAY), Local remote (LOCREM) and Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) are used. Information about the control location is given to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function through connection of the Permitted Source to Operate (PSTO) output of the QCBAY function block to the input PSTO of the TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function block. Control Mode The control mode of the automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control can be: Manual Automatic
The control mode can be changed from the local location via the command menu on the local HMI under Main menu/Control/Commands/ TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x, or changed from a remote location via binary signals connected to the MANCTRL, AUTOCTRL inputs on TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function block. Measured Quantities In normal applications, the LV side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring point. If necessary, the LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-voltage drop to the regulation point. Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function block has three inputs I3P1, I3P2 and
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
U3P2 corresponding to HV-current, LV-current and LV-voltage respectively. These analog quantities are fed to the IED via the transformer input module, the Analog to Digital Converter and thereafter a Pre-Processing Block. In the PreProcessing Block, a great number of quantities for example, phase-to-phase analog values, sequence values, max value in a three phase group etc., are derived. The different function blocks in the IED are then subscribing on selected quantities from the pre-processing blocks. In case of TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC, there are the following possibilities: I3P1 represents a three-phase group of phase current with the highest current in any of the three phases considered. As only the highest of the phase current is considered, it is also possible to use one single-phase current as well as twophase currents. In these cases, the currents that are not used will be zero. For I3P2 and U3P2 the setting alternatives are: any individual phase current/ voltage, as well as any combination of phase-phase current/voltage or the positive sequence current/voltage. Thus, single-phase as well as, phase-phase or three-phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected for current and voltage.
High Voltage Side IL1,IL2,IL3 IED
Load Tap Changer
raise,lower signals/alarms position
BOM BIM MIM TRM
(Load Current) IL
3ph or ph-ph or 1ph Current
Low Voltage Side
UB (Busbar Voltage) Line Impedance R+jX Load Center UL (Load Point Voltage)
IEC10000044 V1 EN
Figure 273:
Signal flow for a single transformer with voltage control
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
On the HV side, the three-phase current is normally required in order to feed the threephase over current protection that blocks the load tap changer in case of overcurrent above harmful levels. The voltage measurement on the LV-side can be made single phase-earth. However, it shall be remembered that this can only be used in solidly earthed systems, as the measured phase-earth voltage can increase with as much as a factor 3 in case of earth faults in a non-solidly earthed system. The analog input signals are normally common with other functions in the IED for example, protection functions. The LV-busbar voltage is designated UB, the load current IL and load point voltage UL. Automatic voltage control for a single transformer Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC measures the magnitude of the busbar voltage UB. If no other additional features are enabled (line voltage drop compensation), this voltage is further used for voltage regulation. TR1ATCC then compares this voltage with the set voltage, USet and decides which action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint, a deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical around USet, see figure 274, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer and an inner deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the timer to initiate tap commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured voltage is once again back inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer deadband is denoted U. The setting of U, setting Udeadband should be set to a value near to the power transformers tap changer voltage step (typically 75125% of the tap changer step).
Security Range
*)
*)
Raise Cmd
DU DU DUin DUin U1 Uset U2
Lower Cmd
*)
Ublock
Umin
Umax
Voltage Magnitude
*) Action in accordance with setting IEC06000489_2_en.vsd

IEC06000489 V2 EN
Figure 274:
Control actions on a voltage scale
During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage UB, stays within the outer deadband (interval between U1 and U2 in figure 274). In that case no actions will be taken by TR1ATCC. However, if UB becomes smaller than U1, or greater than U2, an appropriate lower or raise timer will start. The timer will run as long as the measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists longer
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC will initiate that the appropriate ULOWER or URAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC, or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC to the transformer load tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of the inner deadband is denoted Uin. The inner deadband Uin, setting UDeadbandInner should be set to a value smaller than U. It is recommended to set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the U value. This way of working is used by TR1ATCC while the busbar voltage is within the security range defined by settings Umin and Umax. A situation where UB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal situation. When UB falls below setting Ublock, or alternatively, falls below setting Umin but still above Ublock, or rises above Umax, actions will be taken in accordance with settings for blocking conditions (refer to table 163). If the busbar voltage rises above Umax, TR1ATCC can initiate one or more fast step down commands (ULOWER commands) in order to bring the voltage back into the security range (settings Umin, and Umax). The fast step down function operation can be set in one of the following three ways: off /auto/auto and manual, according to the setting FSDMode. The ULOWER command, in fast step down mode, is issued with the settable time delay tFSD. The measured RMS magnitude of the busbar voltage UB is shown on the local HMI as value BUSVOLT under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/ TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x. Time characteristic The time characteristic defines the time that elapses between the moment when measured voltage exceeds the deadband interval until the appropriate URAISE or ULOWER command is initiated. The purpose of the time delay is to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations caused by temporary voltage fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations in radial networks in order to limit the number of load tap changer operations. This can be done by setting a longer time delay closer to the consumer and shorter time delays higher up in the system. The first time delay, t1, is used as a time delay (usually long delay) for the first command in one direction. It can have a definite or inverse time characteristic, according to the setting t1Use (Constant/Inverse). For inverse time characteristics larger voltage deviations from the USet value will result in shorter time delays, limited by the shortest time delay equal to the tMin setting. This setting should be coordinated with the tap changer mechanism operation time. Constant (definite) time delay is independent of the voltage deviation.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The inverse time characteristic for the first time delay follows the formulas:
DA = UB - USet
(Equation 418)
D=
DA DU
(Equation 419)
EQUATION1986 V1 EN
tMin
t1 =D
(Equation 420)
EQUATION1848 V2 EN
Where: DA D absolute voltage deviation from the set point relative voltage deviation in respect to set deadband value
For the last equation, the condition t1 > tMin shall also be fulfilled. This practically means that tMin will be equal to the set t1 value when absolute voltage deviation DA is equal to U ( relative voltage deviation D is equal to 1). For other values see figure 275. It should be noted that operating times, shown in the figure 275 are for 30, 60, 90, 120, 150 & 180 seconds settings for t1 and 10 seconds for tMin.
t1=180 t1=150 t1=120 t1=90 t1=60 t1=30
IEC06000488 V2 EN
Figure 275:
Inverse time characteristic for TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The second time delay, t2, will be used for consecutive commands (commands in the same direction as the first command). It can have a definite or inverse time characteristic according to the setting t2Use (Constant/Inverse). Inverse time characteristic for the second time delay follows the similar formulas as for the first time delay, but the t2 setting is used instead of t1. Line voltage drop The purpose with the line voltage drop compensation is to control the voltage, not at the power transformer low voltage side, but at a point closer to the load point. Figure 276 shows the vector diagram for a line modelled as a series impedance with the voltage UB at the LV busbar and voltage UL at the load center. The load current on the line is IL, the line resistance and reactance from the station busbar to the load point are RL and XL. The angle between the busbar voltage and the current, is j. If all these parameters are known UL can be obtained by simple vector calculation. Values for RL and XL are given as settings in primary system ohms. If more than one line is connected to the LV busbar, an equivalent impedance should be calculated and given as a parameter setting. The line voltage drop compensation function can be turned On/Off by the setting parameter OperationLDC. When it is enabled, the voltage UL will be used by the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control for voltage regulation instead of UB. However, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC will still perform the following two checks: 1. The magnitude of the measured busbar voltage UB, shall be within the security range, (setting Umin and Umax). If the busbar voltage falls-out of this range the line voltage drop compensation calculations will be temporarily stopped until the voltage UB comes back within the range. The magnitude of the calculated voltage UL at the load point, can be limited such that it is only allowed to be equal to or smaller than the magnitude of UB, otherwise UB will be used. However, a situation where UL>UB can be caused by a capacitive load condition, and if the wish is to allow for a situation like that, the limitation can be removed by setting the parameter OperCapaLDC to On.
2.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
UB
UB UL RLIL
IEC06000487 V1 EN
jXLIL
Re
en06000487.vsd
Figure 276:
Vector diagram for line voltage drop compensation
The calculated load voltage UL is shown on the local HMI as value ULOAD under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC, 90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x. Load voltage adjustment Due to the fact that most loads are proportional to the square of the voltage, it is possible to provide a way to shed part of the load by decreasing the supply voltage a couple of percent. It is possible to do this voltage adjustment in two different ways in Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC and parallel control TR8ATCC: 1. 2. Automatic load voltage adjustment, proportional to the load current. Constant load voltage adjustment with four different preset values.
In the first case the voltage adjustment is dependent on the load and maximum voltage adjustment should be obtained at rated load of the transformer. In the second case, a voltage adjustment of the set point voltage can be made in four discrete steps (positive or negative) activated with binary signals connected to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function block inputs LVA1, LVA2, LVA3 and LVA4. The corresponding voltage adjustment factors are given as setting parameters LVAConst1, LVAConst2, LVAConst3 and LVAConst4. The inputs are activated with a pulse, and the latest activation of anyone of the four inputs is valid. Activation of the input LVARESET in TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC block, brings the voltage setpoint back to USet. With these factors, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC adjusts the value of the set voltage USet according to the following formula:
Usetadjust = Uset + Sa
IL I 2 Base
+ Sci
(Equation 421)
Load
RL
XL
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Uset, adjust
Adjusted set voltage in per unit Original set voltage: Base quality is Un2 Automatic load voltage adjustment factor, setting VRAuto Load current Rated current, LV winding Constant load voltage adjust. factor for active input i (corresponding to LVAConst1, LVAConst2, LVAConst3 and LVAConst4)
USet
Sa IL I2Base Sci
It shall be noted that the adjustment factor is negative in order to decrease the load voltage and positive in order to increase the load voltage. After this calculation Uset, adjust will be used by TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC for voltage regulation instead of the original value USet. The calculated set point voltage USet, adjust is shown on the local HMI as a service value under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/ TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x. Automatic control of parallel transformers Parallel control of power transformers means control of two or more power transformers connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also on the HV side. Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway situation where the tap changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and end up in opposite end positions. Three alternative methods can be used in an IED for parallel control with the Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single/parallel control TR8ATCC: master-follower method reverse reactance method circulating current method
In order to realize the need for special measures to be taken when controlling transformers in parallel, consider first two parallel transformers which are supposed to be equal with similar tap changers. If they would each be in automatic voltage control for single transformer that is, each of them regulating the voltage on the LV busbar individually without any further measures taken, then the following could happen. Assuming for instance that they start out on the same tap position and that the LV busbar voltage UB is within USet DU, then a gradual increase or decrease in the load would at some stage make UB fall outside USet DU and a lower or raise command would be initiated. However, the rate of change of voltage would normally be slow, which would make one tap changer act before the other. This is unavoidable and is due to small inequalities in measurement and so on. The one tap changer that responds first on a low voltage condition with a raise command will be prone to always do so, and vice versa. The situation could thus develop such that, for example T1 responds first to a low busbar voltage with a raise command and thereby restores the voltage. When the busbar voltage thereafter at a later stage gets high, T2 could respond with a lower command and thereby again restore the busbar voltage to be within the inner deadband. However,
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
this has now caused the load tap changer for the two transformers to be 2 tap positions apart, which in turn causes an increasing circulating current. This course of events will then repeat with T1 initiating raise commands and T2 initiating lower commands in order to keep the busbar voltage within USet DU, but at the same time it will drive the two tap changers to its opposite end positions. High circulating currents and loss of control would be the result of this runaway tap situation. Parallel control with the master-follower method In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles for Automatic voltage control. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary input FORCMAST in TR8ATCC function block for one of the transformers in the group. The followers can act in two alternative ways depending on the setting of the parameter MFMode. When this setting is Follow Cmd, raise and lower commands (URAISE and ULOWER) generated by the master, will initiate the corresponding command in all follower TR8ATCCs simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow the master irrespective of their individual tap positions. Effectively this means that if the tap positions of the followers were harmonized with the master from the beginning, they would stay like that as long as all transformers in the parallel group continue to participate in the parallel control. On the other hand for example, one transformer is disconnected from the group and misses a one tap step operation, and thereafter is reconnected to the group again, it will thereafter participate in the regulation but with a one tap position offset. If the parameter MFMode is set to Follow Tap, then the followers will read the tap position of the master and adopt to the same tap position or to a tap position with an offset relative to the master, and given by setting parameter TapPosOffs (positive or negative integer value). The setting parameter tAutoMSF introduces a time delay on URAISE/ULOWER commands individually for each follower when setting MFMode has the value Follow Tap. Selecting a master is made by activating the input FORCMAST in TR8ATCC function block. Deselecting a master is made by activating the input RSTMAST. These two inputs are pulse activated, and the most recent activation is valid that is, an activation of any of these two inputs overrides previous activations. If none of these inputs has been activated, the default is that the transformer acts as a follower (given of course that the settings are parallel control with the master follower method). When the selection of master or follower in parallel control, or automatic control in single mode, is made with a three position switch in the substation, an arrangement as in figure 277 below is arranged with application configuration.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
BIM/IOM
TR8ATCC
M F I
FORCMAST RSTMAST SNGLMODE
IEC06000633 V2 EN
Figure 277:
Principle for a three-position switch Master/Follower/Single
Parallel control with the reverse reactance method Consider figure 278 with two parallel transformers with equal rated data and similar tap changers. The tap positions will diverge and finally end up in a runaway tap situation if no measures to avoid this are taken.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
T1
T2
UB
IT1 IL
IT2
UL
IEC06000486 V1 EN
Load
en06000486.vsd
Figure 278:
Parallel transformers with equal rated data.
In the reverse reactance method, the line voltage drop compensation is used. The purpose is to control the voltage at a load point further out in the network. The very same function can also be used here but with a completely different objective. Figure 279, shows a vector diagram where the principle of reverse reactance has been introduced for the transformers in figure 278. The transformers are here supposed to be on the same tap position, and the busbar voltage is supposed to give a calculated compensated value UL that coincides with the target voltage USet.
Set L2=U UL1=U
RLIT1=RLIT2 jXLIT1=jXLIT2
UB IT1=IT2=(IT1+IT2)/2
IEC06000485 V2 EN
Figure 279:
Vector diagram for two transformers regulated exactly on target voltage.
A comparison with figure 276 gives that the line voltage drop compensation for the purpose of reverse reactance control is made with a value with opposite sign on XL, hence the designation reverse reactance or negative reactance. Effectively this
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
means that, whereas the line voltage drop compensation in figure 276 gave a voltage drop along a line from the busbar voltage UB to a load point voltage UL, the line voltage drop compensation in figure 279 gives a voltage increase (actually, by adjusting the ratio XL/RL with respect to the power factor, the length of the vector UL will be approximately equal to the length of UB) from UB up towards the transformer itself. Thus in principal the difference between the vector diagrams in figure 276 and figure 279 is the sign of the setting parameter XL. If now the tap position between the transformers will differ, a circulating current will appear, and the transformer with the highest tap (highest no load voltage) will be the source of this circulating current. Figure 280 below shows this situation with T1 being on a higher tap than T2.
ICC...T2
T1
ICC...T1
T2
RLIT2
UL1
UL2
RIT1 jXLIT1
UB
IT1 IL
IT2
IT2 IT1 -Icc (IT1+IT2)/2 Icc
jXLIT2 UB
UL
IEC06000491 V2 EN
Load
Figure 280:
Circulating current caused by T1 on a higher tap than T2.
The circulating current Icc is predominantly reactive due to the reactive nature of the transformers. The impact of Icc on the individual transformer currents is that it increases the current in T1 (the transformer that is driving Icc) and decreases it in T2 at the same time as it introduces contradictive phase shifts, as can be seen in figure 280. The result is thus, that the line voltage drop compensation calculated voltage UL for T1 will be higher than the line voltage drop compensation calculated voltage UL for T2, or in other words, the transformer with the higher tap position will have the higher UL value and the transformer with the lower tap position will have the lower UL value. Consequently, when the busbar voltage increases, T1 will be the one to tap down, and when the busbar voltage decreases, T2 will be the one to tap up. The overall performance will then be that the runaway tap situation will be avoided and that the circulating current will be minimized.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Parallel control with the circulating current method Two transformers with different turns ratio, connected to the same busbar on the HVside, will apparently show different LV-side voltage. If they are now connected to the same LV busbar but remain unloaded, this difference in no-load voltage will cause a circulating current to flow through the transformers. When load is put on the transformers, the circulating current will remain the same, but now it will be superimposed on the load current in each transformer. Voltage control of parallel transformers with the circulating current method means minimizing of the circulating current at a given voltage target value, thereby achieving: 1. 2. that the busbar or load voltage is regulated to a preset target value that the load is shared between parallel transformers in proportion to their ohmic short circuit reactance
If the transformers have equal percentage impedance given in the respective transformer MVA base, the load will be divided in direct proportion to the rated power of the transformers when the circulating current is minimized. This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC function blocks (one TR8ATCC function for each transformer in the parallel group). TR8ATCC function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete exchange of TR8ATCC data, analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made cyclically every 300 ms. The busbar voltage UB is measured individually for each transformer in the parallel group by its associated TR8ATCC function. These measured values will then be exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC block, the mean value of all UB values will be calculated. The resulting value UBmean will then be used in each IED instead of UB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring that the same value is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that one erroneous measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation. At the same time, supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed. This works such that, if a measured voltage UB, differs from UBmean with more than a preset value (setting parameter VTmismatch) and for more than a pre set time (setting parameter tVTmismatch) an alarm signal VTALARM will be generated. The calculated mean busbar voltage UBmean is shown on the local HMI as a service value BusVolt under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/ TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x. Measured current values for the individual transformers must be communicated between the participating TR8ATCC functions, in order to calculate the circulating current.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The calculated circulating current Icc_i for transformer i is shown on the HMI as a service value ICIRCUL under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/ TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x. When the circulating current is known, it is possible to calculate a no-load voltage for each transformer in the parallel group. To do that the magnitude of the circulating current in each bay, is first converted to a voltage deviation, Udi, with equation 422:
U di = Ci I cc _ i X i
EQUATION1869 V1 EN
(Equation 422)
where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting parameter named Comp which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or decreasing the impact of the circulating current in TR8ATCC control calculations. It should be noted that Udi will have positive values for transformers that produce circulating currents and negative values for transformers that receive circulating currents. Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be approximated with:
U i = U Bmean + U di
EQUATION1870 V1 EN
(Equation 423)
This value for the no-load voltage is then simply put into the voltage control function for single transformer. There it is treated as the measured busbar voltage, and further control actions are taken as described previously in section "Automatic voltage control for a single transformer". By doing this, the overall control strategy can be summarized as follows. For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated noload voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage UBmean. The calculated no-load voltage will then be compared with the set voltage USet. A steady deviation which is outside the outer deadband will result in ULOWER or URAISE being initiated alternatively. In this way the overall control action will always be correct since the position of a tap changer is directly proportional to the transformer no-load voltage. The sequence resets when UBmean is inside the inner deadband at the same time as the calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in the parallel group are inside the outer deadband. In parallel operation with the circulating current method, different USet values for individual transformers can cause the voltage regulation to be unstable. For this reason, the mean value of USet for parallel operating transformers can be automatically calculated and used for the voltage regulation. This is set On/Off by setting parameter OperUsetPar. The calculated mean USet value is shown on the local HMI as a service value USETPAR under Main menu/Test/Function status/ Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The use of mean USet is recommended for parallel operation with the circulating current method, especially in cases when Load Voltage Adjustment is also used. Line voltage drop compensation for parallel control The line voltage drop compensation for a single transformer is described in section "Line voltage drop". The same principle is used for parallel control with the circulating current method and with the master follower method, except that the total load current, IL, is used in the calculation instead of the individual transformer current. (See figure 276 for details). The same values for the parameters Rline and Xline shall be set in all IEDs in the same parallel group. There is no automatic change of these parameters due to changes in the substation topology, thus they should be changed manually if needed. Avoidance of simultaneous tapping Avoidance of simultaneous tapping (operation with the circulating current method) For some types of tap changers, especially older designs, an unexpected interruption of the auxiliary voltage in the middle of a tap manoeuvre, can jam the tap changer. In order not to expose more than one tap changer at a time, simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers (regulated with the circulating current method) can be avoided. This is done by setting parameter OperSimTap to On. Simultaneous tapping is then avoided at the same time as tapping actions (in the long term) are distributed evenly amongst the parallel transformers. The algorithm in Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC will select the transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Udi to tap first. That transformer will then start timing, and after time delay t1 the appropriate URAISE or ULOWER command will be initiated. If now further tapping is required to bring the busbar voltage inside UDeadbandInner, the process will be repeated, and the transformer with the then greatest value of Udi amongst the remaining transformers in the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so on. This is made possible as the calculation of Icc is cyclically updated with the most recent measured values. If two transformers have equal magnitude of Udi then there is a predetermined order governing which one is going to tap first. Avoidance of simultaneous tapping (operation with the master follower method) A time delay for the follower in relation to the command given from the master can be set when the setting MFMode is Follow Tap that is, when the follower follows the tap position (with or without an offset) of the master. The setting parameter tAutoMSF then introduces a time delay on UVRAISE/ULOWER commands individually for each follower, and effectively this can be used to avoid simultaneous tapping. Homing Homing (operation with the circulating current method) This function can be used with parallel operation of power transformers using the circulating current method. It makes possible to keep a transformer energized from the HV side, but open on the LV side (hot stand-by), to follow the voltage
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
regulation of loaded parallel transformers, and thus be on a proper tap position when the LV circuit breaker closes. For this function, it is needed to have the LV VTs for each transformer on the cable (tail) side (not the busbar side) of the CB, and to have the LV CB position hardwired to the IED. In TR8ATCC block for one transformer, the state "Homing" will be defined as the situation when the transformer has information that it belongs to a parallel group (for example, information on T1INCLD=1 or T2INCLD=1 ... and so on), at the same time as the binary input DISC on TR8ATCC block is activated by open LV CB. If now the setting parameter OperHoming = On for that transformer, TR8ATCC will act in the following way: The algorithm calculates the true busbar voltage, by averaging the voltage measurements of the other transformers included in the parallel group (voltage measurement of the disconnected transformer itself is not considered in the calculation). The value of this true busbar voltage is used in the same way as Uset for control of a single transformer. The disconnected transformer will then automatically initiate URAISE or ULOWER commands (with appropriate t1 or t2 time delay) in order to keep the LV side of the transformer within the deadband of the busbar voltage.
Homing (operation with the master follower method) If one (or more) follower has its LV circuit breaker open and its HV circuit breaker closed, and if OperHoming = On, this follower continues to follow the master just as it would have made with the LV circuit breaker closed. On the other hand, if the LV circuit breaker of the master opens, automatic control will be blocked and TR8ATCC function output MFERR will be activated as the system will not have a master. Adapt mode, manual control of a parallel group Adapt mode (operation with the circulating current method) When the circulating current method is used, it is also possible to manually control the transformers as a group. To achieve this, the setting OperationAdapt must be set On, then the control mode for one TR8ATCC shall be set to Manual via the binary input MANCTRL or the local HMI under Main menu/Control/Commands/ TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x whereas the other TR8ATCCs are left in Automatic. TR8ATCCs in automatic mode will then observe that one transformer in the parallel group is in manual mode and will then automatically be set in adapt mode. As the name indicates they will adapt to the manual tapping of the transformer that has been put in manual mode. TR8ATCC in adapt mode will continue the calculation of Udi, but instead of adding Udi to the measured busbar voltage, it will compare it with the deadband DU. The following control rules are used:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
1. 2. 3.
If Udi is positive and its modulus is greater thanDU, then initiate an ULOWER command. Tapping will then take place after appropriate t1/t2 timing. If Udi is negative and its modulus is greater than DU, then initiate an URAISE command. Tapping will then take place after appropriate t1/t2 timing. If Udi modulus is smaller thanDU, then do nothing.
The binary output signal ADAPT on the TR8ATCC function block will be activated to indicate that this TR8ATCC is adapting to another TR8ATCC in the parallel group. It shall be noted that control with adapt mode works as described under the condition that only one transformer in the parallel group is set to manual mode via the binary input MANCTRL or, the local HMI Main menu/Control/Commands/ TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x. In order to operate each tap changer individually when the circulating current method is used, the operator must set each TR8ATCC in the parallel group, in manual. Adapt mode (operation with the master follower method) When in master follower mode, the adapt situation occurs when the setting OperationAdapt is On, and the master is put in manual control with the followers still in parallel master-follower control. In this situation the followers will continue to follow the master the same way as when it is automatic control. If one follower in a master follower parallel group is put in manual mode, still with the setting OperationAdaptOn, the rest of the group will continue in automatic master follower control. The follower in manual mode will of course disregard any possible tapping of the master. However, as one transformer in the parallel group is now exempted from the parallel control, the binary output signal ADAPT on TR8ATCC function block will be activated for the rest of the parallel group. Plant with capacitive shunt compensation (for operation with the circulating current method) If significant capacitive shunt generation is connected in a substation and it is not symmetrically connected to all transformers in a parallel group, the situation may require compensation of the capacitive current to the ATCC. An asymmetric connection will exist if for example, the capacitor is situated on the LV-side of a transformer, between the CT measuring point and the power transformer or at a tertiary winding of the power transformer, see figure 281. In a situation like this, the capacitive current will interact in opposite way in the different ATCCs with regard to the calculation of circulating currents. The capacitive current is part of the imaginary load current and therefore essential in the calculation. The calculated circulating current and the real circulating currents will in this case not be the same, and they will not reach a minimum at the same time. This might result in a situation when minimizing of the calculated circulating current will not regulate the tap changers to the same tap positions even if the power transformers are equal.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
However if the capacitive current is also considered in the calculation of the circulating current, then the influence can be compensated for.
Icc....T2
Icc....T2
T1
Icc....T1
T2
T1
Icc....T1
T2
IT1
IT2-IC
IT2 IC IT1 UB IL
IT1 IT2
IT2 IC IL
IT1 UB
UL
Load
UL
Load
en06000512.vsd
IEC06000512 V1 EN
Figure 281:
Capacitor bank on the LV-side
From figure 281 it is obvious that the two different connections of the capacitor banks are completely the same regarding the currents in the primary network. However the CT measured currents for the transformers would be different. The capacitor bank current may flow entirely to the load on the LV side, or it may be divided between the LV and the HV side. In the latter case, the part of IC that goes to the HV side will divide between the two transformers and it will be measured with opposite direction for T2 and T1. This in turn would be misinterpreted as a circulating current, and would upset a correct calculation of Icc. Thus, if the actual connection is as in the left figure the capacitive current IC needs to be compensated for regardless of the operating conditions and in ATCC this is made numerically. The reactive power of the capacitor bank is given as a setting Q1, which makes it possible to calculate the reactive capacitance:
XC = U2 Q1
(Equation 424)
EQUATION1871 V1 EN
Thereafter the current IC at the actual measured voltage UB can be calculated as:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IC =
UB 3 XC
(Equation 425)
EQUATION1872 V1 EN
In this way the measured LV currents can be adjusted so that the capacitor bank current will not influence the calculation of the circulating current. Three independent capacitor bank values Q1, Q2 and Q3 can be set for each transformer in order to make possible switching of three steps in a capacitor bank in one bay. Power monitoring The level (with sign) of active and reactive power flow through the transformer, can be monitored. This function can be utilized for different purposes for example, to block the voltage control function when active power is flowing from the LV side to the HV side or to initiate switching of reactive power compensation plant, and so on. There are four setting parameters P>, P<, Q> and Q< with associated outputs in TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks PGTFWD, PLTREV, QGTFWD and QLTREV. When passing the pre-set value, the associated output will be activated after the common time delay setting tPower. The definition of direction of the power is such that the active power P is forward when power flows from the HV-side to the LV-side as shown in figure 282. The reactive power Q is forward when the total load on the LV side is inductive ( reactance) as shown in figure 282.
HV-side
Pforward Qforward (inductive)
IED ATCC
LV-side
IEC06000536 V2 EN
Figure 282:
Power direction references
With the four outputs in the function block available, it is possible to do more than just supervise a level of power flow in one direction. By combining the outputs with logical elements in application configuration, it is also possible to cover for example, intervals as well as areas in the P-Q plane.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Busbar topology logic Information of the busbar topology that is, position of circuit breakers and isolators, yielding which transformers that are connected to which busbar and which busbars that are connected to each other, is vital for the Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control function TR8ATCC when the circulating current or the master-follower method is used. This information tells each TR8ATCC, which transformers that it has to consider in the parallel control. In a simple case, when only the switchgear in the transformer bays needs to be considered, there is a built-in function in TR8ATCC block that can provide information on whether a transformer is connected to the parallel group or not. This is made by connecting the transformer CB auxiliary contact status to TR8ATCC function block input DISC, which can be made via a binary input, or via GOOSE from another IED in the substation. When the transformer CB is open, this activates that input which in turn will make a corresponding signal DISC=1 in TR8ATCC data set. This data set is the same data package as the package that contains all TR8ATCC data transmitted to the other transformers in the parallel group (see section "Exchange of information between TR8ATCC functions" for more details). Figure 283 shows an example where T3 is disconnected which will lead to T3 sending the DISC=1 signal to the other two parallel TR8ATCC modules (T1 and T2) in the group. Also see table 162.
T1 T2 T3
U1
U2
U3
Z1
I1
Z2
I2
Z3
I3=0
IL=I1+I2
99000952.VSD
IEC99000952 V1 EN
Figure 283:
Disconnection of one transformer in a parallel group
When the busbar arrangement is more complicated with more buses and bus couplers/ bus sections, it is necessary to engineer a specific station topology logic. This logic can be built in the application configuration in PCM600 and will keep record on which transformers that are in parallel (in one or more parallel groups). In each TR8ATCC function block there are eight binary inputs (T1INCLD,..., T8INCLD) that will be activated from the logic depending on which transformers that are in parallel with the transformer to whom the TR8ATCC function block belongs. TR8ATCC function block is also fitted with eight outputs (T1PG,..., T8PG) for indication of the actual composition of the parallel group that it itself is part of. If parallel operation mode has been selected in the IED with setting TrfId = Tx, then the TxPG signal will always be set to 1. The parallel function will consider
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
communication messages only from the voltage control functions working in parallel (according to the current station configuration). When the parallel voltage control function detects that no other transformers work in parallel it will behave as a single voltage control function in automatic mode. Exchange of information between TR8ATCC functions Each transformer in a parallel group needs an Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC function block of its own for the parallel voltage control. Communication between these TR8ATCCs is made either on the GOOSE interbay communication on the IEC 61850 protocol if TR8ATCC functions reside in different IEDs, or alternatively configured internally in one IED if multiple instances of TR8ATCC reside in the same IED. Complete exchange of TR8ATCC data, analog as well as binary, on GOOSE is made cyclically every 300 ms. TR8ATCC function block has an output ATCCOUT. This output contains two sets of signals. One is the data set that needs to be transmitted to other TR8ATCC blocks in the same parallel group, and the other is the data set that is transferred to the TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function block for the same transformer as TR8ATCC block belongs to. There are 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals in the data set that is transmitted from one TR8ATCC block to the other TR8ATCC blocks in the same parallel group:
Table 160:
Signal TimerOn automaticCTRL mutualBlock disc receiveStat TermIsForcedMaster TermIsMaster termReadyForMSF raiseVoltageOut lowerVoltageOut
Binary signals
Explanation This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is going to tap when the set time has expired. Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control Activated when the automatic control is blocked Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar Signal used for the horizontal communication Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower parallel control mode Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel control mode Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control mode Order from the master to the followers to tap up Order from the master to the followers to tap down
Table 161:
Signal voltageBusbar ownLoadCurrim ownLoadCurrre
Analog signals
Explanation Measured busbar voltage for this transformer Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer Measured load current real part for this transformer

Signal reacSec relativePosition voltage Setpoint Explanation
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side The transformer's actual tap position The transformer's set voltage (USet) for automatic control
Manual configuration of VCTR GOOSE data set is required. Note that both data value attributes and quality attributes have to be mapped. The following data objects must be configured: BusV LodAIm LodARe PosRel SetV VCTRStatus X2
The transformers controlled in parallel with the circulating current method or the master-follower method must be assigned unique identities. These identities are entered as a setting in each TR8ATCC, and they are predefined as T1, T2, T3,..., T8 (transformers 1 to 8). In figure 283 there are three transformers with the parameter TrfId set to T1, T2 and T3, respectively. For parallel control with the circulating current method or the master-follower method alternatively, the same type of data set as described above, must be exchanged between two TR8ATCC. To achieve this, each TR8ATCC is transmitting its own data set on the output ATCCOUT as previously mentioned. To receive data from the other transformers in the parallel group, the output ATCCOUT from each transformer must be connected (via GOOSE or internally in the application configuration) to the inputs HORIZx (x = identifier for the other transformers in the parallel group) on TR8ATCC function block. Apart from this, there is also a setting in each TR8ATCC =/,..., =/T1RXOP=Off/On,..., T8RXOP=Off/ On. This setting determines from which of the other transformer individuals that data shall be received. Settings in the three TR8ATCC blocks for the transformers in figure 283, would then be according to the table 162:
Table 162:
TrfId=T1 TrfId=T2 TrfId=T3
Setting of TxRXOP
T1RXOP=O ff T1RXOP=O n T1RXOP=O n T2RXOP=O n T2RXOP=O ff T2RXOP=O n T3RXOP=O n T3RXOP=O n T3RXOP=O ff T4RXOP=O ff T4RXOP=O ff T4RXOP=O ff T5RXOP=O ff T5RXOP=O ff T5RXOP=O ff T6RXOP=O ff T6RXOP=O ff T6RXOP=O ff T7RXOP=O ff T7RXOP=O ff T7RXOP=O ff T8RXOP=O ff T8RXOP=O ff T8RXOP=O ff
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Observe that this parameter must be set to Off for the own transformer. (for transformer with identity T1 parameter T1RXOP must be set to Off, and so on. Blocking Blocking conditions The purpose of blocking is to prevent the tap changer from operating under conditions that can damage it, or otherwise when the conditions are such that power system related limits would be exceeded or when, for example the conditions for automatic control are not met. For the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control, three types of blocking are used: Partial Block: Prevents operation of the tap changer only in one direction (only URAISE or ULOWER command is blocked) in manual and automatic control mode. Auto Block: Prevents automatic voltage regulation, but the tap changer can still be controlled manually. Total Block: Prevents any tap changer operation independently of the control mode (automatic as well as manual). Setting parameters for blocking that can be set in TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC under general settings in PST/local HMI are listed in table 163.
Table 163:
Setting OCBk (automatically reset)
Blocking settings
Values (Range) Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Description When any one of the three HV currents exceeds the preset value IBlock, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC will be temporarily totally blocked. The outputs IBLK and TOTBLK or AUTOBLK will be activated depending on the actual parameter setting. If the busbar voltage UB(not the compensated load point voltage UVL) exceedsUmax (see figure 274), an alarm will be initiated or further URAISE commands will be blocked. If permitted by setting in PST configuration, Fast Step Down (FSD) of the tap changer will be initiated in order to re-enter the voltage into the range Umin < UB < Umax. The FSD function is blocked when the lowest voltage tap position is reached. The time delay for the FSD function is separately set. The output UHIGH will be activated as long as the voltage is above Umax. If the busbar voltage UB (not the compensated load point voltage UL) is between Ublock and Umin (see figure274), an alarm will be initiated or further ULOWER commands will be blocked. The output ULOW will be activated. If the busbar voltage UB falls below Ublock this blocking condition is active. It is recommended to block automatic control in this situation and allow manual control. This is because the situation normally would correspond to a disconnected transformer and then it should be allowed to operate the tap changer before reconnecting the transformer. The outputs UBLK and TOTBLK or AUTOBLK will be activated depending on the actual parameter setting.
OVPartBk (automatically reset)
Alarm Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk (automatically reset) UVBk (automatically reset)
Alarm Auto&Man Block
Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block

Setting RevActPartBk(auto matically reset) Values (Range) Alarm Auto Block Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The risk of voltage instability increases as transmission lines become more heavily loaded in an attempt to maximize the efficient use of existing generation and transmission facilities. In the same time lack of reactive power may move the operation point of the power network to the lower part of the P-V-curve (unstable part). Under these conditions, when the voltage starts to drop, it might happen that an URAISE command can give reversed result that is, a lower busbar voltage. Tap changer operation under voltage instability conditions makes it more difficult for the power system to recover. Therefore, it might be desirable to block TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC temporarily. Requirements for this blocking are: The load current must exceed the set value After an URAISE command, the measured busbar voltage shall have a lower value than its previous value The second requirement has to be fulfilled for two consecutive URAISE commands
RevActLim
If all three requirements are fulfilled, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC automatic control will be blocked for raise commands for a period of time given by the setting parameter tRevAct and the output signal REVACBLK will be set. The reversed action feature can be turned off/on with the setting parameter OperationRA. CmdErrBk (manually reset) Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Typical operating time for a tap changer mechanism is around 3-8 seconds. Therefore, the function should wait for a position change before a new command is issued. The command error signal, CMDERRAL on the TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function block, will be set if the tap changer position does not change one step in the correct direction within the time given by the setting tTCTimeout in TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function block. The tap changer module TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC will then indicate the error until a successful command has been carried out or it has been reset by changing control mode of TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function to Manual and then back to Automatic. The outputs CMDERRAL on TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC and TOTBLK or AUTOBLK on TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC will be activated depending on the actual parameter setting. This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR on TCMYLTC function block, or alternatively by changing control mode of TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function to Manual and then back to Automatic. If the input TCINPROG of TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function block is connected to the tap changer mechanism, then this blocking condition will be active if the TCINPROG input has not reset when the tTCTimeout timer has timed out. The output TCERRAL will be activated depending on the actual parameter setting. In correct operation the TCINPROG shall appear during the URAISE/ULOWER output pulse and disappear before the tTCTimeout time has elapsed. This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR on TCMYLTC function block, or alternatively by changing control mode of TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function to Manual and then back to Automatic.
TapChgBk (manually reset
Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting TapPosBk (automatically reset/manually reset) Values (Range) Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Description This blocking/alarm is activated by either: 1. The tap changer reaching an end position i.e. one of the extreme positions according to the setting parameters LowVoltTapand HighVoltTap. When the tap changer reaches one of these two positions further commands in the corresponding direction will be blocked. Effectively this will then be a partial block if Auto Block or Auto&Man Blockis set. The outputs POSERRAL and LOPOSAL or HIPOSAL will be activated. Tap Position Error which in turn can be caused by one of the following conditions: Tap position is out of range that is, the indicated position is above or below the end positions. The tap changer indicates that it has changed more than one position on a single raise or lower command. The tap position reading shows a BCD code error (unaccepted combination) or a parity fault. The reading of tap position shows a mA value that is out of the mA-range. Supervision of the input signal for MIM is made by setting the MIM parameters I_Max and I_Min to desired values, for example, I_Max = 20mA and I_Min = 4mA. Very low or negative mA-values. Indication of hardware fault on BIM or MIM module. Supervision of the input hardware module is provided by connecting the corresponding error signal to the INERR input (input module error) or BIERR on TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function block. Interruption of communication with the tap changer.
2.
The outputs POSERRAL and AUTOBLK or TOTBLK will be set. This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR on TCMYLTCfunction block, or alternatively by changing control mode of TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function to Manual and then back to Automatic. CircCurrBk (automatically reset) Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block When the magnitude of the circulating current exceeds the preset value (setting parameter CircCurrLimit) for longer time than the set time delay (setting parameter tCircCurr) it will cause this blocking condition to be fulfilled provided that the setting parameter OperCCBlock is On. The signal resets automatically when the circulating current decreases below the preset value. Usually this can be achieved by manual control of the tap changers. TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC outputs ICIRC and TOTBLK or AUTOBLK will be activated depending on the actual parameter setting. In the master-follower mode, if the tap difference between a follower and the master is greater than the set value (setting parameter MFPosDiffLim) then this blocking condition is fulfilled and the outputs OUTOFPOS and AUTOBLK (alternatively an alarm) will be set.
MFPosDiffBk (manually reset)
Alarm Auto Block
Setting parameters for blocking that can be set in TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC under setting group Nx in PST/ local HMI are listed in table 164.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 164:
Setting
Blocking settings
Value (Range) Description TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function can be totally blocked via the setting parameter TotalBlock, which can be set On/Off from the local HMI or PST. The output TOTBLK will be activated. TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function can be blocked for automatic control via the setting parameter AutoBlock, which can be set On/ Off from the local HMI or PST. The output AUTOBLK will be set.
TotalBlock (manually reset)
On/Off
AutoBlock (manually reset)
On/Off
TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC blockings that can be made via input signals in the function block are listed in table 165.
Table 165:
Input name BLOCK (manually reset)
Blocking via binary inputs

Activation Description The voltage control function can be totally blocked via the binary input BLOCK on TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function block. The output TOTBLK will be activated. The voltage control function can be blocked for automatic control via the binary input EAUTOBLK on TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function block. The output AUTOBLK will be activated. Deblocking is made via the input DEBLKAUT.
On/Off(via binary input)
EAUTOBLK (manually reset)
On/Off(via binary input)
Blockings activated by the operating conditions and there are no setting or separate external activation possibilities are listed in table 166.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 166:
Activation
Blockings without setting possibilities

Type of blocking Auto Block Description Automatic control is blocked for a transformer when parallel control with the circulating current method is used, and that transformer is disconnected from the LV-busbar. (This is under the condition that the setting OperHoming is selected Off for the disconnected transformer. Otherwise the transformer will get into the state Homing). The binary input signal DISC in TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function shall be used to supervise if the transformer LV circuit breaker is closed or not. The outputs TRFDISC and AUTOBLK will be activated . Blocking will be removed when the transformer is reconnected (input signal DISC set back to zero). Automatic control is blocked when parallel control with the master-follower method is used, and the master is disconnected from the LV-busbar. Also if there for some reason should be a situation with more than one master in the system, the same blocking will occur. The binary input signal DISC in TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function shall be used to supervise if the transformer LV circuit breaker is closed or not. The outputs TRFDISC, MFERR and AUTOBLK will be activated. The followers will also be blocked by mutual blocking in this situation. Blocking will be removed when the transformer is reconnected (input signal DISC set back to zero). When the setting OperationAdapt is Off, automatic control will be blocked when parallel control with the master-follower or the circulating current method is used, and one of the transformers in the group is switched from auto to manual. The output AUTOBLK will be activated. If the horizontal communication (GOOSE) for any one of TR8ATCCs in the group fails it will cause blocking of automatic control in all TR8ATCC functions, which belong to that parallel group. This error condition will be reset automatically when the communication is reestablished. The outputs COMMERR and AUTOBLK will be set.
Disconnected transformer (automatically reset)
No Master/More than one Master (automatically reset)
Auto Block
One transformer in a parallel group switched to manual control (automatically reset)
Auto Block
Communication error (COMMERR) (automatic deblocking)
Auto block
Circulating current method
Mutual blocking
When one parallel instance of voltage control TR8ATCC blocks its operation, all other TR8ATCCs working in parallel with that module, shall block their operation as well. To achieve this, the affected TR8ATCC function broadcasts a mutual block to the other group members via the horizontal communication. When mutual block is received from any of the group members, automatic operation is blocked in the receiving TR8ATCCs that is, all units of the parallel group. The following conditions in any one of TR8ATCCs in the group will cause mutual blocking when the circulating current method is used:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Over-Current Total block via settings Total block via configuration Analog input error Automatic block via settings Automatic block via configuration Under-Voltage Command error Position indication error Tap changer error Reversed Action Circulating current Communication error
Master-follower method
When the master is blocked, the followers will not tap by themselves and there is consequently no need for further mutual blocking. On the other hand, when a follower is blocked there is a need to send a mutual blocking signal to the master. This will prevent a situation where the rest of the group otherwise would be able to tap away from the blocked individual, and that way cause high circulating currents. Thus, when a follower is blocked, it broadcasts a mutual block on the horizontal communication. The master picks up this message, and blocks its automatic operation as well. Besides the conditions listed above for mutual blocking with the circulating current method, the following blocking conditions in any of the followers will also cause mutual blocking: Master-follower out of position Master-follower error (No master/More than one master)
General
It should be noted that partial blocking will not cause mutual blocking. TR8ATCC, which is the source of the mutual blocking will set its AUTOBLK output as well as the output which corresponds to the actual blocking condition for example, IBLK for over-current blocking. The other TR8ATCCs that receive a mutual block signal will only set its AUTOBLK output. The mutual blocking remains until TR8ATCC that dispatched the mutual block signal is de-blocked. Another way to release the mutual blocking is to force TR8ATCC, which caused mutual blocking to Single mode operation. This is done by activating the binary input SNGLMODE on TR8ATCC function block or by setting the parameter OperationPAR to Off from the built-in local HMI or PST. TR8ATCC function can be forced to single mode at any time. It will then behave exactly the same way as described in section "Automatic voltage control for a
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
single transformer", except that horizontal communication messages are still sent and received, but the received messages are ignored. TR8ATCC is at the same time also automatically excluded from the parallel group. Disabling of blockings in special situations When the Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control, function block is connected to read back information (tap position value and tap changer in progress signal) it may sometimes be difficult to find timing data to be set in TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC for proper operation. Especially at commissioning of for example, older transformers the sensors can be worn and the contacts maybe bouncing etc. Before the right timing data is set it may then happen that TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC becomes totally blocked or blocked in auto mode because of incorrect settings. In this situation, it is recommended to temporarily set these types of blockings to alarm instead until the commissioning of all main items are working as expected. Tap Changer position measurement and monitoring Tap changer extreme positions This feature supervises the extreme positions of the tap changer according to the settings LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap. When the tap changer reaches its lowest/ highest position, the corresponding ULOWER/URAISE command is prevented in both automatic and manual mode. Monitoring of tap changer operation The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC output signal URAISE or ULOWER is set high when TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function has reached a decision to operate the tap changer. These outputs from TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC function blocks shall be connected to a binary output module, BOM in order to give the commands to the tap changer mechanism. The length of the output pulse can be set via TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC setting parameter tPulseDur. When an URAISE/ULOWER command is given, a timer ( set by setting tTCTimeout ) (settable in PST/local HMI) is also started, and the idea is then that this timer shall have a setting that covers, with some margin, a normal tap changer operation. Usually the tap changer mechanism can give a signal, Tap change in progress, during the time that it is carrying through an operation. This signal from the tap changer mechanism can be connected via a BIM module to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC input TCINPROG, and it can then be used by TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function in three ways, which is explained below with the help of figure 284.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
b
URAISE/ULOWER
tTCTimeout
g
TCINPROG
a
IEC06000482 V2 EN
e d
h
Figure 284:
pos Description a b c d e f g h
Timing of pulses for tap changer operation monitoring
Safety margin to avoid that TCINPROG is not set high without the simultaneous presence of an URAISE or ULOWER command. Time setting tPulseDur. Fixed extension 4 sec. of tPulseDur, made internally in TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function. Time setting tStable New tap position reached, making the signal tap change in progress disappear from the tap changer, and a new position reported. The new tap position available in TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC. Fixed extension 2 sec. of TCINPROG, made internally in TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function. Safety margin to avoid that TCINPROG extends beyond tTCTimeout.
The first use is to reset the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control as soon as the signal TCINPROG disappears. If the TCINPROG signal is not fed back from the tap changer mechanism, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC will not reset until tTCTimeout has timed out. The advantage with monitoring the TCINPROG signal in this case is thus that resetting of TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC can sometimes be made faster, which in turn makes the system ready for consecutive commands in a shorter time. The second use is to detect a jammed tap changer. If the timer tTCTimeout times out before the TCINPROG signal is set back to zero, the output signal TCERRAL is set high and TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function is blocked. The third use is to check the proper operation of the tap changer mechanism. As soon as the input signal TCINPROG is set back to zero TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function expects to read a new and correct value for the tap position. If this does not happen the output signal CMDERRAL is set high and TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function is blocked. The fixed extension (g) 2 sec. of TCINPROG, is made to prevent a situation where this could happen despite no real malfunction.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In figure 284, it can be noted that the fixed extension (c) 4 sec. of tPulseDur, is made to prevent a situation with TCINPROG set high without the simultaneous presence of an URAISE or ULOWER command. If this would happen, TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC would see this as a spontaneous TCINPROG signal without an accompanying URAISE or ULOWER command, and this would then lead to the output signal TCERRAL being set high and TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function being blocked. Effectively this is then also a supervision of a run-away tap situation. Hunting detection Hunting detection is provided in order to generate an alarm when the voltage control gives an abnormal number of commands or abnormal sequence of commands within a pre-defined period of time. There are three hunting functions: 1. The Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control will activate the output signal DAYHUNT when the number of tap changer operations exceed the number given by the setting DayHuntDetect during the last 24 hours (sliding window). Active as well in manual as in automatic mode. TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function will activate the output signal HOURHUNT when the number of tap changer operations exceed the number given by the setting HourHuntDetect during the last hour (sliding window). Active as well in manual as in automatic mode. TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function will activate the output signal HUNTING when the total number of contradictory tap changer operations (RAISE, LOWER, RAISE, LOWER, and so on) exceeds the pre-set value given by the setting NoOpWindow within the time sliding window specified via the setting parameter tWindowHunt. Only active in automatic mode.
2.
3.
Hunting can be the result of a narrow deadband setting or some other abnormalities in the control system. Wearing of the tap changer contacts Two counters, ContactLife and NoOfOperations are available within the Tap changer control and supervision function, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC. They can be used as a guide for maintenance of the tap changer mechanism. The ContactLife counter represents the remaining number of operations (decremental counter) at rated load.
I load ContactLife n+1 = ContactLife - n I rated

EQUATION1873 V2 EN
(Equation 426)
where n is the number of operations and is an adjustable setting parameter, CLFactor, with default value is set to 2. With this default setting an operation at
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
rated load (current measured on HV-side) decrements the ContactLife counter with 1. The NoOfOperations counter simply counts the total number of operations (incremental counter). Both counters are stored in a non-volatile memory as well as, the times and dates of their last reset. These dates are stored automatically when the command to reset the counter is issued. It is therefore necessary to check that the IED internal time is correct before these counters are reset. The counter value can be reset on the local HMI under Main menu/Reset/Reset counters/TransformerTapControl(YLTC, 84)/TCMYLTC:1 or TCLYLTC:1/Reset Counter and ResetCLCounter Both counters and their last reset dates are shown on the local HMI as service values under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/ TransformerTapControl(YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/ CLCNT_VALandMain menu/Test/Function status/Control/ TransformerTapControl (YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/CNT_VAL
3.12.4.2
Setting guidelines TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC general settings

TrfId: The transformer identity is used to identify transformer individuals in a parallel group. Thus, transformers that can be part of the same parallel group must have unique identities. Moreover, all transformers that communicate over the same horizontal communication (GOOSE) must have unique identities. Xr2: The reactance of the transformer in primary ohms referred to the LV side. tAutoMSF: Time delay set in a follower for execution of a raise or lower command given from a master. This feature can be used when a parallel group is controlled in the master-follower mode, follow tap, and it is individually set for each follower, which means that different time delays can be used in the different followers in order to avoid simultaneous tapping if this is wanted. It shall be observed that it is not applicable in the follow command mode. OperationAdapt: This setting enables or disables adapt mode for parallel control with the circulating current method or the master-follower method. MFMode: Selection of Follow Command or Follow Tap in the master-follower mode. CircCurrBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the circulating current exceeds CircCurrLimit. CmdErrBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the feedback from the tap changer has resulted in command error. OCBk: Selection of action to be taken in case any of the three phase currents on the HV-side has exceeded Iblock.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
MFPosDiffBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the tap difference between a follower and the master is greater than MFPosDiffLim. OVPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage UB exceeds Umax. RevActPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case Reverse Action has been activated. TapChgBk: Selection of action to be taken in case a Tap Changer Error has been identified. TapPosBk: Selection of action to be taken in case of Tap Position Error, or if the tap changer has reached an end position. UVBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage UB falls below Ublock. UVPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage UB is between Ublock and Umin.
TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC Setting group General

Operation: Switching automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function On/Off. I1Base: Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side of the transformer. I2Base: Base current in primary Ampere for the LV-side of the transformer. UBase: Base voltage in primary kV for the LV-side of the transformer. MeasMode: Selection of single phase, or phase-phase, or positive sequence quantity to be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-side. The involved phases are also selected. Thus, single phase as well as phase-phase or threephase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected for current and voltage. Q1, Q2 and Q3: MVAr value of a capacitor bank or reactor that is connected between the power transformer and the CT, such that the current of the capacitor bank (reactor) needs to be compensated for in the calculation of circulating currents. There are three independent settings Q1, Q2 and Q3 in order to make possible switching of three steps in a capacitor bank in one bay. TotalBlock: When this setting is On, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function that is, the voltage control is totally blocked for manual as well as automatic control. AutoBlock: When this setting is On, TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC function that is, the voltage control is blocked for automatic control.

Operation
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
FSDMode: This setting enables/disables the fast step down function. Enabling can be for automatic and manual control, or for only automatic control alternatively. tFSD: Time delay to be used for the fast step down tapping.
Voltage
USet: Setting value for the target voltage, to be set in per cent of UBase. UDeadband: Setting value for one half of the outer deadband, to be set in per cent of UBase. The deadband is symmetrical around USet, see section "Automatic voltage control for a single transformer", figure 274. In that figure UDeadband is equal to DU. The setting is normally selected to a value near the power transformers tap changer voltage step (typically 75 - 125% of the tap changer step). UDeadbandInner: Setting value for one half of the inner deadband, to be set in per cent of UBase. The inner deadband is symmetrical around USet, see section "Automatic voltage control for a single transformer",figure 274. In that figure UDeadbandInner is equal to DUin. The setting shall be smaller than UDeadband. Typically the inner deadband can be set to 25-70% of the UDeadband value. Umax: This setting gives the upper limit of permitted busbar voltage (see section "Automatic voltage control for a single transformer", figure 274). It is set in per cent of UBase. If OVPartBk is set to Auto&ManBlock, then busbar voltages above Umax will result in a partial blocking such that only lower commands are permitted. Umin This setting gives the lower limit of permitted busbar voltage (see section "Automatic voltage control for a single transformer", figure 274). It is set in per cent of UBase. If UVPartBk is set to Auto Block orAuto&ManBlock, then busbar voltages below Umin will result in a partial blocking such that only raise commands are permitted. Ublock: Voltages below Ublock normally correspond to a disconnected transformer and therefore it is recommended to block automatic control for this condition (setting UVBk). Ublock is set in per cent of UBase.
Time
t1Use: Selection of time characteristic (definite or inverse) for t1. t1: Time delay for the initial (first) raise/lower command. t2Use: Selection of time characteristic (definite or inverse) for t2. t2: Time delay for consecutive raise/lower commands. In the circulating current method, the second, third, etc. commands are all executed with time delay t2 independently of which transformer in the parallel group that is tapping. In the masterfollower method with the follow tap option, the master is executing the second, third, etc. commands with time delay t2. The followers on the other hand read the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
masters tap position, and adapt to that with the additional time delay given by the setting tAutoMSF and set individually for each follower. tMin: The minimum operate time when inverse time characteristic is used (see section "Time characteristic", figure 275).
Line voltage drop compensation (LDC)

OpertionLDC: Sets the line voltage drop compensation function On/Off. OperCapaLDC: This setting, if set On, will permit the load point voltage to be greater than the busbar voltage when line voltage drop compensation is used. That situation can be caused by a capacitive load. When the line voltage drop compensation function is used for parallel control with the reverse reactance method, then OperCapaLDC must always be set On. Rline and Xline: For line voltage drop compensation, these settings give the line resistance and reactance from the station busbar to the load point. The settings for Rline and Xline are given in primary system ohms. If more than one line is connected to the LV busbar, equivalent Rline and Xline values should be calculated and given as settings. When the line voltage drop compensation function is used for parallel control with the reverse reactance method, then the compensated voltage which is designated load point voltage UL is effectively an increase in voltage up into the transformer. To achieve this voltage increase, Xline must be negative. The sensitivity of the parallel voltage regulation is given by the magnitude of Rline and Xline settings, with Rline being important in order to get a correct control of the busbar voltage. This can be realized in the following way. Figure 276 shows the vector diagram for a transformer controlled in a parallel group with the reverse reactance method and with no circulation (for example, assume two equal transformers on the same tap position). The load current lags the busbar voltage UB with the power factor j and the argument of the impedance Rline and Xline is designated j1.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
j1
Rline
Xline
Zline UL
IT*Rline
DU j IT UB
jIT*Xline
j2
en06000626.vsd
IEC06000626 V1 EN
Figure 285:
Transformer with reverse reactance regulation and no circulating current
The voltage DU=UB-UL=IT*Rline+j IT*Xline has the argument j2 and it is realised that if j2 is slightly less than -90, then UL will have approximately the same length as UB regardless of the magnitude of the transformer load current IT (indicated with the dashed line). The automatic tap change control regulates the voltage towards a set target value, representing a voltage magnitude, without considering the phase angle. Thus, UB as well as UL and also the dashed line could all be said to be on the target value. Assume that we want to achieve that j2 = -90, then:
DU = Z I DUe - j 90 = Ze jj1 Ie jj = ZIe j (j1 +j ) -900 = j1 + j
0
j1 = -j - 900
EQUATION1938 V1 EN
(Equation 427)
If for example cosj = 0.8 then j = arcos 0.8 = 37. With the references in figure 285, j will be negative (inductive load) and we get:
j1 = - ( -37 0 ) - 90 0 = -530
EQUATION1939 V1 EN
(Equation 428)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

To achieve a more correct regulation, an adjustment to a value of j2 slightly less than -90 (2 4 less) can be made. The effect of changing power factor of the load will be that j2 will no longer be close to -90 resulting in UL being smaller or greater than UB if the ratio Rline/ Xline is not adjusted. Figure 286 shows an example of this where the settings of Rline and Xline for j = 11 from figure 285 has been applied with a different value of j (j = 30).
j1=110-900=-790 j1 Rline
Xline
Zline UL DU IT*Rline
jIT*Xline
j=300
UB
j2
IT
IEC06000630 V1 EN
en06000630.vsd
Figure 286:
Transformer with reverse reactance regulation poorly adjusted to the power factor
As can be seen in figure 287, the change of power factor has resulted in an increase of j2 which in turn causes the magnitude of UL to be greater than UB. It can also be noted that an increase in the load current aggravates the situation, as does also an increase in the setting of Zline (Rline and Xline). Apparently the ratio Rline/Xline according to equation 428, that is the value of j1 must be set with respect to the power factor, also meaning that the reverse reactance method should not be applied to systems with varying power factor. The setting of Xline gives the sensitivity of the parallel regulation. If Xline is set too low, the transformers will not pull together and a run away tap situation will occur. On the other hand, a high setting will keep the transformers strongly together with no, or only a small difference in tap position, but the voltage regulation as such will be more sensitive to a deviation from the anticipated power factor. A too high setting of Xline can cause a hunting situation as the transformers will then be prone to over react on deviations from the target value. There is no rule for the setting of Xline such that an optimal balance between control response and susceptibility to changing power factor is achieved. One way of determining the setting is by trial and error. This can be done by setting e.g.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Xline equal to half of the transformer reactance, and then observe how the parallel control behaves during a couple of days, and then tune it as required. It shall be emphasized that a quick response of the regulation that quickly pulls the transformer tap changers into equal positions, not necessarily corresponds to the optimal setting. This kind of response is easily achieved by setting a high Xline value, as was discussed above, and the disadvantage is then a high susceptibility to changing power factor. A combination of line voltage drop compensation and parallel control with the negative reactance method is possible to do simply by adding the required Rline values and the required Xline values separately to get the combined impedance. However, the line drop impedance has a tendency to drive the tap changers apart, which means that the reverse reactance impedance normally needs to be increased.
Load voltage adjustment (LVA)

LVAConst1: Setting of the first load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the target value USet is given in percent of UBase. LVAConst2: Setting of the second load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the target value USet is given in percent ofUBase. LVAConst3: Setting of the third load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the target value USet is given in percent of UBase. LVAConst4: Setting of the fourth load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the target value USet is given in percent of UBase. VRAuto: Setting of the automatic load voltage adjustment. This adjustment of the target valueUSet is given in percent of UBase, and it is proportional to the load current with the set value reached at the nominal current I2Base.
RevAct
OperationRA: This setting enables/disables the reverse action partial blocking function. tRevAct: After the reverse action has picked up, this time setting gives the time during which the partial blocking is active. RevActLim: Current threshold for the reverse action activation. This is just one of two criteria for activation of the reverse action partial blocking.
Tap changer control (TCCtrl)

Iblock: Current setting of the over current blocking function. In case, the transformer is carrying a current exceeding the rated current of the tap changer for example, because of an external fault. The tap changer operations shall be temporarily blocked. This function typically monitors the three phase currents on the HV side of the transformer.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
DayHuntDetect: Setting of the number of tap changer operations required during the last 24 hours (sliding window) to activate the signal DAYHUNT HourHuntDetect: Setting of the number of tap changer operations required during the last hour (sliding window) to activate the signal HOURHUNT tWindowHunt: Setting of the time window for the window hunting function. This function is activated when the number of contradictory commands to the tap changer exceeds the specified number given by NoOpWindow within the time tWindowHunt. NoOpWindow: Setting of the number of contradictory tap changer operations (RAISE, LOWER, RAISE, LOWER etc.) required during the time window tWindowHunt to activate the signal HUNTING.
Power
P>: When the active power exceeds the value given by this setting, the output PGTFWD will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the setting is given with sign, which effectively means that a negative value of P> means an active power greater than a value in the reverse direction. This is shown in figure 287 where a negative value of P> means pickup for all values to the right of the setting. Reference is made to figure 282 for definition of forward and reverse direction of power through the transformer.
P>
IEC06000634 V2 EN
P
en06000634_2_en.vsd
Figure 287:
Setting of a negative value for P>
P<: When the active power falls below the value given by this setting, the output PLTREV will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the setting is given with sign, which effectively means that, for example a positive value of P< means an active power less than a value in the forward direction. This is shown in figure 288 where a positive value of P< means pickup for all values to the left of the setting. Reference is made to figure 282 for definition of forward and reverse direction of power through the transformer.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
P<
IEC06000635 V2 EN
en06000635_2_en.vsd
Figure 288:
Setting of a positive value for P<
Q>: When the reactive power exceeds the value given by this setting, the output QGTFWD will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the setting is given with sign, which effectively means that the function picks up for all values of reactive power greater than the set value, similar to the functionality for P>. Q<: When the reactive power in reverse direction falls below the value given by this setting, the output QLTREV will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the setting is given with sign, which effectively means that the function picks up for all values of reactive power less than the set value, similar to the functionality for P<. tPower: Time delay for activation of the power monitoring output signals (PGTFWD, PLTREV, QGTFWD and QLTREV).
Parallel control (ParCtrl)

OperationPAR: Setting of the method for parallel operation. OperCCBlock: This setting enables/disables blocking if the circulating current exceeds CircCurrLimit. CircCurrLimit: Pick up value for the circulating current blocking function. The setting is made in percent of I2Base. tCircCurr: Time delay for the circulating current blocking function. Comp: When parallel operation with the circulating current method is used, this setting increases or decreases the influence of the circulating current on the regulation. If the transformers are connected to the same bus on the HV- as well as the LVside, Comp can be calculated with the following formula which is valid for any number of two-winding transformers in parallel, irrespective if the transformers are of different size and short circuit impedance.
Comp = a
EQUATION1941 V1 EN
2 DU 100% np
(Equation 429)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
where: DU is the deadband setting in percent. n denotes the desired number of difference in tap position between the transformers, that shall give a voltage deviation Udi which corresponds to the dead-band setting. p is the tap step (in % of transformer nominal voltage). a is a safety margin that shall cover component tolerances and other non-linear measurements at different tap positions (for example, transformer reactances changes from rated value at the ends of the regulation range). In most cases a value of a = 1.25 serves well.
This calculation gives a setting of Comp that will always initiate an action (start timer) when the transformers have n tap positions difference. OperSimTap: Enabling/disabling the functionality to allow only one transformer at a time to execute a Lower/Raise command. This setting is applicable only to the circulating current method, and when enabled, consecutive tappings of the next transformer (if required) will be separated with the time delay t2. OperUsetPar: Enables/disables the use of a common setting for the target voltage USet. This setting is applicable only to the circulating current method, and when enabled, a mean value of the USet values for the transformers in the same parallel group will be calculated and used. OperHoming: Enables/disables the homing function. Applicable for parallel control with the circulating current method, as well for parallel control with the masterfollower method. VTmismatch: Setting of the level for activation of the output VTALARM in case the voltage measurement in one transformer bay deviates to the mean value of all voltage measurements in the parallel group. tVTmismatch: Time delay for activation of the output VTALARM. T1RXOP.......T8RXOP: This setting is set On for every transformer that can participate in a parallel group with the transformer in case. For this transformer (own transformer), the setting must always be Off. TapPosOffs: This setting gives the tap position offset in relation to the master so that the follower can follow the masters tap position including this offset. Applicable when regulating in the follow tap command mode. MFPosDiffLim: When the difference (including a possible offset according to TapPosOffs) between a follower and the master reaches the value in this setting, then the output OUTOFPOS in the Automatic voltage control for tap changer,
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
parallel control TR8ATCC function block of the follower will be activated after the time delay tMFPosDiff. tMFPosDiff: Time delay for activation of the output OUTOFPOS.
Transformer name
TRFNAME: Non-compulsory transformer name. This setting is not used for any purpose by the voltage control function.
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC general settings
LowVoltTap: This gives the tap position for the lowest LV-voltage. HighVoltTap: This gives the tap position for the highest LV-voltage. mALow: The mA value that corresponds to the lowest tap position. Applicable when reading of the tap position is made via a mA signal. mAHigh: The mA value that corresponds to the highest tap position. Applicable when reading of the tap position is made via a mA signal. CodeType: This setting gives the method of tap position reading. UseParity: Sets the parity check On/Off for tap position reading when this is made by Binary, BCD, or Gray code. tStable: This is the time that needs to elapse after a new tap position has been reported to TCMYLTC until it is accepted. CLFactor: This is the factor designated a in equation 429. When a tap changer operates at nominal load current(current measured on the HV-side), the ContactLife counter decrements with 1, irrespective of the setting of CLFactor. The setting of this factor gives the weighting of the deviation with respect to the load current. InitCLCounter: The ContactLife counter monitors the remaining number of operations (decremental counter). The setting InitCLCounter then gives the start value for the counter that is, the total number of operations at rated load that the tap changer is designed for. EnabTapCmd: This setting enables/disables the lower and raise commands to the tap changer. It shall be On for voltage control, and Off for tap position feedback to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF or T3WPDIF. TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC Setting group
General
Operation: Switching the TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function On/Off. IBase: Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side of the transformer.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
tTCTimeout: This setting gives the maximum time interval for a raise or lower command to be completed. tPulseDur: Length of the command pulse (URAISE/ULOWER) to the tap changer. It shall be noticed that this pulse has a fixed extension of 4 seconds that adds to the setting value of tPulseDur.
3.12.4.3
Table 167:
Name Operation I1Base I2Base UBase MeasMode
Setting parameters
TR1ATCC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1 L2 L3 L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 PosSeq Off On Off On Off Auto AutoMan 1.0 - 100.0 85.0 - 120.0 0.2 - 9.0 0.1 - 9.0 80 - 180 70 - 120 50 - 120 Constant Inverse 3 - 1000 Constant Inverse Unit A A kV Step 1 1 0.05 Default Off 3000 3000 400.00 PosSeq Description Operation Off / On Base setting for HV current level in A Base setting for LV current level in A Base setting for voltage level in kV Selection of measured voltage and current
TotalBlock AutoBlock FSDMode
Off Off Off
Total block of the voltage control function Block of the automatic mode in voltage control function Fast step down function activation mode
tFSD USet UDeadband UDeadbandInner Umax Umin Ublock t1Use t1 t2Use
s %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB s -
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 1 -
15.0 100.0 1.2 0.9 105 80 80 Constant 60 Constant
Time delay for lower command when fast step down mode is activated Voltage control set voltage, % of rated voltage Outer voltage deadband, % of rated voltage Inner voltage deadband, % of rated voltage Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated voltage Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated voltage Undervoltage block level, % of rated voltage Activation of long inverse time delay Time delay (long) for automatic control commands Activation of short inverse time delay

Name t2 tMin OperationLDC OperCapaLDC Rline Xline LVAConst1 LVAConst2 LVAConst3 LVAConst4 VRAuto OperationRA tRevAct RevActLim Iblock HourHuntDetect DayHuntDetect tWindowHunt NoOpWindow P> P< Q> Q< tPower Values (Range) 1 - 1000 3 - 120 Off On Off On 0.00 - 150.00 -150.00 - 150.00 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 Off On 30 - 6000 0 - 100 0 - 250 0 - 30 0 - 100 1 - 120 3 - 30 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 1 - 6000 Unit s s ohm ohm %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB s %IB1 %IB1 Op/H Op/D Min Op/W MW MW MVAr MVAr s Step 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 Default 15 5 Off Off 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Off 60 95 150 30 100 60 30 1000 -1000 1000 -1000 10 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Time delay (short) for automatic control commands Minimum operating time in inverse mode Operation line voltage drop compensation LDC compensation for capacitive load Line resistance, primary values, in ohm Line reactance, primary values, in ohm Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Load voltage auto correction, % of rated voltage Enable block from reverse action supervision Duration time for the reverse action block signal Current limit for reverse action block in % of I1Base Overcurrent block level, % of rated current Level for number of counted raise/lower within one hour Level for number of counted raise/lower within 24 hour Time window for hunting alarm, minutes Hunting detection alarm, max operations/ window Alarm level of active power in forward direction Alarm level of active power in reverse direction Alarm level of reactive power in forward direction Alarm level of reactive power in reverse direction Time delay for alarms from power supervision
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 168:
Name TRFNAME Xr2 CmdErrBk
TR1ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0 - 13 0.1 - 200.0 Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto&Man Block Unit ohm Step 1 0.1 Default NAME#-15 0.5 Auto Block Description User define string for OUT signal 15 Transformer reactance in primary ohms on ATCC side Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for command error Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for overcurrent Alarm or auto&man partial block for overvoltage Alarm or auto partial block for reverse action Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for tap changer error Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos sup Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for undervoltage Alarm or auto&man partial block for undervoltage
OCBk
Auto&Man Block
OVPartBk RevActPartBk TapChgBk
Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block
TapPosBk
Auto Block
UVBk
Auto Block
UVPartBk
Alarm
Table 169:
Name Operation I1Base I2Base UBase MeasMode
TR8ATCC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1 L2 L3 L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 PosSeq -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 Off On Unit A A kV Step 1 1 0.05 Default Off 3000 3000 400.00 PosSeq Description Operation Off / On Base setting for HV current level in A Base setting for LV current level in A Base setting for voltage level in kV Selection of measured voltage and current
Q1 Q2 Q3 TotalBlock
MVAr MVAr MVAr -
0.01 0.01 0.01 -
0 0 0 Off
Size of cap/reactor bank 1 in MVAr, >0 for C and <0 for L Size of cap/reactor bank 2 in MVAr, >0 for C and <0 for L Size of cap/reactor bank 3 in MVAr, >0 for C and <0 for L Total block of the voltage control function

Name AutoBlock FSDMode Values (Range) Off On Off Auto AutoMan 1.0 - 100.0 85.0 - 120.0 0.2 - 9.0 0.1 - 9.0 80 - 180 70 - 120 50 - 120 Constant Inverse 3 - 1000 Constant Inverse 1 - 1000 3 - 120 Off On Off On 0.00 - 150.00 -150.00 - 150.00 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 -20.0 - 20.0 Off On 30 - 6000 Unit Step Default Off Off Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Block of the automatic mode in voltage control function Fast step down function activation mode
tFSD USet UDeadband UDeadbandInner Umax Umin Ublock t1Use t1 t2Use t2 tMin OperationLDC OperCapaLDC Rline Xline LVAConst1 LVAConst2 LVAConst3 LVAConst4 VRAuto OperationRA tRevAct
s %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB s s s ohm ohm %UB %UB %UB %UB %UB s
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1
15.0 100.0 1.2 0.9 105 80 80 Constant 60 Constant 15 5 Off Off 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Off 60
Time delay for lower command when fast step down mode is activated Voltage control set voltage, % of rated voltage Outer voltage deadband, % of rated voltage Inner voltage deadband, % of rated voltage Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated voltage Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated voltage Undervoltage block level, % of rated voltage Activation of long inverse time delay Time delay (long) for automatic control commands Activation of short inverse time delay Time delay (short) for automatic control commands Minimum operating time in inverse mode Operation line voltage drop compensation LDC compensation for capacitive load Line resistance, primary values, in ohm Line reactance, primary values, in ohm Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated voltage Load voltage auto correction, % of rated voltage Enable block from reverse action supervision Duration time for the reverse action block signal
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0 - 100 0 - 250 0 - 30 0 - 100 1 - 120 3 - 30 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 -9999.99 - 9999.99 1 - 6000 Off CC MF Off On 0.0 - 20000.0 0 - 1000 0 - 2000 Off On Off On Off On 0.5 - 10.0 1 - 600 Off On Off On Off On Off On Unit %IB1 %IB1 Op/H Op/D Min Op/W MW MW MVAr MVAr s Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 Default 95 150 30 100 60 30 1000 -1000 1000 -1000 10 Off Description Current limit for reverse action block in % of I1Base Overcurrent block level, % of rated current Level for number of counted raise/lower within one hour Level for number of counted raise/lower within 24 hour Time window for hunting alarm, minutes Hunting detection alarm, max operations/ window Alarm level of active power in forward direction Alarm level of active power in reverse direction Alarm level of reactive power in forward direction Alarm level of reactive power in reverse direction Time delay for alarms from power supervision Parallel operation, Off/CirculatingCurrent/ MasterFollower Enable block from circulating current supervision Block level for circulating current Time delay for block from circulating current Compensation parameter in % for Circulating Current Simultaneous tapping prohibited Use common voltage set point for parallel operation Activate homing function Alarm level for VT supervision, % of rated voltage Time delay for VT supervision alarm Receive block operation from parallel transformer1 Receive block operation from parallel transformer2 Receive block operation from parallel transformer3 Receive block operation from parallel transformer4
Name RevActLim Iblock HourHuntDetect DayHuntDetect tWindowHunt NoOpWindow P> P< Q> Q< tPower OperationPAR
OperCCBlock CircCurrLimit tCircCurr Comp OperSimTap OperUsetPar OperHoming VTmismatch tVTmismatch T1RXOP T2RXOP T3RXOP T4RXOP
%IB2 s % %UB s -
0.1 1 1 0.1 1 -
On 100.0 30 100 Off Off Off 10.0 10 Off Off Off Off

Name T5RXOP T6RXOP T7RXOP T8RXOP TapPosOffs MFPosDiffLim tMFPosDiff Values (Range) Off On Off On Off On Off On -5 - 5 1 - 20 0 - 6000 Unit s Step 1 1 1 Default Off Off Off Off 0 1 60 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Receive block operation from parallel transformer5 Receive block operation from parallel transformer6 Receive block operation from parallel transformer7 Receive block operation from parallel transformer8 Tap position offset in relation to the master Limit for tap pos difference from master Time for tap pos difference from master
Table 170:
Name TrfId
TR8ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 0 - 13 0.1 - 200.0 0 - 60 Off On Follow Cmd Follow Tap Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Alarm Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Unit Step Default T1 Description Identity of transformer
TRFNAME Xr2 tAutoMSF OperationAdapt MFMode CircCurrBk
ohm s -
1 0.1 1 -
NAME#-15 0.5 10 Off Follow Cmd Alarm
User define string for OUT signal 15 Transformer reactance in primary ohms on ATCC side Time delay for command for auto follower Enable adapt mode Select follow tap or follow command Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for high circ current Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for command error Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for overcurrent Alarm or auto block for tap position difference in MF Alarm or auto&man partial block for overvoltage Alarm or auto partial block for reverse action Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for tap changer error
CmdErrBk
Auto Block
OCBk
Auto&Man Block
MFPosDiffBk OVPartBk RevActPartBk TapChgBk
Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto Block Auto&Man Block Alarm Auto&Man Block Unit Step Default Auto Block Description Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos sup Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for undervoltage Alarm or auto&man partial block for undervoltage
Name TapPosBk
UVBk
Auto Block
UVPartBk
Alarm
Table 171:
Name Operation IBase tTCTimeout tPulseDur
TCMYLTC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 120 0.5 - 10.0 Unit A s s Step 1 1 0.1 Default Off 3000 5 1.5 Description Operation Off / On Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side Tap changer constant time-out Raise/lower command output pulse duration
Table 172:
Name LowVoltTap HighVoltTap mALow mAHigh CodeType
TCMYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 63 1 - 63 0.000 - 25.000 0.000 - 25.000 BIN BCD Gray SINGLE mA Off On 1 - 60 1.0 - 3.0 0 - 9999999 Off On Unit mA mA Step 1 1 0.001 0.001 Default 1 33 4.000 20.000 BIN Description Tap position for lowest voltage Tap position for highest voltage mA for lowest voltage tap position mA for highest voltage tap position Type of code conversion
UseParity tStable CLFactor InitCLCounter EnabTapCmd
s s -
1 0.1 1 -
Off 2 2.0 250000 On
Enable parity check Time after position change before the value is accepted Adjustable factor for contact life function CL counter start value Enable commands to tap changer
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 173:
Name Operation IBase tTCTimeout tPulseDur
TCLYLTC Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 120 0.5 - 10.0 Unit A s s Step 1 1 0.1 Default Off 3000 5 1.5 Description Operation Off / On Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side Tap changer constant time-out Raise/lower command output pulse duration
Table 174:
Name LowVoltTap HighVoltTap mALow mAHigh CodeType
TCLYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 63 1 - 63 0.000 - 25.000 0.000 - 25.000 BIN BCD Gray SINGLE mA Off On 1 - 60 1.0 - 3.0 0 - 9999999 Off On Unit mA mA Step 1 1 0.001 0.001 Default 1 33 4.000 20.000 BIN Description Tap position for lowest voltage Tap position for highest voltage mA for lowest voltage tap position mA for highest voltage tap position Type of code conversion
UseParity tStable CLFactor InitCLCounter EnabTapCmd
s s -
1 0.1 1 -
Off 2 2.0 250000 On
Enable parity check Time after position change before the value is accepted Adjustable factor for contact life function CL counter start value Enable commands to tap changer
3.12.5
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO
Function description Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation IEC 61850 identification SLGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.12.5.1
Application
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation function (SLGGIO) (or the selector switch function block, as it is also known) is used to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems. SLGGIO function block has two operating inputs (UP and DOWN), one blocking input (BLOCK) and one operator position input (PSTO). SLGGIO can be activated both from the local HMI and from external sources (switches), via the IED binary inputs. It also allows the operation from remote (like the station computer). SWPOSN is an integer value output, giving the actual output number. Since the number of positions of the switch can be established by settings (see below), one must be careful in coordinating the settings with the configuration (if one sets the number of positions to x in settings for example, there will be only the first x outputs available from the block in the configuration). Also the frequency of the (UP or DOWN) pulses should be lower than the setting tPulse. From the local HMI, there are two modes of operating the switch: from the menu and from the Single-line diagram (SLD).
3.12.5.2
Setting guidelines
The following settings are available for the Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) function: Operation: Sets the operation of the function On or Off. NrPos: Sets the number of positions in the switch (max. 32). This setting influence the behavior of the switch when changes from the last to the first position. OutType: Steady or Pulsed. tPulse: In case of a pulsed output, it gives the length of the pulse (in seconds). tDelay: The delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation. StopAtExtremes: Sets the behavior of the switch at the end positions if set to Disabled, when pressing UP while on first position, the switch will jump to the last position; when pressing DOWN at the last position, the switch will jump to the first position; when set to Enabled, no jump will be allowed.

3.12.5.3
Table 175:
Name Operation NrPos OutType tPulse tDelay StopAtExtremes
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameters
SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 2 - 32 Pulsed Steady 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60000.000 Disabled Enabled Unit s s Step 1 0.001 0.010 Default Off 32 Steady 0.200 0.000 Disabled Description Operation Off/On Number of positions in the switch Output type, steady or pulse Operate pulse duration, in [s] Time delay on the output, in [s] Stop when min or max position is reached
3.12.6
Selector mini switch VSGGIO

Function description Selector mini switch IEC 61850 identification VSGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.12.6.1
Application
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function is a multipurpose function used in the configuration tool in PCM600 for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch. VSGGIO can be used for both acquiring an external switch position (through the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs) and represent it through the single line diagram symbols (or use it in the configuration through the outputs POS1 and POS2) as well as, a command function (controlled by the PSTO input), giving switching commands through the CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21 outputs. The output POSITION is an integer output, showing the actual position as an integer number 0 3. An example where VSGGIO is configured to switch Autorecloser onoff from a button symbol on the local HMI is shown in Figure 289. The I and O buttons on the local HMI are normally used for onoff operations of the circuit breaker.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
VSGGIO INTONE PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2 NAM_POS1 NAM_POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21 ON OFF
INVERTER OUT INPUT
OFF ON
SMBRREC SETON
IEC07000112 V2 EN
Figure 289:
Control of Autorecloser from local HMI through Selector mini switch
VSGGIO is also provided with IEC 61850 communication so it can be controlled from SA system as well.
3.12.6.2
Setting guidelines
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can generate pulsed or steady commands (by setting the Mode parameter). When pulsed commands are generated, the length of the pulse can be set using the tPulse parameter. Also, being accessible on the single line diagram (SLD), this function block has two control modes (settable through CtlModel): Dir Norm and SBO Enh.
3.12.6.3
Table 176:
Name Operation CtlModel Mode tSelect tPulse
Setting parameters
VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Dir Norm SBO Enh Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s Step 0.001 0.001 Default Off Dir Norm Pulsed 30.000 0.200 Description Operation Off / On Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Operation mode Max time between select and execute signals Command pulse lenght
3.12.7
Generic double point function block DPGGIO

Function description IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions IEC 61850 identification DPGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is used to send three logical outputs to other systems or equipment in the substation. The three inputs are named OPEN, CLOSE and VALID, since this function block is intended to be used as a position indicator block in interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.
3.12.7.2
Setting guidelines
3.12.8
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO

Function description Single point generic control 8 signals IEC 61850 identification SPC8GGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.12.8.1
Application
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks. PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Even if PSTO can be configured to allow LOCAL or ALL operator positions, the only functional position usable with the SPC8GGIO function block is REMOTE.
3.12.8.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function are set via the local HMI or PCM600. Operation: turning the function operation On/Off. There are two settings for every command output (totally 8): Latchedx: decides if the command signal for output x is Latched (steady) or Pulsed.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
tPulsex: if Latchedx is set to Pulsed, then tPulsex will set the length of the pulse (in seconds).
3.12.8.3
Table 177:
Name Operation Latched1 tPulse1 Latched2 tPulse2 Latched3 tPulse3 Latched4 tPulse4 Latched5 tPulse5 Latched6 tPulse6 Latched7 tPulse7 Latched8 tPulse8
Setting parameters
SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Unit s s s s s s s s Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default Off Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Pulsed 0.10 Description Operation Off/On Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 1 Output1 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 2 Output2 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 3 Output3 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 4 Output4 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 5 Output5 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 6 Output6 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 7 Output7 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 8 Output8 pulse time
3.12.9
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS

Function description AutomationBits, command function for DNP3 IEC 61850 identification AUTOBITS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.12.9.1
Application
Automation bits, command function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the
651
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
DNP3.0 protocol.The AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).AUTOBITS function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters are regarded as appropriate. For example, pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart. For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to the Communication manual.
3.12.9.2
Setting guidelines
AUTOBITS function block has one setting, (Operation: On/Off) enabling or disabling the function. These names will be seen in the DNP3 communication management tool in PCM600.
3.12.9.3
Table 178:
Name Operation
Setting parameters
DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation mode Off / On
Table 179:
Name Operation BaudRate
CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off Serial-Mode 300 Bd 600 Bd 1200 Bd 2400 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Four-wire Two-wire Unit Step Default Off 9600 Bd Description Operation mode Baud-rate for serial port
WireMode
Two-wire
RS485 wire mode
Table 180:
Name DLinkConfirm
CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Never Sometimes Always 0.000 - 60.000 0 - 255 Unit Step Default Never Description Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout DLinkRetries
s -
0.001 1
2.000 3
Data-link confirm timeout in s Data-link maximum retries
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 20 - 2048 20 - 2048 1-2 No Even Odd 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s Step 0.001 1 1 1 Default 0.000 2048 2048 1 Even Description Rx to Tx minimum delay in s Application layer maximum Rx fragment size Application layer maximum Tx fragment size Stop bits Parity
Name tRxToTxMinDel ApLayMaxRxSize ApLayMaxTxSize StopBits Parity
tRTSWarmUp tRTSWarmDown tBackOffDelay tMaxRndDelBkOf
s s s s
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.050 0.100
RTS warm-up in s RTS warm-down in s RS485 back-off delay in s RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s
Table 181:
Name Operation
CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 0 - 65535 Unit Step Default Off Description Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast
1 1 1 1
20000 20000 20000 0
TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master
Table 182:
Name ApLayMaxRxSize ApLayMaxTxSize
CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 20 - 2048 20 - 2048 Unit Step 1 1 Default 2048 2048 Description Application layer maximum Rx fragment size Application layer maximum Tx fragment size
Table 183:
Name Operation

1 1 1 1
20000 20000 20000 0
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 184:

Table 185:
Name Operation

1 1 1 1
20000 20000 20000 0
Table 186:

Table 187:
Name Operation

1 1 1 1
20000 20000 20000 0
Table 188:

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 189:
Name Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar
MSTRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT Unit Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTim e Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar
3:DIChWithRelTim e
Object 4, default variation
Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar
2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF
Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 190:
Name ValMasterAddr AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline UREvClassMask
MSTRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) No Yes No Yes 0.00 - 300.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes 30 - 3600 No Yes No Yes Unit s Step 0.01 Default Yes Yes 10.00 Yes Yes Yes No Off Description Validate source (master) address Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 tUREvBufTout1 UREvCntThold2 tUREvBufTout2 UREvCntThold3 tUREvBufTout3 DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime
s s s s s s -
1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 -
5 5.00 30.00 5 5.00 5 5.00 5 5.00 No 1800 No Yes
Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 Unit s Step 0.1 Default No Yes 30.0 Description Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout
Name Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout
Table 191:
Name Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar
MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e 1:DIWithoutFlag 2:DIWithFlag 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Unit IP Address IP Address Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTim e Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
1:DIWithoutFlag 3:DIChWithRelTim e

Name Obj22DefVar Values (Range) 1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT Unit Step Default 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 192:
Name AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes ConfMultFrag UREnable UREvClassMask
MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) No Yes 0.00 - 300.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 Unit s Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Yes Yes Off Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 tUREvBufTout1 UREvCntThold2
s s s -
1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 1
5 5.00 30.00 5 5.00 5
Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes LocalTime UTC No Yes 30 - 3600 No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Unit s s s s s s Step 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.1 1 1 Default 5.00 5 5.00 No UTC No 1800 No No Yes 30.0 0 10 Description Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full External time format Allow DNP to set time in IED Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
Name tUREvBufTout2 UREvCntThold3 tUREvBufTout3 DelOldBufFull ExtTimeFormat DNPToSetTime tSynchTimeout TSyncReqAfTout Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT
Table 193:

Values (Range) Off On 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e 1:DIWithoutFlag 2:DIWithFlag Unit IP Address IP Address Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTim e Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag

Name Obj4DefVar Values (Range) 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT Unit Step Default 3:DIChWithRelTim e Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 194:

Values (Range) No Yes 0.00 - 300.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 Unit s Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Yes Yes Off Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0 - 10 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes LocalTime UTC No Yes 30 - 3600 No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Unit s s s s s s s s s Step 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.1 1 1 Default 5 5.00 30.00 5 5.00 5 5.00 5 5.00 No UTC No 1800 No No Yes 30.0 0 10 Description Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full External time format Allow DNP to set time in IED Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
Name UROfflineRetry tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 tUREvBufTout1 UREvCntThold2 tUREvBufTout2 UREvCntThold3 tUREvBufTout3 DelOldBufFull ExtTimeFormat DNPToSetTime tSynchTimeout TSyncReqAfTout Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT
Table 195:
Name Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr

Values (Range) Off On 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 Unit IP Address Step 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address

Name MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar Values (Range) 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e 1:DIWithoutFlag 2:DIWithFlag 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT Unit IP Address Step 1 Default 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTim e Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 196:
Name AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Values (Range) No Yes 0.00 - 300.00 No Yes Unit s Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes LocalTime UTC No Yes 30 - 3600 No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Unit Step Default Yes Yes Off Description Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
Name ConfMultFrag UREnable UREvClassMask
UROfflineRetry tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 tUREvBufTout1 UREvCntThold2 tUREvBufTout2 UREvCntThold3 tUREvBufTout3 DelOldBufFull ExtTimeFormat DNPToSetTime tSynchTimeout TSyncReqAfTout Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT
s s s s s s s s s
1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.1 1 1
5 5.00 30.00 5 5.00 5 5.00 5 5.00 No UTC No 1800 No No Yes 30.0 0 10
Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full External time format Allow DNP to set time in IED Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 197:

Values (Range) Off On 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e 1:DIWithoutFlag 2:DIWithFlag 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT Unit IP Address IP Address Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTim e Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Obj30DefVar
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 198:

Values (Range) No Yes 0.00 - 300.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes LocalTime UTC No Yes 30 - 3600 No Yes No Yes No Yes Unit s Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Yes Yes Off Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 tUREvBufTout1 UREvCntThold2 tUREvBufTout2 UREvCntThold3 tUREvBufTout3 DelOldBufFull ExtTimeFormat DNPToSetTime tSynchTimeout TSyncReqAfTout Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint
s s s s s s -
1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 -
5 5.00 30.00 5 5.00 5 5.00 5 5.00 No UTC No 1800 No No Yes
Unsolicited response retries before offline retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full External time format Allow DNP to set time in IED Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point

Name tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT Values (Range) 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Unit s s s Step 0.1 1 1 Default 30.0 0 10 Description Select timeout
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer
3.12.10
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

Function description Single command, 16 signals IEC 61850 identification SINGLECMD IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.12.10.1
Application
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) is a common function and always included in the IED. The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. Together with the configuration logic circuits, the user can govern pulses or steady output signals for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. Figure 290 shows an application example of how the user can connect SINGLECMD via configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of command control is normally carried out by sending a pulse to the binary outputs of the IED. Figure 290 shows a close operation. An open breaker operation is performed in a similar way but without the synchro-check condition.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Single command function

SINGLECMD
Configuration logic circuits
Close CB1
CMDOUTy
OUTy
Userdefined conditions Synchrocheck
&
en04000206.vsd
IEC04000206 V2 EN
Figure 290:
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker via configuration logic circuits
Figure 291 and figure 292 show other ways to control functions, which require steady On/Off signals. Here, the output is used to control built-in functions or external devices.

SINGLECMD
Function n
Function n
CMDOUTy
OUTy
en04000207.vsd
IEC04000207 V2 EN
Figure 291:
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in functions
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

SINGLESMD
Configuration logic circuits
Device 1
CMDOUTy
OUTy
Userdefined conditions
&
en04000208.vsd
IEC04000208 V2 EN
Figure 292:
Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external devices via configuration logic circuits
3.12.10.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) are set via the local HMI or PCM600. Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CMDOUTy which includes the user defined name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. Off, sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. Steady, sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. Pulse, gives a pulse with 100 ms duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means the configured logic connected to the command function block may not have a cycle time longer than the cycle time for the command function block.
3.12.10.3
Table 199:
Name Mode
Setting parameters
SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off Steady Pulsed Unit Step Default Off Description Operation mode
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
3.13
3.13.1
Scheme communication
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH
Function description Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification ECPSCH IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 85
3.13.1.1
Application
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels. One communication channel is used in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal if required. The performance and security of this function is directly related to the transmission channel speed and security against false or lost signals. In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison in permissive schemes, a short operate time of the protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance. During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the autoreclosing device must block the directional comparison earth-fault communication scheme. The communication logic module enables blocking as well as permissive under/ overreaching schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weakend infeed and current reversal, included in the Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) function. Metallic communication paths adversely affected by fault generated noise may not be suitable for conventional permissive schemes that rely on signal transmitted during a protected line fault. With power line carrier, for example, the communication signal may be attenuated by the fault, especially when the fault is close to the line end, thereby disabling the communication channel. To overcome the lower dependability in permissive schemes, an unblocking function can be used. Use this function at older, less reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication, where the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal during the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
security time is used as a CR signal. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. Set the tSecurity to 35 ms.
3.13.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following settings can be done for the scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection function: Operation: Off or On. SchemeType: This parameter can be set to Off , Intertrip, Permissive UR, Permissive OR or Blocking. tCoord: Delay time for trip from ECPSCH function. For Permissive under/ overreaching schemes, typically be set to 50-60 ms to avoid problems at for example breaker opening. For Blocking scheme, the setting should be minimum: the maximum signal transmission time +10 ms. Unblock: Select Off if unblocking scheme with no alarm for loss of guard is used. Set to Restart if unblocking scheme with alarm for loss of guard is used.
3.13.1.3
Table 200:
Name Operation SchemeType
Setting parameters
ECPSCH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Step Default Off Permissive UR Description Operation Off / On Scheme type, Mode of Operation
tCoord tSendMin
s s
0.001 0.001
0.035 0.100
Communication scheme coordination time Minimum duration of a carrier send signal
Table 201:
Name Unblock
ECPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off NoRestart Restart 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Step Default Off Description Operation mode of unblocking logic
tSecurity
0.001
0.035
Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH
Function description Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification ECRWPSCH IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 85
3.13.2
3.13.2.1
Application Fault current reversal logic

Figure 293 and figure 294 show a typical system condition, which can result in a fault current reversal. Note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 after the breaker opening. This can cause an unselective trip on line L2 if the current reversal logic does not block the permissive overreaching scheme in the IED at B:2.
Strong source A L2 A:2
IEC99000043 V1 EN
L1 A:1 B:1 B
Weak source
B:2
99000043.vsd
Figure 293:
Initial condition
Strong source A
L1 A:1 L2 A:2 B:2 B:1 B
Weak source
99000044.vsd
IEC99000044 V1 EN
Figure 294:
Current distribution after the breaker at B:1 is opened
When breaker on the parallel line operates, the fault current on the non faulty line is reversed. The IED at B:2 recognizes now the fault in forward direction. Together with the remaining received signal it will trip the breaker in B:2. To ensure that this does not occur, the permissive overreaching function needs to be blocked by IRVL, until the received signal is reset.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The IED at remote end, where the forward direction element was initially activated, must reset before the send signal is initiated from B:2. The delayed reset of output signal IRVL also ensures the send signal from IED B:2 is held back until the forward direction element is reset in IED A:2.
Weak-end infeed logic
Figure 295 shows a typical system condition that can result in a missing operation. Note that there is no fault current from node B. This causes that the IED at B cannot detect the fault and trip the breaker in B. To cope with this situation, a selectable weak-end infeed logic is provided for the permissive overreaching scheme.
Strong source A L1 B Weak source
99000054.vsd
IEC99000054 V1 EN
Figure 295:
Initial condition
3.13.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The current reversal function is set on or off by setting the parameter CurrRev to On or Off. Time delays shall be set for the timers tPickUpRev and tDelayRev. tPickUpRev is chosen shorter (<80%) than the breaker opening time, but minimum 20 ms. tDelayRev is chosen at a minimum to the sum of protection reset time and the communication reset time. A minimum tDelayRev setting of 40 ms is recommended. The reset time of the directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4PTOC) is typically 25 ms. If other type of residual overcurrent protection is used in the remote line end, its reset time should be used. The signal propagation time is in the range 3 10 ms/km for most types of communication media. In communication networks small additional time delays are added in multiplexers and repeaters. Theses delays are less than 1 ms per process. It is often stated that the total propagation time is less than 5 ms. When a signal arrives or ends there is a decision time to be added. This decision time is highly dependent on the interface between communication and protection used. In many cases external interface (teleprotection equipment) is used. This equipment makes a decision and gives a binary signal to the protection device. In
Current reversal
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
case of analog teleprotection equipment typical decision time is in the range 10 30 ms. For digital teleprotection equipment this time is in the range 2 10 ms. If the teleprotection equipment is integrated in the protection IED the decision time can be slightly reduced. Below the principle time sequence of signaling at current reversal is shown.
Protection Function
TeleProtection Equipment
Telecommunication System
TeleProtection Equipment
Protection Function
CS from the protection function, operating and reset time
CS initiation to the communication system, operating and reset time
CS propagation, propagation
CR selection and decision, operating and reset time
CR to the protection function, operating and reset time
Sending protection reset CR to teleprot. Protection CS initiation eq. pick-up
CR reception drop CR to prot. func drop
Fault occurs
CR to CS to prot. communication Fault current func drop reversal
Time Minimum setting of tDelay

IEC05000536 V1 EN
en05000536.vsd
Figure 296:
Time sequence of signaling at current reversal
The weak-end infeed can be set by setting the parameter WEI to Off, Echo or Echo & Trip. Operating zero sequence voltage when parameter WEI is set to Echo & Trip is set with 3U0>. The zero sequence voltage for a fault at the remote line end and appropriate fault resistance is calculated. To avoid unwanted trip from the weak-end infeed logic (if spurious signals should occur), set the operate value of the broken delta voltage level detector (3U0) higher than the maximum false network frequency residual voltage that can occur during normal service conditions. The recommended minimum setting is two times the false zero-sequence voltage during normal service conditions.
Weak-end infeed

3.13.2.3
Table 202:
Name CurrRev tPickUpRev tDelayRev WEI
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameters
ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off Echo Echo & Trip 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 2000.00 5 - 70 Unit s s Step 0.001 0.001 Default Off 0.020 0.060 Off Description Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic
tPickUpWEI UBase 3U0>
s kV %UB
0.001 0.05 1
0.000 400.00 25
Coordination time for the WEI logic Base setting for voltage level Neutral voltage setting for fault conditions measurement
3.14
3.14.1
Logic
Tripping logic SMPPTRC
Function description Tripping logic IEC 61850 identification SMPPTRC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 94
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
3.14.1.1
Application
All trip signals from the different protection functions shall be routed through the trip logic. In its simplest alternative the logic will only link the TRIP signal and make sure that it is long enough. Tripping logic SMPPTRC offers three different operating modes: Three-phase tripping for all fault types (3ph operating mode) Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults and three-phase tripping for multiphase and evolving faults (1ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions is not possible, or when external conditions request threephase tripping. Two-phase tripping for two-phase faults.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The three-phase trip for all faults offers a simple solution and is often sufficient in well meshed transmission systems and in sub-transmission systems. Since most faults, especially at the highest voltage levels, are single phase-to-earth faults, singlephase tripping can be of great value. If only the faulty phase is tripped, power can still be transferred on the line during the dead time that arises before reclosing. Singlephase tripping during single-phase faults must be combined with single pole reclosing. To meet the different double, 1 breaker and other multiple circuit breaker arrangements, two identical SMPPTRC function blocks may be provided within the IED. One SMPPTRC function block should be used for each breaker, if the line is connected to the substation via more than one breaker. Assume that single-phase tripping and autoreclosing is used on the line. Both breakers are then normally set up for 1/3-phase tripping and 1/3-phase autoreclosing. As an alternative, the breaker chosen as master can have single-phase tripping, while the slave breaker could have three-phase tripping and autoreclosing. In the case of a permanent fault, only one of the breakers has to be operated when the fault is energized a second time. In the event of a transient fault the slave breaker performs a three-phase reclosing onto the non-faulted line. The same philosophy can be used for two-phase tripping and autoreclosing. To prevent closing of a circuit breaker after a trip the function can block the closing. The two instances of the SMPPTRC function are identical except, for the name of the function block (SMPPTRC1 and SMPPTRC2). References will therefore only be made to SMPPTRC1 in the following description, but they also apply to SMPPTRC2.
Three-phase tripping
A simple application with three-phase tripping from the logic block utilizes a part of the function block. Connect the inputs from the protection function blocks to the input TRIN. If necessary (normally the case) use a logic OR block to combine the different function outputs to this input. Connect the output TRIP to the digital Output/ s on the IO board. This signal can also be used for other purposes internally in the IED. An example could be the starting of Breaker failure protection. The three outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 will always be activated at every trip and can be utilized on individual trip outputs if single-phase operating devices are available on the circuit breaker even when a three-phase tripping scheme is selected. Set the function block to Program = 3Ph and set the required length of the trip pulse to for example, tTripMin = 150ms. For special applications such as Lock-out refer to the separate section below. The typical connection is shown below in figure 297. Signals that are not used are dimmed.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SMPPTRC BLOCK Impedance protection zone 1 TRIP Impedance protection zone 3 TRIP Impedance protection zone 2 TRIP EF4PTOC TRIP BLKLKOUT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT
TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT
en05000544.vsd
IEC05000544 V2 EN
Figure 297:
Tripping logic SMPPTRC is used for a simple three-phase tripping application
Single- and/or three-phase tripping
The single-/three-phase tripping will give single-phase tripping for single-phase faults and three-phase tripping for multi-phase fault. The operating mode is always used together with a single-phase autoreclosing scheme. The single-phase tripping can include different options and the use of the different inputs in the function block. The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTREF are used for single-phase tripping for distance protection and directional earth fault protection as required. The inputs are combined with the phase selection logic and the start signals from the phase selector must be connected to the inputs PSL1, PSL2 and PSL3 to achieve the tripping on the respective single-phase trip outputs TRL1, TRL2 and TRL3. The Output TRIP is a general trip and activated independent of which phase is involved. Depending on which phases are involved the outputs TR1P, TR2P and TR3P will be activated as well. When single-phase tripping schemes are used a single-phase autoreclosing attempt is expected to follow. For cases where the autoreclosing is not in service or will not follow for some reason, the input Prepare Three-phase Trip P3PTR must be activated. This is normally connected to the respective output on the Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing function SESRSYN but can also be connected to other signals, for example an external logic signal. If two breakers are involved, one TR block instance and one SESRSYN instance is used for each breaker. This will ensure correct operation and behavior of each breaker.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The output Trip 3 Phase TR3P must be connected to the respective input in SESRSYN to switch SESRSYN to three-phase reclosing. If this signal is not activated SESRSYN will use single-phase reclosing dead time. Note also that if a second line protection is utilizing the same SESRSYN the three-phase trip signal must be generated, for example by using the three-trip relays contacts in series and connecting them in parallel to the TR3P output from the trip block. The trip logic also has inputs TRINL1, TRINL2 and TRINL3 where phase-selected trip signals can be connected. Examples can be individual phase inter-trips from remote end or internal/external phase selected trip signals, which are routed through the IED to achieve, for example SESRSYN, Breaker failure, and so on. Other back-up functions are connected to the input TRIN as described above. A typical connection for a single-phase tripping scheme is shown in figure 298.
Distance protection zone 2 TRIP Distance protection zone 3 TRIP Overcurrent protection TRIP
1
BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN
SMPPTRC TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT
Distance protection zone 1 TRIP
TRINL1 TRINL2
Phase Selection PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 TR3P
TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ
SMBRREC PREP3P
1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT
TR3P
RSTLKOUT
IEC05000545 V3 EN
Figure 298:
The trip logic function SMPPTRC used for single-phase tripping application
The single-/two-/three-phase tripping mode provides single-phase tripping for singlephase faults, two-phase tripping for two-phase faults and three-phase tripping for multi-phase faults. The operating mode is always used together with an autoreclosing scheme with setting Program = 1/2/3Ph or Program = 1/3Ph attempt. The functionality is very similar to the single-phase scheme described above. However SESRSYN must in addition to the connections for single phase above be
Single-, two- or three-phase tripping
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
informed that the trip is two phase by connecting the trip logic output TR2P to the respective input in SESRSYN.
Lock-out
This function block is provided with possibilities to initiate lock-out. The lock-out can be set to only activate the block closing output CLLKOUT or initiate the block closing output and also maintain the trip signal (latched trip). The lock-out can then be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the input reset Lock-Out RSTLKOUT. If external conditions are required to initiate Lock-out but not initiate trip this can be achieved by activating input SETLKOUT. The setting AutoLock = Off means that the internal trip will not activate lock-out so only initiation of the input SETLKOUT will result in lock-out. This is normally the case for overhead line protection where most faults are transient. Unsuccessful autoreclose and back-up zone tripping can in such cases be connected to initiate Lock-out by activating the input SETLKOUT.
Blocking of the function block
The function block can be blocked in two different ways. Its use is dependent on the application. Blocking can be initiated internally by logic, or by the operator using a communication channel. Total blockage of the trip function is done by activating the input BLOCK and can be used to block the output of the trip logic in the event of internal failures. Blockage of lock-out output by activating input BLKLKOUT is used for operator control of the lock-out function.
3.14.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for Tripping logic SMPPTRC are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following trip parameters can be set to regulate tripping. Operation: Sets the mode of operation. Off switches the tripping off. The normal selection is On. Program: Sets the required tripping scheme. Normally 3Ph or 1/2Ph are used. TripLockout: Sets the scheme for lock-out. Off only activates lock-out output. On activates the lock-out output and latching output contacts. The normal selection is Off. AutoLock: Sets the scheme for lock-out. Off only activates lock-out through the input SETLKOUT. On also allows activation from trip function itself. The normal selection is Off. tTripMin: Sets the required minimum duration of the trip pulse. It should be set to ensure that the breaker is tripped and if a signal is used to start Breaker failure protection CCRBRF longer than the back-up trip timer in CCRBRF. Normal setting is 0.150s.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
tWaitForPHS: Sets a duration after any of the inputs 1PTRZ or 1PTREF has been activated during which a phase selection must occur to get a single phase trip. If no phase selection has been achieved a three-phase trip will be issued after the time has elapsed.
3.14.1.3
Table 203:
Name Operation Program
Setting parameters
SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 3 phase 1ph/3ph 1ph/2ph/3ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.020 - 0.500 Unit Step Default On 1ph/3ph Description Operation Off / On Three ph; single or three ph; single, two or three ph trip Minimum duration of trip output signal Secures 3-pole trip when phase selection failed
tTripMin tWaitForPHS
s s
0.001 0.001
0.150 0.050
Table 204:
Name TripLockout AutoLock
SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off On Off On Unit Step Default Off Off Description On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch, Off: only outp On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, Off: only inp
3.14.2
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO

Function description Trip matrix logic IEC 61850 identification TMAGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.14.2.1
Application
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function is used to route trip signals and other logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED. TMAGGIO output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.
3.14.2.2
Setting guidelines
Operation: Operation of function On/Off. PulseTime: Defines the pulse time delay. When used for direct tripping of circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order
679
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils. OnDelay: Used to prevent output signals to be given for spurious inputs. Normally set to 0 or a low value. OffDelay: Defines a minimum on time for the outputs. When used for direct tripping of circuit breaker(s) the off delay time shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils. ModeOutputx: Defines if output signal OUTPUTx (where x=1-3) is Steady or Pulsed.
3.14.2.3
Table 205:
Name Operation PulseTime OnDelay OffDelay ModeOutput1 ModeOutput2 ModeOutput3
Setting parameters
TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.050 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Unit s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default On 0.150 0.000 0.000 Steady Steady Steady Description Operation Off / On Output pulse time Output on delay time Output off delay time Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
3.14.3
3.14.3.1
Configurable logic blocks

Application
A set of standard logic blocks, like AND, OR etc, and timers are available for adapting the IED configuration to the specific application needs. There are no settings for AND gates, OR gates, inverters or XOR gates. For normal On/Off delay and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set from the local HMI or via the PST tool. Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed on drop-out) always have a common setting value. For controllable gates, settable timers and SR flip-flops with memory, the setting parameters are accessible via the local HMI or via the PST tool.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Configuration
Logic is configured using the ACT configuration tool. Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs according to a fixed sequence with different cycle times. For each cycle time, the function block is given an serial execution number. This is shown when using the ACT configuration tool with the designation of the function block and the cycle time, see example below.
IEC09000695 V2 EN
Figure 299:
Example designation, serial execution number and cycle time for logic function
The execution of different function blocks within the same cycle is determined by the order of their serial execution numbers. Always remember this when connecting two or more logical function blocks in series. Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle time to function blocks with a slow cycle time. Remember to design the logic circuits carefully and always check the execution sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors, for example, race between functions.
3.14.3.2
Table 206:
Name T
Setting parameters
TIMER Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0.000 - 90000.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Description Time delay of function
Table 207:
Name T
PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 208:
Name Memory
SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operating mode of the memory function
Table 209:
Name Memory
RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operating mode of the memory function
Table 210:
Name Operation
GATE Group settings (basic)

Table 211:
Name Operation t
TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0.000 - 90000.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default Off 0.000 Description Operation Off/On Delay for settable timer n
3.14.4
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN

Function description Fixed signals IEC 61850 identification FXDSIGN IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.14.4.1
Application
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.
Example for use of GRP_OFF signal in FXDSIGN

The Restricted earth fault function REFPDIF can be used both for autotransformers and normal transformers. When used for auto-transformers, information from both windings parts, together with the neutral point current, needs to be available to the function. This means that three inputs are needed.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
REFPDIF I3PW1CT1 I3PW2CT1 I3P

IEC09000619 V3 EN
Figure 300:
REFPDIF function inputs for autotransformer application
For normal transformers only one winding and the neutral point is available. This means that only two inputs are used. Since all group connections are mandatory to be connected, the third input needs to be connected to something, which is the GRP_OFF signal in FXDSIGN function block.
REFPDIF I3PW1CT1 I3PW2CT1 I3P
FXDSIGN GRP_OFF
IEC09000620 V3 EN
Figure 301:
REFPDIF function inputs for normal transformer application
3.14.4.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
3.14.5
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Function description Boolean 16 to integer conversion IEC 61850 identification B16I IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.14.5.1
Application
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. It can be used for example, to connect logical output signals from a function (like distance protection) to integer inputs
683
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
from another function (like line differential protection). B16I does not have a logical node mapping.
3.14.5.2
Setting guidelines
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).
3.14.6
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI

Function description Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation IEC 61850 identification B16IFCVI IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.14.6.1
Application
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function B16IFCVI is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. B16IFCVI can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC 61850. These functions are very useful when you want to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by inputting an integer number. B16IFCVI has a logical node mapping in IEC 61850.
3.14.6.2
Setting guidelines
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).
3.14.7
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16

Function description Integer to boolean 16 conversion IEC 61850 identification IB16 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.14.7.1
Application
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. It can be used for example, to connect integer output signals from a function (like distance protection) to binary (logical) inputs in another function (like line differential protection). IB16 function does not have a logical node mapping.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).
3.14.7.2
3.14.8
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB

Function description Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IEC 61850 identification IB16FCVB IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.14.8.1
Application
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16FCVB function can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC 61850. These functions are very useful when the user wants to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by inputting an integer number. IB16FCVB function has a logical node mapping in IEC 61850.
3.14.8.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600)
3.15
3.15.1
Monitoring
Measurement

Function description Measurements IEC 61850 identification CVMMXN
P, Q, S, I, U, f
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
Phase current measurement
CMMXU
I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
Phase-phase voltage measurement
VMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
Current sequence component measurement
CMSQI
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
Voltage sequence measurement
VMSQI
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
Phase-neutral voltage measurement
VNMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
3.15.1.1
Application
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function. The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs. Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting. The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities: P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power PF: power factor U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude I: phase current amplitude F: power system frequency
Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical quantities: I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU) U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) (VMMXU, VNMMXU)
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage. The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600. The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequential quantities: I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle) U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and angle).
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

3.15.1.2 Zero clamping
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The measuring functions, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU and CVMMXN have no interconnections regarding any setting or parameter. Zero clampings are also entirely handled by the ZeroDb for each and every signal separately for each of the functions. For example, the zero clamping of U12 is handled by UL12ZeroDb in VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is handled by IL1ZeroDb in CMMXU ETC. Example how CVMMXN is operating: The following outputs can be observed on the local HMI under Monitoring/ Servicevalues/SRV1
S P Q PF ILAG ILEAD U I F Apparent three-phase power Active three-phase power Reactive three-phase power Power factor I lagging U I leading U System mean voltage, calculated according to selected mode System mean current, calculated according to selected mode Frequency
The settings for this function is found under Setting/General setting/Monitoring/ Service values/SRV1 It can be seen that: When system voltage falls below UGenZeroDB, the shown value for S, P, Q, PF, ILAG, ILEAD, U and F on the local HMI is forced to zero When system current falls below IGenZeroDB, the shown value for S, P, Q, PF, ILAG, ILEAD, U and F on the local HMI is forced to zero When the value of a single signal falls below the set dead band for that specific signal, the value shown on the local HMI is forced to zero. For example, if apparent three-phase power falls below SZeroDb the value for S on the local HMI is forced to zero.
3.15.1.3
Setting guidelines
The available setting parameters of the measurement function CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600. The parameters for the Measurement functions CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are set via the local HMI or PCM600.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operation: Off/On. Every function instance (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) can be taken in operation (On) or out of operation (Off). The following general settings can be set for the Measurement function (CVMMXN). PowAmpFact: Amplitude factor to scale power calculations. PowAngComp: Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U. Mode: Selection of measured current and voltage. There are 9 different ways of calculating monitored three-phase values depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. See parameter group setting table. k: Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I. UGenZeroDb: Minimum level of voltage in % of UBase used as indication of zero voltage (zero point clamping). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero. IGenZeroDb: Minimum level of current in % of IBase used as indication of zero current (zero point clamping). If measured value is below IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero. UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised object. IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised object. SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA. UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The following general settings can be set for the Phase-phase current measurement (CMMXU). IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The following general settings can be set for the Phase-phase voltage measurement (VMMXU). UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. UAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The following general settings can be set for all monitored quantities included in the functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) X in setting names below equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0. Xmin: Minimum value for analog signal X set directly in applicable measuring unit. Xmax: Maximum value for analog signal X. XZeroDb: Zero point clamping. A signal value less than XZeroDb is forced to zero. Observe the related zero point clamping settings in Setting group N for CVMMXN (UGenZeroDb and IGenZeroDb). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb and/or IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero and these settings will override XZeroDb. XRepTyp: Reporting type. Cyclic (Cyclic), amplitude deadband (Dead band) or integral deadband (Int deadband). The reporting interval is controlled by the parameter XDbRepInt. XDbRepInt: Reporting deadband setting. Cyclic reporting is the setting value and is reporting interval in seconds. Amplitude deadband is the setting value in % of measuring range. Integral deadband setting is the integral area, that is, measured value in % of measuring range multiplied by the time between two measured values. XHiHiLim: High-high limit. Set in applicable measuring unit. XHiLim: High limit. XLowLim: Low limit. XLowLowLim: Low-low limit. XLimHyst: Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits. All phase angles are presented in relation to defined reference channel. The parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".
Calibration curves
It is possible to calibrate the functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU) to get class 0.5 presentations of currents, voltages and powers. This is accomplished by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation curve will have the characteristic for
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
amplitude and angle compensation of currents as shown in figure 302 (example). The first phase will be used as reference channel and compared with the curve for calculation of factors. The factors will then be used for all related channels.
IEC05000652 V2 EN
Figure 302:
Calibration curves
Setting examples
Three setting examples, in connection to Measurement function (CVMMXN), are provided: Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a 400 kV OHL Measurement function (CVMMXN) application on the secondary side of a transformer Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a generator
For each of them detail explanation and final list of selected setting parameters values will be provided. The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
Measurement function application for a 400 kV OHL Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 303:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
400kV Busbar
800/1 A
400 0,1 / kV 3 3
IED
Q
400kV OHL
IEC09000039-1-EN V1 EN
Figure 303:
Single line diagram for 400 kV OHL application
In order to monitor, supervise and calibrate the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 303 it is necessary to do the following: 1. 2. 3. Set correctly CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef (see section "Analog inputs") using PCM600 for analog input channels Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to three-phase CT and VT inputs Set under General settings parameters for the Measurement function: general settings as shown in table 212. level supervision of active power as shown in table 213. calibration parameters as shown in table 214.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 212:
Setting Operation PowAmpFact
General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Short Description Operation Off/On Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Selected value On 1.000 Comments Function must be On It can be used during commissioning to achieve higher measurement accuracy. Typically no scaling is required It can be used during commissioning to achieve higher measurement accuracy. Typically no angle compensation is required. As well here required direction of P & Q measurement is towards protected object (as per IED internal default direction) All three phase-to-earth VT inputs are available Typically no additional filtering is required Set minimum voltage level to 25%. Voltage below 25% will force S, P and Q to zero. Set minimum current level to 3%. Current below 3% will force S, P and Q to zero. Set rated OHL phase-to-phase voltage Set rated primary CT current used for OHL
PowAngComp
Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U
0.0
Mode k UGenZeroDb
Selection of measured current and voltage Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Zero point clamping in % of Ubase Zero point clamping in % of Ibase
L1, L2, L3 0.00 25
IGenZeroDb
UBase IBase
Base setting for voltage level in kV Base setting for current level in A
400.00 800
Table 213:
Setting
Settings parameters for level supervision

Short Description Minimum value Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range Reporting type Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Selected value -750 750 3000 db 2 Comments Minimum expected load Maximum expected load Set zero point clamping to 45 MW that is, 3% of 1500 MW Select amplitude deadband supervision Set db=30 MW that is, 2% (larger changes than 30 MW will be reported) High alarm limit that is, extreme overload alarm High warning limit that is, overload warning Low warning limit. Not active Low alarm limit. Not active Set Hysteresis MW that is, 2%
PMin PMax PZeroDb PRepTyp PDbRepInt
PHiHiLim PHiLim PLowLim PLowLowlLim PLimHyst
600 500 -800 -800 2
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 214:
Setting
Settings for calibration parameters

Short Description Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle pre-calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle pre-calibration for current at 100% of Ir Selected value 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Comments
IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 UAmpComp5 UAmpComp30 UAmpComp100 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100
Measurement function application for a power transformer Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 304.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
110kV Busbar
200/1
31,5 MVA 110/36,75/(10,5) kV Yy0(d5)
IED
P 500/5
UL1L2 35 / 0,1kV
35kV Busbar
IEC09000040-1-EN V1 EN
Figure 304:
Single line diagram for transformer application
In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 304, it is necessary to do the following: 1. 2. 3. Set correctly all CT and VT and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef (see section "Analog inputs") data using PCM600 for analog input channels Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to LV side CT & VT inputs Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the following table 215:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 215:
Setting

Short description Operation Off/On Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U Selected value Comment Function must be On Typically no scaling is required Typically no angle compensation is required. However here the required direction of P & Q measurement is towards busbar (Not per IED internal default direction). Therefore angle compensation have to be used in order to get measurements in aliment with the required direction. Only UL1L2 phase-to-phase voltage is available Typically no additional filtering is required Set minimum voltage level to 25% Set minimum current level to 3% Set LV side rated phase-tophase voltage Set transformer LV winding rated current
Operation PowAmpFact PowAngComp
On
1.000 180.0
Mode
k UGenZeroDb IGenZeroDb UBase IBase
Selection of measured current and voltage Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Zero point clamping in % of Ubase Zero point clamping in % of Ibase Base setting for voltage level in kV Base setting for current level in A
L1L2 0.00 25 3 35.00 495
Measurement function application for a generator Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 305.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
220kV Busbar
300/1
100 MVA 242/15,65 kV Yd5
15 / 0,1kV
IED
UL1L2 , UL2L3
P 100MVA 15,65kV 4000/5
IEC09000041-1-EN V1 EN
Figure 305:
Single line diagram for generator application
In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 305, it is necessary to do the following: 1. 2. 3. Set correctly all CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef(see section "Analog inputs") using PCM600 for analog input channels Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to the generator CT & VT inputs Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the following table:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 216:
Setting Operation PowAmpFact PowAngComp

Short description Operation Off/On Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U Selected value On 1.000 0.0 Comment Function must be On Typically no scaling is required Typically no angle compensation is required. As well here required direction of P & Q measurement is towards protected object (as per IED internal default direction) Generator VTs are connected between phases (V-connected) Typically no additional filtering is required Set minimum voltage level to 25% Set minimum current level to 3% Set generator rated phase-tophase voltage Set generator rated current
Mode k UGenZeroDb IGenZeroDb UBase IBase
Selection of measured current and voltage Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Zero point clamping in % of Ubase Zero point clamping in % of Ibase Base setting for voltage level in kV Base setting for current level in A
Arone 0.00 25% 3 15,65 3690
3.15.1.4
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
Table 217:
Name SLowLim SLowLowLim SMin SMax SRepTyp
CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.0 - 2000.0 0.0 - 2000.0 0.0 - 2000.0 0.0 - 2000.0 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -2000.0 - 2000.0 -2000.0 - 2000.0 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -2000.0 - 2000.0 -2000.0 - 2000.0 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Unit %SB %SB %SB %SB Step 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Default 80.0 60.0 50.0 200.0 Cyclic Description Low limit in % of SBase Low Low limit in % of SBase Minimum value in % of SBase Maximum value in % of SBase Reporting type
PMin PMax PRepTyp
%SB %SB -
0.1 0.1 -
-200.0 200.0 Cyclic
Minimum value in % of SBase Maximum value in % of SBase Reporting type
QMin QMax QRepTyp
%SB %SB -
0.1 0.1 -
-200.0 200.0 Cyclic
Minimum value in % of SBase Maximum value in % of SBase Reporting type
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) -1.000 - 1.000 -1.000 - 1.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.0 - 200.0 0.0 - 200.0 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.0 - 500.0 0.0 - 500.0 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 0.000 - 100.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 200000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 0.000 - 6.000 -180.0 - 180.0 0.000 - 1.000 Unit Step 0.001 0.001 Default -1.000 1.000 Cyclic Description Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
Name PFMin PFMax PFRepTyp
UMin UMax URepTyp
%UB %UB -
0.1 0.1 -
50.0 200.0 Cyclic
Minimum value in % of UBase Maximum value in % of UBase Reporting type
IMin IMax IRepTyp
%IB %IB -
0.1 0.1 -
50.0 200.0 Cyclic
Minimum value in % of IBase Maximum value in % of IBase Reporting type
FrMin FrMax FrRepTyp
Hz Hz -
0.001 0.001 -
0.000 70.000 Cyclic
Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
Operation IBase UBase SBase Mode
A kV MVA -
1 0.05 0.05 -
Off 3000 400.00 2080.00 L1, L2, L3
Operation Off / On Base setting for current values in A Base setting for voltage value in kV Base setting for power values in MVA Selection of measured current and voltage
PowAmpFact PowAngComp k
Deg -
0.001 0.1 0.001
1.000 0.0 0.000
Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I
Table 218:
Name SDbRepInt SZeroDb SHiHiLim
CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 1 - 300 0 - 100000 0.0 - 2000.0 Unit Type m% %SB Step 1 1 0.1 Default 10 500 150.0 Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit in % of SBase

Name SHiLim SLimHyst PDbRepInt PZeroDb PHiHiLim PHiLim PLowLim PLowLowLim PLimHyst QDbRepInt QZeroDb QHiHiLim QHiLim QLowLim QLowLowLim QLimHyst PFDbRepInt PFZeroDb PFHiHiLim PFHiLim PFLowLim PFLowLowLim PFLimHyst UDbRepInt UZeroDb UHiHiLim UHiLim ULowLim ULowLowLim ULimHyst IDbRepInt IZeroDb IHiHiLim Values (Range) 0.0 - 2000.0 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 0 - 100000 -2000.0 - 2000.0 -2000.0 - 2000.0 -2000.0 - 2000.0 -2000.0 - 2000.0 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 0 - 100000 -2000.0 - 2000.0 -2000.0 - 2000.0 -2000.0 - 2000.0 -2000.0 - 2000.0 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 0 - 100000 -1.000 - 1.000 -1.000 - 1.000 -1.000 - 1.000 -1.000 - 1.000 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 0 - 100000 0.0 - 200.0 0.0 - 200.0 0.0 - 200.0 0.0 - 200.0 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 0 - 100000 0.0 - 500.0 Unit %SB % Type m% %SB %SB %SB %SB % Type m% %SB %SB %SB %SB % Type m% % Type m% %UB %UB %UB %UB % Type m% %IB Step 0.1 0.001 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.001 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.001 1 1 0.1 Default 120.0 5.000 10 500 150.0 120.0 -120.0 -150.0 5.000 10 500 150.0 120.0 -120.0 -150.0 5.000 10 500 1.000 0.800 -0.800 -1.000 5.000 10 500 150.0 120.0 80.0 60.0 5.000 10 500 150.0 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
High limit in % of SBase Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit in % of SBase High limit in % of SBase Low limit in % of SBase Low Low limit in % of SBase Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit in % of SBase High limit in % of SBase Low limit in % of SBase Low Low limit in % of SBase Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit in % of UBase High limit in % of UBase Low limit in % of UBase Low Low limit in % of UBase Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit in % of IBase
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.0 - 500.0 0.0 - 500.0 0.0 - 500.0 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 0 - 100000 0.000 - 100.000 0.000 - 100.000 0.000 - 100.000 0.000 - 100.000 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 100 1 - 100 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Unit %IB %IB %IB % Type m% Hz Hz Hz Hz % %UB %IB % % % % % % Deg Deg Deg Step 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 120.0 80.0 60.0 5.000 10 500 65.000 63.000 47.000 45.000 5.000 5 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Description High limit in % of IBase Low limit in % of IBase Low Low limit in % of IBase Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Zero point clamping in % of Ubase Zero point clamping in % of Ibase Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
Name IHiLim ILowLim ILowLowLim ILimHyst FrDbRepInt FrZeroDb FrHiHiLim FrHiLim FrLowLim FrLowLowLim FrLimHyst UGenZeroDb IGenZeroDb UAmpComp5 UAmpComp30 UAmpComp100 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100
Table 219:
Name IL1DbRepInt Operation IBase IL1Max IL1RepTyp
CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 300 Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Unit Type A A Step 1 1 0.001 Default 10 Off 3000 1000.000 Cyclic Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Base setting for current level in A Maximum value Reporting type

Name IL1AngDbRepInt IL2DbRepInt IL2Max IL2RepTyp Values (Range) 1 - 300 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 Unit Type Type A Step 1 1 0.001 Default 10 10 1000.000 Cyclic Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type
IL2AngDbRepInt IL3DbRepInt IL3Max IL3RepTyp
Type Type A -
1 1 0.001 -
10 10 1000.000 Cyclic
IL3AngDbRepInt
Type
10
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table 220:
Name IL1ZeroDb IL1HiHiLim IL1HiLim IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IL1LowLim IL1LowLowLim IAmpComp100 IAngComp5 IL1Min IAngComp30 IAngComp100 IL1LimHys IL2ZeroDb
CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 - 100.000 0 - 100000 Unit m% A A % % A A % Deg A Deg Deg % m% Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 Default 0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000 0 Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Minimum value Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 Unit A A A A A % m% A A A A A % Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000 0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000 Description High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
Name IL2HiHiLim IL2HiLim IL2LowLim IL2LowLowLim IL2Min IL2LimHys IL3ZeroDb IL3HiHiLim IL3HiLim IL3LowLim IL3LowLowLim IL3Min IL3LimHys
Table 221:
Name UL1DbRepInt Operation UBase UL1Max UL1RepTyp
VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 300 Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 Unit Type kV V Step 1 0.05 0.001 Default 10 Off 400.00 300000.000 Cyclic Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Base setting for voltage level in kV Maximum value Reporting type
UL1LimHys UL1AnDbRepInt UL2DbRepInt UL2Max
% Type Type V
0.001 1 1 0.001
5.000 10 10 300000.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value

Name UL2RepTyp Values (Range) Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 Unit Step Default Cyclic Description Reporting type
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
UL2LimHys UL2AnDbRepInt UL3DbRepInt UL3Max UL3RepTyp
% Type Type V -
0.001 1 1 0.001 -
5.000 10 10 300000.000 Cyclic
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type
UL3LimHys UL3AnDbRepInt
% Type
0.001 1
5.000 10
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table 222:
Name UL1ZeroDb UL1HiHiLim UL1HiLim UL1LowLim UL1LowLowLim UAmpComp100 UL1Min UL2ZeroDb UL2HiHiLim UL2HiLim UL2LowLim UL2LowLowLim UL2Min UL3ZeroDb
VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 Unit m% V V V V % V m% V V V V V m% Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 Default 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0.000 0.000 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0.000 0 Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Unit V V V V V Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0.000 Description High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value
Name UL3HiHiLim UL3HiLim UL3LowLim UL3LowLowLim UL3Min
Table 223:
Name UL12DbRepInt Operation UBase UL12Max UL12RepTyp
VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 300 Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 Unit Type kV V Step 1 0.05 0.001 Default 10 Off 400.00 500000.000 Cyclic Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Base setting for voltage level in kV Maximum value Reporting type
UL12AnDbRepInt UL23DbRepInt UL23Max UL23RepTyp
Type Type V -
1 1 0.001 -
10 10 500000.000 Cyclic
UL23AnDbRepInt UL31DbRepInt UL31Max UL31RepTyp
Type Type V -
1 1 0.001 -
10 10 500000.000 Cyclic
UL31AnDbRepInt
Type
10
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 224:
Name UL12ZeroDb UL12HiHiLim UL12HiLim UL12LowLim UL12LowLowLim UAmpComp100 UL12Min UL12LimHys UL23ZeroDb UL23HiHiLim UL23HiLim UL23LowLim UL23LowLowLim UL23Min UL23LimHys UL31ZeroDb UL31HiHiLim UL31HiLim UL31LowLim UL31LowLowLim UL31Min UL31LimHys
VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 Unit m% V V V V % V % m% V V V V V % m% V V V V V % Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0 450000.000 420000.000 380000.000 350000.000 0.000 0.000 5.000 0 450000.000 420000.000 380000.000 350000.000 0.000 5.000 0 450000.000 420000.000 380000.000 350000.000 0.000 5.000 Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 225:
Name 3I0DbRepInt 3I0Min 3I0Max 3I0RepTyp
CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 Off On -180.000 - 180.000 -180.000 - 180.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 -180.000 - 180.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Unit Type A A Step 1 0.001 0.001 Default 10 0.000 1000.000 Cyclic Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
3I0LimHys 3I0AngDbRepInt Operation 3I0AngMin 3I0AngMax 3I0AngRepTyp
% Type Deg Deg -
0.001 1 0.001 0.001 -
5.000 10 Off -180.000 180.000 Cyclic
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
I1DbRepInt I1Min I1Max I1RepTyp
Type A A -
1 0.001 0.001 -
10 0.000 1000.000 Cyclic
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt I1AngMax I1AngRepTyp
Type Deg -
1 0.001 -
10 180.000 Cyclic
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type
I2DbRepInt I2Min I2Max I2RepTyp
Type A A -
1 0.001 0.001 -
10 0.000 1000.000 Cyclic
I2LimHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits

Name I2AngDbRepInt I2AngMin I2AngRepTyp Values (Range) 1 - 300 -180.000 - 180.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Unit Type Deg Step 1 0.001 Default 10 -180.000 Cyclic Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Minimum value Reporting type
Table 226:
Name 3I0ZeroDb 3I0HiHiLim 3I0HiLim 3I0LowLim 3I0LowLowLim 3I0AngZeroDb I1ZeroDb I1HiHiLim I1HiLim I1LowLim I1LowLowLim I1LimHys I1AngZeroDb I1AngMin I2ZeroDb I2HiHiLim I2HiLim I2LowLim I2LowLowLim I2AngZeroDb I2AngMax
CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0 - 100000 -180.000 - 180.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 -180.000 - 180.000 Unit m% A A A A m% m% A A A A % m% Deg m% A A A A m% Deg Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 Default 0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0 0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 5.000 0 -180.000 0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0 180.000 Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Maximum value
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 227:
Name 3U0DbRepInt 3U0Min 3U0Max 3U0RepTyp
VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 Off On 0 - 100000 -180.000 - 180.000 -180.000 - 180.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 1 - 300 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 1 - 300 -180.000 - 180.000 Unit Type V V Step 1 0.001 0.001 Default 10 0.000 300000.000 Cyclic Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
3U0LimHys 3U0AngDbRepInt Operation 3U0AngZeroDb 3U0AngMin 3U0AngMax 3U0AngRepTyp
% Type m% Deg Deg -
0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001 -
5.000 10 Off 0 -180.000 180.000 Cyclic
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
U1DbRepInt U1Min U1Max U1RepTyp
Type V V -
1 0.001 0.001 -
10 0.000 300000.000 Cyclic
U1LimHys U1AngDbRepInt U2DbRepInt U2Min U2Max U2RepTyp
% Type Type V V -
0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001 -
5.000 10 10 0.000 300000.000 Cyclic
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
U2LimHys U2AngDbRepInt U2AngMin
% Type Deg
0.001 1 0.001
5.000 10 -180.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Minimum value

Name U2AngMax U2AngRepTyp Values (Range) -180.000 - 180.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Unit Deg Step 0.001 Default 180.000 Cyclic Description Maximum value Reporting type
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
UAmpPreComp5 UAmpPreComp30 UAmpPreComp100
% % %
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.000 0.000 0.000
Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at 100% of Ir
Table 228:
Name 3U0ZeroDb 3U0HiHiLim 3U0HiLim 3U0LowLim 3U0LowLowLim U1ZeroDb U1HiHiLim U1HiLim U1LowLim U1LowLowLim U1AngZeroDb U1AngMin U1AngMax U1AngRepTyp
VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 -180.000 - 180.000 -180.000 - 180.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 Unit m% V V V V m% V V V V m% Deg Deg Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 Default 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0 -180.000 180.000 Cyclic Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
U2ZeroDb U2HiHiLim U2HiLim U2LowLim U2LowLowLim U2AngZeroDb
m% V V V V m%
1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1
0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0
Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Event counter CNTGGIO

Identification
Function description Event counter IEC 61850 identification CNTGGIO
S00946 V1 EN
3.15.2
3.15.2.1
3.15.2.2
Application
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter has been activated. CNTGGIO can be used to count how many times a specific function, for example the tripping logic, has issued a trip signal. All six counters have a common blocking and resetting feature.
3.15.2.3
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600)
3.15.3
Event function EVENT

Function description Event function IEC 61850 identification EVENT
S00946 V1 EN
3.15.3.1
Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for LON and SPA communication. Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.
3.15.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the Event (EVENT) function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.
EventMask (Ch_1 - 16) The inputs can be set individually as:

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
NoEvents OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect
LONChannelMask or SPAChannelMask Definition of which part of the event function block that shall generate events:
Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16
MinRepIntVal (1 - 16) A time interval between cyclic events can be set individually for each input channel. This can be set between 0.0 s to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s. It should normally be set to 0, that is, no cyclic communication.
It is important to set the time interval for cyclic events in an optimized way to minimize the load on the station bus.
3.15.3.3
Table 229:
Name SPAChannelMask
Setting parameters
EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect Unit Step Default Off Description SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask
Off
LON channel mask
EventMask1
AutoDetect
Reporting criteria for input 1
EventMask2
AutoDetect
EventMask3
AutoDetect
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect Unit Step Default AutoDetect Description Reporting criteria for input 4
Name EventMask4
EventMask5
AutoDetect
EventMask6
AutoDetect
EventMask7
AutoDetect
EventMask8
AutoDetect
EventMask9
AutoDetect
EventMask10
AutoDetect
EventMask11
AutoDetect
EventMask12
AutoDetect
EventMask13
AutoDetect
EventMask14
AutoDetect

Name EventMask15 Values (Range) NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Unit Step Default AutoDetect Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
EventMask16
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 MinRepIntVal2 MinRepIntVal3 MinRepIntVal4 MinRepIntVal5 MinRepIntVal6 MinRepIntVal7 MinRepIntVal8 MinRepIntVal9 MinRepIntVal10 MinRepIntVal11 MinRepIntVal12 MinRepIntVal13 MinRepIntVal14 MinRepIntVal15 MinRepIntVal16
s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Minimum reporting interval input 1 Minimum reporting interval input 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 Minimum reporting interval input 4 Minimum reporting interval input 5 Minimum reporting interval input 6 Minimum reporting interval input 7 Minimum reporting interval input 8 Minimum reporting interval input 9 Minimum reporting interval input 10 Minimum reporting interval input 11 Minimum reporting interval input 12 Minimum reporting interval input 13 Minimum reporting interval input 14 Minimum reporting interval input 15 Minimum reporting interval input 16
3.15.4
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

Function description Logical signal status report IEC 61850 identification BINSTATREP IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.15.4.1
Application
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA master to poll signals from various other function blocks. BINSTATREP has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication. When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
INPUTn OUTPUTn t t
IEC09000732 V1 EN
Figure 306:
BINSTATREP logical diagram
3.15.4.2
Setting guidelines
The pulse time t is the only setting for the Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP). Each output can be set or reset individually, but the pulse time will be the same for all outputs in the entire BINSTATREP function.
3.15.4.3
Table 230:
Name t
Setting parameters
BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
3.15.5
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

Function description Measured value expander block IEC 61850 identification RANGE_XP IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.15.5.1
Application
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, that is low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block ( RANGE_XP) has been introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals, that is below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic.

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
There are no settable parameters for the measured value expander block function.
3.15.6
Disturbance report DRPRDRE

Function description Analog input signals Disturbance report Disturbance report Disturbance report Disturbance report IEC 61850 identification A41RADR DRPRDRE A1RADR A4RADR B1RBDR IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
3.15.6.1
Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/ or in the secondary system it is very important to gather information on fault currents, voltages and events. It is also important having a continuous eventlogging to be able to monitor in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the disturbance report function DRPRDRE and facilitate a better understanding of the power system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan, improve existing equipment, and so on. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when planning for and designing new installations, that is, a disturbance recording could be a part of Functional Analysis (FA). Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog and binary signals connected to the function blocks that is, maximum 30 external analog signals, 10 internal derived analog signals, and 96 binary signals.
Disturbance report function is a common name for several functions that is, Indications (IND), Event recorder (ER), Event list (EL), Trip value recorder (TVR), Disturbance recorder (DR). Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or another. Disturbance report can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance recorder.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. Local HMI can be used to get information about the recordings, and the disturbance report files may be uploaded in the PCM600 using the Disturbance handling tool, for report reading or further analysis (using WaveWin, that can be found on the PCM600 installation CD). The user can also upload disturbance report files using FTP or MMS (over 61850) clients. If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), the disturbance recorder (record made and fault number) and the fault locator information are available as GOOSE or Report Control data. The same information is obtainable if IEC60870-5-103 is used.
3.15.6.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Disturbance report function DRPRDRE are set via the local HMI or PCM600. It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical in all functions that is, Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip value recorder (TVR) and Event list (EL) function. User-defined names of binary and analog input signals is set using PCM600. The analog and binary signals appear with their user-defined names. The name is used in all related functions (Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip value recorder (TVR) and Event list (EL)). Figure 307 shows the relations between Disturbance report, included functions and function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indication (IND) uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR),. Disturbance report function acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
A1-4RADR
Disturbance Report
A4RADR Analog signals
DRPRDRE Trip value rec
B1-6RBDR
Disturbance recorder
Binary signals
B6RBDR Event list Event recorder Indications
IEC09000337 V2 EN
Figure 307:
Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
For Disturbance report function there are a number of settings which also influences the sub-functions. Three LED indications placed above the LCD screen makes it possible to get quick status information about the IED.
Green LED: Steady light Flashing light Dark Yellow LED: Steady light Flashing light Red LED: Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDN = On A Disturbance Report is triggered The IED is in test mode In Service Internal failure No power supply
Operation The operation of Disturbance report function DRPRDRE has to be set On or Off. If Off is selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, and none sub-function will operate (the only general parameter that influences Event list (EL)).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Operation = Off: Disturbance reports are not stored. LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or changed.
Operation = On: Disturbance reports are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local HMI and from a PC using PCM600. LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.
Every recording will get a number (0 to 999) which is used as identifier (local HMI, disturbance handling tool and IEC 61850). An alternative recording identification is date, time and sequence number. The sequence number is automatically increased by one for each new recording and is reset to zero at midnight. The maximum number of recordings stored in the IED is 100. The oldest recording will be overwritten when a new recording arrives (FIFO). To be able to delete disturbance records, Operation parameter has to be On.
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
Recording times
The different recording times for Disturbance report are set (the pre-fault time, postfault time, and limit time). These recording times affect all sub-functions more or less but not the Event list (EL) function. Prefault recording time (PreFaultRecT) is the recording time before the starting point of the disturbance. The setting should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the estimation of pre-fault values in the Trip value recorder (TVR) function. Postfault recording time (PostFaultRecT) is the maximum recording time after the disappearance of the trig-signal (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR) function).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Recording time limit (TimeLimit) is the maximum recording time after trig. The parameter limits the recording time if some trigging condition (fault-time) is very long or permanently set (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR) function). Post retrigger (PostRetrig) can be set to On or Off. Makes it possible to choose performance of Disturbance report function if a new trig signal appears in the postfault window. PostRetrig = Off The function is insensitive for new trig signals during post fault time. PostRetrig = On The function completes current report and starts a new complete report that is, the latter will include: new pre-fault- and fault-time (which will overlap previous report) events and indications might be saved in the previous report too, due to overlap new trip value calculations if installed, in operation and started
Operation in test mode If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = Off. Disturbance report function does not save any recordings and no LED information is displayed. If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = On. Disturbance report function works in normal mode and the status is indicated in the saved recording.
Binary input signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected among internal logical and binary input signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals. For each of the 96 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a trigger for the start of Disturbance report and if the trigger should be activated on positive (1) or negative (0) slope. OperationN: Disturbance report may trig for binary input N (On) or not (Off). TrigLevelN: Trig on positive (Trig on 1) or negative (Trig on 0) slope for binary input N. Func103N: Function type number (0-255) for binary input N according to IEC-60870-5-103, that is, 128: Distance protection, 160: overcurrent protection, 176: transformer differential protection and 192: line differential protection. Info103N: Information number (0-255) for binary input N according to IEC-60870-5-103, that is, 69-71: Trip L1-L3, 78-83: Zone 1-6. See also description in the chapter IEC 60870-5-103.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Analog input signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected among internal analog and analog input signals. PCM600 is used to configure the signals. For retrieving remote data from LDCM module, the Disturbance report function should not be connected to a 3 ms SMAI function block if this is the only intended use for the remote data. The analog trigger of Disturbance report is not affected if analog input M is to be included in the disturbance recording or not (OperationM = On/Off). If OperationM = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder. If OperationM = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph. NomValueM: Nominal value for input M. OverTrigOpM, UnderTrigOpM: Over or Under trig operation, Disturbance report may trig for high/low level of analog input M (On) or not (Off). OverTrigLeM, UnderTrigLeM: Over or under trig level, Trig high/low level relative nominal value for analog input M in percent of nominal value.
Sub-function parameters
All functions are in operation as long as Disturbance report is in operation. Indications IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of that particular input, will be fetched and shown in the disturbance summary on local HMI. If not set (Hide), status change will not be indicated. SetLEDN: Set red LED on local HMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes status. Disturbance recorder OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder (On) or not (Off). If OperationM = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder. If OperationM = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph. Event recorder Event recorder (ER) function has no dedicated parameters.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Trip value recorder ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal that will be used as phase angle reference for all other analog input signals. This signal will also be used for frequency measurement and the measured frequency is used when calculating trip values. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage input signal, for example, a line or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30). Event list Event list (EL) (SOE) function has no dedicated parameters.
Consideration
The density of recording equipment in power systems is increasing, since the number of modern IEDs, where recorders are included, is increasing. This leads to a vast number of recordings at every single disturbance and a lot of information has to be handled if the recording functions do not have proper settings. The goal is to optimize the settings in each IED to be able to capture just valuable disturbances and to maximize the number that is possible to save in the IED. The recording time should not be longer than necessary (PostFaultrecT and TimeLimit). Should the function record faults only for the protected object or cover more? How long is the longest expected fault clearing time? Is it necessary to include reclosure in the recording or should a persistent fault generate a second recording (PostRetrig)?
Minimize the number of recordings: Binary signals: Use only relevant signals to start the recording that is, protection trip, carrier receive and/or start signals. Analog signals: The level triggering should be used with great care, since unfortunate settings will cause enormously number of recordings. If nevertheless analog input triggering is used, chose settings by a sufficient margin from normal operation values. Phase voltages are not recommended for trigging.
Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere are linked to the information on a report. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and VT ratios.
3.15.6.3
Table 231:
Name Operation PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
Setting parameters
DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 9.90 0.1 - 10.0 Unit s s Step 0.01 0.1 Default Off 0.10 0.5 Description Operation Off/On Pre-fault recording time Post-fault recording time
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0.5 - 10.0 Off On 1 - 30 Off On Unit s Ch Step 0.1 1 Default 1.0 Off 1 Off Description Fault recording time limit Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off) Reference channel (voltage), phasors, frequency measurement Operation mode during test mode
Name TimeLimit PostRetrig ZeroAngleRef OpModeTest
Table 232:
Name Operation01 NomValue01 UnderTrigOp01 UnderTrigLe01 OverTrigOp01 OverTrigLe01 Operation02 NomValue02 UnderTrigOp02 UnderTrigLe02 OverTrigOp02 OverTrigLe02 Operation03 NomValue03 UnderTrigOp03 UnderTrigLe03 OverTrigOp03 OverTrigLe03 Operation04 NomValue04
A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Unit % % % % % % Step 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Description Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 1 Use under level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 2 Use under level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 3 Use under level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 4

Name UnderTrigOp04 UnderTrigLe04 OverTrigOp04 OverTrigLe04 Operation05 NomValue05 UnderTrigOp05 UnderTrigLe05 OverTrigOp05 OverTrigLe05 Operation06 NomValue06 UnderTrigOp06 UnderTrigLe06 OverTrigOp06 OverTrigLe06 Operation07 NomValue07 UnderTrigOp07 UnderTrigLe07 OverTrigOp07 OverTrigLe07 Operation08 NomValue08 UnderTrigOp08 UnderTrigLe08 Values (Range) Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Unit % % % % % % % % % Step 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 Default Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Use under level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 5 Use under level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 6 Use under level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 7 Use under level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 8 Use under level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Unit % % % % % Step 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 Default Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Description Use over level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 9 Use under level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 10 Use under level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal
Name OverTrigOp08 OverTrigLe08 Operation09 NomValue09 UnderTrigOp09 UnderTrigLe09 OverTrigOp09 OverTrigLe09 Operation10 NomValue10 UnderTrigOp10 UnderTrigLe10 OverTrigOp10 OverTrigLe10
Table 233:
Name Operation31 NomValue31 UnderTrigOp31 UnderTrigLe31 OverTrigOp31 OverTrigLe31 Operation32 NomValue32 UnderTrigOp32 UnderTrigLe32
A4RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Unit % % % Step 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 Default Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Description Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 31 Use under level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 32 Use under level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal

Name OverTrigOp32 OverTrigLe32 Operation33 NomValue33 UnderTrigOp33 UnderTrigLe33 OverTrigOp33 OverTrigLe33 Operation34 NomValue34 UnderTrigOp34 UnderTrigLe34 OverTrigOp34 OverTrigLe34 Operation35 NomValue35 UnderTrigOp35 UnderTrigLe35 OverTrigOp35 OverTrigLe35 Operation36 NomValue36 UnderTrigOp36 UnderTrigLe36 OverTrigOp36 OverTrigLe36 Values (Range) Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Unit % % % % % % % % % Step 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 Default Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Use over level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 33 Use under level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 34 Use under level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 35 Use under level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 36 Use under level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Off On 0 - 5000 Unit % % % % % % % % Step 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 1 Default Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Off 0.0 Off 50 Off 200 Description Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 37 Use under level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 38 Use under level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 39 Use under level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 40 Use under level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal
Name Operation37 NomValue37 UnderTrigOp37 UnderTrigLe37 OverTrigOp37 OverTrigLe37 Operation38 NomValue38 UnderTrigOp38 UnderTrigLe38 OverTrigOp38 OverTrigLe38 Operation39 NomValue39 UnderTrigOp39 UnderTrigLe39 OverTrigOp39 OverTrigLe39 Operation40 NomValue40 UnderTrigOp40 UnderTrigLe40 OverTrigOp40 OverTrigLe40
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 234:
Name Operation01 TrigLevel01 IndicationMa01 SetLED01 Operation02 TrigLevel02 IndicationMa02 SetLED02 Operation03 TrigLevel03 IndicationMa03 SetLED03 Operation04 TrigLevel04 IndicationMa04 SetLED04 Operation05 TrigLevel05 IndicationMa05 SetLED05 Operation06 TrigLevel06 IndicationMa06 SetLED06
B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Unit Step Default Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Description Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 1 Indication mask for binary channel 1 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 2 Indication mask for binary channel 2 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 2 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 3 Indication mask for binary channel 3 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 4 Indication mask for binary channel 4 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 5 Indication mask for binary channel 5 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 6 Indication mask for binary channel 6 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Unit Step Default Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Description Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 7 Indication mask for binary channel 7 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 8 Indication mask for binary channel 8 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 9 Indication mask for binary channel 9 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 10 Indication mask for binary channel 10 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 11 Indication mask for binary channel 11 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 12 Indication mask for binary channel 12 Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12
Name Operation07 TrigLevel07 IndicationMa07 SetLED07 Operation08 TrigLevel08 IndicationMa08 SetLED08 Operation09 TrigLevel09 IndicationMa09 SetLED09 Operation10 TrigLevel10 IndicationMa10 SetLED10 Operation11 TrigLevel11 IndicationMa11 SetLED11 Operation12 TrigLevel12 IndicationMa12 SetLED12

Name Operation13 TrigLevel13 IndicationMa13 SetLED13 Operation14 TrigLevel14 IndicationMa14 SetLED14 Operation15 TrigLevel15 IndicationMa15 SetLED15 Operation16 TrigLevel16 IndicationMa16 SetLED16 FUNT1 FUNT2 FUNT3 FUNT4 FUNT5 FUNT6 FUNT7 FUNT8 Values (Range) Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 Unit FunT FunT FunT FunT FunT FunT FunT FunT Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off Off Trig on 1 Hide Off 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 13 Indication mask for binary channel 13 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 14 Indication mask for binary channel 14 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 15 Indication mask for binary channel 15 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 16 Indication mask for binary channel 16 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 Unit FunT FunT FunT FunT FunT FunT FunT FunT InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
Name FUNT9 FUNT10 FUNT11 FUNT12 FUNT13 FUNT14 FUNT15 FUNT16 INFNO1 INFNO2 INFNO3 INFNO4 INFNO5 INFNO6 INFNO7 INFNO8 INFNO9 INFNO10 INFNO11 INFNO12 INFNO13 INFNO14 INFNO15 INFNO16

3.15.7.1
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Event list
Application
From an overview perspective, continuous event-logging is a useful system monitoring instrument and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions. The event list (EL), always included in the IED, logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer where, if the buffer is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event is logged. The difference between the event list (EL) and the event recorder (ER) function is that the list function continuously updates the log with time tagged events while the recorder function is an extract of events during the disturbance report time window. The event list information is available in the IED via the local HMI or PCM600.
3.15.7.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Event list function (EL) are a part of the Disturbance report settings. It is possible to event handle up to 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals from binary input channels. These signals are identical with the binary signals recorded by the disturbance recorder. There is no dedicated setting for the EL function.
3.15.8
3.15.8.1
Indications
Application
Fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is important. Binary signals that have changed status during a disturbance are an example of this. This information is used primarily in the short term (for example, immediate disturbance analysis, corrective actions) to get information via the local HMI in a straightforward way without any knowledge of how to handle the IED. There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status information about the IED (in service, internal failure, and so on) and the Disturbance report function (trigged). The Indication function (IND), always included in the IED, shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have been activated during a disturbance. The status changes are logged during the entire
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
recording time, which depends on the set of recording times (pre-, post-fault and limit time) and the actual fault time. The indications are not time-tagged. The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the local HMI to view the information.
3.15.8.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for LEDs and the Indication function (IND) are a part of the disturbance report settings. Available signals are identical with the binary signals recorded by the disturbance report. It is possible to use all binary input signals for the Indication function on the local HMI, but it is not recommended since the general view will be lost. The intention is to point out some important signals, not to many, to be shown. If a more thorough analysis is to be done information from the event recorder should be used. To be able to control the red LED in the local HMI: SetLEDn: Set red LED on LMHI in front of the IED if binary input N changes status. For the IND function there are a number dedicated settings: IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of that particular input, will be fetched and shown on the local HMI. If not set (Hide), status change will not be indicated.
3.15.9
3.15.9.1
Event recorder
Application
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital, for example, time tagged events logged during disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term, for example, disturbance analysis, corrective actions and in the long term, for example, disturbance analysis, statistics and maintenance, that is Functional Analysis). The event recorder, always included in the IED, logs all selected binary input signals connected to the disturbance report function DRPRDRE. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events. The events are logged during the total recording time, which depends on the set of recording times (pre-, post-fault and limit time) and the actual fault time. During this time, the first 150 events for all 96 binary signals are logged and time-tagged. The event recorder information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the local HMI to get the information. The information is included in the disturbance recorder file, which may be uploaded to PCM600 and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
3.15.9.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Event Recorder (ER) function are a part of the Disturbance Report settings. It is possible to event handle up to 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals from binary input channels. These signals are identical to the binary signals recorded by the disturbance report. For the ER function there is no dedicated setting.
3.15.10
3.15.10.1
Trip value recorder

Application
Fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances such as fault currents and voltage faults in the power system is vital. This information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (for example, fault location, disturbance analysis, corrective actions) and the long term (for example, disturbance analysis, statistics and maintenance, that is Functional Analysis). The trip value recorder (TVR), always included in the IED, calculates the values of all selected external analog input signals (channel 1-30) connected to the Disturbance Report function. The estimation is performed immediately after finalizing each recording and available in the disturbance report. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal. The information is used as input to the fault location function (FL), if included in the IED and in operation. The trip value recorder (TVR) information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the local HMI to get the information. The information is included in the disturbance recorder file, which can be uploaded to PCM600 and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
3.15.10.2
Setting guidelines
The trip value recorder (TVR) setting parameters are a part of the disturbance report settings. For the trip value recorder (TVR) there is one dedicated setting: ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal to use as phase-angle reference for all other input signals. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage input signal, for example a line or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30).
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 3 IED application Disturbance recorder

Application
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to less than 100.
3.15.11
3.15.11.1
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space. To get fast, complete and reliable information about fault current, voltage, binary signal and other disturbances in the power system is very important. This is accomplished by the Disturbance Recorder function and facilitates a better understanding of the behavior of the power system and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan, improvement of existing equipment, and so on. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when planning for and designing new installations, that is a disturbance recording could be a part of Functional Analysis (FA). The Disturbance Recorder (DR), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data from all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function blocks, that is maximum 30 external analog, 10 internal (derived) analog and 96 binary signals. The function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, the disturbance recorder is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions. The disturbance recorder information is saved for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the local HMI to get some general information about the recordings. The disturbance recording information is included in the disturbance recorder files, which may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the Disturbance Handling tool. The information is also available on a station bus according to IEC 61850 and according to IEC 60870-5-103.
3.15.11.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Disturbance Recorder function (DR) is a part of the Disturbance Report settings. It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical with the
735
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
signals recorded by the other functions in the Disturbance Report function, that is Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR) function. For the DR function there is one dedicated setting: OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder (On) or not (Off). Other disturbance report settings, such as Operation and TrigLevel for binary signals, will also influence the disturbance recorder.
3.16
3.16.1
Metering
Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO
Function description Pulse-counter logic IEC 61850 identification PCGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
S00947 V1 EN
3.16.1.1
Application
Pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module (BIM), and read by the pulse counter function. The number of pulses in the counter is then reported via the station bus to the substation automation system or read via the station monitoring system as a service value. When using IEC 61850, a scaled service value is available over the station bus. The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses from external energy meters. An optional number of inputs from an arbitrary input module in IED can be used for this purpose with a frequency of up to 40 Hz. The pulse counter can also be used as a general purpose counter.
3.16.1.2
Setting guidelines
From PCM600, these parameters can be set individually for each pulse counter: Operation: Off/On tReporting: 0-3600s EventMask: NoEvents/ReportEvents
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The configuration of the inputs and outputs of the Pulse counter function block is made with PCM600. On the Binary Input Module, the debounce filter time is fixed set to 5 ms, that is, the counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 5 ms. The input oscillation blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz. That means that the counter finds the input oscillating if the input frequency is greater than 40 Hz. The oscillation suppression is released at 30 Hz. The values for blocking/release of the oscillation can be changed in the local HMI and PCM600 under Main menu/Settings/ General settings/I/O-modules The setting is common for all input channels on a Binary Input Module, that is, if changes of the limits are made for inputs not connected to the pulse counter, the setting also influences the inputs on the same board used for pulse counting.
3.16.1.3
Table 235:
Name Operation EventMask CountCriteria
Setting parameters
PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On NoEvents ReportEvents Off RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange 1.000 - 90000.000 Count ActivePower ApparentPower ReactivePower ActiveEnergy ApparentEnergy ReactiveEnergy 0 - 3600 Unit Step Default Off NoEvents RisingEdge Description Operation Off/On Report mask for analog events from pulse counter Pulse counter criteria
Scale Quantity
0.001 -
1.000 Count
Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per counted value Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
tReporting
60
Cycle time for reporting of counter value
3.16.2
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR

Function description Energy calculation and demand handling IEC 61850 identification ETPMMTR IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Energy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR is intended for statistics of the forward and reverse active and reactive energy. It has a high accuracy basically given by the measurements function (CVMMXN). This function has a site calibration possibility to further increase the total accuracy. The function is connected to the instantaneous outputs of (CVMMXN) as shown in figure 308.
CVMMXN
P_INST Q_INST P Q
ETPMMTR
TRUE FALSE FALSE
STACC RSTACC RSTDMD
IEC09000106.vsd
IEC09000106 V1 EN
Figure 308:
Connection of energy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR to the measurements function (CVMMXN)
The energy values can be read through communication in MWh and MVarh in monitoring tool of PCM600 and/or alternatively the values can be presented on the local HMI. The local HMI graphical display is configured with PCM600 Graphical display editor tool (GDE) with a measuring value which is selected to the active and reactive component as preferred. All four values can also be presented. Maximum demand values are presented in MWh or MVarh in the same way. Alternatively, the values can be presented with use of the pulse counters function (PCGGIO). The output values are scaled with the pulse output setting values EAFAccPlsQty, EARAccPlsQty, ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty of the energy metering function and then the pulse counter can be set-up to present the correct values by scaling in this function. Pulse counter values can then be presented on the local HMI in the same way and/or sent to the SA system through communication where the total energy then is calculated by summation of the energy pulses. This principle is good for very high values of energy as the saturation of numbers else will limit energy integration to about one year with 50 kV and 3000 A. After that the accumulation will start on zero again.
3.16.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters are set via the local HMI or PCM600. The following settings can be done for the energy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR: Operation: Off/On
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
tEnergy: Time interval when energy is measured. StartAcc: Off/On is used to switch the accumulation of energy on and off. The input signal STACC is used to start accumulation. Input signal STACC cannot be used to halt accumulation. The energy content is reset every time STACC is activated. STACC can for example, be used when an external clock is used to switch two active energy measuring function blocks on and off to have indication of two tariffs. tEnergyOnPls: gives the pulse length ON time of the pulse. It should be at least 100 ms when connected to the Pulse counter function block. Typical value can be 100 ms. tEnergyOffPls: gives the OFF time between pulses. Typical value can be 100 ms. EAFAccPlsQty and EARAccPlsQty: gives the MWh value in each pulse. It should be selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the correct total pulse value. ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty : gives the MVarh value in each pulse. It should be selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the correct total pulse value. For the advanced user there are a number of settings for direction, zero clamping, max limit, and so on. Normally, the default values are suitable for these parameters.
3.16.2.3
Table 236:
Name Operation StartAcc tEnergy
Setting parameters
ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off On 1 Minute 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 180 Minutes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 - 10000.000 Unit Step Default Off Off 1 Minute Description Operation Off/On Activate the accumulation of energy values Time interval for energy calculation
tEnergyOnPls tEnergyOffPls EAFAccPlsQty
s s MWh
0.001 0.001 0.001
1.000 0.500 100.000
Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated energy value

Name EARAccPlsQty ERFAccPlsQty ERVAccPlsQty Values (Range) 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 - 10000.000 Unit MWh MVArh MVArh Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 100.000 100.000 100.000 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for reactive forward accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for reactive reverse accumulated energy value
Table 237:
Name EALim ERLim DirEnergyAct DirEnergyReac EnZeroClamp LevZeroClampP LevZeroClampQ EAFPrestVal EARPrestVal ERFPresetVal ERVPresetVal
ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.001 10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Off On 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 Unit MWh MVArh MW MVAr MWh MWh MVArh MVArh Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 1000000.000 1000.000 Forward Forward On 10.000 10.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Description Active energy limit Reactive energy limit Direction of active energy flow Forward/ Reverse Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/ Reverse Enable of zero point clamping detection function Zero point clamping level at active Power Zero point clamping level at reactive Power Preset Initial value for forward active energy Preset Initial value for reverse active energy Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 4 Station communication
Section 4
Station communication
About this chapter

This chapter describes the communication possibilities in a SA-system.
4.1
Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. Following communication protocols are available: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol LON communication protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol DNP3.0 communication protocol
Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
4.2
4.2.1
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Application IEC 61850-8-1
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol allows vertical communication to HSI clients and allows horizontal communication between two or more intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from one or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in the performance of their functions and for correct co-operation. GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC 61850 81 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control information amongst themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That is, upon detecting an event, the IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify those devices that have registered to receive the data. An IED can, by publishing a GOOSE message, report its status. It can also request a control action to be directed at any device in the network.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Figure 309 shows the topology of an IEC 6185081 configuration. IEC 618508 1 specifies only the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is left to the system integrator.
Engineering Workstation SMS Station HSI Base System Gateway CC
Printer
IED 1
KIOSK 1
IED 2
IED 3
IED 1
KIOSK 2
IED 2
IED 3
IED 1
KIOSK 3
IED 2
IED 3
IEC09000135_en.v sd
IEC09000135 V1 EN
Figure 309:
SA system with IEC 61850
Figure 310 shows the GOOSE peer-to-peer communication.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Station HSI MicroSCADA
Gateway
GOOSE
IED A Control
IEC05000734 V1 EN
IED A Protection
IED A Control and protection
IED A Control
IED A Protection en05000734.vsd
Figure 310:
Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message
4.2.2
Setting guidelines
There are two settings related to the IEC 6185081 protocol: Operation User can set IEC 61850 communication to On or Off. GOOSE has to be set to the Ethernet link where GOOSE traffic shall be send and received.
4.2.3
Table 238:
Name Operation GOOSE
Setting parameters
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Front OEM311_AB OEM311_CD Unit Step Default Off OEM311_AB Description Operation Off/On Port for GOOSE communication
Table 239:
Name Operation
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

Section 4 Station communication 4.2.4
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO, SP16GGIO

Application
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) function is used to send one single logical output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It has one visible input, that should be connected in ACT tool.
4.2.4.1
4.2.4.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings available for the user for SPGGIO. However, PCM600 must be used to get the signals sent by SPGGIO.
4.2.4.3
Setting parameters
4.2.5
4.2.5.1
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO

Application
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
4.2.5.2
Setting guidelines
The settings available for IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function allows the user to choose a deadband and a zero deadband for the monitored signal. Values within the zero deadband are considered as zero. The high and low limit settings provides limits for the high-high-, high, normal, low and low-low ranges of the measured value. The actual range of the measured value is shown on the range output of MVGGIO function block. When a Measured value expander block (RANGE_XP) is connected to the range output, the logical outputs of the RANGE_XP are changed accordingly.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Setting parameters
4.2.5.3
Table 240:
Name MV db MV zeroDb MV hhLim MV hLim MV lLim MV llLim MV min MV max MV dbType
MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 300 0 - 100000 -10000000000.000 - 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 - 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 - 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 - 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 - 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 - 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Unit Type m% Step 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 10 500 90.000 80.000 -80.000 -90.000 -100.000 100.000 Dead band Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit High limit Low limit Low Low limit Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type
MV limHys
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
4.2.6
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

Function description Parallel Redundancy Protocol Status Duo driver configuration IEC 61850 identification PRPSTATUS DUODRV IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
4.2.6.1
Application
Parallel redundancy protocol status (PRPSTATUS) together with Duo driver configuration (DUODRV) are used to supervise and assure redundant Ethernet communication over two channels. This will secure data transfer even though one communication channel might not be available for some reason. Together PRPSTATUS and DUODRV provide redundant communication over station bus running IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The redundant communication use both port AB and CD on OEM module.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Station Control System Redundancy Supervision Duo
Data
Data
Switch A 1 2
Switch B 1 2
Data
Data
AB Configuration
CD
IED
OEM
DUODRV
PRPSTATUS
IEC09000758 V2 EN
Figure 311:
Redundant station bus
4.2.6.2
Setting guidelines
Redundant communication (DUODRV) is configured in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/General settings/Communication/Ethernet configuration/Rear OEM - Redundant PRP
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The settings can then be viewed, but not set, in the Parameter Setting tool in PCM600 under Main menu/IED Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/DUODRV: Operation: The redundant communication will be activated when this parameter is set to On.After confirmation the IED will restart and the setting alternatives Rear OEM - Port AB and CD will not be further displayed in the local HMI. The ETHLANAB and ETHLANCD in the Parameter Setting Tool are irrelevant when the redundant communication is activated, only DUODRV IPAdress and IPMask are valid.
IEC10000057 V1 EN
Figure 312:
PST screen: DUODRV Operation is set to On, which affect Rear OEM - Port AB and CD which are both set to Duo

4.2.6.3
Table 241:
Name Operation IPAddress IPMask
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Setting parameters
DUODRV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0 - 18 0 - 18 Unit IP Address IP Address Step 1 1 Default Off 192.168.7.10 255.255.255.0 Description Operation Off / On IP-Address IP-Mask
4.3
4.3.1
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

Introduction
Every IED can be provided with a communication interface enabling it to connect to a process bus, in order to get data from analog data acquisition units close to the process (primary apparatus), commonly known as Merging Units (MU). The protocol used in this case is the IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol. Note that the IEC 61850-9-2LE standard does not specify the quality of the sampled values, only the transportation. Thus, the accuracy of the current and voltage inputs to the merging unit and the inaccuracy added by the merging unit must be coordinated with the requirement for actual type of protection function. Factors influencing the accuracy of the sampled values from the merging unit are for example anti aliasing filters, frequency range, step response, truncating, A/D conversion inaccuracy, time tagging accuracy etc. In principle shall the accuracy of the current and voltage transformers, together with the merging unit, have the same quality as direct input of currents and voltages. The process bus physical layout can be arranged in several ways, described in Annex B of the standard, depending on what are the needs for sampled data in a substation.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC06000537 V1 EN
Figure 313:
Example of a station configuration with separated process bus and station bus
The IED can get analog values simultaneously from a classical CT or VT and from a Merging Unit, like in this example: The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one or more measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to other clients (or subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data from classical measuring transformers, others from nonconventional measuring transducers and yet others can pick up data from both types. The electronic part of a non-conventional measuring transducer (like a Rogowski coil or a capacitive divider) can represent a MU by itself as long as it can send sampled data over process bus.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Station Wide SCADA System

IEC61850-8-1
Station Wide GPS Clock
Splitter
Electrical-toOptical Converter
IEC61850-8-1
Other Relays
110 V 1A 1A
IED
1PPS
IEC61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
ABB Merging Unit
1PPS
CT
CT
Combi Sensor
Conventional VT
en08000069-3.vsd
IEC08000069 V2 EN
Figure 314:
Example of a station configuration with the IED receiving analog values from both classical measuring transformers and merging units. Example of a station configuration with the IED receiving analogue values from merging units
Figure 315:
4.3.2
Setting guidelines
There are several settings related to the Merging Units in local HMI under:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Main menu\Settings\General Settings\Analog Modules\Merging Unit x where x can take the value 1,2 or 3.
4.3.2.1
Specific settings related to the IEC 61850-9-2LE communication

The process bus communication IEC 61850-9-2LE have specific settings, similar to the analog inputs modules. Besides the names of the merging unit channels (that can be edited only from PCM600, not from the local HMI) there are important settings related to the merging units and time synchronization of the signals: When changing the sending (MU unit) MAC address, a reboot of the IED is required. If there are more than one sample group involved, then time synch is mandatory and the protection functions will be blocked if there is no time synchronization. SmpGrp this setting parameter is not used CTStarPointx this parameter is currently not used. To specify direction to or from object, use setting Negation on the pre-processing groups (SMAI). AppSynch: If this parameter is set to Synch and the IED HW-time synchronization is lost or the synchronization to the MU time is lost, the protection functions in the list 242 will be blocked and the output SYNCH will be set. SynchMode: marks how the IED will receive the data coming from a merging unit: if it is set to NoSynch, then when the sampled values arrive, there will be no check on the SmpSynch flag If it is set to Operation, the SmpSynch flag will be checked all time. setting Init, should not be used
The rest of the setting are explained in table 243.
4.3.2.2
Consequence on accuracy for power measurement functions when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE communication
The Power measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU) contains correction factors to account for the non-linearity in the input circuits, mainly in the input transformers, when using direct analogue connection to the IED. The IED will use the same correction factors also when feeding the IED with analog signals over IEC 61850-9-2LE. Since the signals via IEC 61850-9-2LE are
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
not subject to the same non-linearity errors this will cause an inaccuracy in the measured values. For voltage signals the correction factors are less than 0.05% of the measured value and no angle compensation why the impact on reported value can be ignored. For current signals the correction factors will cause a not insignificant impact on the reported values at low currents. The correction factors are +2.4% and -3.6 degrees at signal levels below 5% of set base current, +0.6% and -1.12 degrees at signal level 30% of set base current and 0% and -0.44 degrees at signal levels above 100% of set base current. Between the calibration points 5%, 30% and 100% of set base current, linear interpolation is used. Since the output from the Power measurement function is used as an input for the Energy measuring function (ETPMMTR) the above described impact will also be valid for the output values for ETPMMTR.
4.3.2.3
Loss of communication
If IEC 61850-9-2LE communication is lost, protection functions in table 242are blocked:
Table 242:
Broken conductor check Capacitor bank protection Breaker failure protection Pole discordance protection Breaker failure protection, single phase version Current circuit supervison Compensated overand undervoltage protection General currrent and voltage protection Current reversal and weakend infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection Four step residual overcurrent protection
Blocked protection functions if IEC 61850-9-2LE communication is interrupted.

IEC 61850 identification Function description BRCPTOC CBPGAPC CCRBRF Phase preference logic PoleSlip/Out-of-step protection Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance Two step residual overvoltage protection Rate-of-change frequency protection Overfrequency protection Underfrequency protection Sudden change in current variation Fuse failure supervision IEC 61850 identification PPLPHIZ PSPPPAM REFPDIF
Function description
CCRPLD CCSRBRF
ROV2PTOV SAPFRC
CCSRDIF COUVGAPC
SAPTOF SAPTUF
CVGAPC ECRWPSCH
SCCVPTOC SDDRFUF
EF4PTOC
Sensitive Directional residual over current and power protetcion
SDEPSDE
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Function description Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle Directional Overpower protection Directional Underpower protection 1Ph High impedance differential protection Line differential protection, 3 CT sets, 23 line ends Line differential protection, 6 CT sets, 35 line ends Low active power and power factor protection Negative sequence overcurrent protection IEC 61850 identification Function description EFPIOC Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing Stub protection IEC 61850 identification SESRSYN
FDPSPDIS
STBPTOC
FMPSPDIS
Additional security logic for differential protection Transformer differential protection, two winding Transformer differential protection, three winding Automatic voltage control for tapchanger, single control Automatic voltage control for tapchanger, parallel control Thermal overload protection, two time constants Two step undervoltage protection Voltage differential protection Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication Local acceleration logic Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based Directional impedance element for mho characteristic Directional impedance quadrilateral Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series compensation
STSGGIO
FRPSPDIS
T2WPDIF
GOPPDOP
T3WPDIF
GUPPDUP
TR1ATCC
HZPDIF
TR8ATCC
L3CPDIF
TRPTTR
L6CPDIF
UV2PTUV
LAPPGAPC LCNSPTOC
VDCPTOV ZC1WPSCH
Negative sequence overvoltage protection Three phase overcurrent Three phase undercurrent Zero sequence overcurrent protection Zero sequence overvoltage protection
LCNSPTOV LCP3PTOC
ZCLCPLAL ZCRWPSCH
LCP3PTUC
ZCVPSOF
LCZSPTOC
ZDMRDIR
LCZSPTOV LDLPDIF
ZDRDIR ZDSRDIR

Function description Loss of excitation IEC 61850 identification Function description LEXPDIS Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines Fullscheme distance protection, mho characteristic Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings Power swing detection Mho Impedance supervision logic
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC 61850 identification ZMCAPDIS
Loss of voltage check
LOVPTUV
ZMCPDIS
Thermal overload protection, one time constant Line differential protection 3 CT sets, with inzone transformers, 23 line ends Line differential protection 6 CT sets, with inzone transformers, 35 line ends Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection Four step phase overcurrent protection
LPTTR
ZMHPDIS
LT3CPDIF
ZMMAPDIS
LT6CPDIF
ZMMPDIS
NS2PTOC
ZMQAPDIS
NS4PTOC
ZMQPDIS
OC4PTOC M
ZMRAPDIS
Overexcitation protection
OEXPVPH
ZMRPDIS
Two step overvoltage protection Four step single phase overcurrent protection Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection
OV2PTOV PH4SPTOC PHPIOC
ZMRPSB ZSMGAPC
4.3.2.4
Setting examples for IEC 61850-9-2LE and time synchronization

It is important that the IED and the merging units (MU) uses the same time reference. This is especially true if analog data is used from several sources, for example an internal TRM and a MU. Or if several physical MU is used. The same time reference is important to correlate data so that channels from different sources refer to correct phase angel.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
When only one MU is used as analog source it is theoretically possible to do without timesynchronization. However, this would mean that timestamps for analog and binary data/events would be uncorrelated. Disturbance recordings will appear incorrect since analog data will be timestamped by MU and binary events will use internal IED time. For this reason it is recommended to use time synchronization also when analog data emanate from only one MU. An external time-source can be used to synchronize both the IED and the MU. It is also possible to use the MU as clock-master to synchronize the IED from the MU. When using an external clock, it is possible to set the IED to be synchronized via PPS or IRIG-B. It is also possible to use an internal GPS-receiver in the IED (if the external clock is using GPS). Using the MU as time source for synchronization
IED
PPS Synchronization IEC 61850-9-2LE Analog data
MU
IEC10000061 V1 EN
Figure 316:
Setting example when MU is the synchronizing source
Settings in local HMI under Settings/Time/Synchronization/TIMESYNCHGEN/ IEC 61850-9-2: HwSyncSrc: set to PPS since this is what is generated by the MU (ABB MU) AppSynch : set to Synch, since protection functions should be blocked in case of loss of timesynchronization SyncAccLevel: could be set to 4us since this corresponds to a maximum phaseangle error of 0.072 degrees at 50Hz fineSyncSource could still be set to something different in order to correlate events and data to other IEDs in the station
Settings in PST in PCM600 under: Hardware/Analog modules/Merging units/ MU01
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
SyncMode : set to Operation. This means that the IED will be blocked if the MU loose time synchronization. Since the MU is set as Time-master, this is unlikely to happen so the setting of SyncMode is not important in this case
There are 3 signals that monitors state related to time synchronization: TSYNCERR signal on the TIMEERR function block. This signal will go high whenever internal timeQuality goes above the setting SyncAccLevel (4us in this case) and this will block the protection functions.. This will happen max 4 seconds after an interruption of the PPS fiber from the MU (or if the fineSyncSource is lost). SYNCH signal on the MU1_4I_4U function block indicates when protection functions are blocked due to loss of internal time synchronization to the IED (that is loss of the hardware synchSrc) MUSYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block monitor the synchronization from the MU (in the datastream). When the MU indicates loss of time synchronization this signal will go high. In this case the MU is set to master so it can not loose time synchronization.
The SMPLLOSTsignal will of course also be interesting since this indicate blocking due to missing analog data (interruption of IEC 61850-9-2LE fiber), although this has nothing to do with time synchronization. Using an external clock for time synchronization
PPS / IRIG-B IED
IEC 61850-9-2LE data STATION CLOCK PPS MU
IEC10000074 V1 EN
Figure 317:
Setting example with external synchronization
Settings in local HMI under Settings/Time/Synchronization/TIMESYNCHGEN/ IEC 61850-9-2:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
HwSyncSrc : set to PPS/IRIG-B depending on available outputs on the clock AppSynch : set to Synch, for blocking protection functions in case of loss of time synchronization SyncAccLevel : could be set to 4us since this correspond to a maximum phaseangle error of 0.072 degrees at 50Hz fineSyncSource :should be set to IRIG-B if this is available from the clock. If using PPS for HWSyncSrc , full-time has to be acquired from another source. If the station clock is on the local area network (LAN) and has a sntpserver this is one option.
Settings in PST in PCM600 under: Hardware/Analog modules/Merging units/ MU01 SyncMode: set to Operation. This means that the IED will block if the MU loose time synchronization.
There are 3 signals that monitors state related to time synchronization: TSYNCERR signal on the TIMEERR function block will go high whenever internal timeQuality goes above the setting SyncAccLevel (4us in this case). This will block the protection functions after maximum 4 seconds after an interruption in the PPS fiber communication from the MU. SYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block indicate that protection functions are blocked by loss of internal time synchronization to the IED (that is loss of the HW-synchSrc). MUSYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block monitors the synchronization flag from the MU (in the datastream). When the MU indicates loss of time synchronization, this signal is set.
A blockedByTimeSynch signal could be made by connecting the MUSYNCH and the SYNCH through an OR gate. If also the SMPLLOST signal is connected to the same OR gate, it will be more of a BlockedByProblemsWith9-2 signal. No synchronization
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IED
IEC 61850-9-2LE Data
MU
IEC10000075 V1 EN
Figure 318:
Setting example without time synchronization
It is possible to use IEC 61850-9-2LE communication without time synchronization. Settings in this case under Settings/Time/Synchronization/ TIMESYNCHGEN/IEC 61850-9-2 are: HwSyncSrc: set to Off AppSynch: set to NoSynch. This means that protection functions will not be blocked SyncAccLevel : set to unspecified
Settings in PST in PCM600 under: Hardware/Analog modules/Merging units/ MU01 SyncMode: set to NoSynch. This means that the IED do not care if the MU indicates loss of time synchronization. TSYNCERR signal will not be set since there is no configured time synchronization source SYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block indicates when protection functions are blocked due to loss of internal time synchronization to the IED. Since AppSynch is set to NoSynch this signal will not be set. MUSYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block will be set if the datastream indicates time synchronization is lost. However, protection functions will not be blocked.
To get higher availability in the protection functions, it is possible to avoid blocking if time synchronization is lost when there is a single source of analog data. This means that if there is only one physical MU and no TRM, parameter AppSynch can be set to NoSynch but parameter HwSyncSrc can still be set to PPS.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
This will keep analog and binary data correlated in disturbance recordings while not blocking the protection functions if PPS is lost.
4.3.3
Table 243:
Name SVId SmplGrp CTStarPoint1 CTStarPoint2 CTStarPoint3 CTStarPoint4
Setting parameters
MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0 - 35 0 - 65535 FromObject ToObject FromObject ToObject FromObject ToObject FromObject ToObject Unit Step 1 1 Default ABB_MU0101 0 ToObject ToObject ToObject ToObject Description MU identifier Sampling group ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
Table 244:
Name SynchMode
MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) NoSynch Init Operation Unit Step Default Operation Description Synchronization mode
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
4.4
4.4.1
LON communication protocol

Application
Station HSI MicroSCADA Control Center
Gateway
Star coupler RER 111
IED
IED
IED
IEC05000663 V2 EN
Figure 319:
Example of LON communication structure for a substation automation system
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables communication with the IEDs in the 670 series through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from the control center and also from other IEDs via bayto-bay horizontal communication. The fibre optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fibre optic cables.
Table 245:
Cable connector Cable diameter Max. cable length Wavelength Transmitted power Receiver sensitivity
Specification of the fibre optic connectors

Glass fibre ST-connector 62.5/125 m 1000 m 820-900 nm -13 dBm (HFBR-1414) -24 dBm (HFBR-2412) Plastic fibre snap-in connector 1 mm 10 m 660 nm -13 dBm (HFBR-1521) -20 dBm (HFBR-2521)
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

The LON Protocol
The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other directly. For more information of the bayto-bay communication, refer to the section Multiple command function.
Hardware and software modules
The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application, but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting the star coupler to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from MicroSCADA, the application library LIB670 is required. The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB520 high-voltage process package, which is a part of the Application Software Library within MicroSCADA applications. The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in IEDs in the 670 series. This module contains the process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate the process database for the control application in MicroSCADA. Use the LON Network Tool (LNT) to set the LON communication. This is a software tool applied as one node on the LON bus. To communicate via LON, the IEDs need to know The node addresses of the other connected IEDs. The network variable selectors to be used.
This is organized by LNT. The node address is transferred to LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter ServicePinMsg = Yes. The node address is sent to LNT via the LON bus, or LNT can scan the network for new nodes. The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s. This can be changed by LNT.
4.4.2
Table 246:
Name Operation
Setting parameters
HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 247:
Name Operation TimerClass
ADE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Slow Normal Fast Unit Step Default Off Slow Description Operation Timer class
4.5
4.5.1
SPA communication protocol

Application
SPA communication protocol as an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103. The same communication port as for IEC 60870-5-103 is used. SPA communication is applied using the front communication port. For this purpose, no serial communication module is required in the IED. Only PCM600 software in the PC and a crossed-over Ethernet cable for front connection is required. When communicating with a PC (as shown in figure 321), using the rear SPA port on the serial communication module (SLM), the only hardware required for a local monitoring system is: Optical fibres for the SPA bus loop Optical/electrical converter for the PC PC
A remote monitoring system for communication over the public telephone network also requires telephone modems and a remote PC. The software required for a local monitoring system is PCM600, and for a remote monitoring system it is PCM600 in the remote PC only.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Remote monitoring system with PCM600
Local monitoring system with PCM600
IED
IED
IED
Teleph one modem
Teleph one modem
Optical to electrical converter, e.g. SPA-ZC 22 or Fiberdata modem

IEC05000672 V2 EN
en05000672.vsd
Figure 320:
SPA communication structure for a monitoring system. The monitoring system can either be local, remote or a combination of both
When communicating with a PC connected to the utility substation LAN, via WAN and the utility office LAN, as shown in figure 321, and using the rear Ethernet port on the optical Ethernet module (OEM), the only hardware required for a station monitoring system is: Optical fibres from the IED to the utility substation LAN. PC connected to the utility office LAN.
The software required is PCM600.

Utility LAN Remote monitoring system with PCM600
WAN
Substation LAN
IED
IED
IED
en05000715.vsd
IEC05000715 V2 EN
Figure 321:
SPA communication structure for a remote monitoring system via a substation LAN, WAN and utility LAN
The SPA communication is mainly used for the Station Monitoring System. It can include different IEDs with remote communication possibilities. Connection to a computer (PC) can be made directly (if the PC is located in the substation) or by telephone modem through a telephone network with ITU (former CCITT) characteristics or via a LAN/WAN connection.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
glass plastic
<1000 m according to optical budget <20 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget
Functionality
The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the IED is a slave and the PC is the master. Only one master can be applied on each fibre optic loop. A program is required in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for translation of the data that should be sent to the IED. For the specification of the SPA protocol V2.5, refer to SPA-bus Communication Protocol V2.5.
4.5.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the SPA communication are set via the local HMI. SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 uses the same rear communication port. Set the parameter Operation, under Main menu /Settings /General settings / Communication /SLM configuration /Rear optical SPA-IEC-DNP port / Protocol selection to the selected protocol. When the communication protocols have been selected, the IED is automatically restarted. The most important settings in the IED for SPA communication are the slave number and baud rate (communication speed). These settings are absolutely essential for all communication contact to the IED. These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel communication and for front channel communication. The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as the slave number is unique within the used SPA loop. The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between 300 and 38400 baud. Refer to technical data to determine the rated communication speed for the selected communication interfaces. The baud rate should be the same for the whole station, although different baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baud rates in the same fibre optical loop or RS485 network are used, consider this when making the communication setup in the communication master, the PC. For local fibre optic communication, 19200 or 38400 baud is the normal setting. If telephone communication is used, the communication speed depends on the quality of the connection and on the type of modem used. But remember that the IED does not adapt its speed to the actual communication conditions, because the speed is set on the local HMI.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 4 Station communication Setting parameters
4.5.3
Table 248:
Name SlaveAddress BaudRate
SPA Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 2400 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd Unit Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line
Table 249:
Name Operation SlaveAddress
LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 1 - 899 Unit Step 1 Default Off 30 Description Operation Slave address
4.6
4.6.1
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Application
TCP/IP
Station HSI
Control Center
Gateway
Star coupler RER 125
IED
IED
IED
en05000660.vsd
IEC05000660 V3 EN
Figure 322:
Example of IEC 60870-5-103 communication structure for a substation automation system

765
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Table 250:
Connector glass (ST connector)
Max distances between IED/nodes

Distance < 1000 m according to optical budget
Functionality
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages. For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103, Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.
Design
General The protocol implementation consists of the following functions: Event handling Report of analog service values (measurands) Fault location Command handling Autorecloser ON/OFF Teleprotection ON/OFF Protection ON/OFF LED reset Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files) Time synchronization
Hardware When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is: Optical fibres, glass/plastic Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU PC/RTU Commands The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in a dedicated function blocks. These blocks have output signals for all available commands according to the protocol.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
IED commands in control direction
Function block with defined IED functions in control direction, I103IEDCMD. This block use PARAMETR as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal. Function commands in control direction
Function block with pre defined functions in control direction, I103CMD. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal. Function commands in control direction
Function block with user defined functions in control direction, I103UserCMD. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each output signal. Status The events created in the IED available for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are based on the: IED status indication in monitor direction
Function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction, I103IED. This block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. Function status indication in monitor direction, user-defined
Function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction, I103UserDef. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each input signal. Supervision indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal. Earth fault indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1
Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction, I103FltDis. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. This block is suitable for distance protection function. Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2
Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction, I103FltStd. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. This block is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, over-current and earth-fault protection functions. Autorecloser indications in monitor direction
Function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal. Measurands The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the standard. Measurands in public range
Function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals, I103Meas. Measurands in private range
Function blocks with user defined input measurands in monitor direction, I103MeasUsr. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Fault location The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in reactive ohms, it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and reported when the fault locator function is included in the IED. Disturbance recordings The transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to the master by polling. The eight last disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
master. A file that has been transferred and acknowledged by the master cannot be transferred again. The binary signals that are reported by polling are those that are connected to the disturbance function blocks B1RBDR to B6RBDR. These function blocks include the function type and the information number for each signal. For more information on the description of the Disturbance report in the Technical reference manual. The analog channels, that are reported, are those connected to the disturbance function blocks A1RADR to A4RADR. The eight first ones belong to the public range and the remaining ones to the private range.
Settings
Settings from the local HMI SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 uses the same rear communication port. Set the parameter Operation, under Main menu/Settings /General settings / Communication /SLM configuration /Rear optical SPA-IEC-DNP port / Protocol selection to the selected protocol. When the communication protocols have been selected, the IED is automatically restarted. The general settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following: SlaveAddress and BaudRate: Settings for slave number and communication speed (baud rate). The slave number can be set to any value between 1 and 31. The communication speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/s or 19200 bits/s. RevPolarity: Setting for inverting the light (or not). CycMeasRepTime: Setting for CycMeasRepTime must be coordinated with the xDbRepInt and xAngDbRepInt reporting setting on the MMXU measurement function blocks. See I103MEAS function block for more information. EventRepMode: Defines the mode for how events are reported.
Event reporting mode

The settings for communication parameters slave number and baud rate can be found on the local HMI under: Main menu/Settings /General settings / Communication /SLM configuration /Rear optical SPA-IEC-DNP port / Protocol selection to the selected protocol Settings from PCM600 Event For each input of the Event (EVENT) function there is a setting for the information number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. To get proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks in the event function is to be set to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event mask is to be set to ON_SET.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description of the Main Function type set on the local HMI. Commands As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with eight output signals. Use PCM600 to configure these signals. To realize the BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI, the output BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected to an input on an event function block. This input must have the information number 20 (monitor direction blocked) according to the standard. Disturbance Recordings Furthermore, there is a setting on each input of the Disturbance recorder function for the function type.
Function and information types

128 = distance protection 160 = overcurrent protection
The function type is defined as follows:
176 = transformer differential protection 192 = line differential protection Refer to the tables in the Technical reference manual /Station communication, specifying the information types supported by the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103. To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection IED. There is no representation for the following parts: Generating events for test mode Cause of transmission: Info no 11, Local operation
EIA RS-485 is not supported. Glass or plastic fibre should be used. BFOC/2.5 is the recommended interface to use (BFOC/2.5 is the same as ST connectors). ST connectors are used with the optical power as specified in standard. For more information, refer to IEC standard IEC 60870-5-103.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 4 Station communication Setting parameters
4.6.2
Table 251:
Name SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTime
IEC60870-5-103 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0 - 255 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Off On 1.0 - 3600.0 Unit Step 1 0.1 Default 30 9600 Bd On 5.0 Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line Invert polarity Cyclic reporting time of measurments
Table 252:
Name FUNTYPE
I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 255 Unit FunT Step 1 Default 255 Description Function type (1-255)
Table 253:
Name FUNTYPE
I103CMD Non group settings (basic)

Table 254:
Name PULSEMOD T FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8
I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0-1 0.200 - 60.000 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 Unit Mode s FunT InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo Step 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 1 0.400 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed Pulse length Function type (1-255) Information number for output 1 (1-255) Information number for output 2 (1-255) Information number for output 3 (1-255) Information number for output 4 (1-255) Information number for output 5 (1-255) Information number for output 6 (1-255) Information number for output 7 (1-255) Information number for output 8 (1-255)
Table 255:
Name FUNTYPE
I103IED Non group settings (basic)

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 256:
Name FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8
I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 Unit FunT InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Function type (1-255) Information number for binary input 1 (1-255) Information number for binary input 2 (1-255) Information number for binary input 3 (1-255) Information number for binary input 4 (1-255) Information number for binary input 5 (1-255) Information number for binary input 6 (1-255) Information number for binary input 7 (1-255) Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)
Table 257:
Name FUNTYPE
I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)

Table 258:
Name FUNTYPE
I103EF Non group settings (basic)

Table 259:
Name FUNTYPE
I103FLTDIS Non group settings (basic)

Table 260:
Name FUNTYPE
I103FLTSTD Non group settings (basic)

Table 261:
Name FUNTYPE
I103AR Non group settings (basic)

1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Table 262:
Name RatedIL1 RatedIL2 RatedIL3 RatedIN RatedUL1 RatedUL2 RatedUL3 RatedUL1-UL2 RatedUN RatedP RatedQ RatedF FUNTYPE
I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 50.0 - 60.0 1 - 255 Unit A A A A kV kV kV kV kV MW MVA Hz FunT Step 1 1 1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 10.0 1 Default 3000 3000 3000 3000 230.00 230.00 230.00 400.00 230.00 1200.00 1200.00 50.0 1 Description Rated current phase L1 Rated current phase L2 Rated current phase L3 Rated residual current IN Rated voltage for phase L1 Rated voltage for phase L2 Rated voltage for phase L3 Rated voltage for phase-phase L1-L2 Rated residual voltage UN Rated value for active power Rated value for reactive power Rated system frequency Function type (1-255)
Table 263:
Name FUNTYPE INFNO RatedMeasur1 RatedMeasur2 RatedMeasur3 RatedMeasur4 RatedMeasur5 RatedMeasur6 RatedMeasur7 RatedMeasur8 RatedMeasur9
I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1 - 255 1 - 255 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 Unit FunT InfNo Step 1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 Default 25 1 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 Description Function type (1-255) Information number for measurands (1-255) Rated value for measurement on input 1 Rated value for measurement on input 2 Rated value for measurement on input 3 Rated value for measurement on input 4 Rated value for measurement on input 5 Rated value for measurement on input 6 Rated value for measurement on input 7 Rated value for measurement on input 8 Rated value for measurement on input 9
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
4.7
Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV, MULTICMDSND

Function description Multiple command and transmit Multiple command and transmit IEC 61850 identification MULTICMDRCV MULTICMDSND IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
4.7.1
Application
The IED can be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/ inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with 16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
4.7.2
4.7.2.1
Setting guidelines
Settings
The parameters for the multiple command function are set via PCM600. The Mode setting sets the outputs to either a Steady or Pulsed mode.
4.7.3
Table 264:
Name tMaxCycleTime tMinCycleTime Mode tPulseTime
Setting parameters
MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0.050 - 200.000 0.000 - 200.000 Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s s s Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 11.000 0.000 Steady 0.200 Description Maximum cycle time between receptions of input data Minimum cycle time between receptions of input data Mode for output signals Pulse length for multi command outputs
Table 265:
Name tMaxCycleTime tMinCycleTime
MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 200.000 0.000 - 200.000 Unit s s Step 0.001 0.001 Default 5.000 0.000 Description Maximum time interval between transmission of output data Minimum time interval between transmission of output data
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 5 Remote communication
Section 5
Remote communication
About this chapter

This chapter describes the remote end data communication possibilities through binary signal transferring.
5.1
Binary signal transfer

Function description Binary signal transfer Binary signal transfer IEC 61850 identification BinSignReceive BinSignTransm IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -
5.1.1
Application
The IEDs can be equipped with communication devices for line differential communication and/or communication of binary signals between IEDs. The same communication hardware is used for both purposes. Communication between two IEDs geographically on different locations is a fundamental part of the line differential function. Sending of binary signals between two IEDs, one in each end of a power line is used in teleprotection schemes and for direct transfer trips. In addition to this, there are application possibilities, for example, blocking/enabling functionality in the remote substation, changing setting group in the remote IED depending on the switching situation in the local substation and so on. When equipped with a LDCM, a 64 kbit/s communication channel can be connected to the IED, which will then have the capacity of 192 binary signals to be communicated with a remote IED.
5.1.1.1
Communication hardware solutions

The LDCM (Line Data Communication Module) has an optical connection such that two IEDs can be connected over a direct fibre (multimode), as shown in figure 323. The protocol used is IEEE/ANSI C37.94. The distance with this solution is typical 110 km.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
CM LD CM LD
C LD
CM LD
en06000519-2.vsd
IEC06000519 V2 EN
Figure 323:
Direct fibre optical connection between two IEDs with LDCM
The LDCM can also be used together with an external optical to galvanic G.703 converter or with an alternative external optical to galvanic X.21 converter as shown in figure 324. These solutions are aimed for connections to a multiplexer, which in turn is connected to a telecommunications transmission network (for example, SDH or PDH).
Multiplexer Telecom. Network Multiplexer
*)
*)
DC L L D
LD L
CM M
CM
DC
*) Converting optical to galvanic G.703 or X.21 alternatively

en05000527.vsd
IEC05000527 V1 EN
Figure 324:
LDCM with an external optical to galvanic converter and a multiplexer
When an external modem G.703 or X21 is used, the connection between LDCM and the modem is made with a multimode fibre of max. 3 km length. The IEEE/ ANSI C37.94 protocol is always used between LDCM and the modem. Alternatively, a LDCM with X.21 built-in converter and micro D-sub 15-pole connector output can be used.
5.1.2
Setting guidelines
ChannelMode: This parameter can be set On or Off. Besides this, it can be set OutOfService which signifies that the local LDCM is out of service. Thus, with this
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
setting, the communication channel is active and a message is sent to the remote IED that the local IED is out of service, but there is no COMFAIL signal and the analog and binary values are sent as zero. TerminalNo: This setting shall be used to assign an unique address to each LDCM, in all current differential IEDs. Up to 256 LDCMs can be assigned a unique number. Consider a local IED with two LDCMs: LDCM for slot 302: Set TerminalNo to 1 and RemoteTermNo to 2 LDCM for slot 303: Set TerminalNo to 3 and RemoteTermNo to 4
In multiterminal current differential applications, with 4 LDCMs in each IED, up to 20 unique addresses must be set. The unique address is necessary to give high security against incorrect addressing in the communication system. Using the same number for setting TerminalNo in some of the LDCMs, a loop-back test in the communication system can give incorrect trip. RemoteTermNo: This setting assigns a number to each related LDCM in the remote IED. For each LDCM, the parameter RemoteTermNo shall be set to a different value than parameter TerminalNo, but equal to the TerminalNo of the remote end LDCM. In the remote IED the TerminalNo and RemoteTermNo settings are reversed as follows: LDCM for slot 302: Set TerminalNo to 2 and RemoteTermNo to 1 LDCM for slot 303: Set TerminalNo to 4 and RemoteTermNo to 3 The redundant channel is always configured in the lower position, for example Slot 302: Main channel Slot 303: Redundant channel
The same is applicable for slot 312-313 and slot 322-323. DiffSync: Here the method of time synchronization, Echo or GPS, for the line differential function is selected. GPSSyncErr: If GPS synchronization is lost, the synchronization of the line differential function will continue during 16 s. based on the stability in the local IED clocks. Thereafter the setting Block will block the line differential function or the setting Echo will make it continue by using the Echo synchronization method. It shall be noticed that using Echo in this situation is only safe as long as there is no risk of varying transmission asymmetry.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
CommSync: This setting decides the Master or Slave relation in the communication system and shall not be mistaken for the synchronization of line differential current samples. When direct fibre is used, one LDCM is set as Master and the other one as Slave. When a modem and multiplexer is used, the IED is always set as Slave, as the telecommunication system will provide the clock master. OptoPower: The setting LowPower is used for fibres 0 1 km and HighPower for fibres >1 km. TransmCurr: This setting decides which of 2 possible local currents that shall be transmitted, or if and how the sum of 2 local currents shall be transmitted, or finally if the channel shall be used as a redundant channel. In a 1 breaker arrangement, there will be 2 local currents, and the earthing on the CTs can be different for these. CT-SUM will transmit the sum of the 2 CT groups. CT-DIFF1 will transmit CT group 1 minus CT group 2 and CT-DIFF2 will transmit CT group 2 minus CT group 1. CT-GRP1 or CT-GRP2 will transmit the respective CT group, and the setting RedundantChannel makes the channel be used as a backup channel. ComFailAlrmDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm. In communication systems, route switching can sometimes cause interruptions with a duration up to 50 ms. Thus, a too short time delay setting might cause nuisance alarms in these situations. ComFailResDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm reset. RedChSwTime: Time delay before switchover to a redundant channel in case of primary channel failure. RedChRturnTime: Time delay before switchback to a the primary channel after channel failure. AsymDelay: The asymmetry is defined as transmission delay minus receive delay. If a fixed asymmetry is known, the Echo synchronization method can be used if the parameter AsymDelay is properly set. From the definition follows that the asymmetry will always be positive in one end, and negative in the other end. AnalogLatency: Local analog latency; A parameter which specifies the time delay (number of samples) between actual sampling and the time the sample reaches the local communication module, LDCM. The parameter shall be set to 2 when transmitting analog data from the local transformer module, TRM. When a merging unit according to IEC 61850-9-2 is used instead of the TRM this parameter shall be set to 5. RemAinLatency: Remote analog latency; This parameter corresponds to the LocAinLatency set in the remote IED.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
MaxTransmDelay: Data for maximum 40 ms transmission delay can be buffered up. Delay times in the range of some ms are common. It shall be noticed that if data arrive in the wrong order, the oldest data will just be disregarded. CompRange: The set value is the current peak value over which truncation will be made. To set this value, knowledge of the fault current levels should be known. The setting is not overly critical as it considers very high current values for which correct operation normally still can be achieved. MaxtDiffLevel: Allowed maximum time difference between the internal clocks in respective line end.
5.1.3
Table 266:
Name ChannelMode
Setting parameters
LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On OutOfService 0 - 255 0 - 255 Slave Master LowPower HighPower 5 - 500 5 - 500 Off On Unit Step Default On Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Invert polarization for X21 communication
TerminalNo RemoteTermNo CommSync OptoPower ComFailAlrmDel ComFailResDel InvertPolX21
ms ms -
1 1 5 5 -
0 0 Slave LowPower 100 100 Off
Table 267:
Name ChannelMode

Values (Range) Off On OutOfService 0 - 13 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 13 Echo GPS Block Echo Unit Step Default On Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService User define string for analogue input 1 Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal User define string for analogue input 2 Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost
NAMECH1 TerminalNo RemoteTermNo NAMECH2 DiffSync GPSSyncErr
1 1 1 1 -
LDCM#-CH1 0 0 LDCM#-CH2 Echo Block

Name CommSync NAMECH3 OptoPower NAMECH4 TransmCurr Values (Range) Slave Master 0 - 13 LowPower HighPower 0 - 13 CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 5 - 500 5 - 500 5 - 500 5 - 500 -20.00 - 20.00 2 - 20 2 - 20 0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On Unit Step 1 1 Default Slave LDCM#-CH3 LowPower LDCM#-CH4 CT-GRP1 Description
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master User define string for analogue input 3 Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High User define string for analogue input 4 Summation mode for transmitted current values
ComFailAlrmDel ComFailResDel RedChSwTime RedChRturnTime AsymDelay AnalogLatency remAinLatency MaxTransmDelay CompRange
ms ms ms ms ms ms -
5 5 5 5 0.01 1 1 1 -
100 100 5 100 0.00 2 2 20 0-25kA
Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Latency between local analogue data and transmitted Analog latency of remote terminal Max allowed transmission delay Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21
us us -
1 1 -
600 300 Off
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication
Table 268:
Name ChannelMode

Values (Range) Off On OutOfService 0 - 13 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 13 Echo GPS Unit Step Default On Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService User define string for analogue input 1 Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal User define string for analogue input 2 Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
NAMECH1 TerminalNo RemoteTermNo NAMECH2 DiffSync
1 1 1 1 -
LDCM#-CH1 0 0 LDCM#-CH2 Echo
1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Values (Range) Block Echo Slave Master 0 - 13 LowPower HighPower 0 - 13 CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 RedundantChannel 5 - 500 5 - 500 5 - 500 5 - 500 -20.00 - 20.00 2 - 20 2 - 20 0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On Unit Step 1 1 Default Block Slave LDCM#-CH3 LowPower LDCM#-CH4 CT-GRP1 Description Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master User define string for analogue input 3 Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High User define string for analogue input 4 Summation mode for transmitted current values
Name GPSSyncErr CommSync NAMECH3 OptoPower NAMECH4 TransmCurr
ComFailAlrmDel ComFailResDel RedChSwTime RedChRturnTime AsymDelay AnalogLatency remAinLatency MaxTransmDelay CompRange
ms ms ms ms ms ms -
5 5 5 5 0.01 1 1 1 -
100 100 5 100 0.00 2 2 20 0-25kA
Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Latency between local analogue data and transmitted Analog latency of remote terminal Max allowed transmission delay Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21
us us -
1 1 -
600 300 Off
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication
782
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 6 Configuration
Section 6
Configuration
About this chapter

This chapter describes the IED configurations.
6.1
Introduction
There are four different software alternatives with which the IED can be ordered. The intention is that these configurations shall suit most applications with minor or no changes. The few changes required on binary input and outputs can be done from the Signal Matrix tool in the PCM600 engineering platform. The main protection functions are switched On and fully operative at delivery whereas back-up functions not generally used will be set to Off. The configurations are: Two-winding transformer. Single-breaker arrangement. Two-winding transformer. Multi-breaker arrangement. Three-winding transformer. Single-breaker arrangement. Three-winding transformer. Multi-breaker arrangement.
The Multi-breaker arrangement includes One-and-a-half and Ring-breaker arrangements. The number of IO must be ordered to the application where more IO is foreseen to be required in the Multi-breaker arrangement. However, all IEDs can be reconfigured with help of the ACT configuration tool, being part of the PCM platform. This way the IED can be made suitable for special applications and special logic can be developed, that is logic for automatic opening of disconnectors and closing ring bays, automatic load transfer from one busbar to the other, and so on. ABB will of course, on request, be available to support the re-configuration work, either direct or to do the design checking. Optional functions and optional IO ordered will not be configured at delivery. It should be noted that the standard only includes one binary input and one binary output module and only the key functions such as tripping are connected to the outputs in the Signal Matrix tool. The required total IO must be calculated and specified at ordering.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
After calculating the IO need and ordering of the IED the number of IO must be correctly set-up under the Application configuration tool menu Edit/Function selector. Include the IO you have in the IED and Save-Compile before you leave ACT. This will mean that the available IO will be shown in the Signal Matrix tool. The Application Configuration tool, which is part of the PCM600 engineering platform, will further to the four arrangements above include also alternatives for each of them with all of the software options configured. These can then be used directly or as assistance of how to configure the options. As the number of options can vary all alternatives possible cannot be handled. The configurations are as far as found necessary provided with application comments to explain why the signals have been connected in the special way. This is of course for the special application features created, not standard functionality. The physical terminals for the configured binary inputs and outputs are found in the connection diagrams for IEC 670 series 1MRK002801-AC.
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.1.1
Description of configuration RET670

Introduction
Description of configuration A30
The connection of the IED is shown in figure 325. This configuration is used in applications with two winding transformers with single or double busbars but with a single breaker arrangement on both sides. The tripping is three poles and also includes a synchronism check function for manual closing of the low voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to always energize the transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side breaker. The Differential protection is the main function. It provides fast and sensitive tripping for internal faults. Stabilization against through faults, inrush and overexcitation are standard features. Restricted earth fault protection of low impedance types are provided for each winding. The low impedance type allows mix of the function on the same core as other protection functions. The tripping from transformer auxiliaries such as buchholtz, temperature devices are linked through the binary inputs, which are stabilized against unnecessary operations due to capacitive discharges. Back-up protection for faults inside the transformer but mainly for system faults are provided by the phase and earth overcurrent functions provided.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
A thermal overload function is available to supervise abnormal service. Breaker failure protection is provided for each of the involved breakers. Voltage protection functions are available as voltage level supervision. The necessary auxiliary functions such as fuse failure supervision are also included. The necessary trip logic is provided to trip the circuit breakers. Measuring functions S, P, Q, I, U, PF, f are available for local presentation on the local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of analog inputs allows connection to separate metering cores and a built-in calibration on the analog inputs allows calibration at site to very high accuracy, then involving the instrument transformer errors and voltage drops in secondary cabling. Following should be noted. This connection diagram shows the connection with the basic supplied single binary input and binary output boards. In many cases this is sufficient, in other cases, for example with full control of all apparatuses included more IO cards are required. Our proposal for a full version with control is to use two Binary input modules and one Binary output module. For systems without Substation Automation a second binary output board might be required.
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RET670 2 Winding/Single Breaker

Configuration 1MRK004500-93 BBP-TRIP
BIM3.16 BIM3.5
BUS A BUS B
QB1 CLOSED
MV BBP-TRIP
BIM3.11
BIM3.6
QB1 OPEN
BIM3.7
-QB1
QB2 CLOSED QB2 OPEN
-QB2
BIM3.8
BUCH TRIP SUDDEN P OT TRIP WT TRIP
BIM3.12
BIM3.13
-QA1
C C
BIM3.14 BIM3.15
BOM4.1
TRIP QA1 MAIN 2 TRIP
T C
T C
BIM3.1 BIM3.2
QA1-CL QA1-SPR UNCH
-BI1
TRM1:1-3
P1
TO MAIN 2 RELAY
BOM4.11 BOM4.12 BOM4.13 BOM4.14
TO BUS PROT
FAULT SIG NALLING
BOM4.15 BOM4.16 BOM4.17 BOM4.18 BOM4.19 BOM4.20 BOM4.21 BOM4.22
TRM1:7
-N.BI1 -N.BI1
O W
-T1
TRM1:8
TRM1:10-11 HV BBA TRIP HV BBB TRIP

BOM4.5 BOM4.6 BIM3.9
MCB OR FUSE
-BU1
MV BB TRIP
BOM4.7 BOM4.8
TO BUS PROT
-BI1
MAN SC OK
BOM4.9 BOM4.10
TO MAIN 2 RELAY
TRM1:4-6
P1
BIM3.3 BIM3.4
QA1-CLOSED SPR UNCH
-QA1
C C
BOM4.3
TRIP QA1
T C T C
TRM1:12
BIM3.10
MCB OK
-BU1
X11.1 3 X11.2 X11.4 5
+ -
IRF
en05000848.eps
IEC05000848 V1 EN
Figure 325:
Connection diagram for configuration A30 with the setting and signal matrix defined
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Description of configuration B30
The connection of the IED is shown in figure 326. This configuration is used in applications with two winding transformers in multibreaker arrangement on one or both sides. The tripping is three poles and includes also a synchronism check function for manual closing of the low voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to always energize the transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side breaker. High voltage circuit breaker synchronism check function is optional for system where synchronism check is required to close the bays/rings. The Differential protection is the main function. It provides fast and sensitive tripping for internal faults. Stabilization against through faults, inrush and overexcitation are standard features. The function involves three stabilized inputs to allow through fault stabilization for through faults in the multi-breaker arrangement. Restricted earth fault protection of low impedance types are provided for each winding. The low impedance type allows mix of the function on the same core as other protection functions. The tripping from transformer auxiliaries such as buchholtz, temperature devices are linked through the binary inputs which are stabilized against unnecessary operations due to capacitive discharges. Back-up protection for faults inside the transformer but mainly for system faults are provided by the phase and earth overcurrent functions provided . A thermal overload function is available to supervise abnormal service. Breaker failure protection is provided for each of the involved breakers. Voltage protection functions are available as voltage level supervision. The necessary auxiliary functions such as fuse failure supervision are also included. The necessary trip logic is provided to trip the circuit breakers. Measuring functions S, P, Q, I, U, PF, f are available for local presentation on the local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of analog inputs allows connection to separate metering cores and a built-in calibration on the analog inputs allows calibration at site to very high accuracy, then involving the instrument transformer errors and voltage drops in secondary cabling. Following should be noted. This connection diagram shows the connection with the basic supplied single binary input and binary output boards. In many cases this is sufficient, in other cases, for example with full control of all apparatuses included more IO cards are required. Our proposal for a full version with control is to use three binary input modules and two binary output modules. For systems without Substation Automation a second binary output board might be required.
6.2.1.2
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RET670 2 Winding/Multi Breaker

Configuration 1MRK004500-94
BUS A -QB1
BBP-TRIP
BIM3.16
-QB62
SPARE SPARE BUCH TRIP SUDDEN P OT TRIP WT TRIP
BIM3.10
-BI1 P1
BIM3.11
TRM1:4-6
BIM3.12
=1-QA1
C C
TO MAIN 2
BIM3.13 BIM3.14 BIM3.15 BIM3.1 BIM3.2 BOM4.1
TRIP QA1 MAIN 2 TRIP =1-QA1-CL =1-QA1-SPR UNCH
T C T C
-BI1 P1
TRM1:1-3
=2-QA1
C C
TO MAIN 2
BOM4.3
TRIP QA1 TO BB PROT MAIN 2 TRIP
T C
T C
BIM3.3 BIM3.4
=2-QA1-CL =2-QA1-SPR UNCH
-QB6 -QB9
O W
-QB61
TRM2:4
-T1
HV BBA TRIP
BOM4.23 BOM4.24
TRM2:5 HV BBA TRIP

BOM4.7 BOM4.8
TRM1:10-12 MAN SC OK
BOM4.9 BOM4.10 BIM3.7
MCB OR FUSE
-BU1
MCB-OK TO BUS PROT
-BI1
BOM4.11 BOM4.12 BOM4.13
TO MAIN 2 RELAY
FAULT SIGNALLING
BOM4.14 BOM4.15 BOM4.16 BOM4.17 BOM4.18 BOM4.19 BOM4.20 BOM4.21 BOM4.22 BOM4.5 BIM3.5 BIM3.6
TRM2:1-3
P1
QA1-CLOSED SPR UNCH
=3-QA1
C C
TRIP QA1
T C T C
MV BBP-TRIP
BIM3.9
TRM2:10
BIM3.8
MCB OK
-BU1
X11.1 3 X11.2 X11.4 5
+ -
IRF
en05000849.eps
IEC05000849 V1 EN
Figure 326:
Connection diagram for configuration B30 with the setting and signal matrix defined
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The connection of the IED is shown in figure 327. This configuration is used in applications with three-winding transformers with single or double busbars but with a single-breaker arrangement on both sides. The tripping is three poles and includes also a synchronism check function for manual closing of the low voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to always energize the transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side and tertiary breaker. The differential protection is the main function. It provides fast and sensitive tripping for internal faults. Stabilization against through faults, inrush and overexcitation are standard features. The function is provided with three stabilized inputs to involve all windings. Restricted earth fault protection of low impedance types are provided for two windings with an optional one for the last winding for cases where this winding is directly earthed. The low impedance type allows mix of the function on the same core as other protection functions. The tripping from transformer auxiliaries such as buchholtz, temperature devices are linked through the binary inputs which are stabilized against unnecessary operations due to capacitive discharges. Back-up protection for faults inside the transformer but mainly for system faults are provided by the phase and earth overcurrent functions provided on each winding. A thermal overload function is available to supervise abnormal service. Breaker failure protection is provided for each of the involved breakers. Voltage protection functions are available as voltage level supervision. The necessary auxiliary functions such as fuse failure supervision are also included. The necessary trip logic is provided to trip the circuit breakers. Measuring functions S, P, Q, I, U, PF, f are available for local presentation on the local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of analog inputs allows connection to separate metering cores and a built-in calibration on the analog inputs allows calibration at site to very high accuracy, then involving the instrument transformer errors and voltage drops in secondary cabling. Following should be noted. This connection diagram shows the connection with the basic supplied single binary input and binary output boards. In many cases this is sufficient, in other cases, for example with full control of all apparatuses included more IO cards are required. Our proposal for a full version with control is to use two binary input modules and two binary output modules. For systems without Substation Automation a second binary output board might be required.
6.2.1.3
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RET670 3-Winding/Single Breaker

BIM3.16 BIM3.8
BUS A BUS B
QB1 CLOSED
MV BBP-TRIP
BIM3.10
-QB1
TERT BBP-TRIP
BIM3.11 BIM3.9
-QB2
QB2 CLOSED
BIM3.12
BIM3.13
=1-QA1
C C
BIM3.14 BIM3.15 BOM4.1
T C T C
BIM3.1 BIM3.2
QA1-CLOSED QA1-SPR UNCH
-BI1
TRM1:1-3
P1
BIM3.5 BIM3.6
TO MAIN 2 RELAY =3-QA1-CL =3-QA1SPR UNCH TRIP =3-QA1
TO BUS PROT
BOM4.5
BOM4.15 BOM4.16
O
TRM1:7
W
F AULT SIGNALLING
BOM4.17 BOM4.18 BOM4.19 BOM4.20 BOM4.21 BOM4.22
TRM1:8
TRM1:10-12
MCB OR FUSE
-BU1
-BI1
HV BB TRIP TO BUS PROT
BOM4.7 BOM4.8
-BI1
TRM2:1-3 TO MAIN 2 RELAY MV BB TRIP

BOM4.9 BOM4.10
=3-QA1
C C
P1
TERT BB TRIP
BOM4.11 BOM4.12
TRM1:4-6
T C
P1
T C
MAN SC OK
BOM4.13 BOM4.14
BIM3.3
=2-QA1CLOSED SPR UNCH
BIM3.4
=2-QA1
C C
BOM4.3
TRIP =2-QA1
T C T C
TRM2:11
-BU1
BIM3.7
MCB OK
-BU1
X11.1 3 X11.2 X11.4 5
+ -
IRF
TRM2:12
Res. for Bus 2 VT
en05000850.eps
IEC05000850 V1 EN
Figure 327:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Description of configuration B40
The connection of the IED is shown in figure 328. This configuration is used in applications with two winding transformers in multibreaker arrangement on one or both sides. The tripping is three poles and includes also a synchronism check function for manual closing of the low voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to always energize the transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side breaker. High voltage circuit breaker synchronism check function is optional for system where synchronism check is required to close the bays/rings. The Differential protection is the main function. It provides fast and sensitive tripping for internal faults. Stabilization against through faults, inrush and overexcitation are standard features. The function is provided with six stabilized inputs which allows all CT sets possible with multi-breaker arrangements on several of the windings to be possible. Restricted earth fault protection of low impedance types are provided for two windings with an optional one for the last winding for cases where this winding is directly earthed. The low impedance type allows mix of the function on the same core as other protection functions. The tripping from transformer auxiliaries such as buchholtz, temperature devices are linked through the binary inputs which are stabilized against unnecessary operations due to capacitive discharges. Back-up protection for faults inside the transformer but mainly for system faults are provided by the phase and earth overcurrent functions provided on each winding. A thermal overload function is available to supervise abnormal service. Breaker failure protection is provided for each of the involved breakers. Voltage protection functions are available as voltage level supervision. The necessary auxiliary functions such as fuse failure supervision are also included. The necessary trip logic is provided to trip the circuit breakers. Measuring functions S, P, Q, I, U, PF, f are available for local presentation on the local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of analog inputs allows connection to separate metering cores and a built-in calibration on the analog inputs allows calibration at site to very high accuracy, then involving the instrument transformer errors and voltage drops in secondary cabling. Following should be noted. This connection diagram shows the connection with the basic supplied single binary input and binary output boards. In many cases this is sufficient, in other cases, for example with full control of all apparatuses included more IO cards are required. Our proposal for a full version with control is to use
6.2.1.4
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
three binary input modules and two binary output modules. For systems without Substation Automation a second binary output board might be required.
RET670 3-Winding/Multi Breaker
BIM3.16
BUS A TO SECOND BAY -QB1

TO TRM2:12
MV BBP-TRIP
BIM3.10
TERT BBP-TRIP
BIM3.11
-QB62
TRM2:10
-BI1 =1-QA1
C C
P1
BIM3.12
TRM2:1-3
BIM3.13
TO MAIN 2
BIM3.14 BIM3.15
BOM4.1
TRIP QA1 TRIP Reinf MAIN 2 TRIP
T C T C
BIM3.1 BIM3.2
=1-QA1-CLOSED =1-QA1-SPR UNCH
-BI1 P1
TRM1:1-3
=2-QA1
C C
TO MAIN 2
BOM4.3 BIM3.3 BIM3.4
TRIP QA1 =2-QA1-CL =2-QA1-SPR UNCH TO BB PROT MAIN 2 TRIP
T C
T C
-QB6
TO TRM2:11
-QB61 -Q9
F AULT SIGNALLING
TRM1:7
-T1
TRM1:8
MCB OR FUSE TRM1:10-12 HV BB TRIP

BOM4.9 BOM4.10
-BU1 -BI1
TO BUS PROT TRM2:4-6
-BI1 =4-QA1
C C
MV BB TRIP
BOM4.11 BOM4.12
TO MAIN 2 RELAY TRM1:4-6

BOM4.7 BIM3.7 BIM3.8
P1
TERT BB TRIP
BOM4.13 BOM4.14
P1
TRIP =4-QA1
T C T C
=4-QA1-CL SPR UNCH

BIM3.5
=3-QA1MAN SC OK
BOM4.15 BOM4.16
=3-QA1-CLOSED
=3-QA1
BIM3.6
SPR UNCH TRIP =3-QA1
C C
BOM4.5
T C T C
TRM2:11
-BU1
BIM3.9
MCB OK
-BU1
X11.1 3 X11.2 X11.4 5
+ -
IRF
TRM2:12
Res. for Bus 2 VT
en05000851.eps
IEC05000851 V1 EN
Figure 328:
Connection diagram for configuration B 40 with the setting and signal matrix defined
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The connection of the IED is shown in figure 328. This configuration is used in applications with two- or three- winding transformers with single or double busbars and with a single or multi-breaker arrangements. The tripping is three poles and includes also a synchronism check function for manual closing of the low voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to always energize the transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side breaker. The tripping from transformer auxiliaries such as buchholtz, temperature devices are linked through the binary inputs which are stabilized against unnecessary operations due to capacitive discharges. It can be done in this back-up IED to have it independent from the main protection IED where differential functions are provided. Back-up protection for faults inside the transformer but mainly for system faults are provided by the phase and earth overcurrent functions provided for each of the windings. If only a two winding transformer exists the neutral currents can be connected to the earth fault functions instead of the default bay residual currents. Breaker failure protection is provided for each of the involved breakers. The necessary trip logic is provided to trip the circuit breakers. Measuring functions S, P, Q, I, U, PF, f are available for local presentation on the local HMI and/or remote presentation. Following should be noted. This connection diagram shows the connection with the basic supplied single binary input and binary output boards and one 9I + 3U input transformer module It is possible to add IO as required to, for example have neutral current/s connected to earth fault functions. The configuration alternative can often be used for two winding transformers and the neutral currents can then be connected instead of the third winding inputs.
6.2.1.5
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RET670 Back-up protection A10

Configuration 1MRK004500-xx IN TEST
BIM3.16
BUS A BUS B
-QB1
-QB2
BIM3.12 BIM3.13 BIM3.14 BIM3.15 BOM4.1
=1-QA1
C C
T C T C
-BI1
TO MAIN 1 RELAY
P1
TRM1:1-3 TO BUS PROT

BOM4.5
TRIP =3-QA1
BOM4.15 BOM4.16
QO QW
FAULT SIGNALLING
TRM1:10
BIM3.1
MCB OR FUSE
-BU1
HV BB TRIP
MCB OK TO BUS PROT
BOM4.7 BOM4.8
-BI1
-BI1
MV BB TRIP
BOM4.9 BOM4.10
TRM1:7-9
=3-QA1 P1
C C
TERT BB TRIP
BOM4.11 BOM4.12
TRM1:4-6 TO MAIN 1 RELAY
P1
MAN SC OK
BOM4.13 BOM4.14
T C T C
=2-QA1
C C
BOM4.3
TRIP =2-QA1
T C T C
TRM1:11
BIM3.2
-BU1
MCB OK Res. for Bus 2 VT
X11.1 3 X11.2
IRF
X11. 4
+
-BU1
TRM1:12
5
-
IEC07000191 V1 EN
Figure 329:
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
The connection of the IED is shown in figure 328. This configuration is used when RET670 is used as a separate Tap changer control IED. It can be used for single or parallel service where the communication between up to eight control function blocks are either internal or over IEC 61850-8-1. Automatic as well as manual tap changer control is provided in the configuration. If the manual control is required to be separate from the automatic control it can be done in any other IED670 where local HMI interfaces to show position, switching Auto-Manual, Raise and Lower commands, and so on can be provided.
6.2.1.6
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
RET670 Tap Changer Control - A25

Configuration 1MRK004500-xx FORCE PARALLEL
BIM3.16
BUS A BUS B
-QB1
-QB2
=1-QA1
C C
T C T C
-BI1
P1
BOM4.13 BOM4.14 BOM4.15 BOM4.16
NOTE! CONFIGURATION IS FOR BCD POS INDICATION. ORDER MIM AND SET IN PST USE OF mA FOR TAP POS INDICATION WHEN APPLICABLE.
FAULT SIGNALLING
BOM4.17 BOM4.18 BOM4.19 BOM4.20 BOM4.21 BOM4.22 BOM4.23 BOM4.24 BIM3.1-6 BIM3.7-11 BIM3.1-5 BIM3.1-6
TC IN PROGRESS T1 TC POS - BCD CODE T1 TC POS - BCD CODE T2 TC IN PROGRESS T2
T1 TC RAISE
BOM4.1 BOM4.2
TRM1:7-9
MCB OR FUSE
-BU1
T1 TC LOWER
BOM4.3 BOM4.4
TRM1:10-12 T2 TC RAISE
BOM4.5 BOM4.6
VOLTAGE FROM T2
T2 TC LOWER
BOM4.7 BOM4.8
TRM1:1-3
TRM1:4-6 T1 OLTC ALARM

BOM4.9 BOM4.10
CURRENT FROM T2
P1
T2 OLTC ALARM
BOM4.11 BOM4.12
=2-QA1
C C
T C T C
BIM3.13 BIM3.14 BIM3.15 X11.2

IEC07000192 V1 EN
CB CLOSED CB CLOSED FROM T2 CB CLOSED FROM BS
X11.1 3
IRF
X11. 4
+
5
-
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Figure 330: Connection diagram for configuration A25 with the setting and signal matrix defined
798
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 7 Glossary
Section 7
Glossary
About this chapter

This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation. AC ACT A/D converter ADBS ADM AI ANSI AR ArgNegRes ArgDir ASCT ASD AWG BBP BFP BI BIM BOM BOS BR BS BSR BST C37.94 CAN CB
Application manual
Alternating current Application configuration tool within PCM600 Analog-to-digital converter Amplitude deadband supervision Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization Analog input American National Standards Institute Autoreclosing Setting parameter/ZD/ Setting parameter/ZD/ Auxiliary summation current transformer Adaptive signal detection American Wire Gauge standard Busbar protection Breaker failure protection Binary input Binary input module Binary output module Binary outputs status External bistable relay British Standards Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication Circuit breaker
799
Section 7 Glossary
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
CBM CCITT
Combined backplane module Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union. CAN carrier module Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI Combined megapulses per second Communication Management tool in PCM600 Close-open cycle Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions Standard format according to IEC 60255-24 Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals Central processor unit Carrier receive Cyclic redundancy check Control relay output block Carrier send Current transformer Capacitive voltage transformer Delayed autoreclosing Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.) Dead bus dead line Dead bus live line Direct current Data flow control Discrete Fourier transform Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board Digital input Dead line live bus
CCM CCVT Class C CMPPS CMT CO cycle Codirectional
COMTRADE Contra-directional
CPU CR CRC CROB CS CT CVT DAR DARPA DBDL DBLL DC DFC DFT DHCP DIP-switch DI DLLB
800
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 7 Glossary
DNP DR DRAM DRH DSP DTT EHV network EIA EMC EMF EMI EnFP EPA ESD FCB FOX 20 FOX 512/515 FOX 6Plus G.703
Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000 Disturbance recorder Dynamic random access memory Disturbance report handler Digital signal processor Direct transfer trip scheme Extra high voltage network Electronic Industries Association Electromagnetic compatibility (Electric Motive Force) Electromagnetic interference End fault protection Enhanced performance architecture Electrostatic discharge Flow control bit; Frame count bit Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals Access multiplexer Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module Graphical display editor within PCM600 General interrogation command Gas-insulated switchgear Generic object-oriented substation event Global positioning system GPS Time Module High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard Plastic fiber connector Human-machine interface
801
GCM GDE GI GIS GOOSE GPS GTM HDLC protocol HFBR connector type HMI
Application manual
Section 7 Glossary
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
HSAR HV HVDC IDBS IEC IEC 60044-6
High speed autoreclosing High-voltage High-voltage direct current Integrating deadband supervision International Electrical Committee IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Substation automation communication standard Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force). Intelligent electronic device Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear Binary input/output module When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function. 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly through the data link layer. 2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54 Internal failure signal
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 IEEE IEEE 802.12 IEEE P1386.1
IED I-GIS IOM Instance
IP
IP 20 IP 40 IP 54 IRF
802
Application manual
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 7 Glossary
IRIG-B: ITU LAN LIB 520 LCD LDCM LDD LED LNT LON MCB MCM MIM MPM MVB NCC NUM OCO cycle OCP OEM OLTC OV Overreach
InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200 International Telecommunications Union Local area network High-voltage software module Liquid crystal display Line differential communication module Local detection device Light-emitting diode LON network tool Local operating network Miniature circuit breaker Mezzanine carrier module Milli-ampere module Main processing module Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains. National Control Centre Numerical module Open-close-open cycle Overcurrent protection Optical ethernet module On-load tap changer Over-voltage A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it. Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus Pulse code modulation Protection and control IED manager Mezzanine card standard Process interface for sensors & actuators PCI Mezzanine card
803
PCI PCM PCM600 PC-MIP PISA PMC
Application manual
Section 7 Glossary
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
POR POTT Process bus PSM PST PT ratio PUTT RASC RCA RFPP RFPE RISC RMS value RS422 RS485 RTC RTU SA SBO SC SCS SCADA SCT SDU SLM SMA connector SMT SMS SNTP
Permissive overreach Permissive overreach transfer trip Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components Power supply module Parameter setting tool within PCM600 Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio Permissive underreach transfer trip Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX Relay characteristic angle Resistance for phase-to-phase faults Resistance for phase-to-earth faults Reduced instruction set computer Root mean square value A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 Real-time clock Remote terminal unit Substation Automation Select-before-operate Switch or push button to close Station control system Supervision, control and data acquisition System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850 Service data unit Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC/ DNP3 communication. Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance. Signal matrix tool within PCM600 Station monitoring system Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
Section 7 Glossary
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required accuracy. SPA SRY ST Starpoint SVC TC TCS TCP TCP/IP Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Switch for CB ready condition Switch or push button to trip Neutral point of transformer or generator Static VAr compensation Trip coil Trip circuit supervision Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet. Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP. Time delayed earth-fault protection function Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector Current transformer class according to IEC User management tool A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach. Process interface components that deliver measured voltage and current values Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5
TEF TNC connector TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS UMT Underreach
U/I-PISA UTC
Section 7 Glossary
1MRK 504 116-UEN B
degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero. UV WEI VT X.21 3IO 3UO Undervoltage Weak end infeed logic Voltage transformer A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the earth-fault current Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
807
Contact us
ABB AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters, Sweden Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00 Fax +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 www.abb.com/substationautomation
1MRK 504 116-UEN B Copyright 2011 ABB. All rights reserved.

1MRK504116-UEN B en Application Manual RET670 1.2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1MRK504116-UEN B en Application Manual RET670 1.2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion 670 series

Transformer protection RET670 Application manual

Copyright 2011 ABB. All rights reserved

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

About this chapter

Introduction to the application manual

Planning & purchase

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

About the application manual

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

More information can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation.

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

About this chapter

Current transformer requirements

Current transformer classification

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Secondary wire resistance and additional load

Section 2 Requirements 2.1.5 General current transformer requirements

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements

Transformer differential protection

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Restricted earth fault protection (low impedance differential)

Neutral CTs and phase CTs for solidly earthed transformers

Eal Ealreq = 2 I etf

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Neutral CTs and phase CTs for impedance earthed transformers

Eal Ealreq = 3 I etf

Table continues on next page 23 Application manual

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards

Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class P, PR

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Voltage transformer requirements

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

SNTP server requirements

IEC 61850-9-2LE Merging unit requirements

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Section 3 IED application

About this chapter

General IED application

Section 3 IED application

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Section 3 IED application

Setting of the phase reference channel

Setting of current channels

Section 3 IED application

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Protected Object Line, transformer, etc

Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects.

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Section 3 IED application

Definition of direction for directional functions Is

Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in the IED

Section 3 IED application

1MRK 504 116-UEN B

Definition of direction for directional functions